Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Ord 381 Approving an Interlocal with the City of Keller for a Joint Elevated Water storage facility
TOWN OF WESTLAKE ORDINANCE NO. 381 AN ORDINANCE OF THE TOWN OF WESTLAKE, TEXAS, APPROVING AN INTERLOCAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE TOWN OF WESTLAKE, TEXAS, AND THE CITY OF KELLER, TEXAS, PROVIDING FOR THE JOINT CONSTRUCTION, OPERATION, MAINTENANCE AND THE USE OF AN ELEVATED WATER. STORAGE FACILITY AND APPURTENANCES THERETO; APPROVING A FACILITIES OPERATING AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE TOWN OF WESTLAKE, TEXAS, AND THE CITY OF KELLER, TEXAS; AND APPROVING A SETTLEMENT AND PURCHASE AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE TOWN OF WESTLAKE, TEXAS, AND THE CITY OF KELLER, TEXAS; PROVIDING A SAVINGS CLAUSE; PROVIDING A SEVERABILITY CLAUSE; AND PROVIDING AN EFFECTIVE DATE WHEREAS, the Town of Westlake, Texas, and the City of Keller, Texas, desire to enter into an Interlocal Agreement for the joint construction, operation, maintenance and use of an elevated water storage facility, a Settlement and Purchase Agreement, and a Facilities Operating Agreement, which will allow for the Town of Westlake to provide water service to all of its citizens. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF WESTLAKE, TEXAS: Section l: That the recitals set forth above in the Interlocal Agreement, the Facilities Operating Agreement, and the Settlement Agreement, attached hereto as Exhibit "A", "B" and "C", respectively, are hereby incorporated herein, are adopted by the Town and declared to be true and correct. Section 2: That the Board of Aldermen of the Town of Westlake, Texas, hereby approve the Agreements attached hereto as Exhibits "A", "B" and "C", and further authorize the Town Manager to execute any and all documents to effectuate the final execution of all agreements contained within Exhibits "A", "B" and "C". Section 3: That this Ordinance shall be cumulative of all Ordinances of the Town of Westlake, Texas, and yet should any other Ordinances contained inconsistent language with this Ordinance, that the provisions of this Ordinance shall prevail. Section 4: It is hereby declared to be the intention of the Board of Aldermen of the Town of Westlake, Texas, that sections, paragraphs, clauses and phrases of this Ordinance are severable, and if any phrase, clause, sentence, paragraph or section of this Ordinance shall be declared unconstitutional by the valid judgment or decree of any court of competent jurisdiction, such unconstitutionality shall not affect any of the remaining phrases, clauses, sentences, paragraphs or sections of this Ordinance since the same would have been enacted by the Board of Aldermen of the Town of Westlake, Texas, without the incorporation in this Ordinance of any such unconstitutional phrase, clause, sentence, paragraph or section. SECTION 5: This Ordinance shall become effective upon its passage. APPROVED AND EFFECTIVE THIS 9TH DAY OF OCTOBER, 2000. Scott Bradley, Mayor ATTEST: Ginger osswy, Town Se tart' Trent O. Petty, Town ager STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF TARRANT § INTERLOCAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE CITY OF KELLER AND THE TOWN OF WESTLAKE PROVIDING FOR THE JOINT CONSTRUCTION, OPERATION, MAINTENANCE, AND USE OF AN ELEVATED WATER STORAGE FACILITY AND APPURTENANCES THERETO This Interlocal Agreement (hereinafter referred to as "Agreement") for the joint construction, operation, maintenance, and use of an elevated water storage facility and appurtenances thereto is made and entered into by and between the City of Keller, Texas, a municipal corporation and political subdivision of the State of Texas located in Tarrant County, Texas (hereinafter referred to as "Keller") and the Town of Westlake, a municipal corporation and political subdivision of the State of Texas located in Tarrant and Denton County, Texas (hereinafter referred to as "Westlake"). WHEREAS, during the term of this Agreement, a new elevated water storage facility and related water distribution equipment (hereinafter referred to as "Facility") therefor will be constructed, the capacity of which is intended to serve both the citizens of Keller and Westlake; and WHEREAS, TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE ANNOTATED § 791.001 et seq., as amended (the "Act") provides authorization for municipalities to contract with one another for the performance of governmental functions and services under the terms of the Act; and WHEREAS, it has been determined that it is in the mutual best interest of the citizens in both Keller and Westlake to share in the cost of construction, use, operation and maintenance of the Facility which is also essential to meeting the water service needs of both parties; and WHEREAS, all costs shall be shared proportionally based on the cost of land acquisition and Facility construction applicable to each municipality, and the -real property and the Facility, excluding Westlake's distribution equipment therein, shall be located in and owned by Keller; and WHEREAS, Keller agrees to debt finance the property acquisition and construction of the Facility whereby Westlake agrees to pay its proportionate share, as set forth above, of the annual principal and interest costs associated therewith throughout the term of said debt service; and WHEREAS, both parties agree to operate the Facility so as to not conflict with any contractual requirements, terms and conditions of each municipality's water supply contract with the City of Forth Worth, Texas; and 1UT v Ve IS IWf .l NOW, THEREFORE, for and in consideration of the mutual covenants, terms and conditions set forth herein, and the mutual benefits to each party to be gained thereby, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, Keller and Westlake hereby contract, covenant, warrant, and agree as follows: I ADOPTION OF PREAMBLE All of the matters stated in the preamble of this Agreement are true and correct and are hereby incorporated into the body of this Agreement as though fully set forth in their entirety herein. II TERM OF THE AGREEMENT The initial term of this Agreement shall be for twenty (20) years; however, either party, by written notice to other party prior to the expiration of the initial term, may elect to continue said Agreement for another twenty (20) years subject to compliance with all terms and conditions of this Agreement. III OBLIGATIONS OF THE PARTIES 1. Keller agrees to contract for professional engineering, design, surveying, testing, and construction inspection services relating to the construction of the Facility. Westlake reserves the right of review and acceptance of all engineering and design documents prior to advertising for competitive bids, and hereby agrees to pay one half of the cost for the engineering, design, surveying, testing, and construction inspection services contracts or any other contracts that may be mutually agreed to by both parties. 2. Keller agrees to competitively bid the Facility construction in accordance with Section 252.001 et seq. of the Texas Local Government Code. 3. Keller agrees to obtain and maintain all necessary local, state and federal permits as may be required relating to the operation and maintenance of the Facility. The cost of all permits and renewals thereof shall be shared equally by Keller and Westlake. 4. Keller agrees to finance the engineering, design and inspection services; land acquisition; and construction of the facility for a term not to exceed twenty (20) years. 5. Keller agrees to provide 2.343 acres of land described as Tract 4B, Abstract No. 142, out of the A. Barnes Survey in Keller, Tarrant County, Texas to be exclusively used for the purpose of constructing and operating said Facility. The general location of the property is the northwest corner of Knox Road and Ravenwood Drive as depicted on Exhibit "A". 6. During the term of the Agreement, Westlake agrees to make semi-annual payments to Keller on December 30 and June 30 of each year, subsequent to, and beginning with the first semi-annual debt service (principal and interest) payment due to be paid by Keller following the issuance of said debt. The amount of Westlake's payment shall be determined based on Westlake's proportionate share of cost associated with the land acquisition (Facility site) and construction of the Facility, plus Westlake's cost of water (inflow/outflow) lines and/or distribution equipment pertinent to Westlake's water distribution system. 7. Within thirty (30) days from the date of the issuance of debt by Keller, Westlake agrees to deposit in Keller's depository bank an amount equal to highest total annual principal and interest payment due Westlake during the term of the debt. The Westlake deposit shall be made to the Keller/Westlake Water Storage Escrow account and shall only be used in the event Westlake is unable to make its required debt payment to Keller. At the end of the term of the debt issue or upon the total payment of the principal and interest of said issue, the remaining escrow account balance, plus accrued interest, shall be returned to Westlake in its entirety within thirty (3 0) days of the date of final debt payment. 8. Access to the Facility and equipment therein shall be provided to only designated or authorized personnel of each party, authorized to operate and/or maintain the Facility. 9. General site maintenance within and around the Facility, including the access road shall be by Keller. No outside storage within the fenced site shall be allowed, except upon agreement of both parties. Not later than August 31" of each year, Keller shall provide Westlake a detailed report of the previous twelve months of site maintenance. Westlake agrees to reimburse Keller not less than fifty (50) percent of the cost of said annual maintenance prior to September 30"` of the current fiscal year in which the maintenance is billed. 10. It is agreed that the Facility will require repainting from time -to -time, the cost of which will be shared equally by both parties. 11. In the event the City of Keller is approached by interests desiring to lease the Facility for the purpose of constructing telecommunications equipment, or any other purpose, Westlake shall have the right to approve such request and shall share equally with Keller in all revenues generated by the mutual approval of such an agreement. IV INDEMNIFICATION AND HOLD HARMLESS 1. Keller agrees to indemnify and hold Westlake harmless from any claim by a third party for damages arising from or resulting from the construction, operation or use of the Facility or from the real property constructed thereon during the term of this Agreement to the extent allowed by law, and to the extent of Keller's liability under the Texas Tort Claims Act; provided, however, that nothing herein shall require Keller to indemnify and hold harmless Westlake for any acts or accounts for which Keller has no liability under Texas law. 2. Westlake agrees to indemnify and hold Keller harmless from any claim by a third party for damages arising from or resulting from the construction, operation or use of the Facility or from the real property constructed thereon during the term of this Agreement to the extent allowed by law, and to the extent of Westlake's liability under the Texas Tort Claims Act; provided, however, that nothing herein shall require Westlake to indemnify and hold harmless Keller for any act or accounts for which Westlake has no liability under Texas law. 3. Each party shall maintain liability insurance consistent with generally accepted practices for municipalities or as may be required by law. V NOTICES Any notice contemplated or required to be given under this Agreement shall be deemed to have been adequately given upon the later of actual delivery by hand or three business days after it is deposited in the United States certified mail return receipt requested and properly addressed to the other party as follows: City of Keller P.O. Box 770 Keller, TX 76244 Attention: City Manager Town of Westlake 3 Village Circle, Suite 207 Westlake, TX 76262 Attention: Town Manager Any change of address may be made by either party upon the giving of ten (10) days prior written notice. 1. This Agreement shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the parties hereto and their respective successors and assigns. 2. This Agreement constitutes the sole and only agreement of the parties hereto with respect to the subject matter hereof and supersedes any prior or contemporaneous understandings or written or oral agreements between the parties respecting the subject matter hereof. There are no representations, agreements, arrangements, or 4 understandings, oral or written, between or among the parties relating to the subject matter hereof, which are not fully expressed herein. 3. No amendment, modification or alteration of the terms hereof shall be binding unless the same is in writing, dated subsequent to the date hereof and duly executed by both parties. 4. The provisions of this Agreement are severable and the invalidity or unenforceability of any provision hereof shall not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision. It is the intention of the parties that each provision hereof be construed in a manner designed to effectuate the purposes of such provision to the maximum extent enforceable under applicable law. If, in case, any one or more of the provisions contained in this Agreement shall for any reason be held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable in any respect, such invalidity, illegality or unenforceable shall not affect any other provision hereof, and this Agreement shall be construed as if such invalid, illegal or unenforceable provision had never been contained herein. This Agreement has been jointly negotiated by the parties and shall not be construed against a party because that party may have assumed primary responsibility for the drafting of this Agreement. 6. The obligations and undertakings of each of the parties to this Agreement are and shall be performable in Tarrant County, Texas. 7. Each parry hereto warrants that is has received authority from its governing body to enter into this Agreement. EXECUTED this the day of 6& Z, -6y2000. CITY OF KELLER, TEXAS TOWN OF WESTLAKE, TEXAS By: Lyle sher, City Manager Trent Petty, To anager ATTEST: l:! ATTEST: By: Ging Crosswy, To ecretary 5 SET 5/8'IR WITH CAP STAMPED "GORRONDONA"--\ IN ? IPP Lh 4 � m I d-n m n FIND 1 GRANVILLE W. ALEXANDER AND N 07'35'29"W WI,F.E, DILLIN J. ALEXANDER 199.56' VOLUME 8671, PAGE 147 D. R. T. C. T. (REFERENCE BEARING) N 9900'00"E 300.00' WIRE �FNCE � PASSING AT 00.58' A FND 5/8"IR 2.343 ACRES PAMELA S. KOOP VOLUME 13708, PACE 282 D.R. T. C. T. �Pp P. O. B. ND 1/2 -IR x U� ROAD Q N ' . n] ' n GRAVEL � O ; WIRE FENCE fIj GAS° METER ASPHALT SET 5/8"IR WITH CAP "GORRONDONA" ', PAVING STAMPED ��►�y QD fV s OHE ONE TELEPHONE RISER � PtT p J O� jl' / O O� O WOODEN FENCE PP 'ASPHALT PAVING x x x xx SET SURVEY NAIL WITH WASHER STAMPED "GORRONDONA' GAS TELEPHONE °METER RISER X', l M 1.1, ' x x x'30f.)'0x WIRE FENCE RAY P. LUNSFORD VOLUME (2377, PACE 124 D. R. T. C. T. m w C3 c 7 C yet' tSO�'C O V � Cy x xx x x SET 5/8"IR WITH CAP STAMPED "GCRRONDONA" SURVEYOR'S CERTIFICATE 0 30 60 120 SCALE IN FEET THAT I, JIM G. GLASS, REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL LAND SURVEYOR NO. 5262, LICENSED IN THE STATE OF TEXAS, DO HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS PLAT IS TRUE AND CORRECT AND WAS PREPARED FROM AN ACTUAL SURVEY ON—THE—GROUND UNDER FAY SUPERVISION. GATE: JULY 28, 2000 JIM G. S REGIST PROFESSIONAL LAND SURVEYOR NO. 5262 Exhibit A City of Keller and City of Westlake Interlocal Agreement Description of Property Being a 2.343 acre tract of land situated in . the A. Barnes Survey, Abstract No. 142, City of Keller, Tarrant County, Texas, said 2.343 acre tract of land being deeded to Pamela S. Koop as recorded in Volume 13709, Page 282 of the Deed Records of Tarrant County, Texas, said 2.343 acre tract of land being more particularly described by metes and bounds and follows: BEGI'3NING at a 1/2 inch iron rod found for the northeast corner of said 2.343 acre tract of land, sold 1/2 inch iron rod being the : southeast corner of a tract .of land deeded to Granville W. Alexander and wife, Billie J. Alexander as recorded in Volume 8571, Page 147 of said Deed Records of Torrant County, Texas, said 1/2 inch iron rod also being in the west right—of—way line of Rovenwood Drive, from which c 1/2 inch iron rod- found for the northeast corner of said tract of land deeded to Granville W. Alexander and wife, Billie J. Alexander beors North 01 degrees 35 minutes 29 seconds West, a distance of 199,56 feet; THENCE South 17 degrees 26 minutes 03 seconds East, with the east line of said 2.343 acre tract of lend and with the said west right—of—way line of Rovenwood Drive, a distance of 104.61 to a 5/8 inch iron rod with cap stomped "GORRONDONA" set for corner; THENCE South 05 degrees 53 minutes 16 seconds West, with the east line of said 2.343 acre tract of land and with the west right—of—way line of said Rovenwood Drive, a distance of 225.80 feet to a 5/8 inch iron rod with cap stamped "GORRONDONA" set for the southeast corner of said 2.343 acre tract of land, said 5/8 inch iron rod with cap stamped "GORRONDONA" being in Knox Road; THENCE South 90 degrees 00 minutes 00 seconds West, with the south line of said 2.343 acre tract of land and with Knox Road, a distance of 300.00 feet to a Survey Nail with washer stomped "GORRONOONA" set for the southwest corner of said 2.343 acre tract of land; THENCE North 00 degrees 45 minutes 13 seconds West, with the west line of said 2.343 acre tract of land, c distance of 324.00 feet to a 5/8 inch iron rod with cap stamped "GCRRONDONA" set for the northwest corner of said 2.343 acre tract of land, said 5/8 inch iron rod with cop stamped "GORRONDONA" being the southwest corner of said. tract of land deeded to Grcnvilte W. Alexander and wife. Billie J. Alexander; THENCE North 90 degrees 00 minutes 00 seconds East (Reference Bearing), with the north line of said 2.343 acre tract of land and with the south line of said tract of land deeded to Granville W. Alexander and wile, Billie J. Alexander, passing at a distance of 00.58 feet c 5/8 inch !ran rod found for reference, in all, a distance of 300.00 feet to the POINT OF BEGINNING and containing 102,056 square fact or 2.343 acres of land, more or less. EXHIBIT "A"' . n] ' n GRAVEL ROAD fIj GAS° METER ASPHALT I PAVING m w C3 c 7 C yet' tSO�'C O V � Cy x xx x x SET 5/8"IR WITH CAP STAMPED "GCRRONDONA" SURVEYOR'S CERTIFICATE 0 30 60 120 SCALE IN FEET THAT I, JIM G. GLASS, REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL LAND SURVEYOR NO. 5262, LICENSED IN THE STATE OF TEXAS, DO HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS PLAT IS TRUE AND CORRECT AND WAS PREPARED FROM AN ACTUAL SURVEY ON—THE—GROUND UNDER FAY SUPERVISION. GATE: JULY 28, 2000 JIM G. S REGIST PROFESSIONAL LAND SURVEYOR NO. 5262 Exhibit A City of Keller and City of Westlake Interlocal Agreement Description of Property Being a 2.343 acre tract of land situated in . the A. Barnes Survey, Abstract No. 142, City of Keller, Tarrant County, Texas, said 2.343 acre tract of land being deeded to Pamela S. Koop as recorded in Volume 13709, Page 282 of the Deed Records of Tarrant County, Texas, said 2.343 acre tract of land being more particularly described by metes and bounds and follows: BEGI'3NING at a 1/2 inch iron rod found for the northeast corner of said 2.343 acre tract of land, sold 1/2 inch iron rod being the : southeast corner of a tract .of land deeded to Granville W. Alexander and wife, Billie J. Alexander as recorded in Volume 8571, Page 147 of said Deed Records of Torrant County, Texas, said 1/2 inch iron rod also being in the west right—of—way line of Rovenwood Drive, from which c 1/2 inch iron rod- found for the northeast corner of said tract of land deeded to Granville W. Alexander and wife, Billie J. Alexander beors North 01 degrees 35 minutes 29 seconds West, a distance of 199,56 feet; THENCE South 17 degrees 26 minutes 03 seconds East, with the east line of said 2.343 acre tract of lend and with the said west right—of—way line of Rovenwood Drive, a distance of 104.61 to a 5/8 inch iron rod with cap stomped "GORRONDONA" set for corner; THENCE South 05 degrees 53 minutes 16 seconds West, with the east line of said 2.343 acre tract of land and with the west right—of—way line of said Rovenwood Drive, a distance of 225.80 feet to a 5/8 inch iron rod with cap stamped "GORRONDONA" set for the southeast corner of said 2.343 acre tract of land, said 5/8 inch iron rod with cap stamped "GORRONDONA" being in Knox Road; THENCE South 90 degrees 00 minutes 00 seconds West, with the south line of said 2.343 acre tract of land and with Knox Road, a distance of 300.00 feet to a Survey Nail with washer stomped "GORRONOONA" set for the southwest corner of said 2.343 acre tract of land; THENCE North 00 degrees 45 minutes 13 seconds West, with the west line of said 2.343 acre tract of land, c distance of 324.00 feet to a 5/8 inch iron rod with cap stamped "GCRRONDONA" set for the northwest corner of said 2.343 acre tract of land, said 5/8 inch iron rod with cop stamped "GORRONDONA" being the southwest corner of said. tract of land deeded to Grcnvilte W. Alexander and wife. Billie J. Alexander; THENCE North 90 degrees 00 minutes 00 seconds East (Reference Bearing), with the north line of said 2.343 acre tract of land and with the south line of said tract of land deeded to Granville W. Alexander and wile, Billie J. Alexander, passing at a distance of 00.58 feet c 5/8 inch !ran rod found for reference, in all, a distance of 300.00 feet to the POINT OF BEGINNING and containing 102,056 square fact or 2.343 acres of land, more or less. EXHIBIT "A"' City of Keller, Texas Town of Westlake, Texas Contract Documents, Plans and Specifications for the Construction of 2.5 MILLION GALLON JOINT USE WATER STORAGE TANK to serve the City of Keller and the Town of Westlake Texas February 2001 City of Keller Dave Phillips Mayor Lyle Dresher City Manager Ed Ilschner, P.E. Director of Public Works John Wendele Water and Sewer Superintendent EMN nil FREESE • NICHOLS KEL00483 Town of Westlake Scott Bradley Mayor Trent Petty City Manager T�4t1ivIA5 VV ITER ................. 7M6 ;2 �0JACE� ' Z- ZZ -0/ TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 0 BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS Section 00020 Invitation for Bids 00100 Instructions to Bidders 00300 Bid Proposal 00500 Contract Agreement and Bonds 00600 Certificates of Insurance 00700 General Conditions of the Contract 00800 Supplementary Conditions DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01005 Definitions and Terminology 01010 Summary of Work 01040 Project Administration 01041 Job Management 01130 Measurement and Payment 01300 Submittals 01310 Progress Schedules 01380 Project Photographs 01400 Quality Control 01568 Erosion and Sediment Control During Construction 01600 Products 01656 Disinfection of Potable Water Facilities 01700 Contract Closeout 01710 Final Cleaning 01730 Operation and Maintenance Manuals 01800 Forms DIVISION 2 SITEWORK Section 02110 General Clearing and Grubbing 02210 Site Grading 02217 Trenching, Backfilling, and Pipe Embedment 02219 Excavation 02220 Trench Safety 02255 Earth Fill Classifications 02256 Aggregate Fill Classifications 02261 Geotextile — Soil Stabilization 02263 Geotextile — Erosion Control 02266 Geogrid — Soil Reinforcement 02271 Riprap and Bedding Material 02276 Concrete Segmental Retaining Walls 02435 Reinforced Concrete Drainage Pipe Table of Contents TOC -1 KEL00483 02480 Landscaping 02515 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 02575 Paving Repair and Resurfacing 02614 Pretensioned Concrete Cylinder Pipe 02810 Underground Yard Irrigation System 02830 Ornamental Fencing 02831 Chain Link Fences and Gates 02832 Chain Link Cantilever Sliding Gate 02833 Ornamental Cantilever Sliding Gate DIVISION 3 CONCRETE Section 03305 Concrete DIVISION 9 FINISHES Section 09905 Protective Coatings DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Section 13413 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank 13440 Instrumentation General Provisions 13442 Instrumentation Commissioning 13500 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System (SCADA) DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL Section 15103 Butterfly Valves 15114 Pilot Operated Solenoid Control Valve 15136 Miscellaneous Valves 15170 Pressure Gauges and Cocks DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements 16111 Conduits 16120 600 Volt Wires and Cables 16122 Wire Connections and Devices 16130 Outlet Boxes 16131 Pull and Junction Boxes 16140 Wiring Devices 16150 Electrical Equipment 16450 Grounding 16500 Lighting APPENDIX A Geotechnical Engineering Study Table of Contents TOC -2 KEL00483 List of Drawings 0 0 Drawings Cover Sheet 1 GI General Notes, Index and Legend 2 CI Site Plan 3 C2 Site Grading Plan 4 C3 Tank Elevation 5 C4 Tank Section and Foundation Plan 6 C5 Access Special Details 7 C6 Miscellaneous Details 8 C7 Chain Link Fencing Details 9 M1 Westlake's Interior Piping 10 M2 Keller's Interior Piping 11 M3 Yard Valve Details 12 IRI Irrigation System Layout 13 E1 Electrical Site Plan and Legend 14 E2 Tank and Lighting 15 E3 Control Schematic and One -Line 16 E4 Diagrams and Schedules 17 E5 Details Table of Contents TOC -3 KEL00483 DIVISION 0 BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 00020 INVITATION FOR BIDS The City of Keller is soliciting proposals for the construction of the following project: 2.5 MILLION GALLON JOINT USE ELEVATED WATER STORAGE TANK TO SERVE THE CITY OF KELLER AND THE TOWN OF WESTLAKE Sealed proposals must be delivered to the City Hall no later than 11:00 a.m., March 13, 2001 to be accepted. The proposals will be publicly opened and read aloud at this time and place. Bids received after this time will be returned unopened. Address proposals to Mr. Ed llschner, P.E., Director of Public Works of the City of Keller, Texas, P.O. Box 770, Keller, Texas 76244 Contract Documents may be examined without charge or purchased at the offices of Freese and Nichols, Inc., Consulting Engineers at the following address: Freese and Nichols, Inc. 4055 International Plaza, Suite 200 Fort Worth, Texas 76109-4895 Attention: Construction Services The cost for Contract Documents is $50 per set. The cost of Contract Documents is not refunded. Submit check, cashier check or money order for payment. Cash will not be accepted. Contract Documents are on file and may be examined without charge in the offices of the City of Keller, Public Works Department. Direct questions regarding distribution of Contract Documents for this project to the Freese and Nichols Construction Services Department. Direct questions related to the design of the project to Thomas Haster, P.E. Written questions may be submitted to the address shown above or you may phone (817) 735-7300. This project includes construction of a double compartment 2.5 MG composite elevated tank and related site work and improvements. Bidders must submit a cashier's check, certified check, or acceptable bidder's bond with their proposal as a guarantee that the Bidder will enter into a contract for the project with the Owner within fifteen (15) days of Notice of Award of the contract. The security must be payable to City of Keller in the amount of five (5%) percent of the bid submitted. Contractor must execute the contract, bonds and certificates of insurance on the forms provided in the Contract Documents. Contractors for this Project must pay no less than the prevailing wage rates for the area established by the Owner and included in the contract documents. Performance, Payment Bonds and Maintenance Bonds are required. The City of Keller reserves the right to adopt the most advantageous interpretation of the bids submitted in the case of ambiguity or lack of clearness in stating proposal prices, to refect any or all bids, and/or waive formalities. Bids may not be withdrawn within sixty (60) days from date on which bids are opened. Advertisement Dates: Sunday, February 24, 2001 Sunday, March 3, 2001 CITY OF KELLER, TEXAS Invitation for Bids 00020-1 KEL00483 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINED TERMS Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS A. Submit documentation with bid to demonstrate that the Contractor is qualified by experience and capability to successfully construct the project within the Contract Time and for the Contract Amount. Refer to Section 13413 1.04.A and include the following information: 1. Qualifications and experience of the Bidders, including key personnel to be assigned to the project. 2. Qualifications and experience of Subcontractors. 3. Qualifications of manufacturers proposed to furnish the principal items of material or equipment. 4. Financial data consisting of audited financial statements for the last five years. 5. Previous experience and present contracts. 6. List of available equipment. 7. Evidence of authority to conduct business in the jurisdiction where the project is located. B. Owner may conduct investigations as considered necessary to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of the Bidders, proposed Subcontractors and other persons and organizations to do the work in accordance with the Contract Documents, to Owner's satisfaction, and within the prescribed time. Owner may reject the Bid of any Bidder who does not meet any such evaluation to Owner's satisfaction. 1.03 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE A. Examine Contract Documents, make observations and investigations correlate knowledge and observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents and consider these in preparation of a bid for the project. 1. Read the Contract Documents and related technical data and reports thoroughly. Use a complete set of Contract Documents in preparing Bids. Assume responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of partial or incomplete contract documents. 2. Visit the site to become familiar with general, local and site conditions that may affect cost, progress or performance of the work in any manner. 3. Become familiar with federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations affecting cost, progress or performance of the work. B. Surveys and investigation reports of subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or conditions or situations affecting the design of the Project used by the Engineer in preparing the Contract Documents are referenced in the Supplementary Conditions. 1. These reports are available for information only and neither the Owner nor Engineer guarantees their accuracy or that any opinions expressed in the report are correct. Instructions to Bidders 00100-1 KEL00483 2. Make additional surveys and investigations as necessary to determine the bid price for performance of the work in compliance with the terms of the Contract Documents before submitting a bid. 3. Cost for these investigations is to be paid by the Bidders. C. Acknowledge sole responsibility for job site safety, including trench excavation and confined space entry safety, by the submission of a Bid for this project. D. The submission of a Bid is incontrovertible representation by the Bidder that he has complied with every requirement of this Section. 1.04 INTERPRETATIONS Submit all questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents to the Engineer in writing. Replies are issued by Addenda to all parties recorded by Engineer as having received the bidding documents. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda are be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. Questions received less than two days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. 1.05 BID SECURITY A. Submit a bid security in the amount of five (5%) percent of the amount of the maximum total bid as a guarantee that the Bidder will promptly enter into a Contract and execute a Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds on the forms included in the Contract Documents if awarded the contract. B. Acceptable Bid security are: 1. Certified or cashier's check made payable to the Owner. 2. An approved Bidder's Bond underwritten by a surety named in the current list of "Surety Companies Acceptable on Federal Bonds" as published in the Federal Register by the Audit Staff Bureau of Accounts, U.S. Treasury Department. C. Bid securities will be returned to bidders when the contract award is made or bids are rejected. 1.06 CONTRACT TIME This project is to be substantially complete (ready for operation) by August 1, 2002. Final Completion shall be by October 1, 2002. Liquidated damages are set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. 1.07 BID FORM A. Submit bids on the Bid forms provided with the Contract Documents for each contract Bid. Include supplemental data to be furnished in the same sealed envelope with Proposal. B. Bid forms must be completed in ink. The Bid price of each item on the form must be stated in words and/or numerals. Words take precedence in case of a conflict. Instructions to Bidders 00100-2 KEL00483 C. Execute bids by corporations in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. Affix the corporate seal and attest by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the signature. D. Execute bids by partnerships in the partnership name. Forms are to be signed by a partner. Print the name below the signature. Write the title of the Partner and show the official address of the partnership shown below the signature. E. Acknowledge receipt of all Addenda on the bid form by signing beside the Addenda number. 1.08 SUBMISSION OF BIDS Submit bids at the time and place indicated in the Invitation for Bids. Submit bids in a sealed envelope, marked with the Project title and name and address of the Bidder. Include the bid security and other required documents in the envelope. 1.09 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS Modify or withdraw bids by submitting an appropriate document executed in the manner that a Bid must be executed. Deliver the modification or withdrawal to the place where Bids are to be submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids. 1.10 OPENING OF BIDS A. Bids will be opened as indicated in the Invitation for Bids. B. All Bids shall remain open for the period of time set forth in the Invitation for Bids, but Owner may, in his sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid Security prior to that date. 1.11 AWARD OF CONTRACT A. Owner may reject Bids, waive formalities, or disregard nonconforming, conditional Bidsor counter proposals. B. Owner may consider the following in evaluating the bids and awarding the contract: 1. Contractor's qualifications and ability to demonstrate current capability to complete the project in conformance with the requirements of the contract documents. 2. Compliance of the Bids with requirements of the Contract Documents 3. Alternates and unit prices if requested in the Bid forms. 4. The amount bid 5. Proposed date of completion and the ability to meet intermediate milestones that may have been established for the project. C. The contract will be awarded to the lowest responsible Bidder whose evaluation by Owner indicates that the award will be in the best interests of the Project if a contract is to be awarded. Instructions to Bidders 00100-3 KEL00483 1. 12 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT A. The successful Bidder must execute the formal Contract Agreement and required Bonds on the forms prepared and submitted by the Owner within fifteen (15) days after the Notice of Award. B. A Notice to Proceed authorizing the Contractor to commence work will be issued after the Contract Documents have been executed. 1.13 WAGE RATES Contractor must pay no less than the general prevailing rates for the Project location as determined in accordance with statutory requirements. The minimum rates for various labor classifications as established by the Owner are included in the Contract Documents. 1.14 BONDS Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds are required for this project and shall be provided in accordance with the General Conditions. 1.15 SALES TAXES The Owner qualifies as an exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas. Owner's purchasing department will issue exemption certificates. Comply with all statutes and rulings of the State Comptroller. 1.16 ALTERNATE BID ITEMS A. The following are alternate bid items and may be added to or deleted from the contract by the Owner. The work includes furnishing all materials, tools, equipment, transportation, services and all labor and superintendence for the construction as indicated in the Contract Documents. 1. Bid Item la — Contractor shall furnish and install 8 -foot black industrial ornamental fence with 12" -mow strip in the south and east boundaries of the tank site including cantilever motor -operated gate in lieu of black vinyl coated chain link fence, complete as specified and shown on the drawings 2. Bid Item 2a — Contractor shall furnish and install tank exterior architectural lighting, complete as specified and shown on the drawings. 1.17 EASEMENT ACQUISITION A. Bidders are advised that all easements required for the construction of the project may not be obtained prior to beginning construction activities. No construction will be allowed on these portions of the project until easements have been acquired. END OF SECTION Instructions to Bidders 00100-4 KEL00483 00300 BID PROPOSAL PROPOSAL OF A Corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of the business name of TO: CITY OF KELLER PROPOSAL FOR: Texas 2001 , a partnership consisting of an individual. 2.5 MILLION GALLON JOINT USE ELEVATED WATER STORAGE TANK TO SERVE THE CITY OF KELLER AND THE TOWN OF WESTLAKE The undersigned Bidder has carefully examined the Invitation for Bids, Instructions to Bidders, this Proposal, the Supplemental Conditions, the form of Contract Agreement and Bonds, the General Conditions of the Agreement, the Specifications, the Drawings, and the site of the work, and will provide all necessary labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment, tools, materials, services and other facilities to complete fully all the work as provided in the Contract Documents; and will execute the contract and bonds in the Contract Documents upon formal acceptance of his Proposal for the following prices: BASE BID ITEMS (Bid Items 1 through 5) 1. Furnish and install a 2,500,000 gallon double -compartment, composite elevated water storage tank complete with all appurtenances as specified and shown on LS 1 the drawings excluding outside architectural tank lighting, for the sum of dollars and cents. 2. Furnish and install City of Keller's-24--i—n-c-h- diameter concrete cylinder yard piping and fittings, stainless steel interior piping, valves and related appurtenances, complete as specified and shown on the drawings, LS 1 for the sum of dollars and cents. __Fu-rnish and install tank instrumentation and controls, complete as specified and shown on the drawings, for the sum of LS 1 $17,900.00 $17,900.00 dollars and cents. Bid Proposal 00300-1 KEL00483 TOTAL ITEMS 1 THROUGH 4 ADDITIVE ALTERNATE BID ITEMS (Bid Items la through 2a) Ia. Furnish and install 8 -foot black industrial ornamental fence with 12" -mow strip in the south and east boundaries of the tank site including cantilever motor -operated gate in lieu of black vinyl coated chain link fence, LS complete as specified and shown on the drawings, for the sum of dollars and cents. architectural lighting, complete as specified and shown on the drawings, for the sum of dollars and LS cents. The undersigned bidder will execute the Contract Agreement within fifteen (15) days after receiving a Notice of Award and will furnish approved bonds and insurance as required by the Contract Documents for the faithful performance of the Contract. The attached bid security in the amount of five (5) percent of the amount bid is to become the property of the Owner as liquidated damages for the delay and additional work caused by the failure of the bidder to enter into a contract in the event the Contract Agreement and bonds are not executed within fifteen (15) days. The undersigned agrees to substantially complete all work covered by these Contract Documents by August 1, 2002 . The date established for the start of work will be not less than ten (10) days or not more than thirty (30) days after the date of the Contract Agreement, except by mutual agreement of the Owner and the Contractor. Bid Proposal 00300-2 KEL00483 4. Fumish and install own of We-s-flikes - inch diameter concrete cylinder yard piping and fittings, stainless steel interior piping, valves and related appurtenances, complete as specified and shown on the drawings, LS 1 for the sum of dollars and cents. TOTAL ITEMS 1 THROUGH 4 ADDITIVE ALTERNATE BID ITEMS (Bid Items la through 2a) Ia. Furnish and install 8 -foot black industrial ornamental fence with 12" -mow strip in the south and east boundaries of the tank site including cantilever motor -operated gate in lieu of black vinyl coated chain link fence, LS complete as specified and shown on the drawings, for the sum of dollars and cents. architectural lighting, complete as specified and shown on the drawings, for the sum of dollars and LS cents. The undersigned bidder will execute the Contract Agreement within fifteen (15) days after receiving a Notice of Award and will furnish approved bonds and insurance as required by the Contract Documents for the faithful performance of the Contract. The attached bid security in the amount of five (5) percent of the amount bid is to become the property of the Owner as liquidated damages for the delay and additional work caused by the failure of the bidder to enter into a contract in the event the Contract Agreement and bonds are not executed within fifteen (15) days. The undersigned agrees to substantially complete all work covered by these Contract Documents by August 1, 2002 . The date established for the start of work will be not less than ten (10) days or not more than thirty (30) days after the date of the Contract Agreement, except by mutual agreement of the Owner and the Contractor. Bid Proposal 00300-2 KEL00483 Receipt is acknowledged of the following addenda: Addendum No. 1 Addendum No. 2 Addendum No. 3 Addendum No. 4 Addendum No. 5 Addendum No. 6 DATE BY Respectfully submitted, Attested By: By (Print Name and Title) Secretary Address (SEAL) If Bidder is a Corporation NOTE: Do not detach bid forms from other papers. Fill in with ink and submit complete with attached papers. Bid Proposal 00300-3 KEL00483 1 VENDOR COMPLIANCE TO STATE LAW The 1985 Session of the Texas Legislature passed House Bill 620 relative to the award of contracts to non-resident bidders. This law provides that, in order to be awarded a contract as low bidder, non- resident bidders (out-of-state contractors whose corporate offices or principal place of business are outside of the state of Texas) bid projects for construction, improvements, supplies or services in Texas at an amount lower than the lowest Texas resident bidder by the same amount that a Texas resident bidder would be required to underbid a non-resident bidder in order to obtain a comparable contract in the state in which the non-resident's principal place of business is located. The appropriate blanks in Section A must be filled out by all out-of-state or non-resident bidders in order for your bid to meet specifications. The failure of out-of-state or non-resident contractors to do so will automatically disqualify that bidder. Resident bidders must check the blank in Section B. A. Non-resident vendors in (give state), our principal place of business, are required to be percent lower than resident bidders by state law. A copy of the statute is attached. Non-resident vendors in (give state), our principal place of business, are not required to underbid resident bidders. B. Our principal place of business or corporate offices are in the State of Texas: BIDDER: Company City State Zip Bid Proposal KEL00483 By: (please print) Signature: Title: (please print) THIS FORM MUST BE RETURNED WITH YOUR BID 00300-4 CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE TO TEXAS SALES TAX CODE Comply with all requirements of the Texas Sales Tax Code. The Contractor hereby certifies that the Contract Amount is divided as follows: Material incorporated into the Project (resold to the Owner as defined in Tax Code) All other charges and costs Total * * The total must equal the total amount of the Contract. CONTRACTOR: Company (please print) Address City State Zip By: (signature of authorized person) Title: THIS FORM SHALL BE EXECUTED AT TIME OF EXECUTION OF CONTRACT AND MADE A PART OF THE CONTRACT. Bid Proposal 00300-5 KEL00483 00500 CONTRACT AGREEMENT AND BONDS STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF § THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this and between of the County of day of A.D., 20___, by and State of Texas, acting through thereunto duly authorized so to do, Party of the First Part, hereinafter termed the OWNER, and_ of the City of , County of and State of Party of the Second Part, hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the Party of the First Part (OWNER), and under the conditions expressed in the bonds bearing even date herewith, the said Party of the Second Part (CONTRACTOR) hereby agrees with the said Party of the First Part (OWNER) to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: 2.5 Million Gallon Joint Use Elevated Water Tank and Related Appurtenances and Site Improvements to Serve the City of Keller and the Town of Westlake and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the General Conditions of the Agreement; and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all the materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction, in accordance with the conditions and prices stated in the Proposal attached hereto, and in accordance with all the General Conditions of the Agreement, the Supplementary Conditions, the Notice to Bidders (Advertisement for Bids), Instructions to Bidders, and the Performance and Payment Bonds, all attached hereto, and in accordance with the plans, which includes all maps, plats, blueprints, and other drawings and printed or written explanatory matter thereof, and the Specifications therefor, as prepared by FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC., herein entitled the ENGINEER, each of which has been identified by the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER, all of which are made a part hereof and collectively evidence and constitute the entire contract. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work on or after the date established for the start of work as set forth in a written notice to commence work and to substantially complete all work within the time stated in the Proposal, subject to such extensions of time as are provided by the General and Supplementary Conditions. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds the price or prices shown in the proposal, which forms a part of this Contract, such payments to be subject to the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but without limitation, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent Contract Agreement and Bonds 00500-1 KEL00483 (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction maybe limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue to be valid and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR, who agree that the Contract Documents shall be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this Agreement in the year and day first above written. ATTEST: ATTEST: M LIM Party of the First Part, OWNER Signature Name and Title (please type or print) (SEAL) Party of the Second Part, CONTRACTOR Signature Name and Title (please type or print) (SEAL) Contract Agreement and Bonds 00500-2 KEL00483 Payment Bond Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): OWNER (Name and Address): CONTRACT Date: Amount: Description (Name and Location): BOND Date (Not earlier than Contract Date): Amount: Modifications to this Bond Form: SURETY (Name and Address of Principal Place of Business): Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms printed on the reverse side hereof, do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent, or representative. CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corp. Seal) Company: Seal) Signature: Signature: Name and Title: Name and Title: (Attach Power of Attorney) (Space is provided below for signatures of additional parties, if required.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corp. Seal) Company: Seal) Signature: Signature: (Corp. (Corp. Contract Agreement and Bonds 00500-3 KEL00483 Name and Title: 1. The CONTRACTOR and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the OWNER to pay for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2. With respect to the OWNER this obligation shall be null and void if the CONTRACTOR: 2.1. Promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due Claimants, and 2.2. Defends, indemnifies and holds harmless the OWNER from all claims, demands, liens or suits by any person or entity who furnished labor, materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Contract, provided the OWNER has promptly notified the CONTRACTOR and the Surety (at the addresses described in paragraph 12) of any claims, demands, liens or suits and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens or suits to the CONTRACTOR and the Surety, and provided there is no OWNER Default. 3. With respect to Claimants, this obligation shall be null and void if the CONTRACTOR promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due. 4. The Surety shall have no obligation to Claimants under this Bond until 4.1. Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with the CONTRACTOR have given notice to the Surety (at the addresses described in paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof,to the OWNER, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim. 4.2. Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the CONTRACTOR: 1. Have furnished written notice to the CONTRACTOR and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the OWNER, within 90 days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the claim stating, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim and the name of the party to whom the materials were furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed; and 2. Have either received a rejection in whole or in part from the CONTRACTOR, or not received within 30 days of furnishing the above notice any communication from the CONTRACTOR by which the CONTRACTOR had indicated the claim will be paid directly or indirectly; and 3. Not having been paid within the above 30 days, have sent a written notice to the Surety and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the OWNER, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and enclosing a copy of the previous written notice fumished to the CONTRACTOR. 5. If a notice required by paragraph 4 is given by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR or to the Surety, that is sufficient compliance. 6. When the Claimant has satisfied the conditions of paragraph 4, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take the following actions: 6.1. Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the OWNER, within 45 days after receipt of the claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed. 6.2. Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts. 7. The Surety's total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety. Contract Agreement and Bonds KEL00483 Name and Title: 8. Amounts owed by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR under the Contract shall be used for the performance of the Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any Performance Bond. By the CONTRACTOR furnishing and the OWNER accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the CONTRACTOR in the performance of the Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the CONTRACTOR and the Surety under this Bond, subject to the OWNER's priority to use the funds for the completion of the Work. 9. The Surety shall not be liable to the OWNER, Claimants or others for obligations of the CONTRACTOR that are unrelated to the Contract. The OWNER shall not be liable for payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligations to make payments to, give notices on behalf of, or otherwise have obligations to Claimants under this Bond. 10. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Contract or to related Subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. 11. In the event that Owner is a governmental entity as defined in Section 2252.001, Texas Government Code, or any supplement or amendment thereto, then all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of such Texas Government Code, Sections 2253.001, et seq. to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein, along with any or all supplements and amendments thereto. In the event Owner is not a governmental entity as set forth above and defined in said statue, then the terms hereof shall be determined aby the wording hereof without regard to said statutory enactment. 12. No suit or action shall be commenced by a Clalmantunder this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the Work or part of the Work is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant gave the notice required by paragraph 4.1 or paragraph 4.2.3, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. 13. Notice to the Surety, the OWNER or the CONTRACTOR shall be mailed or delivered to the addresses shown on thesignature page. Actual receipt of notice by Surety, the OWNER or the CONTRACTOR however accomplished, shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received at the address shown on the signature page. 14. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the Contract was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is, that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory Bond and not as a common law bond. 15. Upon request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made. 16. DEFIMTIONS 16.1. Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract with the CONTRACTOR or with a Subcontractor of the CONTRACTOR to furnish labor, materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Contract. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limitation in the terms "labor, materials or equipment" that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental equipment used in the Contract, architectural and engineering 00500-4 services required for performance of the Work of the CONTRACTOR and other items for which a mechanic's lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials or equipment were furnished. 16.2. Contract: The agreement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR identified on the signature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. Contract Agreement and Bonds KEL00483 the CONTRACTOR's Subcontractors, and all 16.3. OWNER Default: Failure of the OWNER, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the CONTRACTOR as required by the Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof. 00500-5 Performance Bond Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): OWNER (Name and Address): CONTRACT Date: Amount: Description (Name and Location): BOND Date (Not earlier than Contract Date): Amount: Modifications to this Bond Form: SURETY (Name and Address of Principal Place of Business): Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms printed on the reverse side hereof, do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL Company: (Corp. Seal) Seal) Signature: Name and Title: SURETY Company: Signature: Name and Title: (Attach Power of Attorney) (Space is provided below for signatures of additional parties, if required.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corp. Seal) Company: Seal) Signature: Name and Title: Contract Agreement and Bonds KEL00483 Signature: Name and Title: (Corp. (Corp. 00500-6 1. The CONTRACTOR and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, heir heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2. If the CONTRACTOR performs the Contract, the Surety and the CONTRACTOR have no obligation under this Bond, except to participate in conferences as provided in paragraph 3.1. 3. If there is no OWNER Default, the Surety's obligation under this Bond shall arise after: 3.1. The OWNER has notified the CONTRACTOR and the Surety at the addresses described in paragraph 10 below, that the OWNER is considering declaring a CONTRACTOR Default and has requested and attempted to arrange a conference with the CONTRACTOR and the Surety to be held not later than fifteen days after receipt of such notice to discuss methods of performing the Contract. If the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR and the Surety agree, the CONTRACTOR shall be allowed a reasonable ime to perform the Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the OWNER's right, if any, subsequently to declare a CONTRACTOR Default; and 3.2. The OWNER has declared a CONTRACTOR Default and formally terminated the CONTRACTOR's right to complete the Contract. Such CONTRACTOR Default shall not be declared earlier than twenty days after the CONTRACTOR and the Surety have received notice as provided in paragraph 3.1; and 3.3. The OWNER has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price to: 3.3. L The Surety in accordance with the terms of the Contract; 3.3.2 Another contractor selected pursuant to paragraph 4.3 to perform the Contract. 4. When the OWNER has satisfied the conditions of paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take one of the following actions: 4.1. Arrange for the CONTRACTOR, with consent of the OWNER, to perforin and complete the Contract; or 4.2. Undertake to perform and complete the Contract itself, through its agents or through independent contractors; or 4.30btain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the OWNER for a contract for performance and completion of the Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the OWNER and the contractor selected with the OWNER's concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the Bonds issued on the Contract, and pay to the OWNER the amount of damages as described in paragraph 6in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the OWNER resulting from the CONTRACTOR Default; or 4.4. Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances; 4.4.1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the OWNER and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, tender payment therefor to the OWNER; or 4.4.2 Deny liability in whole or in part and Contract Agreement and Bonds KE L00483 notify the OWNER citing reasons therefor, 5. If the Surety does not proceed as provided in paragraph 4 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond fifteen days after receipt of an additional written notice from the OWNER to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the OWNER shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the OWNER. If the Surety proceeds as provided in paragraph 4.4, and the OWNER refuses the payment tendered or the Surety has denied plability, in whole or in part, without further notice the OWNER shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the OWNER. 6. After the OWNER has terminated the CONTRACTOR's right to complete the Contract, and if the Surety elects to act under paragraph 4.1, 4.2, or 4.3 above, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the OWNER shall not be greater than those of the CONTRACTOR under the Contract, and the responsibilities of the OWNER to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the OWNER under the Contract. To a limit of the amount of this Bond, but subject to commitment by the OWNER of the Balance of the Contract Price to mitigation of costs and damages on the Contract, the Surety is obligated without duplication for: 6.1. The responsibilities of the CONTRACTOR for correction of defective Work and completion of the Contract; 6.2. Additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the CONTRACTOR's Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under paragraph 4. 6.3. Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non- performance of the CONTRACTOR 7. The Surety shall not be liable to the OWNER or others for obligations of the CONTRACTOR that are unrelated to the Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the OWNER or its heirs, executors, administrators, or successors. 8. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. 9. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the Work or part of the Work is located and shall be instituted within two years after CONTRACTOR Default or within two years after the CONTRACTOR ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. 10. Notice to the Surety, the OWNER or the CONTRACTOR shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature page. 11. In the event that Owner is a governmental entity as defined in Section 2252.001, Texas Government Code, or any supplement or amendment thereto, then all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of such Texas Government Code, Sections 2253.001, et seq. to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein, along with any or all supplements and amendments thereto. In the event Owner is not a governmental entity as set forth above and defined in said statue, then the terms hereof shall be determined by the wording hereof without regard to said statutory enactment. 12. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the Contract was be performed, any 00500-7 provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted here from and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 13. Definitions. 13.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR under the Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the CONTRACTOR of any amounts received or to be received by the OWNER in settlement of insurance or other Claims for damages to which the CONTRACTOR is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the CONTRACTOR Contract Agreement and Bonds KEL00483 under the Contract. 13.2. Contract: The agreement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR identified on the signature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. 13.3. CONTRACTOR Default: Failure of the CONTRACTOR, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with the terms of the Contract. 13.4. OWNER Default: Failure of the OWNER, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the CONTRACTOR as required by the Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof. UU5UU-5 Maintenance Bond STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF § That [CONTRACTOR] Principal, and organized under the laws of held and bound to pay unto the KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: as a corporation and as Sureties, do hereby expressly acknowledge themselves to be Owner, a governmental entity as that term is defined in V.C.T.A., Government Code, Section 2253.001, et seq., the sum of (AMOUNT STATED AS A % OF TOTAL CONTRACT PRICE) Dollars ($ for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made unto said Owner, and its successors, said Principal and Sureties do hereby bind themselves, their assigns, and successors jointly and severally. This obligation is conditioned, however, that, whereas said Principal has this day entered into a written contract with said Owner to build and construct the [description of project as it appears on cover of contract documents] which contract and the plans and specifications therein mentioned and adopted by the Owner are hereby expressly made a part thereof as though the same were written and embodied therein. Contract Agreement and Bonds uubuu-y KEL00483 WHEREAS, under the specifications and contract, it is provided that the Contractor shall maintain and keep in good repair the work constructed and/or equipment furnished by him as contemplated by the plans, specifications, drawings, etc., and to perform for a period of [NUMBER OF YEARS FOR THE BOND; NOT MORE THAN ONE YEAR IS RECOMMENDED] from the date of final payment by the Owner, all necessary repairs, reconstruction and renewal of any part of said construction, and to furnish the labor and materials to make good and to repair any defective condition growing out of or on account of the breakage or failure of any substance or the improper function of any part of the construction work. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the costs of all engineering and special services required to be furnished by the Owner which are directly attributable to the restoration of the constructed work. Said maintenance contemplates the complete restoration of the constructed work to a functional use during the said period as set forth above. It is understood that the purpose of this section is to require the correction of all defective conditions resulting from materials furnished or work and labor performed by the said Contractor under the conditions prescribed by the plans and specifications; and in case the said Contractor shall fail or refuse to perform as provided within ten (10) days after proper written notifications have been furnished to him by the Owner, it is agreed that the Owner may do said work and supply such materials and the said Contractor and Sureties herein shall be subject to the liquidated damages mentioned in said Contract for each calendar day's failure on its part to comply with the terms of the said provision of said Contract and this Maintenance Bond. NOW, THEREFORE, if the said Contractor shall keep and perform its said agreement to maintain said work and keep the same in good repair for the said maintenance period as provided above, then these presents shall be null and void and have no further effect, but if default shall be made by the said Contractor in the performance of its contract to do so maintain and repair damages in the premises, as provided, and it is further understood and agreed that this obligation shall be a continuing one against the Principal and Sureties hereon, and that successive recoveries may be had hereon for successive breaches until the full amount shall have been exhausted; and it is further understood that the obligation herein to maintain said work shall continue throughout said maintenance period, and the same shall not be changed, diminished, or in any manner affected from any clause during said time. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Owner has caused these presents to be executed by [NAME OF CONTRACTOR'S AUTHORIZED AGENT] said Surety has caused these presents to be executed by its [ATTORNEY-IN-FACT OR OFFICIAL] and the said [ATTORNEY-IN-FACT OR OFFICIAL] has hereto set his hand this the day of 20 Surety Contract Agreement and Bonds KEL00483 LIM Principal and the 00500-10 Title Address ATTEST: [ SEAL ] Contractor Surety Title Address [ SEAL ] NOTE. Date of Maintenance Bond must not be prior to date of Contract. NOTE. A Power of Attorney on behalf of the Surety must be attached to the Bond in all cases. Contract Agreement and Bonds 00500-11 KEL00483 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE Issued To: (Owner) Address: THIS IS TO CERTIFY to (Owner) that the following policies of insurance, subject to their terms, conditions and exclusions, have been issued by this Company covering the insured named below for the types of operations and at the locations described herein. It is understood and agreed that none of the policies referenced herein will be canceled, changed, or reduced in coverage without at least (30) thirty days advance written notice to the (Owner) at the above address. 1. Name of Insured: 2. Address: 3. Status of Insured: Corporation Partnership ; Individual Other 4. Location of Operations Covered: 5. Description of Operations Covered: THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE NEITHER AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMENDS, EXTENDS, OR ALTERS THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESIGNATED HEREIN. INSURANCE POLICIES IN FORCE INSURANCE AFFORDED ONLY FOR HAZARDS INDICATED BY (X) Type of Policy X Limits of Liability Policy Policy Number Term (a) Standard Workmen's Statutory W.C. From: Compensation & Employer's and Each Occurrence S To: Occupational Disease Liability Aggregate Disease S (b) Longshoremen's & Harbor Statutory From: Workers Compensation To: (c) General Liability From: Bodilv Iniury To: Premises - Operation Each Person S Contractor's Protective Each Occurrence S Products & Completed Operations Aggregate Products S Contractual & Completed Operations Property Damage Contractual Each Occurrence S Explosion, Collapse & Aggregate Prem. Oper. S Underground Damage (X.C.U.) Aggregate Protective S Aggregate Products S & Completed Operations Aggregate Contractual S Aggregate X.C.U. S (d) Automobile Liability From: Bodilv Iniury To: Owned Automobiles Each Person S Hired Automobiles Non -Owned Automobiles Each Occurrence S Propertv Damage Owned Automobiles Hired Automobiles Each Occurrence S Non -Owned Automobiles Other Insurance i CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY Subject to policy terms, conditions and exclusions, specific Contractual Liability coverage is provided as follows: n For liability assumed by the Insured under. its Contract with u for the operations described herein. n All Contracts between the Insured and u Insurance Company Date: Address Owner) . (Owner). Authorized Representative STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Prepared by ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS COMMITTEE and Issued and Published Jointly By PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE a practice division of the NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS AMERICAN CONSULTING ENGINEERS COUNCIL EJCDC No. 1910-8 (1996 Edition) AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America Construction Specifications Institute 00700-1 Copyright ©1996 National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314 American Consulting Engineers Council 1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005 American Society of Civil Engineers 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017 00700-2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY ............................................. 00700-6 1.01 Defined Terms..............................................................00700-6 1.02 Terminology ................................................................00700-8 ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS ...................................................... 00700-9 2.01 Delivery of Bonds........................................................... 00700-9 2.02 Copies of Documents ......................................................... 00700-9 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ................................ 00700-9 2.04 Starting the Work............................................................00700-9 2.05 Before Starting Construction................................................... 00700-9 2.06 Preconstruction Conference ................................................... 00700-10 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules ................................................ 00700-10 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE .......................... 00700-10 3.01 Intent....................................................................00700-10 3.02 Reference Standards........................................................ 00700-11 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies .......................................... 00700-11 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents ................................. 00700-11 3.05 Reuse of Documents......................................................... 00700-11 ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 00700-12 4.01 Availability of Lands ........................................................ 00700-12 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ............................................. 00700-12 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ...................................... 00700- 12 4.04 Underground Facilities...................................................... 00700- 13 4.05 Reference Points ...................................... ...................00700-14 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site ....................................... 00700-14 ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE..................................................... 00700-15 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds ......................................... 00700-15 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers ................................................ 00700-15 5.03 Certificates of Insurance..................................................... 00700-15 5.04 CONTRACTOR'S Liability Insurance ............................................ 00700-16 5.05 OWNER'S Liability Insurance ................................................. 00700-16 5.06 Property Insurance.........................................................00700-17 5.07 Waiver of Rights........................................................... 00700-17 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds .................................... 00700-18 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace .............................. 00700-18 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer ............................. 00700-18 ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES ........................................... 00700-19 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence............................................... 00700-19 6.02 Labor; Working Hours.......................................................00700-19 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ............................................. 00700-19 6.04 Progress Schedule.......................................................... 00700-19 6.05 Substitutes and "Or -Equals" .................................................. 00700-19 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others ................................. 00700-21 00700-3 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties .................................................... 00700 -22 6.08 Permits..................................................................00700-22 6.09 Laws and Regulations.......................................................00700-22 6.10 Taxes....................................................................00700-22 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas ................................................... 00700-22 6.12 Record Documents..........................................................00700-23 6.13 Safety and Protection........................................................ 00700-23 6.14 Safety Representative........................................................ 00700-23 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs .............................................. 00700-24 6.16 Emergencies.............................................................. 00700-24 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples .................................................. 00700-24 6.18 Continuing the Work........................................................00700-25 6.19 CONTRACTOR's General Warranty and Guarantee ................................ 00700-25 6.20 INDEMNIFICA TION........................................................00700-25 ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK.............................................................. 00700-26 7.01 Related Work at Site........................................................00700-26 7.02 Coordination.............................................................. 00700-27 ARTICLE 8 - OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES................................................. 00700-27 8.01 Communications to Contractor ................................................ 00700-27 8.02 Replacement of ENGINEER ................................................... 00700-27 8.03 Furnish Data..............................................................00700-27 8.04 Pay Promptly When Due .....................................................00700-27 8.05 Lands and Easements, Reports and Tests ......................................... 00700-27 8.06 Insurance.................................................................00700-27 8.07 Change Orders.............................................................00700-27 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals ............................................... 00700-27 8.09 Limitations on OWNER's Responsibilities ........................................ 00700-27 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition .................................. 00700-27 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements ............................................ 00700-27 ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION ................................. 00700-28 9.01 OWNER'S Representative.................................................... 00700-28 9.02 Visits to Site............................................................... 00700-28 9.03 Project Representative....................................................... 00700-28 9.04 Clarifications and Interpretations .............................................. 00700-28 9.05 Authorized Variations in Work ................................................. 00700-28 9.06 Rejecting Defective Work ..................................................... 00700-28 9.07 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments ..................................... 00700-28 9.08 Determinations for Unit Price Work ............................................. 00700-29 9.09 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ............ 00700-29 9.10 Limitations on ENGINEER's Authority and Responsibilities .......................... 00700-29 ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS ............................................ 00700-29 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work ............................................... 00700-29 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ............................................. 00700-30 10.03 Execution of Change Orders ......... .......................................00700-30 10.04 Notification to Surety ........................................................ 00700-30 10.05 Claims and Disputes........................................................00700-30 ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; CASH ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK ................... 00700-31 11.01 Costofthe Work...........................................................00700-31 00700-4 11.02 Cash Allowances...........................................................00700-32 11.03 Unit Price Work............................................................00700-33 ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES .................. 00700-33 12.01 Change of Contract Price ....................................................00700-33 12.02 Change of Contract Times .................................................... 00700-34 12.03 Delays Beyond CONTRACTOR's Control ........................................ 00700-34 12.04 Delays Within CONTRACTOR's Control ......................................... 00700-34 12.05 Delays Beyond 0WNER's and CONTRACTOR's Control ............................. 00700-34 12.06 Delay Damages............................................................00700-34 ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 00700-34 13.01 Notice of Defects ........................................................... 00700-35 13.02 Access to Work.............................................................00700-35 13.03 Tests and Inspections........................................................ 00700-35 13.04 Uncovering Work...........................................................00700-35 13.05 OWNER May Stop the Work ................................................... 00700-35 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work ........................................ 00700-36 13.07 Correction Period..........................................................00700-36 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work ................................................. 00700-36 13.09 OWNER May Correct Defective Work ........................................... 00700-36 ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION .............................. 00700-37 14.01 Schedule of Values..........................................................00700-37 14.02 Progress Payments..........................................................00700-37 14.03 CONTRACTOR's Warranty of Title ............................................. 00700-39 14.04 Substantial Completion...................................................... 00700-39 14.05 Partial Utilization.......................................................... 00700-39 14.06 Final Inspection............................................................00700-40 14.07 Final Payment.............................................................00700-40 14.08 Final Completion Delayed .................................................... 00700-40 14.09 Waiver of Claims...........................................................00700-41 ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION ................................... 00700-41 15.01 OWNER May Suspend Work .................................................. 00700-41 15.02 OWNER May Terminate for Cause .............................................. 00700-41 15.03 OWNER May Terminate For Convenience ........................................ 00700-41 15.04 CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate ..................................... 00700-42 ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION...................................................... 00700-42 16.01 Methods and Procedures .....................................................00700-42 ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS ...................................... I ................... 00700-42 17.01 Giving Notice..............................................................00700-42 17.02 Computation of Times ....................................................... 00700-42 17.03 Cumulative Remedies........................................................ 00700-42 17.04 Survival of Obligations...................................................... 00700-42 17.05 Controlling Law............................................................00700-43 00700-5 GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Wherever used in the Contract Documents and printed with initial or all capital letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. 1. Addenda --Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the Contract Documents. 2. Agreement --The written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering the Work. 3. Application for Payment—The form acceptable to ENGINEER which is to be used by CONTRACTOR during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 4. Asbestos—Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 5. Bid—The offer or proposal of a bidder submit- ted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. 6. Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). 7. Bidding Requirements --The Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid security form, if any, and the Bid form with any supplements. 8. Bonds—Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security. 9. Change Order --A document recommended by ENGINEER which is signed by CONTRACTOR and OWNER and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract 00700-6 Price or the Contract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. 10. Claim—A demand or assertion by OWNER or CONTRACTOR seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim. 11. Contract --The entire and integrated written agreement between the OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written or oral. 12. Contract Documents—The Contract Documents establish the rights and obligations of the parties and include the Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), CONTRACTOR's Bid (including documentation accompanying the Bid and any post Bid documentation submitted prior to the Notice of Award) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Notice to Proceed, the Bonds, these General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings as the same are more specifically identified in the Agreement, together with all Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and ENGINEER's written interpretations and clarifications issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. Approved Shop Drawings and the reports and drawings of subsurface and physical conditions are not Contract Documents. Only printed or hard copies of the items listed in this paragraph are Contract Documents. Files in electronic media format of text, data, graphics, and the like that may be fumished by OWNER to CONTRACTOR are not Contract Documents. 13. Contract Price --The moneys payable by OWN- ER to CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the provisions of paragraph 11.03 in the case of Unit Price Work). 14. Contract Times—The number of days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve Substantial Completion; and (ii) complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by ENGINEER's written recommendation of final payment. 15. CONTRACTOR --The individual or entity with whom OWNER has entered into the Agreement. 16. Cost of the Work --See paragraph I LOLA for definition. 17. Drawings --That part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by ENGINEER which graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by CONTRACTOR. Shop Drawings and other CONTRACTOR submittals are not Drawings as so defined. 18. Effective Date of the Agreement --The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effec- tive, but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver. 19. ENGINEER --The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement. 20. ENGINEER's Consultant --An individual or entity having a contract with ENGINEER to furnish services as ENGINEER's independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. 21. Field Order --A written order issued by ENGI- NEER which requires minor changes in the Work but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 22. General Requirements --Sections of Division 1 of the Specifications. The General Requirements pertain to all sections of the Specifications. 23. Hazardous Environmental Condition --The presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material in such quantities or circumstances that may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto in connection with the Work. 24. Hazardous Waste --The term Hazardous Waste shall have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as amended from time to time. 25. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations -- Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmen- tal bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. 00700-7 26. Liens --Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or personal property. 27. Milestone --A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate comple- tion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 28. Notice ofAward--The written notice by OWN- ER to the apparent successful bidder stating that upon timely compliance by the apparent successful bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein, OWNER will sign and deliver the Agreement. 29. Notice to Proceed --A written notice given by OWNER to CONTRACTOR fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work under the Contract Documents. 30. OWNER --The individual, entity, public body, or authority with whom CONTRACTOR has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be performed. 31. Partial Utilization --Use by OWNER of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 32. PCBs --Polychlorinated biphenyls. 33. Petroleum --Petroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard condi- tions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahren- heit and 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, and oil mixed with other non -Hazardous Waste and crude oils. 34. Project --The total construction of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part as may be indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 35. Project Manual --The bound documentary information prepared for bidding and constructing the Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual, which may be bound in one or more volumes, is contained in the table(s) of contents. 36. Radioactive Material --Source, special nuclear, or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from time to time. 37. Resident Project Representative --The autho- rized representative of ENGINEER who may be assigned to the Site or any part thereof. 38. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. 39. Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for CONTRACTOR and submitted by CONTRACTOR to illustrate some portion of the Work. 40. Site --Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by OWNER upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands furnished by OWNER which are designated for the use of CONTRACTOR 41. Specifications --That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. 42. Subcontractor --An individual or entity having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site. 43. Substantial Completion --The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of ENGINEER, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. 44. Supplementary Conditions --That part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these General Conditions. 45. Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with any Subcontrac- tor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor. 46. Underground Facilities—All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities, including those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 47. Unit Price Work --Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. 48. Work—The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. 49. Work Change Directive—A written statement to CONTRACTOR issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by OWNER and recom- mended by ENGINEER ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen subsurface or physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or to emergencies. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the change ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 50. Written Amendment --A written statement modifying the Contract Documents, signed by OWNER and CONTRACTOR on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and normally dealing with the nonengineering or nontechnical rather than strictly construction -related aspects of the Contract Documents. 1.02 Terminology 00700-8 A. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives 1. Whenever in the Contract Documents the terms .,as allowed," "as approved," or terms of like effect or import are used, or the adjectives "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of ENGINEER as to the Work, it is intended that such action or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the completed Work for compliance with the requirements of and information in the Contract Documents and conformance with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective shall not be effective to assign to ENGINEER any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of paragraph 9.10 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. B. Day 1. The word "day" shall constitute a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. C. Defective 1. The word "defective," when modifying the word "Work," refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to ENGINEER's recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by OWNER at Substantial Completion in accordance with paragraph 14.04 or 14.05). D. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide 1. The word "furnish," when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition. 2. The word "install," when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 3. The words "perform" or "provide," when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 4. When "furnish," "install," "perform," or "pro- vide" is not used in connection with services, materials, or equipment in a context clearly requiring an obligation of CONTRACTOR, "provide" is implied. E. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases which have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning. ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds A. When CONTRACTOR delivers the executed Agreements to OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall also deliver to OWNER such Bonds as CONTRACTOR may be required to furnish. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. OWNER shall furnish to CONTRACTOR up to ten copies of the Contract Documents. Additional copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times com- mence to run later than the sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, whichever date is earlier. 2.04 Starting the Work A. CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which the Contract Times commence to run. 2.05 Before Starting Construction 00700-9 A. CONTRACTOR's Review of Contract Documents: Before undertaking each part of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures therein and all applicable field measurements. CONTRACTOR shall promptly report in writing to ENGINEER any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy which CONTRACTOR may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from ENGINEER before proceeding with any Work affected thereby; however, CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or ENGINEER for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably should have known thereof. B. Preliminary Schedules: Within ten days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements), CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for its timely review: 1. a preliminary progress schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents; 2. a preliminary schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals which will list each required submit- tal and the times for submitting, reviewing, and pro- cessing such submittal; and 3. a preliminary schedule of values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. C. Evidence of Insurance: Before any Work at the Site is started, CONTRACTOR and OWNER shall each deliver to the other, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance which either of them or any additional insured may reasonably request) which CONTRACTOR and OWNER respectively are required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Article 5. 2.06 Preconstruction Conference A. Within 20 days after the Contract Times start to run, but before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in paragraph 2.05.13, procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and maintaining required records. 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- ments, at least ten days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference attended by CON- TRACTOR, ENGINEER, and others as appropriate will be held to review for acceptability to ENGINEER as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with paragraph 2.05.B. CONTRACTOR shall have an additional ten days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to CONTRACTOR until acceptable schedules are submitted to ENGINEER. 1. The progress schedule will be acceptable to ENGINEER if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within any specified Milestones and the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on ENGINEER responsibility for the progress schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work nor interfere with or relieve CONTRACTOR from CONTRACTOR's full responsibility therefor. 2. CONTRACTOR's schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals will be acceptable to ENGINEER if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals. 3. CONTRACTOR's schedule of values will be acceptable to ENGINEER as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to component parts of the Work. ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to 00700- 10 produce the intended result will be provided whether or not specifically called for at no additional cost to OWNER C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by ENGINEER as provided in Article 9. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and Regulations 1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regula- tions in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. 2. No provision of any such standard, specification, manual or code, or any instruction of a Supplier shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, or ENGINEER, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall any such provision or instruction be effective to assign to OWNER, ENGINEER, or any of ENGINEER's Consultants, agents, or employees any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies 1. If, during the performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any standard, specification, manual or code, or of any instruction of any Supplier, CONTRACTOR shall report it to ENGINEER in writing at once. CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by paragraph 6.16.A) until an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods indicated in paragraph 3.04; provided, however, that CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or ENGINEER for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity, or dis- crepancy unless CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably should have known thereof. B. Resolving Discrepancies 1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and: a. the provisions of any standard, specification, manual, code, or instruction (whether or not specifi- cally incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents); or b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation). 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof in one or more of the following ways: (i) a Written Amendment; (ii) a Change Order; or (iii) a Work Change Directive. B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized, by one or more of the following ways: (i) a Field Order; (ii) ENGINEER's approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; or (iii) ENGINEER's written interpreta- tion or clarification. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. CONTRACTOR and any Subcontractor or Supplier or other individual or entity performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with OWNER: (i) shall not have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of ENGINEER or ENGINEER's Consultant, including electronic media editions; and (ii) shall not reuse any of such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of OWNER and ENGINEER and specific written verification or adaption by ENGINEER. This prohibition will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work, or termination or completion of the Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude CONTRACTOR 00700-11 from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes. ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.01 Availability of Lands A. OWNER shall furnish the Site. OWNER shall notify CONTRACTOR of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which CONTRACTOR must comply in performing the Work. OWNER will obtain in a timely manner and pay for easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. If CONTRACTOR and OWNER are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of any delay in OWNER's furnishing the Site, CONTRACTOR may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. B. Upon reasonable written request, OWNER shall furnish CONTRACTOR with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which the Work is to be performed and OWNER's interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic's or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations. C. CONTRACTOR shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site that ENGINEER has used in preparing the Contract Docu- ments; and 2. those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities) that ENGINEER has used in preparing the Contract Documents. B. Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR on Technical Data Authorized: CONTRACTOR may rely upon the general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical data," CONTRACTOR may not rely upon or make any Claim against OWNER, ENGINEER, or any of ENGINEER's Consultants with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for CONTRACTOR's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by CONTRACTOR, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any CONTRACTOR interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notice: If CONTRACTOR believes that any subsur- face or physical condition at or contiguous to the Site that is uncovered or revealed either: 1. is of such a nature as to establish that any "technical data" on which CONTRACTOR is entitled to rely as provided in paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or 2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Documents; or 3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then CONTRACTOR shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by paragraph 6.16.A), notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing about such condition. CONTRACTOR shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do so. 00700-12 B. ENGINEER's Review: After receipt of written notice as required by paragraph 4.03.A, ENGINEER will promptly review the pertinent condition, determine the necessity of OWNER's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect thereto, and advise OWNER in writing (with a copy to CONTRACTOR) of ENGINEER's findings and conclusions. C. Possible Price and Times Adjustments 1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent that the existence of such differing subsurface or physical condition causes an increase or decrease in CONTRACTOR's cost of, or time required for, perfor- mance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: a. such condition must meet any one or more of the categories described in paragraph 4.03.A; and b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a Unit Price Basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of paragraphs 9.08 and 11.03. 2. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times if- a. f a. CONTRACTOR knew of the existence of such conditions at the time CONTRACTOR made a final commitment to OWNER in respect of Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or b. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for CONTRACTOR prior to CONTRACTOR's making such final commitment; or c. CONTRACTOR failed to give the written notice within the time and as required by paragraph 4.03.A. 3. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. However, OWNER, ENGINEER, and ENGINEER's Consultants shall not be liable to CONTRACTOR for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by CONTRACTOR on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. 4.04 Underground Facilities A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based on information and data furnished to OWNER or ENGINEER by the owners of such Underground Facilities, including OWNER, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions: 00700-13 1. OWNER and ENGINEER shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and 2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility for: a. reviewing and checking all such information and data, b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, c. coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities, including OWNER, during construction, and d. the safety and protection of all such Under- ground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. B. Not Shown or Indicated 1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was not shown or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to OWNER and ENGINEER. ENGINEER will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility. During such time, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility. 2. If ENGINEER concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Work Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and document such consequences. An equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Price of Contract Times, or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence or location of any Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents and that CONTRACTOR did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, OWNER or CONTRACTOR may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 4.05 Reference Points A. OWNER shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in ENGINEER's judgment are necessary to enable CON- TRACTOR to proceed with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall report to ENGINEER whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel. 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site A. Reports and Drawings: Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of those reports and drawings relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition identified at the Site, if any, that have been utilized by the ENGINEER in the preparation of the Contract Documents. B. Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR on Technical Data Authorized: CONTRACTOR may rely upon the general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical data," CONTRACTOR may not rely upon or make any Claim against OWNER, ENGINEER or any of ENGINEER's Consultants with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for CONTRACTOR's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by CONTRACTOR and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any CONTRACTOR interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created with any materials brought to the Site by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom CON- TRACTOR is responsible. D. If CONTRACTOR encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if CONTRACTOR or anyone for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, CONTRACTOR shall immedi- ately: (i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by paragraph 6.16); and (iii) notify OWNER and ENGINEER (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). OWNER shall promptly consult with ENGINEER concerning the necessity for OWNER to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. E. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such condition or in any affected area until after OWNER has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered to CONTRACTOR written notice: (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or (ii) specify- ing any special conditions under which such Work may be re- sumed safely. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by CONTRACTOR, either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. F. If after receipt of such written notice CONTRACTOR does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable 00700-14 belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then OWNER may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condi- tion to be deleted from the Work. If OWNER and CON- TRACTOR cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times as a result of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. OWNER may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by OWNER's own forces or others in accordance with Article 7. G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, OWNER shall indemnify and hold harmless CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER'S Consultants and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, other consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (ii) was not created by CONTRACTOR or by anyone for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. Nothing in this paragraph 4.06.E shall obligate OWNER to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual's or entity's own negligence. H. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER'S Consultants, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, other consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by CONTRACTOR or by anyone for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. Nothing in this paragraph 4.06.F shall obligate CONTRACTOR to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual's or entity's own negligence. I. The provisions of paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 are not intended to apply to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish performance and payment Bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds shall remain in effect at least until one year after the date when final payment becomes due, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Contract Documents. B. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All Bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agent's authority to act. C. If the surety on any Bond furnished by CON- TRACTOR is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of paragraph 5.01.13, CONTRACTOR shall within 20 days thereafter substitute another Bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the requirements of paragraphs 5.0 1.13 and 5.02. 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers A. All Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by OWNER or CONTRACTOR shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue Bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 5.03 Certificates of Insurance A. CONTRACTORshall deliver to OWNER, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by OWNER or any other additional insured) which CONTRACTOR is required to purchase and 00700-15 maintain. OWNER shall deliver to CONTRACTOR, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supple- mentary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evi- dence of insurance requested by CONTRACTOR or any other additional insured) which OWNER is required to purchase and maintain. 5.04 CONTRACTOR's Liability Insurance A. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work and CONTRACTOR's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: 1. claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts; 2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of CONTRACTOR's employees; 3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than CONTRACTOR's employees; 4. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sus- tained: (i) by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by CONTRACTOR, or (ii) by any other person for any other reason; 5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and 6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. B. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph 5.04 to be purchased and maintained shall: 1. with respect to insurance required by paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 inclusive, include as additional insureds (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability) OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insureds, and include coverage for the respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds, and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby; 2. include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater; 3. include completed operations insurance; 4. include contractual liability insurance covering CONTRACTOR's indemnity obligations under para- graphs 6.07, 6.11, and 6.20; 5. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to OWNER and CONTRACTOR and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the CONTRACTOR pursuant to paragraph 5.03 will so provide); 6. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when CONTRACTOR may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in accordance with paragraph 13.07; and 7. with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims -made basis, remain in effect for at least two years after final payment (and CONTRACTOR shall furnish OWNER and each other additional insured identified in the Supple- mentary Conditions, to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued, evidence satisfactory to OWNER and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter). 5.05 OWNER's Liability Insurance A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by CONTRACTOR under paragraph 5.04, OWNER, at OWNER's option, may purchase and maintain at OWNER's expense OWNER's own liability insurance as will protect OWNER against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents. 00700- 16 5.06 Property Insurance A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, OWNER shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall: 1. include the interests of OWNER, CONTRAC- TOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identi- fied in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an additional insured; 2. be written on a Builder's Risk "all-risk" or open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false work, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage, and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions; 3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects); 4. cover materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by OWNER prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by ENGINEER; 5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by OWNER; 6. include testing and startup; and 7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER with 30 days written notice to each other additional insured to whom a certifi- cate of insurance has been issued. B. OWNER shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance or additional property insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured. C. All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to OWNER and CONTRACTOR and to each other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions in accordance with paragraph 5.07. D. OWNER shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance specified in this paragraph 5.06 to protect the interests of CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, or others in the Work to the extent of any deductible amounts that are identified in the Supplementary Conditions. The risk of loss within such identified deductible amount will be borne by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, or others suffering any such loss, and if any of them wishes property insurance coverage within the limits of such amounts, each may purchase and maintain it at the purchaser's own expense. E. If CONTRACTOR requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance policies provided under paragraph 5.06, OWNER shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be charged to CONTRACTOR by appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, OWNER shall in writing advise CONTRACTOR whether or not such other insurance has been procured by OWNER. 5.07 Waiver of Rights A. OWNER and CONTRACTOR intend that all policies purchased in accordance with paragraph 5.06 will protect OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insureds or additional insureds thereunder. OWNER and CONTRACTOR waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, 00700- 17 directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by OWNER as trustee or otherwise payable under any policy so issued. B. OWNER waives all rights against CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for: 1., loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to OWNER's property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other peril whether or not insured by OWNER; and 2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by OWNER during partial utilization pursuant to paragraph 14.05, after Substantial Completion pursuant to paragraph 14.04, or after final payment pursuant to paragraph 14.07. C. Any insurance policy maintained by OWNER cover- ing any loss, damage or consequential loss referred to in paragraph 5.07.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of recovery against CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, or ENGINEER's Consultants and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them. 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds A. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by paragraph 5.06 will be adjusted with OWNER and made payable to OWNER as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of paragraph 5.08.B. OWN- ER shall deposit in a separate account any money so received and shall distribute it in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. B. OWNER as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within 15 days after the occurrence of loss to OWNER's exercise of this power. If such objection be made, OWNER as fiduciary shall make settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no such agreement among the parties in interest is reached, OWNER as fiduciary shall adjust and settle the loss with the insurers and, if required in writing by any party in interest, OWNER as fiduciary shall give bond for the proper performance of such duties. 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance, Option to Replace A. If either OWNER or CONTRACTOR has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the Bonds or insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the other party in accordance with Article 5 on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract Documents, the objecting party shall so notify the other party in writing within 10 days after receipt of the certificates (or other evidence requested) required by paragraph 2.05.C. OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall each provide to the other such additional information in respect of insurance provided as the other may reasonably request. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the Bonds and insurance required of such party by the Contract Documents, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, the other party may elect to obtain equivalent Bonds or insurance to protect such other party's interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and a Change Order shall be issued to adjust the Contract Price accordingly. 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer A. If OWNER finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in paragraph 14.05, no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers providing the property insurance pursuant to paragraph 5.06 have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers 00700-18 providing the property insurance shall consent by endorse- ment on the policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy. ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. CONTRACTOR shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, but CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for the negligence of OWNER or ENGINEER in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. B. At all times during the progress of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall assign a competent resident superin- tendent thereto who shall not be replaced without written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be CONTRACTOR's representative at the Site and shall have authority to act on behalf of CONTRACTOR. All communications given to or received from the superintendent shall be binding on CONTRACTOR. 6.02 Labor; Working Hours A. CONTRACTOR shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out, and construct the Work as required by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours, and CONTRACTOR will not permit overtime work or the performance of Work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without OWNER's written consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld) given after prior written notice to ENGINEER. 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Unless otherwise specified in the General Re- quirements, CONTRACTOR shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work. B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified, shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All warranties and guarantees specifically called for by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of OWNER If required by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents. 6.04 Progress Schedule A. CONTRACTOR shall adhere to the progress schedule established in accordance with paragraph 2.07 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. 1. CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for acceptance (to the extent indicated in paragraph 2.07) proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times (or Milestones). Such adjustments will conform generally to the progress schedule then in effect and additionally will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable thereto. 2. Proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that will change the Contract Times (or Milestones) shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 12. Such adjustments may only be made by a Change Order or Written Amendment in accordance with Article 12. 6.05 Substitutes and "Or -Equals" A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed 00700- 19 by words reading that no like, equivalent, or "or -equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to ENGINEER for review under the circum- stances described below. 1. "Or -Equal " Items: If in ENGINEER's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by CONTRACTOR is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by ENGINEER as an "or -equal" item, in which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in ENGINEER's sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this paragraph 6.05.A.1, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if. a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment ENGINEER determines that: (i) it is at least equal in quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; (ii) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole, and; b. CONTRACTOR certifies that: (i) there is no increase in cost to the OWNER; and (ii) it will conform substantially, even with deviations, to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents. 2. Substitute Items a. If in ENGINEER's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by CONTRACTOR does not qualify as an "or -equal" item under paragraph 6.05.A.1, it will be considered a proposed substitute item. b. CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow ENGINEER to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment will not be accepted by ENGINEER from anyone other than CONTRACTOR. c. The procedure for review by ENGINEER will be as set forth in paragraph 6.05.A.2.d, as supplemented in the General Requirements and as ENGINEER may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. d. CONTRACTOR shall first make written application to ENGINEER for review of a proposed substitute item of material or equipment that CONTRACTOR seeks to furnish or use. The application shall certify that the proposed substitute item will perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, be similar in substance to that specified, and be suited to the same use as that specified. The application will state the extent, if any, to which the use of the pro- posed substitute item will prejudice CONTRACTOR's achievement of Substantial Completion on time, whether or not use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with OWNER for work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item and whether or not incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. All variations of the pro- posed substitute item from that specified will be identified in the application, and available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services will be indicated. The application will also contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indi- rectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change, all of which will be considered by ENGINEER in evaluating the proposed substitute item. ENGINEER may require CON- TRACTOR to furnish additional data about the pro- posed substitute item. B. Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction approved by ENGINEER. CON- TRACTOR shall submit sufficient information to allow ENGINEER, in ENGINEER's sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The procedure for review by ENGINEER will be similar to that provided in sub- paragraph 6.05.A.2. C. Engineer's Evaluation: ENGINEER will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or submittal made pursuant to paragraphs 6.05.A and 6.05.13. ENGINEER will be the sole judge of acceptability. No "or -equal" or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until ENGINEER's review is complete, which will be evidenced by either a Change Order for a substitute or an 00700-20 approved Shop Drawing for an "or equal." ENGINEER will advise CONTRACTOR in writing of any negative determination. D. Special Guarantee: OWNER may require CON- TRACTOR to furnish at CONTRACTOR's expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. E. ENGINEER's Cost Reimbursement: ENGINEERwill record time required by ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants in evaluating substitute proposed or submitted by CONTRACTOR pursuant to paragraphs 6.05.A.2 and 6.05.13 and in making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with OWNER for work on the Project) occasioned thereby. Whether or not ENGINEER approves a substitute item so proposed or submitted by CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall reimburse OWNER for the charges of ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants for evaluating each such proposed substitute. F. CONTRACTOR's Expense: CONTRACTOR shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or "or -equal" at CONTRACTOR's expense. 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. CONTRACTOR shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity (including those acceptable to OWNER as indicated in paragraph 6.06.13), whether initially or as a replacement, against whom OWNER may have reasonable objection. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable objection. B. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to be submitted to OWNER in advance for acceptance by OWNER by a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, and if CONTRACTOR has submitted a list thereof in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, OWNER's acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due investigation. CON- TRACTOR shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the Contract Price will be adjusted by the difference in the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate Change Order will be issued or Written Amendment signed. No acceptance by OWNER of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of any right of OWNER or ENGINEER to reject defective Work. C. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to OWNER and ENGINEER for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as CONTRACTOR is responsible for CONTRACTOR's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any contractual relationship between OWNER or ENGINEER and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other individual or entity, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of OWNER or ENGINEER to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcon- tractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. D. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with CONTRACTOR. E. CONTRACTOR shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work to communicate with ENGI- NEER through CONTRACTOR. F. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control CONTRACTOR in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. G. All Work performed for CONTRACTOR by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of OWNER and ENGINEER. Whenever any such agreement is with a Subcontractor or Supplier who is listed as an additional insured on the property insurance provided in paragraph 5.06, the agreement between the CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractor or Supplier will contain provisions whereby the Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights against OWNER, CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the 00700-21 perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work. If the insurers on any such policies require separate waiver forms to be signed by any Subcontractoror Supplier, CONTRACTORwill obtain the same. 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties A. CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if to the actual knowledge of OWNER or ENGINEER its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by OWNER in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and the officers, directors, partners, employees or agents, and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents. 6.08 Permits A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. OWNER shall assist CONTRACTOR, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. CONTRACTOR shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement. CONTRACTOR shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the Work, and OWNER shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto, such as plant investment fees. 6.09 Laws and Regulations A. CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither OWNER nor ENGINEER shall be responsible for monitoring CONTRACTOR's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. B. If CONTRACTOR performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work; however, it shall not be CONTRACTOR's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of CONTRACTOR's obligations under paragraph 3.03. C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work may be the subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 6.10 Taxes A. CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by CONTRAC- TOR in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas 00700-22 A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas 1. CONTRACTOR shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas resulting from the performance of the Work. 2. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultant, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against OWNER, ENGINEER, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work CONTRACTOR shall keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall con- form to applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work CONTRACTOR shall clean the Site and make it ready for utilization by OWNER. At the completion of the Work CONTRACTOR shall remove from the Site all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. D. Loading Structures: CONTRACTOR shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall CONTRACTOR subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. 6.12 Record Documents A. CONTRACTOR shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to show changes made during construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings will be available to ENGINEER for reference. Upon completion of the Work, these record documents, Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to ENGINEER for OWNER. 6.13 Safety and Protection A. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work; 2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and 3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. B. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. CONTRACTOR shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and other utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by CON- TRACTOR, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by CONTRACTOR (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of OWNER or ENGINEER or ENGINEER's Consultant, or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them). CONTRACTOR's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and ENGINEER has issued a notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR in accordance with paragraph 14.07.13 that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). 6.14 Safety Representative A. CONTRACTOR shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the 00700-23 maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs. 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 6.16 Emergencies A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, CONTRACTOR is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER prompt written notice if CONTRACTOR believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If ENGINEER determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by CONTRACTOR in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued. 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples A. CONTRACTOR shall submit Shop Drawings to ENGINEER for review and approval in accordance with the acceptable schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals. All submittals will be identified as ENGINEER may require and in the number of copies specified in the General Requirements. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimen- sions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show ENGINEER the services, materials, and equipment CONTRACTOR proposes to provide and to enable ENGINEER to review the information for the limited purposes required by paragraph 6.17.E. B. CONTRACTOR shall also submit Samples to ENGINEER for review and approval in accordance with the acceptable schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals. Each Sample will be identified clearly as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, and the use for which intended and otherwise as ENGINEER may require to enable ENGINEER to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by paragraph 6.17.E. The numbers of each Sample to be submitted will be as specified in the Specifications. C. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals acceptable to ENGINEER as required by paragraph 2.07, any related Work performed prior to ENGINEER's review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of CONTRACTOR. 00700-24 D. Submittal Procedures 1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, CONTRACTOR shall have determined and verified: a. all field measurements, quantities, dimen- sions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect thereto; b. all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; c. all information relative to means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures ofconstruction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; and d. CONTRACTOR shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Docu- ments. 2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written indication that CONTRACTOR has satisfied CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to CONTRACTOR's review and approval of that submittal. 3. At the time of each submittal, CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to ENGINEER for review and approval of each such variation. E. ENGINEER's Review 1. ENGINEERwill timely review and approve Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals acceptable to ENGINEER. ENGINEER's review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, con- form to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. ENGINEER's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of con- struction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 3. ENGINEER's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility for any variation from the require- ments of the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR has in writing called ENGINEER's attention to each such variation at the time of each submittal as required by paragraph 6.17.D.3 and ENGINEER has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by ENGINEER relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph 6.17.D.1. F. Resubmittal Procedures 1. CONTRACTOR shall make corrections required by ENGINEER and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. CONTRACTOR shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by ENGINEER on previous submittals. 6.18 Continuing the Work A. CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with OWNER. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by paragraph 15.04 or as OWNER and CONTRACTOR may otherwise agree in writing. 6.19 CONTRACTOR's General Warranty and Guarantee A. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to OWNER, ENGINEER, and ENGINEER's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. CONTRACTOR's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than CONTRACTOR, Sub- contractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible; or 2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. B. CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Docu- ments: 1. observations by ENGINEER; 2. recommendation by ENGINEER or payment by OWNER of any progress or final payment; 3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by ENGINEER or any payment related thereto by OWNER; 4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by OWNER; 5. any acceptance by OWNER or any failure to do so; 6. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of acceptabil- ity by ENGINEER; 7. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or 8. any correction of defective Work by OWNER. 6.20 INDEMNIFICATION A. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAWS AND REGULATIONS, CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER'S CONSULTANTS, AND THE OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, PARTNERS, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, AND OTHER CONSULTANTS AND SUBCONTRACTORS OF EACH AND ANY OF THEM FROM AND AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, COSTS, LOSSES, AND DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL FEES AND CHARGES OF ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, ATTORNEYS, AND OTHER PROFESSIONALS AND ALL COURT OR ARBITRATION OR OTHER DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK, PROVIDED THAT ANY SUCH CLAIM, COST, LOSS, OR DAMAGE: 00700-25 1. IS ATTRIBUTABLE TO BODILY INJURY, SICKNESS, DISEASE, OR DEATH, OR TO INJURY TO OR DESTRUCTION OF TANGIBLE PROPERTY (OTHER THAN THE WORK ITSELF), INCLUDING THE LOSS OF USE RESULTING THEREFROM; AND 2. IS CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART BY ANY NEGLIGENT ACT OR OMISSION OF CONTRACTOR, ANY SUBCONTRACTOR, ANY SUPPLIER, OR ANY INDIVIDUAL OR ENTITY DIRECTLY OR INDIRECT- LY EMPLOYED BY ANY OF THEM TO PERFORM ANY OF THE WORK OR ANYONE FOR WHOSE ACTS ANY OF THEM MAY BE LIABLE, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT CAUSED IN PART BY ANY NEGLIGENCE OR OMISSION OF AN INDIVIDUAL OR ENTITY INDEMNIFIED HEREUNDER OR WHETHER LIABILITY IS IMPOSED UPON SUCH INDEMNIFIED PARTY BY LAWS AND REGULATIONS REGARDLESS OF THE NEGLIGENCE OF ANY SUCH INDIVIDUAL OR ENTITY. B. IN ANY AND ALL CLAIMS AGAINST OWNER OR ENGINEER OR ANY OF THEIR RESPECTIVE CONSULTANTS, AGENTS, OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, PARTNERS, OR EMPLOYEES BY ANY EMPLOYEE (OR THE SURVIVOR OR PERSONAL REPRESENTATIVE OF SUCH EMPLOYEE) OF CONTRACTOR, ANY SUBCONTRACTOR, ANY SUPPLIER, OR ANY INDIVIDUAL OR ENTITY DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY EMPLOYED BY ANY OF THEM TO PERFORM ANY OF THE WORK, OR ANYONE FOR WHOSE ACTS ANY OF THEM MAY BE LIABLE, THE INDEMNIFICATION OBLIGATION UNDER PARAGRAPH 6.20.A SHALL NOT BE LIMITED IN ANY WAY BY ANY LIMITATION ON THE AMOUNT OR TYPE OF DAMAGES, COMPENSATION, OR BENEFITS PAYABLE BY OR FOR CONTRACTOR OR ANY SUCH SUBCONTRACTOR, SUPPLIER, OR OTHER INDIVIDUAL OR ENTITY UNDER WORKERS' COMPENSATION ACTS, DISABILITY BENEFIT ACTS, OR OTHER EMPLOYEE BENEFIT ACTS. C. The indemnification obligations of CONTRACTOR under paragraph 6.20.a shall not extend to the liability of ENGINEER and ENGINEER'S consultants or to the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them arising out of: 1. The preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve, maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, change orders, designs, or specifications; or 2. Giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK 7.01 Related Work at Site A. OWNER may perform other work related to the Project at the Site by OWNER's employees, or let other direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility owners. If such other work is not noted in the Contract Documents, then: 1. written notice thereof will be given to CON- TRACTOR prior to starting any such other work; and 2. if OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times that should be allowed as a result of such other work, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. B. CONTRACTOR shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract and each utility owner (and OWNER, if OWNER is performing the other work with OWNER's employees) proper and safe access to the Site and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work and shall properly coordinate the Work with theirs. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, CON- TRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with the written consent of ENGINEER and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of CONTRACTOR under this paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of CONTRACTOR in said direct contracts between OWNER and such utility owners and other contractors. C. If the proper execution or results of any part of CONTRACTOR's Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 7, CONTRACTOR shall inspect such other work and promptly report to ENGINEER in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of CONTRACTOR's Work. 00700-26 CONTRACTOR's failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with CONTRACTOR's Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work. 7.02 Coordination A. If OWNER intends to contract with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the Site, the following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions: 1. the individual or entity who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors will be identified; 2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and A. OWNER's duties in respect of providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to OWNER'S identifying and making available to CONTRACTOR copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site that have been utilized by ENGINEER in preparing the Contract Documents. 8.06 Insurance A. OWNER's responsibilities, if any, in respect to pur- chasing and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in Article 5. 8.07 Change Orders 3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities A. OWNER is obligated to execute Change Orders as will be provided. indicated in paragraph 10.03. B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, OWNER shall have sole authority and respon- sibility for such coordination. ARTICLE 8 - OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 8.01 Communications to Contractor A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Condi- tions, OWNER shall issue all communications to CONTRACTOR through ENGINEER 8.02 Replacement of ENGINEER A. In case of termination of the employment of ENGI- NEER, OWNER shall appoint an engineer to whom CONTRACTOR makes no reasonable objection, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former ENGINEER. 8.03 Furnish Data 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals A. OWNER's responsibility in respect to certain inspec- tions, tests, and approvals is set forth in paragraph 13.03.B. 8.09 Limitations on OWNER's Responsibilities A. The OWNER shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CON- TRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OWNER will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. OWNER's responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in paragraph 4.06. 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements A. OWNER shall promptly furnish the data required of OWNER under the Contract Documents. A. If and to the extent OWNER has agreed to furnish CONTRACTOR reasonable evidence that financial 8.04 Pay Promptly When Due arrangements have been made to satisfy OWNER'S obligations under the Contract Documents, OWNER's A. OWNER shall make payments to CONTRACTOR responsibility in respect thereof will be as set forth in the promptly when they are due as provided in paragraphs. Supplementary Conditions. 14.02.0 and 14.07.C. 8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests 00700-27 ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.01 OWNER'S Representative A. ENGINEER will be OWNER's representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of ENGINEER as OWNER's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and will not be changed without written consent of OWNER and ENGINEER. 9.02 Visits to Site A. ENGINEER will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as ENGINEER deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of CONTRACTOR's executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, ENGINEER, for the benefit of OWNER, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. ENGINEER will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. ENGINEER's efforts will be directed toward providing for OWNER a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, ENGINEER will keep OWNER informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard OWNER against defective Work. B. ENGINEER's visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on ENGINEER's authority and responsibility set forth in paragraph 9. 10, and particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of ENGINEER's visits or observations of CONTRACTOR's Work ENGINEER will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. 9.03 Project Representative A. If OWNER and ENGINEER agree, ENGINEER will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist ENGINEER in providing more extensive observation of the Work. The responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in paragraph 9.10 and in the Supplementary Conditions. If OWNER designates another representative or agent to represent OWNER at the Site who is not ENGINEER's Consultant, agent or employee, the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supple- mentary Conditions. 9.04 Clarifications and Interpretations A. ENGINEER will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the require- ments of the Contract Documents as ENGINEER may deter- mine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If OWNER and CON- TRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, that should be allowed as a result of a written clarification or interpretation, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 9.05 Authorized Variations in Work A. ENGINEER may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on OWNER and also on CONTRACTOR, who shall perform the Work involved promptly. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of a Field Order, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 9.06 Rejecting Defective Work A. ENGINEER will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which ENGINEER believes to be defective, or that ENGINEER believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. ENGINEER will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in paragraph 13.04, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. 9.07 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments A. In connection with ENGINEER's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see paragraph 6.17. 00700-28 B. In connection with ENGINEER's authority as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12. C. In connection with ENGINEER's authority as to Applications for Payment, see Article 14. 9.08 Determinations for Unit Price Work A. ENGINEER will determine the actual .quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER will review with CON- TRACTOR the ENGINEER's preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). ENGINEER's written decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by ENGINEER to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR, subject to the provisions of paragraph 10.05. 9.09 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. ENGINEER will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the Work, the quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work, the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance of the Work, and Claims seeking changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times will be referred initially to ENGINEER in writing, in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 10.05, with a request for a formal decision. B. When functioning as interpreter and judge under this paragraph 9.09, ENGINEER will not show partiality to OWNER or CONTRACTOR and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by ENGINEER pursuant to this paragraph 9.09 with respect to any such Claim, dispute, or other matter (except any which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided in paragraph 14.07) will be a condition precedent to any exercise by OWNER or CONTRACTOR of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such Claim, dispute, or other matter. 9.10 Limitations on ENGINEER's Authority and Respon- sibilities A. Neither ENGINEER's authority or responsibility under this Article 9 or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by ENGINEER in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any authority or responsibility by ENGINEER shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by ENGINEER to CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. B. ENGINEER will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. ENGINEER will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. ENGINEER will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of CONTRACTOR or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work. D. ENGINEER's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all mainte- nance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by paragraph 14.07.A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with, the Contract Documents. E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph 9.10 shall also apply to ENGINEER's Consultants, Resident Project Representative, and assistants. ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work A. Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, OWNER may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, CONTRACTOR shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided). B. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, 00700-29 i that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in paragraph 3.04, except in the case of an emer- gency as provided in paragraph 6.16 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 13.04.B. 10.03 Execution of Change Orders A. OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall execute appropriate Change Orders recommended by ENGINEER (or Written Amendments) covering: 1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered by OWNER pursuant to paragraph 10.01.A, (ii) required because of acceptance of defective Work under paragraph 13.08.A or OWNER'S correction of defective Work under paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties; 2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; and 3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by ENGINEER pursuant to paragraph 10.05; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in paragraph 6.18.A. 10.04 Notification to Surety A. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be CONTRACTOR's responsibility. The amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change. 10.05 Claims and Disputes A. Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of each Claim, dispute, or other matter shall be delivered by the claimant to ENGINEER and the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto. Notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, dispute, or other matter with supporting data shall be delivered to the ENGINEER and the other party to the Contract within 60 days after the start of such event (unless ENGINEER allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim, dispute, or other matter). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 12.0I.B. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Time shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 12.02.B. Each Claim shall be accom- panied by claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The opposing party shall submit any response to ENGINEER and the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal (unless ENGINEER allows additional time). B. ENGINEER's Decision: ENGINEER will render a formal decision in writing within 30 days after receipt of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any. ENGINEER's written decision on such Claim, dispute, or other matter will be final and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR unless: 1. an appeal from ENGINEER's decision is taken within the time limits and in accordance with the dispute resolution procedures set forth in Article 16; or 2. if no such dispute resolution procedures have been set forth in Article 16, a written notice of intention to appeal from ENGINEER's written decision is delivered by OWNER or CONTRACTOR to the other and to ENGINEER within 30 days after the date of such decision, and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction within 60 days after the date of such decision or within 60 days after Substantial Completion, whichever is later (unless otherwise agreed in writing by OWNER and CONTRACTOR), to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such Claim, dispute, or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations. C. If ENGINEER does not render a formal decision in writing within the time stated in paragraph 10.053, a decision denying the Claim in its entirety shall be deemed to have been issued 31 days after receipt of the last submittal of 00700-30 the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any. D. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph 10.05. ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; CASH ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 11.01 Cost of the Work A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs necessarily incurred and paid by CON- TRACTOR in the proper performance of the Work. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, the costs to be reimbursed to CONTRACTOR will be only those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the Claim. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by OWNER, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall include only the following items, and shall not include any of the costs itemized in paragraph 11.01.13. 1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of CONTRACTOR in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by OWNER and CONTRACTOR. Such employees shall include without limitation superintendents, foremen, and other personnel employed full time at the Site. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions, unem- ployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers' compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by OWNER. 2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers' field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to CONTRACTOR unless OWNER deposits funds with CONTRACTOR with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to OWNER. All trade discounts, 00700-31 rebates and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to OWNER, and CONTRACTOR shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. 3. Payments made by CONTRACTOR to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to OWNER and CONTRACTOR and shall deliver such bids to OWNER, who will then determine, with the advice of ENGINEER, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as CONTRACTOR's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this paragraph 11.01. 4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work. 5. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of CONTRACTOR's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. b. Cost, including transportation and mainte- nance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facili- ties at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of CONTRACTOR. c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented from CONTRACTOR or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by OWNER with the advice of ENGINEER, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, ma- chinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which CON- 00700-31 ON- TRACTOR is liable, imposed by Laws and Regulations. e. Deposits lost for causes other than negli- gence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by CONTRACTOR in connection with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established in accordance with paragraph 5.06.1)), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of OWNER. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining CONTRACTOR's fee. g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site. h. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the Site, expressage, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. i. When the Cost of the Work is used to determine the value of a Change Order or of a Claim, the cost of premiums for additional Bonds and insurance required because of the changes in the Work or caused by the event giving rise to the Claim. j. When all the Work is performed on the basis of cost-plus, the costs of premiums for all Bonds and insurance CONTRACTOR is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain. B. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of CONTRACTOR's officers, executives, principals (of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general manag- ers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expedit- ers, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by CONTRACTOR, whether at the Site or in CONTRACTOR's principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in paragraph 11.01.A.1 or specifically covered by paragraph 11.0I.A.4, all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by the CONTRACTOR's fee. 2. Expenses of CONTRACTOR's principal and branch offices other than CONTRACTOR's office at the Site. 3. Any part of CONTRACTOR's capital expenses, including interest on CONTRACTOR's capital employed for the Work and charges against CONTRACTOR for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them maybe liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property. 5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in paragraphs I LOLA and 11.O1.B. C. CONTRACTOR's Fee: When all the Work is performed on the basis of cost-plus, CONTRACTOR's fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, CONTRACTOR's fee shall be determined as set forth in paragraph 12.01.C. D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to paragraphs 11.0 LA and 11.0 LB, CONTRACTOR will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to ENGINEER an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data. 11.02 Cash Allowances A. It is understood that CONTRACTOR has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums as may be acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR agrees that: 00700-32 1. the allowances include the cost to CONTRACTOR (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and 2. CONTRACTOR's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowapces, and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. B. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by ENGINEER to reflect actual amounts due CONTRACTOR on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.03 Unit Price Work A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agree- ment. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR will be made by ENGINEER subject to the provisions of paragraph 9.08. B. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by CONTRACTOR to be adequate to cover CONTRACTOR's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. C. OWNER or CONTRACTOR may make a Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with paragraph 10.05 if - 1. f 1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and 2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect any other item of Work; and 3. if CONTRACTOR believes that CONTRACTOR is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or OWNER believes that OWNER is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 12.01 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the ENGINEER and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 10.05. B. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: 1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by applica- tion of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of paragraph 11.03 ); or 2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with paragraph 12.0l.C.2); or 3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agree- ment to a lump sum is not reached under paragraph 12.01.13.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in paragraph 11.01) plus a CONTRACTOR's fee for overhead and profit (deter- mined as provided in paragraph 12.01.C). C. CONTRACTOR's Fee: The CONTRACTOR's fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: 00700-33 1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. for costs incurred under paragraphs 11.0I.A.I and 11.0I.A.2, the CONTRACTOR's fee shall be 15 percent; b. for costs incurred under paragraph 11.0I.A.3, the CONTRACTOR's fee shall be five percent; r c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of paragraph 12.0I.C.2.a is that the Subcontractor who actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred by such Subcontractor under paragraphs 11.0l.A.1 and 11.01.A.2 and that any higher tier Subcontractor and CONTRACTOR will each be paid a fee of five percent of the amount paid to the next lower tier Subcontractor; d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under paragraphs 11.0l.A.4, 11.0l.A.5, and 11.01.13; e. the amount of credit to be allowed by CONTRACTOR to OWNER for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in CONTRACTOR's fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease; and f. when both additions and credits are in- volved in any one change, the adjustment in CONTRACTOR's fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with para- graphs 12.0I.C.2.a through 12.0I.C.2.e, inclusive. 12.02 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the claim to the ENGINEER and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 10.05. B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times (or Milestones) covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times (or Milestones) will be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Article 12. 12.03 Delays Beyond CONTRACTOR's Control A. Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of CONTRACTOR, the Contract Times (or Milestones) will be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a Claim is made therefor as provided in paragraph 12.02.A. Delays beyond the control of CONTRACTOR shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by OWNER, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, or acts of God. 12.04 Delays Within CONTRACTOR's Control A. The Contract Times (or Milestones) will not be extended due to delays within the control of CONTRACTOR. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of CONTRACTOR. 12.05 Delays Beyond OWNER's and CONTRACTOR's Control A. Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from complet- ing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both OWNER and CONTRACTOR, an extension of the Contract Times (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. 12.06 Delay Damages A. In no event shall OWNER or ENGINEER be liable to CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any other person or organization, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from: 1. delays caused by or within the control of CON- TRACTOR; or 2. delays beyond the control of both OWNER and CONTRACTOR including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, or acts or neglect by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7. B. Nothing in this paragraph 12.06 bars a change in Contract Price pursuant to this Article 12 to compensate CONTRACTOR due to delay, interference, or disruption directly attributable to actions or inactions of OWNER or anyone for whom OWNER is responsible. ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 00700-34 13.01 Notice of Defects A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of which OWNER or ENGINEER has actual knowledge will be given to CONTRACTOR All defective Work may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 13. 13.02 Access to Work A. OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, other representatives and personnel of OWNER, independent testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspecting, and testing. CONTRACTOR shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of CONTRACTOR's Site safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable. 13.03 Tests and Inspections A. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. B. OWNER shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents except: 1. for inspections, tests, or approvals covered by paragraphs 13.03.0 and 13.03.13 below; 2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections conducted pursuant to paragraph 13.04.13 shall be paid as provided in said paragraph 13.04.13; and 3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Con- tract Documents. C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish ENGINEER the required certificates of inspection or approval. D. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests, or approvals required for OWNER's and ENGINEER's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to CONTRACTOR's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be performed by organizations acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER. E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by CONTRACTOR without written concurrence of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by ENGINEER, be uncovered for observation. F. Uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 13.03.E shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense unless CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER timely notice of CONTRACTOR's intention to cover the same and ENGINEER has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.04 Uncovering Work A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by ENGINEER, be uncovered for ENGINEER's observation and replaced at CONTRACTOR's expense. B. If ENGINEER considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by ENGINEER or inspected or tested by others, CONTRACTOR, at ENGINEER's request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as ENGINEER may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material, and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, CONTRACTOR shall pay all Claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, OWNER may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 13.05 OWNER May Stop the Work A. If the Work is defective, or CONTRACTOR fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or 00700-35 equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, OWNER may order CONTRACTOR to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been elimi- nated; however, this right of OWNER to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of OWNER to exercise this right for the benefit of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them. 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work A. CONTRACTOR shall correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by ENGINEER, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. CONTRACTOR shall pay all Claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.07 Correction Period A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made available for CONTRACTOR's use by OWNER or permitted by Laws and Regulations as contemplated in paragraph 6.1 LA is found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to OWNER and in accordance with OWNER's written instructions: (i) repair such defective land or areas, or (ii) correct such defective Work or, if the defective Work has been rejected by OWNER, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, and (iii) satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom. If CONTRACTOR does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, OWNER may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced, and all Claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by CONTRACTOR. B. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. C. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this paragraph 13.07, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. D. CONTRACTOR's obligations under this paragraph 13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty. The provisions of this paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, OWNER (and, prior to ENGINEER's recommendation of final payment, ENGINEER) prefers to accept it, OWNER may do so. CONTRACTOR shall pay all Claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to OWNER's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by ENGINEER as to reasonableness) and the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by CONTRACTOR pursuant to this sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to ENGINEER's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, OWNER may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. If the acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate amount will be paid by CONTRACTOR to OWNER. 13.09 OWNER May Correct Defective Work A. If CONTRACTOR fails within a reasonable time after written notice from ENGINEER to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by ENGINEER in accordance with paragraph 13.06.A, or if CONTRACTOR fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if CONTRACTOR fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, 00700-36 OWNER may, after seven days written notice to 14.02 Progress Payments CONTRACTOR, correct and remedy any such deficiency. B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph, OWNER shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, OWNER may exclude CONTRACTOR from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend CONTRACTOR's services related thereto, take possession of CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the Site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which OWNER has paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere. CONTRACTOR shall allow OWNER, OWNER's representatives, agents and employees, OWNER's other contractors, and ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants access to the Site to enable OWNER to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. C. All Claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred or sustained by OWNER in exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph 13.09 will be charged against CONTRACTOR, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of the adjustment, OWNER may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of CONTRACTOR's defective Work. D. CONTRACTOR shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by OWNER of OWNER's rights and remedies under this paragraph 13.09. ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 14.01 Schedule of Values A. The schedule of values established as provided in paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to ENGINEER. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 00700-37 A. Applications for Payments 1. At least 20 days before the date established for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by CONTRACTOR covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that OWNER has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect OWNER's interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to OWNER. 2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of CONTRACTOR stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work have been applied on account to discharge CONTRACTOR's legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment. 3. The amount of retainage with respect to pro- gress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. B. Review of Applications 1. ENGINEER will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to OWNER or return the Application to CONTRACTOR indicating in writing ENGINEER's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, CONTRACTOR may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 2. ENGINEER's recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by ENGINEER to OWNER, based on ENGINEER's observations on the Site of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design profession- al and on ENGINEER's review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of ENGINEER's knowledge, information and belief- 00700-37 elief: 1 a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated; b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, to a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under paragraph 9.08, and to any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and c. the conditions precedent to CONTRACTOR's being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is ENGINEER's responsibility to observe the Work. 3. By recommending any such payment ENGI- NEER will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: (i) inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents; or (ii) that there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle CONTRACTOR to be paid addition- ally by OWNER or entitle OWNER to withhold payment to CONTRACTOR. 4. Neither ENGINEER's review of CONTRACTOR's Work for the purposes of recom- mending payments nor ENGINEER's recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will impose responsibility on ENGINEER to supervise, direct, or control the Work or for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for CON- TRACTOR's failure to comply with Laws and Regu- lations applicable to CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. Additionally, said review or recommendation will not impose responsibility on ENGINEER to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes CONTRACTOR has used the moneys paid on account of the Contract Price, or to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to OWNER free and clear of any Liens. 5. ENGINEER may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in ENGINEER's opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to OWNER referred to in paragraph 14.02.B.2. ENGI- NEER may also refuse to recommend any such payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the 00700-38 results of subsequent inspections or tests, revise or revoke any such payment recommendation previously made, to such extent as may be necessary in ENGINEER's opinion to protect OWNER from loss because: a. the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged, requiring correction or replace- ment; b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Written Amendment or Change Orders; c. OWNERhas been required to correct defect- ive Work or complete Work in accordance with paragraph 13.09; or d. ENGINEER has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in para- graph 15.02.A. C. Payment Becomes Due 1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to OWNER with ENGINEER's recom- mendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of paragraph 14.02.D) become due, and when due will be paid by OWNER to CONTRACTOR. D. Reduction in Payment 1. OWNER may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by ENGINEER because: a. claims have been made against OWNER on account of CONTRACTOR's performance or fur- nishing of the Work; b. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where CONTRACTOR has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to OWNER to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens; c. there are other items entitling OWNER to a set-off against the amount recommended; or d. OWNER has actual knowledge ofthe occur- rence of any of the events enumerated in paragraphs 14.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.c or paragraph 15.02.A. 2. If OWNER refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by ENGINEER, OWNER must give CONTRACTOR immediate written notice (with a copy to ENGINEER) stating the reasons for such action and promptly pay CONTRACTOR any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. OWNER shall promptly pay CONTRACTOR the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by OWNER and CONTRACTOR, when CONTRAC- TOR corrects to OWNER's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 3. If it is subsequently determined that OWNER's refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by paragraph 14.02.C.1. 14.03 CONTRACTOR's Warranty of Title A. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to OWNER no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens. 14.04 Substantial Completion A. When CONTRACTOR considers the entire Work ready for its intended use CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by CONTRACTOR as incomplete) and request that ENGINEER issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Promptly thereafter, OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If ENGINEER does not consider the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will notify CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons therefor. If ENGINEER considers the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will prepare and deliver to OWNER a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. OWNER shall have seven days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which to make written objection to ENGINEER as to any provisions of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such objections, ENGINEER concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, ENGINEER will within 14 days after submission of the tentative certificate to OWNER notify CONTRACTOR in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, after consideration of OWNER's objections, ENGINEER considers the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will within said 14 days execute and deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate as ENGINEER believes justified after consideration of any objections from OWNER. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion ENGINEER will deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending final payment between OWNER and CONTRACTOR with respect to security, operation, safety, and protection of the Work, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties and guarantees. Unless OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree otherwise in writing and so inform ENGINEER in writing prior to ENGINEER's issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, ENGINEER's aforesaid recommendation will be binding on OWNER and CONTRACTOR until final payment. B. OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion, but OWNER shall allow CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete or convect items on the tentative list. 14.05 Partial Utilization A. Use by OWNER at OWNER's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which OWNER, ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by OWNER for its intended purpose without significant interference with CONTRACTOR's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work subject to the following conditions. 00700-39 1. OWNER at any time may request CON- TRACTOR in writing to permit OWNER to use any such part of the Work which OWNER believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If CONTRACTOR agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, CONTRACTOR will certify to OWNER and ENGINEER that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request ENGINEER to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. CONTRACTOR at any time may notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that CONTRACTOR considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request ENGINEER to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If ENGINEER does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, ENGINEER will notify OWNER and CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons therefor. If ENGINEER considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of paragraph 14.04 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 2. No occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of paragraph 5.10 regarding property insurance. 14.06 Final Inspection A. Upon written notice from CONTRACTOR that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, ENGINEER will promptly make a final inspection with OWNER and CONTRACTOR and will notify CON- TRACTOR in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. CONTRACTOR shall immediately take such measures as are necessaryto complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.07 Final Payment A. Application for Payment 1. After CONTRACTOR has, in the opinion of ENGINEER, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all main- tenance and operating instructions, schedules, guaran- tees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance certificates of inspection, marked -up record documents (as provided in paragraph 6.12), and other documents, CONTRACTORmay make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. 2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by subparagraph 5.04.B.7; (ii) consent of the surety, if any, to final payment; and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to OWNER) of all Lien rights arising out of or Liens filed in connection with the Work. 3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as approved by OWNER, CONTRACTOR may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of CONTRACTOR that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which OWNER or OWNER's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, CONTRACTOR may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to OWNER to indemnify OWNER against any Lien. B. Review of Application and Acceptance 1. If, on the basis of ENGINEER's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and ENGINEER's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, ENGINEER is satisfied that the Work has been completed and CONTRACTOR's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, ENGINEER will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing ENGINEER's recommendation of payment and present the Application for Payment to OWNER for payment. At the same time ENGINEER will also give written notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, ENGINEER will return the Application for Payment to CONTRACTOR, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment. C. Payment Becomes Due 1. Thirty days after the presentation to OWNER of the Application for Payment and accompanying docu- mentation, the amount recommended by ENGINEER will become due and, when due, will be paid by OWNER to CONTRACTOR. 14.08 Final Completion Delayed A. If, through no fault of CONTRACTOR, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if ENGINEER so confirms, OWNER shall, upon receipt of CONTRACTOR's final Application for Payment and recommendation of ENGINEER, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by OWNER for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by CON- TRACTOR to ENGINEER with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims. 00700-40 14.09 Waiver of Claims A. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: 1. a waiver of all Claims by OWNER against CONTRACTOR, except Claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to paragraph 14.06, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from CONTRACTOR's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and 2. a waiver of all Claims by CONTRACTOR against OWNER other than those previously made in writing which are still unsettled. ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.01 OWNER May Suspend Work A. At any time and without cause, OWNER may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by notice in writing to CON- TRACTOR and ENGINEER which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. CONTRACTOR shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if CONTRACTOR makes a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 15.02 OWNER May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will justify termination for cause: 1. CONTRACTOR's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule established under paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to paragraph 6.04); 2. CONTRACTOR's disregard of Laws orRegula- tions of any public body having jurisdiction; 3. CONTRACTOR's disregard of the authority of ENGINEER; or 4. CONTRACTOR's violation in any substantial way of any provisions of the Contract Documents. B. If one or more of the events identified in paragraph 15.02.A occur, OWNER may, after giving CONTRACTOR (and the surety, if any) seven days written notice, terminate the services of CONTRACTOR, exclude CONTRACTOR from the Site, and take possession of the Work and of all CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances, construction equipment, and machinery at the Site, and use the same to the full extent they could be used by CONTRACTOR (without liability to CONTRACTOR for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which OWNER has paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as OWNER may deem expedient. In such case, CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by OWNER arising out of or relating to completing the Work, such excess will be paid to CONTRACTOR. If such claims, costs, losses, and damages exceed such unpaid balance, CONTRACTOR shall pay the difference to OWNER. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by OWNER will be reviewed by ENGINEER as to their reasonableness and, when so approved by ENGINEER, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph OWNER shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. C. Where CONTRACTOR's services have been so terminated by OWNER, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of OWNER against CONTRACTOR then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due CONTRACTOR by OWNER will not release CONTRACTOR from liability. 15.03 OWNER May Terminate For Convenience A. Upon seven days written notice to CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER, OWNER may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of OWNER, elect to terminate the Contract. In such case, CONTRACTOR shall be paid (without duplication of any items): 00700-41 1. for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; 2. for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; 3. for all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others; and 4. for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. B. CONTRACTOR shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.04 CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate A. If, through no act or fault of CONTRACTOR, the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by OWNER or under an order of court or other public authority, or ENGINEER fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or OWNER fails for 30 days to pay CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined to be due, then CONTRACTOR may, upon seven days written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER, and provided OWNER or ENGINEER do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Contract and recover from OWNER payment on the same terms as provided in paragraph 15.03. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if ENGINEER has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or OWNER has failed for 30 days to pay CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined to be due, CONTRACTOR may, seven days after written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due CONTRACTOR, including interest thereon. The provisions of this paragraph 15.04 are not intended to preclude CONTRACTOR from making a Claim under paragraph 10.05 for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to CONTRACTOR's stopping the Work as permitted by this paragraph. ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION 16.01 Methods and Procedures A. Dispute resolution methods and procedures, if any, shall be as set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. If no method and procedure has been set forth, and subject to the provisions of paragraphs 9.09 and 10.05, OWNER and CON- TRACTOR may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute. ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS 17.01 Giving Notice A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.02 Computation of Times A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. 17.03 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract Documents, and the provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. 17.04 Survival of Obligations A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Documents, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of the Agreement. 00700-42 17.05 Controlling Law A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located. 00700-43 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS The terms in the Supplementary Conditions will have the same meaning as in the General Conditions of the Construction Contract (EJCDC No. 1910-8, 1996) SC -1 The following modifications shall be made to 1.01 A; Delete 1.01 A. 19. And insert the following: 19. ENGINEER shall mean Freese and Nichols, Inc. Architects and Engineers, 4055 International Plaza, Suite 200, Fort Worth, Texas 76109, or its designated representative. Add the following to 1.01 A. 20.: The ENGINEER'S Consultants are: Rone Engineers, Inc. Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Brittain & Crawford, LLC. Add the following to 1.01 A.: 51. MODIFICATION - (a) Written Amendment; (b) Change Order; (c) Field Order; (d) Work Change Directive SC -2 The following shall be added and/or deleted to paragraph 1.02 Terminology. B.1. The sentence shall be deleted and the following added: B.I. A "calendar day" shall be a day of twenty-four hours measured from midnight to the next midnight, and is any day of the year, no days being excepted. Add the following: B.2. "A "working day" shall be a day, not including Saturdays, Sundays or any of the following holidays: New Year, President's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day, in which weather or other conditions not under the control of the CONTRACTOR will permit construction of the principal units of the work for a period of not less than seven hours between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. SC -3 Delete Paragraph 2.05 A. of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in its place: Supplementary Conditions 00800-1 KEL00483 2.05 A. CONTR.4CTOR's Review of Construction Documents: Before undertaking each part of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures therein and all applicable field measurements. CONTRACTOR shall promptly report in writing to ENGINEER any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy which CONTRACTOR may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from ENGINEER before proceeding with any work affected thereby. In the event of a conflict in the Drawings, Specifications, or other portions of the Contract Documents which were not reported prior to the Bidding of the Contract, the CONTRACTOR shall be deemed to have included the most expensive in his Bid." SC -4 Amend Paragraph 2.07 A. by adding the following: "Such acceptance of the contract completion schedule in no way affects the Contract Times." SC -5 Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 2.07 of the General Conditions which is to read as follows: 2.08 The Contract Times may be changed only as set forth in Article 12 of the General Conditions, and a progress schedule shall not constitute a change in the Contract Times. SC -6 Add to paragraph 3.01 3.011). The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. The Contract Documents may be altered only by a Modification. SC -7 Amend paragraph 3.03. A.1. of the General Conditions by striking out the following words: "; provided, however, that CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or ENGINEER for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably should have known thereof." and add the following: "In the event of a conflict in the Drawings, Specifications, or other portions of the Contract Documents which were not reported prior to the Bidding of the Contract, the CONTRACTOR shall be deemed to have included the most expensive in his Bid." SC -8 As set forth in paragraph 4.02, ENGINEER OR ENGINEER's Consultants in the preparation of Drawings and Specifications have relied upon: 4.02.A.1 The following reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the site of the Work: Supplementary Conditions 00800-2 KEL00483 4.02.A1.1 Report dated January 12, 2001 prepared by Rone Engineers, Inc entitled: Geotechnical Engineering Study Elevated Storage Tank Knox Road at Ravenwood Drive consisting of seventeen (17) pages. The CONTRACTOR may rely in the technical information stated therein; however, paragraphs, statements, test results, boring logs, diagrams, etc. should not be taken out of context, nor utilized without a knowledge and awareness of their intent within the overall concept of such report. CONTRACTOR recognizes that the technical data listed therein reflect only the conditions for the day the data was collected and reflects only conditions existing at the exact location of Samples. Add the following paragraph. 4.02.A.3 Copies of these reports and Drawings that are not included with Bidding Documents may be examined at the offices of Freese and Nichols located at 4055 International Plaza, Suite 200 Fort Worth Texas during regular business hours. These reports and Drawings are not part of the Contract Documents, but the technical data contained therein upon which the CONTRACTOR is entitled to rely as provided in GC -4.02B and as identified and established above are incorporated therein by reference. CONTRACTOR is not entitled to rely upon other information and data utilized by ENGINEER AND ENGINEER's Consultants in preparation of Drawings and Specifications. SC -9 Amend paragraph 4.03 A. by deleting "promptly" and inserting "within three (3) days." SC -10 Amend the first sentence of paragraph 4.04 B. Las follows: "...accuracy in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall, within three (3) days after becoming aware thereof..." SC -11 Amend the second sentence of paragraph 4.04 B.2.as follows: "An equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Price or Contrad Times, or both, to the extent..." SC -12 Amend paragraph 4.06 G. by changing reference to paragraph 4.06 E. to paragraph 4.06 G. SC -13 Amend paragraph 4.06 H. by changing reference to paragraph 4.06 F. to paragraph 4.06 H. SC -14 [Not Used] Supplementary Conditions 00800-3 KEL00483 SC -15 [Not Used] SC -16 Delete the following from Paragraph 5.03 A.: "OWNER shall deliver to CONTRACTOR, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by CONTRACTOR or any other additional insured) which OWNER is required to purchase and maintain." SC -17 The limits of liability for the insurance required by Paragraph 5.04 of the General Conditions shall provide the following coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by Laws and Regulations. Supplementary Conditions 00800-4 KEL00483 Workers' Compensation, etc., under Paragraphs 5.04.A.I and A.2. of the General Conditions: 1) State: Statutory 2) Applicable Federal (e.g., Longshore) Statutory 3) Employers' Liability: Bodily Injury by Accident $500,000 Bodily Injury by Disease - Each Employee $500,000 Bodily Injury by Disease - Policy Limit $500,000 4) Maritime Coverage Endorsement Insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the OWNER and ENGINEER, its officers, employees, agents and subconsultants. Paragraphs 5.04.A.3, 5.04.A.4 and 5.04.A.5 Contractor's Liability Insurance under Paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.5 of the General Conditions shall also include completed operations and product liability coverage, and eliminate the exclusion with respect to property under the care, custody and control of CONTRACTOR: (1) General Aggregate $1,000,000 / Occurrence (Except Products - Completed Operations) $2,000,000 / Aggregate (2) Products - Completed Operations Aggregate $1,000,000 / Occurrence $2,000,000 / Aggregate (3) Personal and Advertising Injury $1,000,000 (One Person/Organization) (4) Each Occurrence $1,000,000 (Bodily Injury and Property Damage) (5) Limit Per Person - Medical Expense $5,000 (6) Personal Injury Liability coverage will include claims $1,000,000 arising out of Employment Practices Liability, limited to coverage provided under standard contract (7) Property Damage Liability insurance will provide $1,000,000 explosion, collapse and underground coverage where applicable (8) Watercraft Liability Policy: Coverage shall apply to $1,000,000 Supplementary Conditions 00800-5 KEL00483 all self propelled vessels General Aggregate (9) Excess Liability, Umbrella Form to include coverage $1,000,000 of Watercraft Liability. General Aggregate - $1,000,000 Each Occurrence $1,000,000 Paragraph 5.04.A.6 Contractor's Automobile Liability Insurance under Paragraph 5.04.A.6 of the General Conditions which shall also include: (1) Bodily Injury: General Aggregate Each Person $1,000,000 Each Accident $1,000,000 Property Damage - Each Accident: $1,000,000 or (2) Combined Single Limit (Bodily Injury and Property Damage) $1,000,000 Add at the end of Paragraph 5.04 B.1 - The following are to be listed as additional insured on all insurance policies: City of Keller Town of Westlake Freese and Nichols, Inc Rone Engineers, Inc. Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Brittain & Crawford, LLC. Add paragraph 5.04.A.8 - In addition to the insurance listed above, CONTRACTOR shall provide the following insurance: Add to paragraph 5.04.B.4 - The Contractual Liability coverage shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts: (1) General Aggregate $1,000,000 (2) Each Occurrence (Bodily Injury and Property Damage) $1,000,000 SC -18 Delete Paragraph 5.06 A. of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in its place: Supplementary Conditions 00800-6 KEL00483 "5.06 A. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the work at the site on a replacement cost basis with a limit not less than 100% of the building's replacement value thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in these Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This limit should include "soft cost," or expenses relating to the construction project(s) over and above those costs which would have been incurred if there had been no loss. These soft costs should include, but not be limited to, interest, additional taxes, advertising/promotional expenses, additional commissions, loss of rents, architects or engineering fees. This insurance shall: 1. include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants and any other persons or entities identified in paragraph 5.04 B.1 (SC -17) of these Supplementary Conditions, each of whom shall have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an additional insured; 2. be written on a Builder's Risk "all risk" or open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss and damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false work and Work in transit and shall insure against at least the following perils; fire lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage, and such other causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions. 3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including butnot limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects); 4. cover materials and equipment in transit to the Project site, and materials that the CONTRACTOR has taken possession of whether stored at the Project site, or 5. allow for Partial Utilization of the Work by OWNER; 6. include testing and startup; and 7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER with thirty days written notice to each other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued. The policies of insurance required to be purchased and maintained by CONTRACTOR in accordance with this paragraph 5.06 shall comply with the requirements of paragraph 5.06C." SC -19 Delete Paragraph 5.06B. of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in its place: "5.06 B. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance or additional property insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditionsor Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants and any other persons or entities identified in paragraph 5.04 B.1 (SC -17) of these Supplementary Conditions, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured." Supplementary Conditions 00800-7 KEL00483 SC -20 Delete Paragraph 5.06 D. of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in its place: "D. OWNER shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance to protect the interest of the CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, or others in the Work. The stated limits of insurance required are minimum only. CONTRACTOR shall determine the limits that are adequate. These limits may be basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, CONTRACTOR is fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting from or connected with operations under this contract whether or not said losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of certificates or other evidence of insurance by the OWNER, ENGINEER, and/or others listed as additional insured in Paragraph 5.04 B.1 (SC -17) that in any respect do not comply with the Contract requirements does not release the CONTRACTOR from compliance herewith." SC -21 Delete Paragraph 5.06 E. of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC -22 Delete paragraph 6.05 A. in its entirety and add the following: "6.05 Substitutes and `Or Equals' A. Where equipment and products are specified by name, no substitutes or "or equal" will be considered or approved unless specified otherwise in the Specifications." SC -23 Amend paragraph 6.06 A. by adding the following to the last sentence: "unless called for in the Contract Documents." SC -24 Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 6.06 G of the General Conditions which is to read as follows: "6.06 H. OWNER or ENGINEER may furnish to any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or organization, to the extent practicable, information about amounts paid to CONTRACTOR in accordance with CONTRACTOR's Application for Payment on account of the particular Subcontractor's, Supplier's, other person's or other organization's Work." SC -25 Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 6.09 C. of the General Conditions which is to read as follows: Supplementary Conditions 00800-8 KEL00483 "6.09 D. All Bidders are required to complete and submit with their Bid the Vendor Compliance to State Law form, which follows the proposal." SC -26 Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 6.09 D. (SC -25) of the General Conditions. Definitions included in this paragraph pertain only to this paragraph which is included verbatim as a statutory requirement of the State of Texas. The paragraph is to read as follows: "6.09 E. Workers Compensation Statement for Building or Construction Projects for Government entities in Texas A. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate")- A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC- 83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the CONTRACTOR'S/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("Subcontractor" in 406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the CONTRACTOR has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the CONTRACTOR and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent CONTRACTORS, Subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutoryrequirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the CONTRACTOR providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. C. The CONTRACTOR must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the CONTRACTOR's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the CONTRACTOR must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: Supplementary Conditions 00800-9 KEL00483 (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (2) no later than seven days after receipt by the CONTRACTOR, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. F. The CONTRACTOR shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. G. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the CONTRACTOR knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. H. The CONTRACTOR shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. I. The CONTRACTOR shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (1) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (2) provide to the CONTRACTOR, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (3) provide the CONTRACTOR, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the CONTRACTOR: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (b) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; Supplementary Conditions 00800-10 KEL00483 (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (7) contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the CONTRACTOR is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the CONTRACTOR who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the CONTRACTOR to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the CONTRACTOR which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the CONTRACTOR does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity." SC -27 Add the following language at the end of the first sentence of paragraph 6.10 A. of the General Conditions: The OWNER qualifies as an exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with all statutes and rulings of the State Comptroller. SC -28 Amend paragraph 6.16 by revising the last sentence to read: "If ENGINEER determines that the incident giving rise to the emergency action was not the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by CONTRACTOR in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued." SC -29 The paragraph 6.17 D.2. of the General Conditions is deleted in its entirety and the following article is added: "2. All Shop Drawings shall be in strict compliance with the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR may seek a deviation by requesting a Modification. All approved Written Amendments, Change Orders, Field Orders and/or Work Change Directives shall be incorporated into the Shop Drawings. The CONTRACTOR may submit a Shop Drawing or sample that varies from strict compliance with the Contract Documents providing the submittal is accompanied by a Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. If the proposed Modification is approved by the ENGINEER, the submittal will be considered to be in strict compliance with the Contract Documents and it will be Supplementary Conditions 00800-11 KEL00483 reviewed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If the proposed Modification is notapproved, the submittal will be returned to the CONTRACTOR with appropriate comments. All Shop Drawings shall bear a duly executed statement by the CONTRACTOR as set forth hereinunder. (THIS SHOP DRAWING HAS BEEN REVIEWED ANDI DETERMINED TO BE IN ❑ COMPLIANCE ❑ COMPLIANCE SUBJECT TO APPROVAL OF ATTACHED CHANGE ORDER/FIELD ORDER AND WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AS MODIFIED ADDENDA, CHANGE ORDER AND FIELD ORDER. CONTRACTOR BY DATE SC -30 Paragraph 6.17 D. 3. is deleted in its entirety. Add the following: "6.17 D. 3 The CONTRACTOR may submit a Shop Drawing or Sample that varies from strict compliance with the Contract Documents providing the submittal is accompanied by a proposed Change Order or Field Order. If the proposed Change Order or Field Order is approved by the ENGINEER, the submittal will be considered in strict compliance with the Contract Documents. Submittals under this provision shall bear a duly executed statement by the CONTRACTOR as set forth in paragraph 6.17 D.2. as modified in these Supplementary Conditions. If the proposed Change Order or Field Order is approved by the ENGINEER, the submittal will be reviewed in accordancewith the Contract Documents. If the Change Order or Field Order is not approved, the submittal will be returned to the CONTRACTOR with appropriate comments." SC -31 Delete the following from 6.17E.3. "unless CONTRACTOR has in writing called ENGINEER's tttention to each such variation at the time of each submittal as required by paragraph 6.17D.3. and ENGINEER has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval" SC -32 Delete the last sentence in paragraph 6.17 F. The following shall be added: Supplementary Conditions 00800-12 KEL00483 "All resubmittals shall be in strict compliance with the Drawings, Specifications and Contract Documents, and only the changes permitted from the prior submittal shall be modifications or additional information addressing specifically the ENGINEERS's previous comments." SC -33 Delete the following from paragraph 6.18—"or as OWNER and CONTRACTOR may otherwise agree in writing." Add the following language at the end of the second sentence of paragraph 6.18 of the General Conditions: "CONTRACTOR assumes and bears responsibility for all costs and time delays associated with any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents." SC -34 Delete paragraph 9.03 in its entirety. Add the following: 9.03 Project Representative A. The ENGINEER will make one (1) visit each month to the site (as distinguished from the continuous services of a Resident Project Representative) to observe the progress and the quality of work and to attempt to determine in general if the work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner will have an inspector that will act as Resident Project Representative. B. Project Representative on the Site. The duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of the Resident Project Representative, and designated assistants, are as follows: 1. Resident Project Representative is ENGINEER's agent at the site, will act as directed by and under the supervision of ENGINEER, and will confer with ENGINEER regarding Resident Project Representative's actions. Resident Project Representative's dealings in matters pertaining to the on-site Work shall in general be with ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR, keeping OWNER advised as necessary. Resident Project Representative's dealings with Subcontractors shall only be through or with full knowledge and approval of CONTRACTOR. Resident Project Representative shall generally communicate with OWNER with the knowledge of and under the direction of ENGINEER. B. Duties and Responsibilities of Resident Project Representative: 1. Schedules: Review the progress schedule, schedule of Shop Drawing submittals and schedules of values prepared by CONTRACTOR and consult with ENGINEER concerning acceptability. 2. Conferences and Meetings: Attend meetings with CONTRACTOR, such as preconstruction conferences, progress meetings, job conferences and other project - related meetings, and prepare and circulate copies of minutes thereof. Supplementary Conditions 00800-13 KEL00483 3. Liaison: a. Serve as ENGINEER's liaison with CONTRACTOR, working principally through CONTRACTOR's superintendent and assist in understanding the intent of Contract Documents; and assist ENGINEER in serving as OWNER's liaison with CONTRACTOR when CONTRACTOR's operations affect OWNER's on-site operations. b. Assist in obtaining from OWNER additional details or information, when required for proper execution of the Work. 4. Shop Drawings and Samples: a. Record date of receipt of Shop Drawings and Samples. b. Receive Samples which are furnished at the Site by CONTRACTOR, and notify ENGINEER of availability of Samples for examination. C. Advise ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR of the commencement of any Work requiring a Shop Drawing or Sample if the submittal has not been approved by ENGINEER. 5. Review of Work, Rejection of Defective Work, Inspections and Tests: a. Conduct on-site observations of the Work in progress to determine if the Work is in general proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. b. Report to ENGINEER whenever Resident Project Representative believes that any Work will not produce a completed Project that conforms generally to the Contract Documents or will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged, or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, test or approval required to be made; and advise ENGINEER of Work the Resident Project Representative believes should be corrected or rejected or should be uncovered for observation, or requires special testing, inspection or approval. C. Verify that tests, equipment and systems start-up and operating and maintenance training are conducted in the presence of appropriate personnel, and the CONTRACTOR maintains adequate records thereof; and observe record and report to ENGINEER appropriate details relative to the test procedures and start-ups. d. Accompany visiting inspectors representing public or other agencies having jurisdiction over the Project, record the results of these inspections and report to ENGINEER. 6. Interpretation of Contract Documents: Report to ENGINEER when clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents are needed and transmit to CONTRACTOR clarifications and interpretations as issued by ENGINEER. Supplementary Conditions 00800-14 KEL00483 Request for Revisions: Consider and evaluate CONTRACTOR's suggestions for revisions to Drawings or Specifications and report with Resident Project Representative's recommendations to ENGINEER. Transmit to CONTRACTOR in writing decisions as issued by ENGINEER. 8. Records: a. Maintain at the job site orderly files for correspondence, reports of job conferences, Shop Drawings and Samples, reproductions of original Contract Documents, including all Work Change Directives, Addenda, Change Orders, Field Orders, Written Amendments, additional Drawings issued subsequent to the execution of the Contract, ENGINEER's clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents, progress reports, submittals and correspondence received from and delivered to CONTRACTOR and other Project related documents. 9. Reports: a. Furnish to ENGINEER periodic reports as required of progress of the work and of CONTRACTOR's compliance with the progress schedule and schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals. b. Consult with ENGINEER in advance of scheduled major tests, inspections or start of important phases of the Work. C. Draft proposed Written Amendments, Change Orders and Work Change Directives, obtaining backup material from CONTRACTOR and recommend to ENGINEER Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders. d. Report immediately to ENGINEER and OWNER the occurrence of any accident. 10. Payment Requests: Review Applications for Payment with CONTRACTOR for compliance with the established procedure for their submission and forward with recommendations to OWNER, noting particularly the relationship of the payment requested to the schedule of values, Work completed and materials and equipment at the Site but not incorporated in the Work. 11. Certificates, Maintenance and Operation Manuals: During the course of the Work, verify that certificates, maintenance and operation manuals and other data required to be assembled and furnished by CONTRACTOR are applicable to the items actually installed and in accordance with the Contract Documents, and have this material delivered to ENGINEER for review and forwarding to OWNER prior to final payment for the Work. 12. Completion: a. Before ENGINEER issues a Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit to CONTRACTOR a list of observed items requiring completion or correction. Supplementary Conditions 00800-15 KEL00483 b. Observe whether CONTRACTOR has performed inspections required by laws or regulations, ordinances, codes or order applicable to the Work, including but not limited to those to be performed by public agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. Conduct a final inspection in the company of ENGINEER, OWNER and CONTRACTOR and prepare a final list of items to be completed or corrected. d. Observe whether all items on final list have been completed or corrected and make recommendations to ENGINEER concerning acceptance. C. Limitations of Authority of Resident Project Representative: Shall not authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or substitution of materials or equipment (including "or -equal" items), unless authorized by ENGINEER. 2. Shall not exceed limitations of ENGINEER's authority as set forth in Agreement or the Contract Documents. 3. Shall not undertake any of the responsibilities of CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor, Suppliers, or CONTRACTOR's superintendent. 4. Shall not advise on, issue directions relative to or assume control over any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction unless such advice or directions are specifically required by the Contract Documents. 5. Shall not advise on, issue directions regarding or assume control over safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work or any activities or operations of OWNER or CONTRACTOR. 6. Shall not accept shop drawing or sample submittals from anyone other than the CONTRACTOR. 7. Shall not participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections conducted by others, except as specifically authorized by ENGINEER. SC -35 Amend paragraph 9.05 by inserting the following sentence prior to the last sentence of the paragraph: "The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER in writing prior to beginning any Work addressed in a Field Order if the CONTRACTOR does not agree that the Work involved represents no additional cost and/or time change in the Contract Documents." SC -36 Amend paragraph 10.05 as follows: Change the reference in the first sentence from "30 days" to "7 days." Supplementary Conditions 00800-16 KEL00483 SC -37 Amend paragraph 11.01 A. of the General Conditions by striking out the following words in the third sentence: "those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall include only the following items, and shall not include any of the costs itemized in paragraph 11.01 B." and adding the following: "those paid for the Work included in the Contract Price, shall include only the following items, and shall not include any of the costs itemized in paragraph 11.01 B. CONTRACTOR shall provide certified payroll records listing personnel classifications and salaries for all individuals involved in additional Work. Salaries for those not included in the certified payroll will be considered as being compensated under paragraph 11.01 B." SC -38 Amend paragraph 11.01 A.1 of the General Conditions by striking out the following words in the second sentence: "without limitation superintendents, foreman" and adding the following: "one foreman (unless agreed upon prior to beginning Work)". Amend paragraph 11.01 A.1 of the General Conditions by striking out the following words in the last sentence: "be included in the above" and adding the following: "not exceed 1.5 times regular pay and shall be included in the above" SC -39 Amend paragraph 11.01 B.1 by adding the following to the list of excluded personnel in the first sentence: superintendents SC -40 Amend paragraph 11.01 D. by modifying the sentence to read as follows; "... and submit in a form and at intervals acceptable to ENGINEER..." SC -41 Delete Paragraph 11.03 C. of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in its place: "11.03 C. The unit price of an item of Unit Price Work shall be subject to reevaluation and adjustment in accordance with paragraph 10.05 under the following conditions: 11.03 C.1. if the total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to twenty percent (20%) or more of the Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work performed by the CONTRACTOR differs by more than twenty percent (20%) from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and Supplementary Conditions 00800-17 KEL00483 11.03 C.2. if there is not corresponding adjustments with respect to any other item of Work; and 11.03 C.3. if CONTRACTOR believes that CONTRACTOR has incurred additional expense as a result thereof; or if OWNER believes that the quantity variation entitles OWNER to an adjustment in the Unit Price, either the OWNER or CONTRACTOR may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with Article 11.01 if the parties are unable to agree as to the effect of any such variation in the quantity of the Unit Price Work performed." SC -42 Add new paragraph following 11.03: "11.04 The CONTRACTOR agrees to make no claims for damage for delay in the performance of the Contract occasioned by any act or omission to act of the OWNER, ENGINEER, or any of the ENGINEERS's or OWNER'S agents, and agrees that any such claim shall be fully compensated by an extension of time, as set forth in a Change Order, to complete performance of the work as provided herein." SC -43 Amend paragraph 12.03 A. by deleting "abnormal weather condition". Add following: "No time extensions will be allowed for weather conditions for Projects using calendar days for the Contract Time." SC -44 Add the following to paragraph 13.07 A.: "When early acceptance of a Substantially Completed portion of the Work is accomplished in the manner indicated, the correction period for that portion of the Work shall commence at the time of substantial completion of that Work." Supplementary Conditions 00800-18 KEL00483 SC -45 Paragraph 14.02A.3. is deleted in its entirety. Add the following: "14.02 A. 3. On projects where the total contract price at the time of execution of the Agreement is less than $400,000.00, the amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be ten percent (10%) of the total amount of completed Work and properly stored materials on hand. On projects where the total contract price at the time of execution of the Agreement is greater than or equal to $400,000.00, the amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be five percent (5%) of the total amount of completed Work and properly stored materials on hand. In addition to the amount retained above, the OWNER may retain additional amounts as set forth elsewhere in the Contract Documents." SC -46 Amend the first sentence of paragraph 14.02 C.1. to read as follows: "Thirty days after presentation of the Application for Payment to OWNER..." SC -47 Add new paragraphs immediately after paragraph 14.02 D. l .d. of the General Conditions which are to read as follows: "e. OWNER has been notified of failure to make payments to Subcontractors or Suppliers or for labor, or f. failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required by GC -6.12, or g. failure to submit monthly progress schedule updates or revised schedules as requested by the OWNER or ENGINEER, or h. failure to provide Project photographs required by Specifications." Add new paragraph immediately after 14.02 D. 3.: "4. OWNER may permanently withhold payment from Contract Price for a. liquidated damages incurred by CONTRACTOR, or b. compensation for ENGINEER for overtime charges of Resident Project Representative, third review of submittals, review of substitutions, reinspection fees, inspections or designs related to correction of defective Work, or other Services identified as requiring payment by the CONTRACTOR. Compensation will be based on the following rates:" Position Hourly Rate Principal in Charge $175 Project Manager $125 Supplementary Conditions 00800-19 KEL00483 Project Engineer $80 Construction Manager $80 Expenses will be billed at the actual cost multiplied by 1.15. c. Costs for tests performed by the OWNER to verify that work previously tested and found to be defective has been corrected. Verification testing is to be provided at the CONTRACTOR's expense to verify products or constructed works are in compliance after corrections have been made. SC -48 Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 14.04B.: C. The following items must be fully functional and suitable for Partial Utilization: Joint Use Elevated Tank, with flow control valves, piping, electrical, instrumentation, Keller's SCADA and all related appurtenances. SC -49 Add the following after paragraph 14.07 C. "In the event the CONTRACTOR fails to attain Substantial Completion of the entire Project (all bid items) within the Contract Time, the OWNER may withhold money permanently from the CONTRACTOR's total compensation a sum of $1,000 per day as liquidated damages and for added expenses including engineering services, etc. The OWNER will be the sole judge as to whether the work has been completed within the allotted time. Accordingly, it is agreed and understood that said amount is to be assessed by the OWNER, not as a penalty, but as a predetermined and agreed upon liquidated damage. Additionally, assessment of liquidated damages by the OWNER shall not constitute a waiver of the OWNER'S right to sue and collect additional damages which OWNER may sustain by the failure of the CONTRACTOR to perform in accordance with the terms of its Contract. SC -50 Add the following paragraph after paragraph 17.06: "17.07 All references and conditions for a `calendar day contract' in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions shall apply for a `Fixed Date Contract'. A `Fixed Date Contract' is one in which the calendar dates for reaching substantial completion and/or final completion are specified in lieu of identifying the actual calendar days involved. END OF SECTION Supplementary Conditions 00800-20 KEL00483 DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SPECIFICATION TERMINOLOGY A. "Engineer" or "Architect" means Freese and Nichols, Inc. Architects and Engineers, 4055 International Plaza, Fort Worth, Texas 76109-4895, or its designated representative. B. "Furnish" means to supply, deliver and unload materials and equipment at the project site ready to install. C. "Install" means the operations at the project site including unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, training and similar operations required to prepare the materials and equipment for use, verify conformance with Contract Documents and prepare for acceptance and operation by the Owner. D. "Provide" means to furnish and install materials and equipment. E. "Perform" means to complete the operations necessary to comply with the Contract Documents. F. "Indicated" means graphic representations, notes, or schedules on drawings, or other requirements in Contract Documents. Words such as "shown", "noted", "scheduled", are used to help locate the reference. No limitation on the location is intended unless specifically noted. G. "Specified" means written representations in the bid documents or the technical specifications. H. "Regulation" means laws, statutes, ordinances, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as, rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of work, whether they are lawfully imposed by authorities having jurisdiction or not. I. "Installer" means an entity engaged by Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or sub -subcontractor to install materials and/or equipment. Installers are to have successfully completed 'a minimum of five projects similar in size and scope to this project, have a minimum of five years of experience in the installation of similar materials and equipment, and comply with the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. J. "Manufacturer" means an entity engaged by Contractor, as a subcontractor, or sub -subcontractor to furnish materials and/or equipment. Manufacturers are to have a minimum of five years experience in the manufacture of materials and equipment similar in size, capacity and scope to the specified materials and equipment. K. "Project site" means the space available to perform the work, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing construction at the project site. Definitions and Terminology 01005-1 KEL00483 L. "Testing laboratory" means an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the project site or elsewhere, and to report and interpret the results of those inspections or tests. M. "Listed" means equipment is included in a list published by a nationally recognized laboratory which makes periodic inspection of production of such equipment and states that such equipment meets nationally recognized standards or has been tested and found safe for use in a specified manner. N. "Labeled" means equipment that embodies a valid label, symbol, or other identifying mark of a nationally recognized testing laboratory such as Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and production is periodically inspected in accordance with nationally recognized standards or tests to determine safe use in a specified manner. O. "Certified" used in context with materials and equipment means the material and equipment has been tested and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet specification requirements, or nationally recognized standards if requirements are not specified, and is safe for use in the specified manner. Production of the equipment must be periodically inspected by a nationally recognized testing laboratory and the equipment must bear a label, tag, or other record of certification. "Certified" used in context with labor performance or ability to install materials and equipment means that the abilities of the proposed installer have been tested by an representative of the specified testing agency authorized to. issue certificates of competency and has met the prescribed standards for certification. "Certified" used in context with test reports, payment requests or other statements of fact means that the statements made on the document are a true statement as attested to by the certifying entity. 1.02 SPECIFICATION SENTENCE STRUCTURE A. Specifications are written in modified brief style. Requirements apply to all work of the same kind, class, and type even though the word "all" is not stated. B. Simple imperative sentence structure is used which places a verb as the first word in the sentence. It is understood that the words "furnish", "install', "provide", or similar words include the meaning of the phrase "The Contractor shall..." before these words. C. It is understood that the words "directed", "designated", "requested", "authorized", "approved", "selected", or similar words include the meaning of the phrase "by the Engineer" after these words unless otherwise stated. Use of these words does not extend the Engineer's responsibility for construction supervision or responsibilities beyond those defined in the General Conditions. D. "At no additional cost to Owner", "With no extra compensation to Contractor", "At Contractor's own expense", or similar words mean that the Contractor will perform or provide specified operation of work without any increase in the Contract Amount. It is Definitions and Terminology 01005-2 KEL00483 understood that the cost for performing all work is included in the amount bid and will be performed at no additional cost to the Owner unless specifically stated otherwise. 1.03 DOCUMENT ORGANIZATION A. The contract requirements described in the General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 apply to each and all specification sections unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Organization of Contract Documents is not intended to control or to lessen the responsibility of the Contractor when dividing work among subcontractors, or to establish the extent of work to be performed by any trade, subcontractor or vendor. Specification or details do not need to be indicated or specified in each specification or drawing. Items shown in the contract documents are applicable regardless of location in the Contract Documents. C. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in the specifications are intended to aid in locating and recognizing various requirements of the specifications. Titles do not define, limit, or otherwise restrict specification text. D. Capitalizing words in the text does not mean that these words convey special or unique meanings or have precedence over other parts of the Contract Documents. Specification text governs over titling and it is understood that the specification is to be interpreted as a whole. E. Drawings and specifications do not indicate or describe all of the work required to complete the project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Engineer. Provide any work, materials or equipment required for a complete and functional system even if they are not detailed or specified. 1.04 INTERPRETATIONS OF DOCUMENTS A. Comply with the most stringent requirements where compliance with two (2) or more standards is specified, and they establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, unless Contract Documents indicate otherwise. 1. Quantity or quality level shown or indicated shall be minimum to be provided or performed in every instance. 2. Actual installation may comply exactly with minimum quality indicated, or it may exceed that minimum within reasonable limits. 3. In complying with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum values, as noted, or appropriate for context of requirements. 4. Refer instances of uncertainty to the Engineer for a decision before proceeding. B. Provide materials and equipment comparable in quality to similar materials and equipment incorporated in the project or as required to meet the minimum requirements of the application if the materials and equipment are shown in the drawings but are not included in the specifications. Definitions and Terminology 01005-3 K-EL00483 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Comply with applicable construction industry standards as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents regardless of lack of reference in the Contract Documents. Apply provisions of the Contract Documents where Contract Documents include more stringent requirements than the referenced standards. 1. Standards referenced directly in the Contract Documents take precedence over standards that are not referenced but recognized in the construction industry as applicable. 2. Comply with standards not referenced but recognized in the construction industry as applicable for performance of the work except as otherwise limited by the Contract Documents. The Engineer determines whether code or standard is applicable, or which of several are applicable. B. Consider a referenced standard to be the latest edition with supplements or amendments when a standard is referred to in an individual specification section but is not listed by title and date. C. Trade association names and title of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Acronyms or abbreviations used in the Contract Documents mean the recognized name of trade association, standards generating organization, authority having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable in the context of the Contract Documents. Refer to "Encyclopedia of Associations," published by Gale Research Company. D. Make copies of reference standards available as requested by Engineer or Owner. 1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS AND EQUAL PRODUCTS Provide materials and equipment manufactured by the entities specifically listed in each technical specification section. Submit a Contractor's Modification Request per Section 01300, SUBMITTALS for substitution of materials and equipment of manufacturers not specifically listed or for materials and equipment that does not strictly comply with the Contract Documents. 1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS AND EQUAL PRODUCTS Contractor may provide "equal" products manufactured by manufacturers other than those specifically listed in the technical specification section unlessit is specifically stated that only the materials and equipment of the specified manufacturers shall be provided. Provide a request for approval of proposed equals per Section 01300 SUBMITTALS for any materials or equipment not specifically listed. Submit a Contractor's Modification Request for substitution of materials and equipment of other manufacturers or for materials and equipment that does not strictly comply with the Contract Documents. A Field Order or Change Order will be issued if the contract modification is approved. END OF SECTION Definitions and Terminology 01005-4 KEL00483 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Construct work as described in the Contract Documents. 1. Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the project completely operable. 2. Provide the labor, equipment, tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete project. 3. Provide the civil, architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, instrumentation and all other work required for a complete and operable project. 4. Test and place the completed project in operation. 5. Provide the special tools, spare parts, lubricants, supplies, or other materials as indicated in Section 01740, SPARE PARTS AND SUPPLIES for the operation and maintenance of the Project. 6. Install Owner provided products and place in operation. 7. Drawings and specifications do not indicate or describe all of the work required to complete the project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Engineer. 1.02 JOB CONDITIONS A. The General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, and Division One specifications apply to each specification sections. B. Comply with all applicable state and local codes and regulations pertaining to the nature and character of the work being performed. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work is described in general, non-inclusive terms as: 1. Design, construction, testing and commissioning of a 2,500,000 gallon double - compartment, composite elevated water storage tank and all related work including foundations, painting, and interior and exterior appurtenances and lighting. 2. Furnishing and installation of City of Keller's 20 -inch diameter concrete cylinder yard piping and fittings, stainless steel interior piping, valves and related appurtenance. 3. Furnishing and installation of tank instrumentation and controls for the City of Keller. 4. Furnishing and installation of Town of Westlake's 20 -inch diameter concrete cylinder yard piping and fittings, stainless steel interior piping, valves and related appurtenances. 5. Furnishing and installation of tank instrumentation and controls for the Town of Westlake. 6. Site improvements including grading, drainage ditches, culverts, concrete segmental retaining wall, concrete driveway and sidewalk, fence, landscaping and irrigation system. Summary of Work 01010-1 KEL00483 1.04 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The following items of work are not included in this contract, but may impact construction scheduling, testing, and start up: 1. Construction of 20" water transmission line from Mt. Gilead to tank site. In the case of a disagreement between the above list and those specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor is to base his bid on the most expensive listing. The Contractor shall tie into City of Keller's 20" water transmission line on Knox Road if existing or shall plug line for future connection. B. Completion of the work described in this contract may impact the construction and testing of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the Owner. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the project or any specified milestones. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION OF UTILITIES A. Utility Companies or their contractors will provide new or enhanced utilities for this project. Coordinate with others performing work connected to this project. B. Power and Electrical Services 1. Owner will provide permanent power connections for the project site through the power utility. 2. Cost for providing permanent power will be paid for by the Owner. 3. Contractor is required to coordinate and cooperate with others performing this work. 4. Power company will provide the construction to the property line. 5. Provide conduit, conductors, pull boxes, manholes, and other appurtenances for the installation of power cable from the transformer at property line to the main power switch. 6. Test conductors in accordance with Section 01400, QUALITY CONTROL, and coordinate with the power company to energize the system when ready. 7. Pay for temporary power, including but not limited to construction cost, meter connection, fees and permits. 8. When permanent power is available at the site, the Contractor may use this power source in lieu of temporary power source he has been using. a. Notify Engineer and Owner of intent to use the permanent power source. b. Arrange with the Power Utility and pay the charges for connections and monthly charges for use of this power. 9. Pay for the power consumed until the project has been accepted as substantially complete. Summary of Work 01010-2 KEL00483 1.06 NOMINATED SUBCONTRACTOR A. Owner has or will select a contractor for furnishing, installing, and testing the following products: These subcontractors shall be designated as "Nominated Subcontractors". Agreements for services are described in the referenced appendices. In the case of a disagreement between the above list and those specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor is to base his bid on the most expensive listing. B. Execute an agreement with each Nominated Subcontractor upon receiving the Notice to Proceed (execution of the Contract Documents). C. Include the Subcontract cost in the proposed bid price. D. Assume responsibilities for Nominated Subcontractor's products and installation as for those products selected and installed by the Contractor. E. Coordinate work performed by the Nominated Subcontractor. F. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools, consumable supplies, and incidentals not specifically required by the Subcontract required to provide a complete and operable product. 1.07 OCCUPANCY A. As soon as any portion of the structure and equipment are ready for use, the Owner shall have the right to operate the portion upon written notice to the Contractor. B. Testing of equipment and appurtenances including specified test periods, training, and start-up does not constitute acceptance for operation. C. Owner may accept the facility for continued use after start-up and testing at the option of the Owner. If acceptance is delayed at the option of the Owner, shut down facilities per approved Operation and Maintenance procedures. D. The execution of bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety. E. Provide an endorsement from the Insurance Carrier permitting occupancy of the structures and use of equipment during the remaining period of construction. F. Conduct operations to insure the least inconvenience to the Owner and general public. 1.08 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PROJECT SITE Summary of Work 01010-3 KEL00483 A. Limit the use of project site for work and storage to the areas at the site approved by the Owner. B. Coordinate the use of the premises with the Engineer. C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the site. D. Store products to allow owner access for maintenance and operations. E. Obtain and pay for the use of any additional storage or work areas needed for construction. F. Any damage to existing facilities, including contamination, caused by the Contractor's personnel, visitors, materials, or equipment, shall be repaired or corrected at the Contractor's expense. G. No alcoholic beverages or illegal substances shall be permitted on the site at any time. H. No concealed or illegal weapons shall be permitted on the site at any time. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS Provide materials and products per the individual sections of the specifications. END OF SECTION Summary of Work 01010-4 KEL00483 01040 PROJECT ADMMSTRATION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Administer contract requirements to construct the project. Provide documentation per the requirements of this Section. Provide information as requested by the Engineer or Owner concerning this project. 1.02 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS. 1.03 COMMUNICATION DURING THE PROJECT A. The Owner's Representative is the first point of contact for all parties on matters concerning this project and coordinates all correspondence. B. The Engineer will coordinate correspondence concerning: 1. Submittals, including requests for payment 2. Clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents 3. Contract modifications 4. Observation of work and testing 5. Claims C. The Engineer will normally communicate only with the Contractor. Any required communication with suppliers or subcontractors will only be with the direct involvement of the Contractor. D. Written communications are to be directed to the Engineer at the address indicated in the Pre - construction Conference. Communications should include as a minimum: 1. Name of the Owner 2. Project name 3. Contract title 4. Project number 5. Date 6. A reference statement E. Submit communications on the forms referenced in this Section or in Section 01300, SUBMITTALS. 1.04 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Pre -construction Conference 1. Attend a pre -construction meeting. 2. The location of the conference will be determined by the Engineer. Project Administration uiv4v-� KEL00483 3. The time of the meeting will be determined by the Engineer but will be after the Notice of ' Award is issued and not later than fifteen (15) days after the Notice to Proceed is issued. 4. Meeting may be attended by the Owner, Engineer, representative of utility companies, the ' Contractor's project manager and superintendent, and representatives from major subcontractors and suppliers. 5. Contractor should provide and be prepared to discuss: ' a. Preliminary construction schedule per Section 01310, PROGRESS SCHEDULE. b. Preliminary Submittal Schedule. C. Schedule of values and anticipated schedule of payments per Section 01130, ' MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT. d. List of Suppliers and Subcontractors. e. Contractor's organizational chart as it relates to this project. ' f. Letter indicating the agents of authority for the Contractor and the limit of that authority with respect to the execution of legal documents. B. Periodical Progress Meetings 1. Attend meetings with the Engineer and Owner. a. Meet on a bi-weekly basis or as requested by the Engineer to discuss the project. b. Meet at the project site or other location as designated by the Engineer. C. Contractor's superintendent and other key personnel are to attend the meeting. Other individuals may be requested to attend to discuss specific matters. 2. Provide information as requested by the Engineer or Owner concerning this project. a. Prepare to discuss: 1) Status of overall project schedule. 2) Contractor's detailed schedule for the next month. 3) Anticipated delivery dates for equipment. 4) Coordination with the Owner. 5) Status of submittals. 6) Information or clarification of the Contract Documents. 7) Claims and proposed modifications to the contract. 8) Field observations, problems, or conflicts. 9) Maintenance of quality standards. b. Notify the Engineer of any specific items to be discussed a minimum of one (1) week prior to the meeting. 3. Review minutes of meetings and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies within ten (10) days of the date of the memorandum. a. Following that date, the minutes will stand as shown or as corrected. b. Corrections will be reflected in the minutes of the following meeting. C. Each item of business shall be numbered to indicate the meeting number and the item number. Items discussed will be documented and old business items will remain on minutes of subsequent meetings until the item is resolved. 1.05 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION A. Submit Request for Information (RFI) to the Engineer to obtain additional information or clarification of the Contract Documents. Project Administration 01040-2 KEL00483 1. Submit a separate RFI for each item. 2. Attach adequate information to permit a written response without further clarification. Engineer will return requests which do not have adequate information for additional information. 3. A response will be made when adequate information is provided. Response will be made on the RFI form or in attached information. B. If the RFI indicates that a contract modification is required, the Engineer will initiate a Proposed Contract Modification (PCM) per Section 1.07. 1.06 NOTIFICATION BY CONTRACTOR A. Notify the Engineer of: 1. Need for testing. 2. Intent to work outside regular working hours. 3. Request to shut down facilities or utilities. 4. Proposed utility connections. 5. Required observation by Engineer or inspection agencies prior to covering work. B. Notification must be provided in time for Owner and Engineer to respond appropriately to the notification. 1.07 REQUESTS FOR MODIFICATIONS A. Submit a request to the Engineer for any change in the Contract Documents or approval of any deviations from the Contract Documents. Use the "Contractor's Modification Request" (CMR) form shown in Section 01800, FORMS. a. Assign a number to the CMR when issued. b. Include with the CMR: 1) A complete description of the proposed modification. 2) The reason the modification is requested. 3) A detailed breakdown of the cost of the change (necessary only if the modification requires a change in contract amount). The itemized breakdown is to include: 1.07.A.Lb.3.1 list of materials and equipment to be installed, 1.07.A.1.b.3.2 manhours for labor by classification, 1.07.A.1.b.3.3 equipment used in construction, 1.07.A.1.b.3.4 consumable supplies, fuels, and materials, 1.07.A.1.b.3.5 royalties and patent fees, 1.07.A.1.b.3.6 bonds and insurance, 1.07.A.1.b.3.7 overhead and profit, 1.07.A.1.b.3.8 field office costs, 1.07.A.1.b.3.9 home office cost, Project Administration 01040-3 KEL00483 1.07.A.1.b.3.10 and other items of cost. 4) A revised schedule indicating the effect on the critical path for the project and a statement of the number of days the project may be delayed by the modification. 2. A CMR is required for field changes. a. Request must be made a minimum of two (2) weeks in advance of performing the work affected. b. Request for field changes will be submitted to the Engineer. 3. A CMR is required for all substitutes or deviations from the Contract Documents. 4. Engineer will evaluate the request for a contract modification. B. Owner will initiate changes through the Engineer. 1. Engineer will prepare a description of the proposed modifications to the Contract Documents. 2. Engineer will use the "Proposed Contract Modification" form shown in Section 01800, FORMS. Engineer will assign a number to the PCM when issued. Return request with a proposal to incorporate the requested change. Include a breakdown of costs into materials and labor in sufficient detail to allow evaluation by the Engineer. C. If a contract modification is required, the Engineer will issue a Field Order per Article 10 of the General Conditions or a Change Order per Article 11 of the General Conditions. 1. Modifications to the contract can only be made by a Field Order or a Change Order. 2. Changes in the project will be documented by Field Order or by a Change Order. 3. Field Orders may be issued by the Engineer for contract modifications that do not change the contract amount or contract time. 4. Any modifications that require a change in contract amount or contract time can only be approved by Change Order. a. CMR's and proposals issued by the Contractor in response to a PCM will be evaluated by the Engineer. b. If a change order is recommended, the Engineer will prepare the change order. C. The Change Order will be sent to the Contractor for execution with a copy to the Owner recommending approval. d. Change Orders can only be approved by the Owner. 1) Work performed on the proposed contract modifications prior to the approval of the Change Order will be performed at the Contractor's risk. 2) No payment will be made for work on Change Orders until approved by the Owner. D. The Contractor may be informed that the proposed modification is not approved and construction is to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.08 EMERGENCY WORK Project Administration 01040-4 KEL00483 A. Notify the Owner and Engineer immediately of any additional work that must be performed to prevent injury or damage to existing structures, facilities, utilities, or work in place. B. When possible, obtain authorization from the Owner before proceeding. 1.09 CLAIMS A. Do not perform any work which is considered to be outside the scope of the Contract Documents without an approved Change Order. B. File notice of claims with the Engineer within 10 days of the event giving rise to the claim. C. Provide full documentation within 30 days of the notice. D. Items not reported within the stipulated time will not be considered. 1. Failure to notify the Owner of potential claims does not allow the Owner to take alternative action to prevent the Contractor from incurring the cost for the item or to perform the work in a different manner. 2. Failure to notify the Owner does not allow operations to be monitored for the actual cost of performing the work. E. When full documentation has been received by the Engineer, the claim will be reviewed in the context of the Contract Documents. 1. If the claim is valid, a Change Order will be prepared and payment of the Change Order will be recommended. 2. If the claim is not valid, then the claim will be denied with an explanation of the reasons. 3. Should the Contractor disagree with the decision of the Engineer, the Contractor may refuse to do the work. a. If the Owner insists that the work be done, proceed with the work on a time and materials basis. b. The validity of the claim will be resolved at a later time in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Maintain at the site one (1) complete record copy of - 1 . f: 1. Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Contract modifications 5. Approved shop drawings and record data 6. One (1) set of construction photographs 7. Test records 8. Clarifications and other information provided in RFI responses. Project Administration OINU-5 KEL00483 B. Store documents and samples in the Contractor's field office. 1. Documents are to remain separated from documents used for construction. These documents are not to be used for construction. 2. Provide files and racks for the storage of documents. 3. Provide a secure storage space for the storage of samples. 4. File documents in accordance with the file schedule shown in Section 01800, FORMS. 5. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible conditions, and in good order. 6. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by the Engineer and Owner. C. MARKING DRAWINGS 1. Label each document as "Project Record" in large printed letters. 2. Record information as construction is being performed. a. Do not conceal any work until the required information is recorded. b. Mark drawings to record actual construction, including the following: 1) Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances constructed and existing utilities encountered during construction. 2) Changes of dimension and detail. 3) Changes made by Field Order and Change Order. 4) Details not on the original Contract Drawings. C. Mark specifications and addenda to record materials and the equipment provided. 1) Record manufacturer name, trade name, catalog number, and each supplier (with address and phone number) of each product and item of equipment actually installed. 2) Record changes made by Field Order and Change Order. d. Mark additional work or information in erasable pencil. 1) Use red for new or revised indication. 2) Use purple for work deleted or not installed (lines to be removed). 3) Highlight in yellow the items constructed per the plans. e. Submit record documents to Engineer for review and acceptance 30 days prior to final completion of the project. 1) Provide one (1) set of marked up drawings. 2) Provide six (6) sets of specifications. f. Partial Payment Requests will not be recommended for payment if record documents are found to be incomplete or not in order. Final payment will not be recommended without record documents. END OF SECTION Project Administration 01040-6 KEL00483 01041 JOB MANAGEMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED B. Furnish equipment, manpower, products, and other items necessary to complete the project with an acceptable standard of quality and within the contract time. The project shall be constructed in accordance with current safety practices. C. Manage project site to allow access to site and control construction operations. D. Provide labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the job site, including the removal of temporary facilities when no longer needed. E. Temporary controls shall include the construction of temporary impounding works, channels, diversions, furnishing and operation of pumps, installing piping and fittings, and other construction for control of conditions at the site. Remove temporary controls at the end of the project. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Notify the Engineer as required by the provisions of 01040, PROJECT ADMINISTRATION. B. Employ competent workmen, skilled in the occupation for which they are employed. Provide only first quality workmanship. Engineer shall determine if the quality of work is acceptable. C. A defective product is any product that has been found not to be in compliance with the Contract Documents or is damaged prior to final completion. Defective products shall be removed from the site immediately. D. Defective products may remain at the site if arrangements have been made to allow repair of the product at the site. Clearly mark the product as "defective" until removed or allowable repairs have been completed. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS, and shall include: 1. Copies of Manufacturer's printed instructions to all parties involved in the installation of the product prior to beginning the work. Maintain one copy at the job site until completion of the project. 2. Two (2) copies of reports prepared concerning accidents, injury, or death on the Project site to the Engineer as Record Data. 3. Field notes, sketches, recordings, and computations made by the Contractor as Record Data. Job Management 01041-1 KEL00483 1.04 DUST CONTROL A. INTERIOR 1. Clean interior spaces prior to the start of finish painting and continue cleaning on an as needed basis until painting is finished. 2. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning operations will not fall on wet or newly painted surfaces. 3. When structures have been made weather -tight, keep buildings in a broom clean state at all times. Continue cleaning on a regular basis until the structure is ready for acceptance. 4. Control dust from waste materials. B. EXTERIOR 1. Provide positive methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations and provide positive means to prevent air -borne dust from disappearing into the atmosphere. 2. Wet materials and rubbish to prevent blown dust. 3. Provide and maintain positive methods of dust control and apply dust control materials to minimize raising and spreading of dust and dirt from cutting and patching operations. 1.05 STANDARDS Perform work to comply with local, State and Federal ordinances and regulations. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work of various trades having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service such equipment. B. Coordinate requests for substitutions to provide compatibility of space, operating elements, effect on the work of other trades, and on the work scheduled for early completion. C. Coordinate the use of project space and the sequence of installation of equipment, elevators, walks, mechanical, electrical, plumbing, or other work that is indicated diagrammatically on the Drawings. Follow routings shown for tubes, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other items as closely as practical, with due allowance for available physical space. Utilize space efficiently to maximize accessibility for Owner's installations for maintenance and repairs. D. Where installation of one part of the work is dependent on installation of other components, either before or after its own installation, schedule construction activities in sequence required to obtain best results. Job Management 01041-2 KEL00483 E. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation, including accepted Bid Alternates, Owner -supplied, Contractor -installed items, work by others, and installation of products purchased with allowances. F. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical, electrical, and other systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Coordinate mechanical and electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured - in -place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 5. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 6. Coordinate the connection of systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with the requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 7. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to the greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Engineer. 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components. 9. Install systems, materials, and equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. As much as practical, connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. 10. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. 11. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope 1.07 PERMITS A. Obtain fees and permits necessary to conduct any part of the work. B. Arrange for inspections and certification by agencies having jurisdiction over the work. C. Make arrangements with private utility companies and pay for fees associated with obtaining services, or for inspection fees. 1.08 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Prevent the contamination of soil, water or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. Provide adequate measures to prevent the creation of noxious air -borne pollutants. Prevent dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. The Job Management 01041-3 KEL00483 Contractor shall not dump or otherwise discharge noxious or harmful fluids into drains or sewers, nor allow noxious liquids to contaminate public waterways in any manner. B. Provide equipment and personnel and perform emergency measures necessary to contain any spillage. 1. Contain chemicals in protective areas and do not dump on soil. Dispose of such materials at off-site locations in acceptable manner. 2. If contamination of the soil does occur, excavate contaminated soil and dispose at an off-site location. 3. Provide documentation to the Owner which states the nature and strength of the contaminant, method of disposal, and the location of the disposal site. 4. Disposal of the contaminant is to comply with local, State and Federal regulations regarding the disposal of pollutants. 5. Fill resulting excavations with suitable backfill and compact to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. C. Groundwater or run-off water which has come into contact with noxious chemicals, sludge, or sludge -contaminated soil is considered contaminated. Contaminated water must not be allowed to enter streams or water courses, leave the site in a non -contained form, enter non -contaminated areas of the site. 1. Pump contaminated water to holding ponds constructed by the Contractor for this purpose, or discharge to areas on the interior of the site, as designated by the Engineer. 2. Construct temporary earthen dikes or take other precautions and measures as required to contain the contaminated water and pump to a designated storage area. 3. Any equipment used for handling contaminated water or soil within contaminated areas shall be washed three (3) times with uncontaminated water prior to using such equipment in an uncontaminated area. Wash water used to wash such equipment is considered "contaminated" and shall be pumped to the designated confinement area 1.09 EARTH CONTROL Remove excess soil, spoil materials and other earth not required for backfill at the time of generation. Control stock pile material to eliminate interference with construction and Owner's operations. 1.10 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Protect the safety and welfare of workmen on the project, the Owner and the general public around the construction site. The Contractor is solely responsible for safety at the project site. Provide and maintain barricades, guard rails, covered walkways, and other protective devices to warn and protect from hazards at the construction site. B. Trenches shall comply with the provisions of Section 02219, EXCAVATION. Job Management 01041-4 KEL00483 C. Perform construction within buildings or structures occupied by the Owner per established fire codes and ordinances. 1.11 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PROJECT SITE A. Limit the use of site for work and storage to those areas designated on the Drawings (approved by the Owner). Coordinate the use of the premises with the Engineer. B. Any damage to existing facilities, including contamination, caused by the Contractor's personnel, visitors, materials, or equipment, shall be repaired or corrected at the Contractor's expense. C. No alcoholic beverages or illegal substances shall be permitted on the site at any time, nor will persons under the influence of same be permitted to remain on the premises. Persons on site under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances will be permanently removed from the site in addition to possible criminal and civil penalties. D. Park equipment and employees' vehicles in designated areas only. E. Enter privately -owned land outside of the Owner's property, rights-of-way, or easements only with written permission of the Owner. F. The use of loud radios, obnoxious vulgar or abusive language, or sexual harassment in any form will not be tolerated and will be cause for immediate removal of the offender from the premises permanently, in addition to possible criminal or civil penalties. G. Workers attire shall be professional and commensurate to the trade. Sleeveless shirts, shorts, exceedingly torn, ripped or soiled clothing shall not be permitted. H. Firearms are not permitted on the site under any conditions, including persons with concealed handgun permits. 1.12 ACCESS TO THE SITE A. Maintain access to the facilities at all times. Roads, pedestrian walks, or access to the various buildings, structures, stairways, or entrances shall not be obstructed. Provide safe temporary walks or other structures to allow access for normal operations during construction. B. Provide adequate and safe access for inspections. Leave ladders, bridges, and scaffolding in place until inspection has been completed. Construct access as required for inspections. C. Provide security at the construction site as necessary to protect against vandalism and loss by theft. D. Maintain security of the site and access leading to it. 1. Close gates and keep locked. 2. Obtain permission of any landowners whose property must be crossed in gaining access to the site. Job Management 01041-5 KEL00483 3. Install a gate lock consisting of a chain with two (2) locks. One (1) lock and key to be given to the landowner. One (1) lock shall be used by the Contractor, Engineer, and Owner. Provide keys to the Contractor's lock to Owner and Engineer. 4. At the close of the project, remove the Contractor's lock from the assembly. 1.13 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Products shall be delivered to the site per the Progress Schedule to prevent delays. B. Deliver packaged products to site in original undamaged containers with identifying labels attached. Open cartons as necessary to check for damage and to verify invoices. Reseal cartons and store until used. Leave products in packages or other containers until installed. C. Deliver products that are too large to fit through openings to the site in advance of the time enclosing walls and roofs are erected. Set in place, raised above floor on cribs. D. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the site. Protect the products until installed. E. Store products at location acceptable to the Engineer and to allow Owner access for maintenance and operations. Store immediately upon delivery in accordance with the Manufacturer's storage instructions and with seals and labels intact. Arrange storage to allow access for maintenance of stored items and for inspection. Store unpacked and loose products on shelves, in bins, or in neat groups of like items. F. Obtain and pay for the use of any additional storage for work areas needed for construction. Provide and maintain storage sheds as required for the protection of products. Remove at the completion of the project. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weather -tight enclosures or storage sheds of adequate dimensions. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges stated in the Manufacturer's instructions. Provide humidity control and ventilation for sensitive products as required by manufacturer's instructions. G. Provide adequate exterior storage for products that may be stored out-of-doors. 1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids to support fabricated products above ground; slope to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling or staining. 2. For products subject to dislocation or deterioration from exposure to the elements, cover with impervious sheet materials. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation below covering. 3. Store loose, granular materials on clean, solid surfaces, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. 4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. 5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids with stored materials. 6. Pipes and conduits stored outdoors are to have open ends sealed to prevent the entrance of dirt, moisture, and other injurious materials. 7. Store light weight products to prevent wind damage. Job Management 01041-6 KEL00483 H. Maintain storage facilities. Inspect stored products on a weekly basis and after periods of severe weather to verify that: 1. Storage facilities continue to meet specified requirements. 2. Manufacturer's required environmental conditions are continually maintained. 3. Surfaces of products exposed to the elements are not adversely affected and that weathering of finishes is within acceptable tolerances to provide a finished project meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. I. Protect and maintain mechanical and electrical equipment in storage. 1. Provide Manufacturer's service instructions on the exterior of the package. 2. Service equipment on a regular basis as recommended by the Manufacturer. Maintain a log of maintenance services. Submit the log as Record Data at the completion of the Project. 3. Provide power to and energize space heaters for all equipment for which these devices are provided. 4. Provide temporary enclosures for all electrical equipment, including electrical systems on mechanical devices. Provide and maintain heat in the enclosures until equipment is energized. J. Replace at no additional cost any stored item damaged by inadequate protection or environmental controls. K. Payment may be withheld for any products not properly stored. 1.14 MAINTENANCE OF WATER A. Manage water resulting from rains or ground water at the site. Maintain trenches and excavations free of water at all times. Provide and maintain pumps as necessary to remove excess water. Direct water away from the site to prevent damage to surrounding property. B. Perform operations necessary to control water at the site. Lower the water table in the construction area by acceptable means if necessary to maintain the site in a dry and workable condition at all times. Provide drains, sumps, casings, well points, and other water control devices as necessary to remove excess water. C. Maintain standby equipment to provide proper and continuous operation for water management. Monitor the operation on a 24-hour basis to provide continuous operation. D. Ensure that water drainage does not damage adjacent property. The Contractor shall be responsible for the discharge of water from the site. 1.15 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES A. Examine the project site and review the available information concerning the site. Locate utilities, streets, driveways, fences, drainage structures, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. Verify the elevations of the structures adjacent to excavations. Report these to the Engineer before beginning construction. Job Management 01041-7 KEL00483 B. Prepare a Plan of Action per Section 01030, SPECIAL PROCEDURES. Determine if existing structures, poles, piping, or other utilities at excavations will require relocation or replacement. Coordinate work with Owner, Engineer, local utility company and others. Include cost of demolition and replacement or relocation of these structures in the price proposal (bid) amount. C. Protect structures not to be replaced or relocated from damage during construction. Structure or utilities damaged during or as a result of construction shall be restored to a condition matching or better than that which existed before the start of construction. Include cost of _ restoration or replacement in the price proposal (bid). D. Protect existing trees and landscaping at the site. 1. Visit site with Engineer to identify trees that may be removed during construction. 2. Mark trees to be removed with paint. 3. Protect trees to remain from damage by wrapping trunks with 2 x 4 timber around the perimeter, securely wired in place, where machinery must operate around existing trees. Protect branches and limbs from damage by equipment. E. Protect building and structures not to be replaced or relocated from damage when handling material or equipment. Protect finished surfaces, including floors, doors, and jambs. Remove doors and install temporary wood protective coverings over jambs. 1.16 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Clean the project as work progresses and dispose of waste materials, keeping the site free from accumulations of waste or rubbish. Provide containers on site for waste collection. B. Use only those cleaning products that will not create hazards to health or property and those methods recommended by the Manufacturer on the surfaces to be cleaned. Use cleaning products only on those surfaces recommended by the cleaning product Manufacturer. C. Comply with codes, ordinances, regulations, and anti -pollution laws. Waste materials shall not be burned or buried. Volatile or hazardous waste materials shall not be disposed of in storm or sanitary sewers. D. Transport waste materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible. Materials shall not be dropped from heights. E. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from the site and legally dispose of these at public or private dumping areas. F. Waste materials or debris shall not be allowed to blow off of the site. 1.17 MAINTENANCE OF ROADS, DRIVEWAYS, AND ACCESS A. Construct temporary detours, including by-pass roads around construction to maintain the flow of traffic at all times. Public roads shall not be closed overnight. Job Management 01041-8 KEL00483 B. Maintain sufficiently clear width of the road for the free flow of traffic. C. The Contractor shall assume responsibility for any damage resulting from construction along roads or drives. 1.18 TRAFFIC MAINTENANCE A. Roads and streets shall remain open during all phases of construction, unless the Owner approves a street closing. B. Submit a written request for the Owner's approval of a street closing. The request shall state: 1. Reason for closing the street. 2. How long the street will remain closed. 3. Procedures to be taken to maintain the flow of traffic. C. Provide temporary access around the closed street by constructing a temporarypaved road at locations necessary to allow the Owner access to the remainder of the site. D. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the detour and excavations. 1.19 DISRUPTION TO SERVICES A. Disruptions to existing utilities, piping, process piping,or electrical services shall be kept to a minimum. Coordinate work with Owner, Engineer, local utility company or companies, and others. B. Maintain storm sewers and sanitary sewers in service at all times. Provide temporary service around the construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that the flow is not curtailed. 1.20 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Perform complete field measurements of the dimensions at the site for products required to fit existing conditions prior to purchasing products affected by that measurement or beginning construction. B. Verify property lines, control lines, grades, and levels indicated on the drawings. C. Verify pipe class, equipment capacities, existing electrical systems and power sources for existing conditions. D. Check shop drawings and indicate the actual dimensions available where products are to be installed. E. Include field measurements in record drawings as required in Section 01040, PROJECT ADMINISTRATION. 1.21 REFERENCE DATA AND CONTROL POINTS Job Management 01041-9 KEL00483 A. The following control points will be provided by the Engineer: 1. Base line or grid reference points for horizontal control. 2. Vertical control benchmark for vertical control. 3. Designated control points may be on an existing structure or monument. B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting the site work and preserve permanent reference points during construction. The Contractor shall not change or relocate points without prior approval of the Engineer. Notify Engineer when the reference point is lost, destroyed, or requires relocation. Replace project control points on the basis of the original survey. C. Provide complete engineering layout of the work needed for construction. 1. Provide competent personnel. Provide equipment including accurate surveying instruments, stakes, platforms, tools, and materials. 2. Survey accuracy is to meet the requirements established for Category 5 Construction Surveying as established in the Manual of Practice of Land Surveying in Texas published by the Texas Society of Professional Surveyors, latest revision. 3. Record data and measurements per standards. 1.22 LOCATION OF PIPELINES The alignment of pipelines may be changed due to unanticipated variations in existing conditions, or for any other reason prior to the time pipe is actually laid. 1.23 EXCESS EARTH Dispose of earth removed from excavations that is not required for backfill or embankments. Remove excess earth from the site within a reasonable time after completing excavation work. 1.24 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching required to complete the work or to: 1. Uncover work to provide for installation of new work or the correction of defective work. 2. Provide routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of mechanical, electrical, and plumbing work. 3. Uncover work that has been covered prior to observation by the Engineer. B. Submit written notification to the Engineer in advance of performing any cutting which affects: 1. Work of any other Contractor or the Owner. Job Management 01041-10 KEL00483 2. Structural integrity of any structure or system of the project. 3. Integrity or effectiveness of weather exposed or moisture resistant structure or systems. 4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of any structure or system. 5. Appearance of any structure or surfaces exposed occasionally or constantly to view. C. The notification shall include: 1. Identification of the project. 2. Location and description of affected work. 3. Reason for cutting, alteration, or excavation. 4. Effect on the work of any separate contractor or Owner. 5. Effect on the structural or weatherproof integrity of the project. 6. Description of proposed work, including: a. Scope of cutting, patching, or alteration. b. Trades that will perform the work. c. Products proposed for use. d. Extent of refinishing to be performed. e. Cost proposal, when applicable. 7. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 8. Written authorization from any separate contractor whose work would be affected. 9. Date and time work will be uncovered or altered. D. Examine the existing conditions, including structures subject to damage or to movement during cutting or patching. 1. Inspect conditions affecting installation of products or performance of the work after uncovering the work. 2. Provide a written report of unacceptable or questionable conditions to the Engineer. The Contractor shall not proceed with work until Engineer has provided further instructions. Beginning work will constitute acceptance of existing conditions by the Contractor. E. Protect the structure and other parts of the work and provide adequate support to maintain the structural integrity of the affected portions of the work. Provide devices and methods to protect adjacent work and other portions of the project from damage. Provide protection from the weather for portions of the project that may be exposed by cutting and patching work. F. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other work, and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs. G. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances, and finishes. H. Cut, remove, and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to, the removal of mechanical piping, heating units, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the modified work. Job Management 01041-11 KEL00483 I. Restore work which has been cut or removed. Install new products to provide completed work per the Contract Documents. J. Fit work air -tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through the surfaces. Where fire rated separations are penetrated, fill the space around the pipe or insert with materials with physical characteristics equivalent to fire resistance requirements of penetrated surface. K. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new products specified for the original installation. L. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: 1. For continuous surfaces, refinish to the nearest intersection. 2. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit. 1.25 BLASTING Blasting for excavations shall not be allowed. 1.26 PRELIMINARY OCCUPANCY A. The Owner reserves the right to deliver, install and connect equipment, furnishings, or other apparatus in the structure. Preliminary occupancy shall not be construed as acceptance of any part of the structure, nor shall it in any manner affect the start of the guarantee periods. B. Protect the Owner's property after installation is complete. C. The Owner reserves the right of trial usage of any product for the purpose of testing or to ascertain that the equipment meets the requirements of the Contract Documents. This trial usage does not constitute acceptance by either the Engineer or the Owner. Trial usage in no way affects the Manufacturer's warranty or the guarantee period. 1.27 INITIAL MAINTENANCE A. Maintain equipment until the project is accepted by the Owner. Ensure that mechanical equipment is properly lubricated and cared for as recommended by the Manufacturer. B. Remove and clean screens and strainers in piping systems. C. Clean insects from intake louver screens. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS Materials shall be in accordance with the requirements of the individual Sections. Job Management 01041-12 KEL00483 3.00 EXECUTION Perform the work per the Manufacturer's published instructions. No preparatory step or installation procedure shall be omitted unless specifically exempted or modified by Field Order. END OF SECTION Job Management 01041-13 KEL00483 01130 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Payments for work shall conform with the provisions of the General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the Proposal, the Agreement, and this Section. B. Submit request for partial payment at the prices indicated in the Proposal. 1. Prices for each bid item in the proposal shall include but not be limited to cost for: a. Mobilization, demobilization, cleanup, bonds, and insurance. b. Professional services including but not limited to engineering and legal fees. c. The products to be permanently incorporated into the project. d. The products consumed during the construction of the project. e. The labor and supervision to complete the project. f. The equipment, including tools, machinery, and appliances required to complete the project. g. The field and home office administration and overhead costs related directly or indirectly to the project. 2. Prices bid shall include the work not specifically set forth as an individual payment item. These items are considered to be a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor and the cost for these items shall be included in the bid prices. 3. Payment shall be based on the actual quantity of work completed per Contract Documents and measured per this Section. 4. Payment shall be made for Materials -on -Hand. a. Materials must be properly stored on site per Section 01041, JOB MANAGEMENT. b. Payment may be made for the invoice amount less the specified retainage. c. Invoices must be provided at the time they are included on the Materials -on -Hand tabulation. d. Documentation of payment for Materials -on -Hand must be provided for these items with the next payment request. Payment will be adjusted to the amount actually paid if this differs from the invoice amount. If this documentation is not provided the item must be removed from the Materials -on -Hand list and payment will be withheld. e. Payment for Materials -on -Hand is provided for the convenience of the Contractor and does not constitute acceptance of the product. 5. The work covered by Progress Payments shall become the property of the Owner at the time of payment. C. Application for payment shall be submitted per the provisions of this Section. 1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND PAYMENTS A. Submit a detailed schedule of values for the work to be performed on the project. 1. Submit schedule within 10 days prior to submitting the first request for payment. Measurement and Payment 01130-1 KEL00483 2. Line items in the proposal are to be used as line items in the schedule. 3. Payment will be made on the quantity of Work completed per Contract Documents during the payment period and as measured per this Section. a. Payment amount shall be the work quantity measured multiplied by the unit prices for that line item in the Proposal. b. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. c. Partial payments will be made for lump sum line items in the Proposal. 1) Lump sum line items in the Proposal are to be divided to allow easy determination of the percentage of the item that. has been completed. a) Provide adequate detail to allow easy determination of the percentage of work completed for each item. b) Items, with the exception of equipment packages are not to exceed $50,000.00. c) Separate product costs and installation costs. �1) Product costs include cost for product, delivery and unloading costs, royalties and patent fees, taxes, and other cost paid directly to the supplier or vendor. (2) Installation costs include cost for the supervision, labor and equipment for field fabrication, erection, installation, start-up, initial operation and Contractor's overhead and profit. d) Lump sum items may be divided into an estimated number of units. i 1) The estimated number of units times the cost per unit must equal the lump sum amount for that line item. (2) Contractor will receive payment for all of the lump sum line item. e) Include a directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit for each line item. f) Divide principal subcontract amounts into an adequate number of line items to allow determination of the percentage of work completed for each item. 2) These line items may be used to establish the value of work to be added or deleted from the project. 3) Correlate line items with other administrative schedules and forms: a) Progress schedule b) List of subcontractors c) Schedule of allowances d) Schedule of alternatives e) List of products and principal suppliers f) Schedule of submittals 4) Costs for mobilization shall be listed as a separate line item and shall be actual cost for: a) Bonds and insurance b) Transportation and setup for equipment c) Transportation and/or erection of all field offices, sheds and storage facilities d) Salaries for preparation of submittals required before the first payment request e) Salaries for field personnel assigned to the project related to the mobilization of the project f) Mobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total contract amount g) Cost for mobilization may be submitted only for work completed 5) The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total contract amount. Measurement and Payment 01130-2 KEL00483 4. Submit a schedule indicating the anticipated schedule of payments to be made by the Owner. Schedule shall indicate: a. The payment request number. b. Date the request is to be submitted. c. Anticipated amount of the payment request. 5. Schedule shall be updated quarterly or more often if necessary to provide a reasonably accurate indication of the funds that the Owner will need to have available to make payment to the Contractor for the work performed. B. Provide written approval of the Schedule of Values, Payment Request Form, and method of payment by the Surety Company providing performance and maintenance bonds prior to submitting the first Payment Request. Payment will not be made without this approval. 1.03 PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Submit payment requests per the submittal procedures indicated in Section 01300, SUBMITTALS. B. Requests maybe submitted on a pre-printed form as indicated in Section 01300, SUBMITTALS or may be generated by computer. Computer generated payment requests must have the same format and information indicated in the pre-printed form and be approved by the Engineer. 1. Submit a Schedule of Values in the payment request format to be used. a. Request must include a completed Summary of Payment Request Values as indicated in Section 01800, FORMS with each estimate submitted. 1) Each request must be sequentially numbered and the payment period indicated. 2) Total amounts for Value of Original Contract Performed, Extra Work on Approved Change Orders, and Materials -on- Hand are to be shown on the Summary Sheet and are to correspond to totals indicated on the attached tabulation for each. 3) The number of pages included in each tabulation is to be noted in the blank space on the Summary Sheet to allow a determination to be made that all sheets have been submitted. 4) Contractor's certification must be executed by the Contractor's agent of authority and notarized for each payment request. b. The Tabulation of Values for Original Contract Performed Attachment "A" is to indicate the total contract amount and the work completed to date. c. The Tabulation of Extra Work on Approved Change Orders Attachment "B" is to include only approved Change Order items. d. The Tabulation of Materials -on -Hand Attachment "C" is to list all materials that are presented for payment. Once an item has been entered on the tabulation it is not to be removed. e. Project Summary Report Attachment "D" is to be included with each payment request. Data included in the Project Summary Report are to be taken from the other tabulations. 2. The Schedule of Values and the form for the submission of requests may not be altered without the express written consent of the Engineer once these have been approved by the Engineer. 3. Final payment requires additional procedures and documentation per Section 01700, CONTRACT CLOSEOUT. C. Progress payments shall be made as the work progresses on a monthly basis. Measurement and Payment 01130-3 KEL00483 1. The payment period shall end on the 25th day of each month and shall cover all work completed and materials received since the end of the last payment period. 2. After the end of the payment period, submit a draft copy of the payment request for that month to the Engineer. Agreement is to be reached on: a. The percentage of work completed for each lump sum item. b. The quantity of work completed for each unit price item. c. The percentage of work completed for each approved Change Order item. d. The amount of Materials -on -Hand. 3. On the basis of these agreements the Contractor is to prepare a final copy of the payment request and submit it to the Engineer for approval. a. The final copy is to be signed by the representative of the Contractor authorized to execute documents for the Contractor and notarized. b. The Engineer will review the payment request and if appropriate will recommend payment of the request to the Owner. A. Each payment request is to be accompanied by a revised and up-to-date progress schedule per Section 01310 PROGRESS SCHEDULES. B. Each payment request is to be accompanied by Project Photographs per Section 01380, PROJECT PHOTOGRAPHS. 1.04 ALTERNATES A. This section describes each alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the work when this alternate is made a part of the work in the Contract Agreement. B. Drawings and Specifications will outline the extent of work to be included in the Alternate Bid. C. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required to properly integrate the work under each Alternate, and provide a complete and functional system as required by the Contract Documents. D. Alternates will be accepted or rejected at the option of the Owner. E. Alternate prices will be maintained a minimum of 120 days, unless noted otherwise. F. Provide submittals for products furnished as part of the alternate proposal per Section 01300, SUBMITTALS. G. DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES 1. ALTERNATE BID ITEM la - Furnish and install 8 -foot black industrial ornamental picket fence with 12" -mow strip in the south and east boundaries of the tank site including cantilever motor -operated gate in lieu of black vinyl coated chain link fence, complete as specified and shown on the drawings. The gate shall operate with a card reading device as specified. Measurement and Payment 01130-4 KEL00483 2. ALTERNATE BID ITEM 2a - Furnish and install tank exterior architectural lighting, complete as specified and shown on the drawings. The lighting fixtures shall illuminate the support wall only to minimize reflection to neighboring properties. 1.05 MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES A. Measure the methods used in trench excavation safety protection by the linear foot of trench deeper than five (5) feet and pay at the unit price in the Proposal, which is the total compensation for furnishing design, materials, tools, labor, equipment, and incidentals necessary, including removal of the system. B. Measure the work described in the Proposal for payment. BID ITEM NO. 1 FURNISH AND INSTALL 2,5000,000 GALLON DOUBLE COMPARTMENT, COMPOSITE ELEVATED WATER STORAGE TANK Item includes furnishing and installation of a 2,500,000 gallon double -compartment, composite elevated water storage tank complete with all appurtenances as shown on the drawings, and all other items shown on plans and specifications that are not specifically described for payment in one of the other bid items. Including all labor, equipment and materials required to design, construct and install the elevated tank. This item includes, but is not limited to reinforced concrete foundation, interior ladder, upper platform, pedestrian access and truck doors, protective coatings, electrical systems excluding instrumentation and SCADA, testing, site grading, base bid fencing, landscaping, paving, retaining wall and other site improvements. Payment will be the lump sum bid price. BID ITEM NO.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL CITY OF KELLER'S 20 -INCH DIAMETER CONCRETE CYLINDER YARD PIPING AND FITTINGS, STAINLESS STEEL INTERIOR PIPING, VALVES AND RELATED APPURTENANCES A. YARD PIPING AND FITTINGS. Item includes furnishing and installation of City of Keller's 20 -inch diameter concrete cylinder yard piping and fittings from the property line on Knox Road to the tank base and stainless steel interior piping and fittings. Item shall cover furnishing, hauling and laying of pipe, and main line fittings shown on the Plans, insulating connection, welding joints for thrust and where specified, field and shop -applied cement mortar lining, thrust blocking and concrete anchors, and pumping where necessary; connections to existing piping, trench excavation, and backfilling, including embedment material and concrete backfill in locations around existing thrust blocking as specified, concrete, asphalt and dirt road replacement, sodding, placement of riprap, replacement of topsoil, protecting or replacing existing structures or utilities, quality control and testing, disposal of surplus materials, cleaning up and maintenance, dust control, removal of mud from roadways and any incidental work and materials not otherwise provided for in these specifications, all in strict accordance with the plans and specifications. B. Payment for this item shall include any and all extra precautions or construction requirements necessary to adequately protect and support existing buried and overhead utilities and relocate existing utilities as necessary for construction of main line pipe. Payment for main line pipe shall include all costs required to have utility companies repair any damage inflicted to their lines by the Contractor and any cleanup, property damages, fines, etc. resulting from damage inflicted to any utility line by the Contractor. Measurement and Payment 01130-5 KEL00483 C. No separate payment will be made for rock excavation, and the cost thereof shall be I included in unit prices bid for main line pipe. D. Construction and maintenance of required access temporary roadways and driveways shall I be included in unit prices bid for main line pipe. E. No separate payment will be made for pavement replacement of roads and driveways removed for construction or damaged by the Contractor and the cost thereof shall be included in unit prices bid for main line pipe. F. The cost of granular embedment shall be included in the cost bid for main line pipe and will not be paid for as a separate item. G. Test plugs used for testing the line shall be included in the unit prices bid for the Main Line Pipe. H. If an existing utility or structure is damaged or must be relocated for construction, the cost of the repair or relocation shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be included in the bid for main line pipe. I. Payment for modifications to existing piping including the removal of existing piping and replacement with new piping and appurtenances as shown in the plans shall be included in the unit prices bid for the main line pipe and will not be paid as a separate item. J. No separate payment shall be made for clearing and grubbing for preparation of installing proposed waterlines and shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, equipment for loading, hauling, unloading, and clearing, removing all trees and underbrush. K. No separate payment shall be made for furnishing and installing a cool or warm season seeding, fertilizer and watering and all other appurtenances specified and indicated on the plans complete in place. L. INTERIOR PIPING AND APPRUTENANCES. Stainless steel interior fill/discharge piping, solenoid control valve, check valve, isolation valves, dismantling joints, small diameter taps, pressure gages, cocks and all related appurtenances, complete as specified and shown on the drawings. Payment will be lump sum bid price. BID ITEM NO.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL TANK INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS, COMPLETE AS SPECIFIED AND SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. Payment shall be made at the lump sum price bid for furnishing and installing all electrical equipment and instrumentation, pressure transducers, SCADA system and controls, hangers, mounting controls, enclosure, and appurtenances as specified or indicated on the drawings. Measurement and Payment 01130-6 KEL00483 BID ITEM NO.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL TOWN OF WESTLAKE'S 20 -INCH DIAMETER CONCRETE CYLINDER YARD PIPING AND FITTINGS, STAINLESS STEEL INTERIOR PIPING, VALVES AND RELATED APPURTENANCES A. YARD PIPING AND FITTINGS. Item includes furnishing and installation of Town of Westlake's concrete cylinder yard piping and fittings from the property line on the northwest corner of the property as shown on the drawings to the tank base andand stainless steel interior piping and fittings. The item shall cover furnishing, hauling and laying of pipe, and main line fittings shown on the Plans, insulating connection, welding joints for thrust and where specified, field and shop -applied cement mortar lining, thrust blocking and concrete anchors, and pumping where necessary; connections to existing piping, trench excavation, and backfilling, including embedment material and concrete backfill in locations around existing thrust blocking as specified, concrete, asphalt and dirt road replacement, sodding, placement of riprap, replacement of topsoil, protecting or replacing existing structures or utilities, quality control and testing, disposal of surplus materials, cleaning up and maintenance, dust control, removal of mud from roadways and any incidental work and materials not otherwise provided for in these specifications, all in strict accordance with the plans and specifications. B. Payment for this item shall include any and all extra precautions or construction requirements necessary to adequately protect and support existing buried and overhead utilities and relocate existing utilities as necessary for construction of main line pipe. Payment for main line pipe shall include all costs required to have utility companies repair any damage inflicted to their lines by the Contractor and any cleanup, property damages, fines, etc. resulting from damage inflicted to any utility line by the Contractor. C. No separate payment will be made for rock excavation, and the cost thereof shall be included in unit prices bid for main line pipe. D. Construction and maintenance of required access temporary roadways and driveways shall be included in unit prices bid for main line pipe. E. No separate payment will be made for pavement replacement of roads and driveways removed for construction or damaged by the Contractor and the cost thereof shall be included in unit prices bid for main line pipe. F. The cost of granular embedment shall be included in the cost bid for main line pipe and will not be paid for as a separate item. G. Test plugs used for testing the line shall be included in the unit prices bid for the Main Line Pipe. H. If an existing utility or structure is damaged or must be relocated for construction, the cost of the repair or relocation shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be included in the bid for main line pipe. I. Payment for modifications to existing piping including the removal of existing piping and replacement with new piping and appurtenances as shown in the plans shall be Measurement and Payment 01130-7 KEL00483 included in the unit prices bid for the main line pipe and will not be paid as a separate item. J. No separate payment shall be made for clearing and grubbing for preparation of installing proposed waterlines and shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, equipment for loading, hauling, unloading, and clearing, removing all trees and underbrush. K. No separate payment shall be made for furnishing and installing a cool or warm season seeding, fertilizer and watering and all other appurtenances specified and indicated on the plans complete in place. L. INTERIOR PIPING AND APPRUTENANCES. Stainless steel interior fill/discharge piping, isolation valves, and blind flanges, complete as specified and shown on the drawings. Payment will be lump sum bid price. END OF SECTION Measurement and Payment 01130-8 KEL00483 01300 SUBMITTALS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Submit documentation as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the Owner and Engineer to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner. 2. Provide information for operation and maintenance of the Project. 3. Provide information for the administration of the Contract. 4. Allow the Engineer to advise the Owner if products proposed for the project by the Contractor conform, in general, with the design concepts of the Contract Documents. B. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the Engineer's review of submittals. Contract modifications may only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. 1.02 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review all submittals prior to submission. B. Determine and verify: 1. Field measurements. 2. Field construction requirements. 3. Location of all existing structures, utilities and equipment related to the submittals. 4. Submittals are complete for their intended purpose. 5. Conflicts between the submittals related to the various subcontractors and suppliers have been resolved. 6. Quantities and dimensions shown on the submittals. C. Submit information per the procedures described in this section and the detailed specifications. D. Furnish the following submittals: 1. As specified in the attached Submittal Schedule. 2. Schedules, data and other documentation as described in detail in this section or referenced in the General Conditions. 3. Documentation required for the administration of the Contract per Section 01040, PROJECT ADMINISTRATION. 4. Shop drawings required for consideration of a contract modification per Paragraph 1.08. 5. Submittals as required in the detailed specifications. 6. Submittals not required will be returned without Engineer's review. E. Submit a schedule indicating the date submittals will be sent to the Engineer and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the project. Make submittals promptly in accordance with the schedule so as to cause no delay in the project. 1. Submittals shall be sent to Engineer allowing a reasonable time for delivery, review and marking submittals. Time for review is to include time for resubmission if necessary and to allow adequate time for the ordering, fabrication, and delivery of the product. Submittals 01300-1 KEL00483 2. Schedule submittal to provide all information for interrelated work at one time. No review will be performed on submittals requiring coordination with other submittals. Engineer will return submittals for resubmission as a complete package. F. Submittals for systems and related equipment shall include information for all of the components required for a complete and operational system. 1. Include electrical, mechanical, and other information required to indicate how the various components of the system function. 2. Where certifications, warranties, and written guarantees are required, they will be provided with the submittal package for review. G. Fabrication or installation of any products prior to the approval of shop drawings is done at the Contractor's risk. Products not meeting the requirements of Contract Documents are defective and may be rejected at the Owner's option. H. Payment will not be made for products for which submittals are required until the submittals have been received. Payment will not be made for products for which shop drawings or samples are required until these are approved by the Engineer. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Submit legible, accurate, complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Submittals not meeting this criteria will be returned without review. B. Demonstrate that the proposed products are in full and complete compliance with the design criteria and requirements of the Contract Documents including drawings and specifications as modified by Addenda, Field Orders, and Change Orders. C. Furnish and install products that fully comply with the information included in the submittal. D. Review and approve submittals prior to submitting them to the Engineer for review. Submittals will not be accepted from subcontractors, suppliers, or anyone other than the Contractor. 1.04 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Deliver submittals to the Engineer at the following address: FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Attn. Construction Services 4055 International Plaza Suite 200 Fort Worth, Texas, 76109-4895 Reference Project: KEL00483 B. Transmit all submittals, with a properly completed Submittal Transmittal Form as indicated in Section 01800, FORMS. 1. A separate transmittal form shall be used for each specific product, class of material, and equipment system. 2. Items specified in different sections of the specifications are to be submitted separately unless integrally related. C. Assign a Contractor's submittal number to the documents originated to allow tracking of the submittal during the review process. Submittals 01300-2 KEL00483 1. Assign the number consisting of a prefix, a sequence number, and a letter suffix. Prefixes shall be as follows: ..sacra hon r Q x rt � k�9W4to CO Change Order]Engineer CMR Contractor's Modification Request ontractor CTR Certified est sport Contractor Equipment Installation Report Contractor —Field Order Engineer NBC Notification by Contractor Contractor Operation & Maintenance Manuals Contractor PCMropose ontract Modification ngmeer PR Payment Request Contractor Project Photographs Contractor RD Record Data Contractor RFIequest or Information Contractor SAM amp a Contractor Shop rawing Contractor c e u e of Progress Contractor 2. Issue sequence numbers in chronological order for each type of submittal. 3. Issue numbers for resubmittals that have the same number as the original submittal followed by an alphabetical suffix indicating the number of times the same submittal has been sent to the Engineer for processing. For example: SD -025-A represents a shop drawing that is the twenty-fifth submittal of this type and is the second time this submittal has been sent for review. 4. Clearly note the submittal number on each page or sheet of the submittal. 5. Correct assignment of numbers is essential since different submittal types are processed in different ways. D. Submit documents with uniform markings and page sizes. 1. Paper size shall allow for ease of reproduction. a. Submit documents on 8-1/2" X 11" paper where practical. b. Use 11" X 17" paper for larger drawings and schematics. c. Use full size blueline sheets for fabrications and layout drawings. Reproducible drawings may be submitted in lieu of bluelines. 2. Mark submittals to: a. Indicate Contractor's corrections in green. b. Highlight items pertinent to the products being furnished in yellow and delete items that are not when the Manufacturer's standard drawings or information sheets are provided. c. Cloud items and highlight in yellow where selections by the Engineer or Owner are required. d. Mark dimensions with the prefix FD to indicate field verified dimensions on the drawings. e. Provide a blank space 8" x 3" for Contractor's and Engineer's stamp. 3. Define abbreviations and symbols used in shop drawings. a. Use terms and symbols in shop drawings consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the shop drawings. c. Provide a legend for symbols used on shop drawings. E. Mark submittals to reference the drawing number and/or section of the specifications, detail designation, schedule or location that corresponds with the data submitted. Other Submittals 01300-3 KEL00483 identification may also be required, such as layout drawings or schedules to allow the reviewer to determine where a particular product is to be used. F. Deliver samples required by the detailed specifications to the project site. Provide a minimum of two (2) samples. G. Construct mock-ups from the actual products to be used in construction per detailed specifications. H. Submit color charts and samples for every product requiring color, texture or finish selection. 1. Submit all color charts and samples at one time. 2. Do not submit color charts and samples until all record data have been submitted or shop drawings for the products have been approved. 3. Submit color charts and samples not less than thirty (30) days prior to when these products are to be ordered or released for fabrication to comply with the schedule for construction of the project. A. Submit Contractor's Modification Request per Section 01040, PROJECT ADMINISTRATION to request modification to the Contract Documents. B. The number of copies of each submittal to be sent by the Contractor and the number of copies of each submittal to be returned are: re ix -Description o. Of o. o Copies Sent Copies Returned CMR Contractor's Modification Request 4 1 CTR Certified est Report EIR Equipment Installation Report Notification by Contractor Preliminary O&M Manuals Final anua s PR ayment Request Pp Project Photographs RD Record Data KFI Request for Information SAM amp e SD Shop Drawings SCH Schedule o rogress 1.05 REVIEW PROCEDURES A. Shop drawings shall be reviewed in the order received. 1. The Contractor may mark submittals as "Priority" for review. Contractor should use discretion in the use of "Priority" submittals as this may delay the review of submittals previously submitted. 2. Priority submittals will be reviewed before other submittals for this project which have been received but not reviewed. 3. Revise the Schedule of Contractor's Submittals for substantial deviations from the previous schedule. B. Review procedures vary with the type of submittal as described in Paragraph 1.06. Submittals 01300-4 KEL00483 1.06 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Shop drawings are required for those products that cannot adequately be described in the Contract Documents to allow fabrication, erection or installation of the product without additional detailed information from the product's manufacturer. 1. Shop drawings are requested so that the Engineer can: a. Assist the Owner in selecting colors, textures or other aesthetic features. b. Compare the proposed features of the product with the specified features so as to advise the Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the Contract Documents. c. Compare the performance features of the proposed product with those specified so as to advise the Owner that it appears that the product will meet the designed performance criteria. d. Review required certifications, guarantees, warranties, and service agreements for compliance with the Contract Documents. 2. Contractor shall certify that he has reviewed the shop drawings and made all necessary corrections such that the products, when installed, will be in full compliance with the Contract Documents per Section 00800, Supplementary Conditions. Shop drawings submitted without this certification will be returned without review. 3. Submit shop drawings for: a. Products indicated in the submittal schedule following this section. b. When a substitution or equal product is proposed in accordance with Paragraph 1.08 of this Section. 4. Include a complete description of the material or equipment to be furnished. Information is to include: a. Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, model number, and operational parameters of the components. b. Weights, gauges, materials of construction, external connections, anchors, and supports required. c. Performance characteristics, capacities, engineering data, motor curves, and other information necessary to allow a complete evaluation of mechanical components. d. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers. e. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings. f. Wiring and piping diagrams and related controls. g. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt, or other materials proportioned for the project. h. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the site. 5. All required statements of certification, guarantees, extended service agreements, and other related documents are to be provided with the shop drawing. The effective date of these documents shall be the date of acceptance of the work by the Owner. 6. Comments will be made on items called to the attention of the Engineer for review and comment. Any marks made by the Engineer do not constitute a blanket review of the submittal or relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or deviations from the Contract requirements. Submittals 01300-5 KEL00483 a. Submittals that are reviewed shall be returned with one or more of the following designations: 1) Approved - Submittal is found to be acceptable as submitted. 2) Approved as Corrected - Submittal is acceptable with corrections marked by Contractor or notations made by Engineer and may be used as corrected. 3) Revise and Resubmit - Submittal has deviations from the Contract Documents, significant errors, or is inadequate and must be revised and resubmitted for subsequent review. 4) Not Approved - Products are not acceptable. b. Drawings with a significant or substantial number of markings by the Contractor may be marked "Approved as Corrected" and "Revise and Resubmit". These drawings are to be revised to provide a clean record of the submittal. c. Dimensions or other data that do not appear to conform to the Contract Documents will be marked as "At Variance With" (AVW) the Contract Documents or other information provided. The Contractor is to make revisions as appropriate to comply with Contract Documents. B. Certifications, Warranties and Service Agreements include documents as specified in the detailed specifications, as shown in the submittal schedule or as follows: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR) - A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the specifications. (Refer to Section 01400, QUALITY CONTROL.) 2. Certification of Local Field Service (CLS) - A certified letter stating that field service is available from a factory or supplier approved service organization located within a 300 mile radius of the project site. List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of approved service organizations on or attach to the certificate. 3. Extended Warranty (EW) - A guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the normal one (1) year warranty described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. 4. Extended Service Agreement (ESA) - A contract to provide maintenance beyond that required to fulfill requirements for warranty repairs, or to perform routine maintenance for a definite period of time beyond the warranty period. Issue the service agreement in the name of the Owner. Certification of Adequacy of Design (CAD) - A certified letter from the manufacturer of the equipment stating that they have designed the equipment to be structurally stable and to withstand all imposed loads without deformation, failure, or adverse effects to the performance and operational requirements of the unit. The letter shall state that mechanical and electrical equipment is adequately sized to be fully operational for the conditions specified or normally encountered by the product's intended use. 6. Certification of Applicator/Subcontractor (CSQ) - A certified letter stating that the Applicator or Subcontractor proposed to perform a specified function is duly designated as factory authorized and trained for the application of the specified product. C. Submit record data to provide information to allow the Owner to adequately identify the products incorporated into the project and allow replacement or repair at some future date. Submittals 01300-6 KEL00483 1. Provide record data for all products. Record data is not required for items for which shop drawings and/or operations and maintenance manuals are required. 2. Provide information only on the specified products. Submit a Contractor's Modification Request for approval of deviations or substitutions and obtain approval by Field Order or Change Order prior to submitting Record Data. 3. Provide the same information required for shop drawings. 4. Record data will be received by the Engineer, logged, and provided to Owner for his record. a. Record data may be reviewed to see that the information provided is adequate for the purpose intended. Inadequate drawings may be returned as unacceptable. b. Record data is not reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents. Comments may be returned if deviations from the Contract Documents are noted during the cursory review performed to see that the information is adequate. D. Provide samples for comparison with products delivered to the site for use on the project. 1. Samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate the functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 2. Indicate the full range of color, texture, and patterns. 3. Dispose of samples when related work has been completed and approved, and disposal is requested by the Engineer. At Owner's option samples will become the property of the Owner. E. Construct mock-ups for comparison with the work being performed. 1. Construct mock-ups of the size or area indicated in the detailed specifications. 2. Construct mock-ups complete with texture and finish to represent the finished product. Refer to Section 13413, 2.08. 3. Protect mock-ups until work has been completed and accepted by the Owner. 4. Dispose of mock-ups when related work has been completed and disposal is approved by the Engineer. F. Submit Operation and Maintenance manuals (O&M) for all equipment, mechanical devices, or components described in the Contract Documents per Section 0 173 0, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS. Include copies of approved shop drawings in the manual. G. Submit Request For Information (RFI) in accordance with Section 01040, PROJECT ADMINISTRATION. H. Submit a Schedule of Values and Payment Requests (PR) in accordance with Section 01130, MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT. I. Submit Progress Schedules (SCH) in accordance with Section 01310, PROGRESS SCHEDULES. J. Submit Certified Test Reports (CTR) from independent testing laboratories in accordance with Section 01400, QUALITY CONTROL. 1. Submit test reports for material fabricated for this project with shop drawings for that product. 2. Submit test reports produced at the point of production for standard production products with the record data for that product. K. Submit a list of Suppliers and Subcontractors as Record Data in accordance with Section 01040, PROJECT ADMINISTRATION. Submittals 01300-7 KEL00483 L. Submit Equipment Installation Reports (EIR) in accordance with Section 01650, STARTING SYSTEMS. M. Submit Notifications by Contractor (NBC) in accordance with Section 01040, PROJECT ADMINISTRATION. N. Submit Project Photographs (PP) in accordance with Section 01380, PROJECT PHOTOGRAPHS. 1.07 REQUESTS FOR DEVIATION A. Submit requests for deviation from the Contract Documents for any product that does not fully comply with the specifications. B. Submit request by Contractor's Modification Request (CMR) per Section 01040, PROJECT ADMINISTRATION. Identify the deviations and the reason the change is requested. C. Deviations that result in a reduction in cost shall also include the amount of the reduction to the Owner. D. A Change Order or Field Order will be issued by the Engineer for deviations approved by the Owner. Deviations from the Contract Documents may only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. 1.08 SUBMITTALS FOR EQUAL NON-SPECIFIED PRODUCTS A. The products of the listed suppliers are to be furnished where detailed specifications list several manufacturers but do not specifically list "or equal" or "or approved equal" products. Use of any products other than those specifically listed is a substitution and must be approved per Paragraph 1.09. B. Contractor may submit other manufacturers' products that are in full compliance with the specification where detailed specifications list one or more manufacturers followed by the phase "or equal" or "or approved equal". 1. Submit shop drawings of adequate detail to document that the proposed product is equal or superior to the specified product. 2. Prove that the product is equal. It is not the Engineer's responsibility to prove the product is not equal. a. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is equal to the Contract Document requirements. b. Make a direct comparison with the specified manufacturer's published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the submittal. c. The decision of the Engineer regarding the acceptability of the proposed product is final. 3. Provide a typewritten certification that, in furnishing the proposed product as an equal, the Contractor: a. Has thoroughly examined the proposed product and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to the product specified. b. Has determined that the product will perform in the same manner and result in the same process as the specified product. c. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds for the product specified. Submittals 01300-8 KEL00483 d. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the product into the construction and will waive all claims for additional work which may be necessary to incorporate the product into the project which may subsequently become apparent. e. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. 4. A modification request is not required for any product that is in complete compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.09 SUBMITTALS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions are defined as any product that the Contractor proposes to provide for the. Project in lieu of the specified product. B. If the Contractor desires to submit a manufacturer or product which is not specified, the Contractor must submit the following for consideration of approval of the substitution: 1. Contractor's Modification Request for deviation from the Contract Documents per Paragraph 1.07. 2. Prove that the product is acceptable as a substitute. It is not the Engineer's responsibility to prove the product is not acceptable as a substitute. a. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is acceptable to meet the intent of the Contract Documents requirements. b. Make a direct comparison with the specified manufacturer's published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the submittal. c. The decision of the Engineer regarding the acceptability of the proposed substituted product is final. 3. Provide a typewritten certification that, in making the substitution request, the Contractor: a. Has determined that the substituted product will perform in substantially the same manner and result in the same ability to meet the specified performance as the specified product. b. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds for the substituted product as specified or as would be provided by the Manufacturer of the specified product. c. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the project and will waive all claims for additional work which may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the project which may subsequently become apparent. d. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. C. Engineering cost for review of substitutions will be paid by the Contractor. 1. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Engineer for the actual hours required for the review and marking of shop drawings by Engineer and in accordance with the following rates: Principal -in -Charge $ 175 Project Manager $ 125 Design Engineer $ 80 Engineering Technician $ 75 Clerk $ 45 2. Cost for the additional review shall be paid to the Owner by the Contractor on a monthly basis. Submittals 01300-9 KEL00483 1. 10 GUARANTEES A. Warranties and guarantees shall be submitted as required by the Contract Documents and submitted with the shop drawings or record data. B. Additional copies will be provided for equipment and will be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Section 01730, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS. 1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make all corrections or changes in the submittals required by the Engineer and resubmit until approved. B. For shop drawings: 1. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the original submittal. 2. Highlight in yellow those revisions which have been made in response to the first review by the Engineer. 3. Highlight in blue any new revisions which have been made or additional details of information that has been added since the previous review by the Engineer. C. For samples: 1. Submit new samples as required for the initial sample. 2. Remove samples which have been rejected. D. For mock-ups: 1. Construct a new mock-up as initially required. 2. Dispose of mock-ups which have been rejected. E. Engineering cost for excessive review of shop drawings will be paid by the Contractor. 1. Excessive review of shop drawings is defined as any review required after the original review has been made and the first resubmittal has been checked to see that corrections have been made. 2. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Engineer for the actual hours required for the review and marking of shop drawings by Engineer and in accordance with the following rates: Principal -in -Charge $ 175 Project Manager $ 125 Design Engineer $ 80 Engineering Technician $ 75 Clerk $ 45 3. Pay cost for the additional review to the Owner on a monthly basis as billed by the Owner. 4. Need for more than one resubmission or any other delay of obtaining Engineer's review of submittals, will not entitle the Contractor to an extension of Contract Time. All costs associated with such delays shall be at the Contractor's expense. Submittals 01300-10 KEL00483 1.12 ENGINEER'S DUTIES A. Review the submittals and return with reasonable promptness. B. Affix stamp, indicate approval, rejection, and the need for resubmittal. C. Distribute documents. Submittals 01300-11 KEL00483 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE Spec. No Description S D S C A T M R C E E C C R L W S A S D S A D Q O M E P I P R B 02210 Site Grading X RD Record Data CLS Certification of Local Field Service 02217 Trench/Backfill/Pipe Embedment for W/S Lines EW Extended Warranty X Equipment Installation Report ESA 02219 Excavation Process Performance Bond X 02220 Trench Safety X 02255 Earth Fill Classifications X 02256 Aggregate Fill Classifications X 02263 Geotextile - Erosion Control X 02266 Geogrid - Soil Reinforcement X 02271 Riprap and Bedding Material X 02276 Concrete Segmental Retaining Walls X 02435 Reinforced Concrete Drainage Pipe X 02480 Landscaping X 02515 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement X 02575 Paving Repair and Resurfacing X 02614 Pretensioned Concrete Cylinder Pipe X 02615 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings -Tape Coated X 02810 Underground Yard Irrigation System X X 02830 Ornamental Fencing X X 02831 Chain Link Fences and Gates X X 02832 Chain Link Cantilevered Sliding Gate X X 02833 Ornamental Cantilevered Sliding Gate X X 03305 Concrete X 09905 Protective Coatings X X 13413 Composite Elevated Storage Tank X X X X X X 13440 Instrumentation General Provisions X X X X 13442 Instrumentation Commissioning X X X X X 13500 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System (SCADA) X X X X X 15103 Butterfly Valves X X 15114 Pilot Operated Solenoid Control Valve X X X X 15136 Miscellaneous Valves X X 15170 Pressure Gauges and Cocks X 16010 General Electrical Requirements X X X 16111 Conduits X X 16120 600 Volt Wires and Cables X 16122 Wire Connections and Devices X 16130 Outlet Boxes X Legend SD Shop Drawing CAD Certificate of Adequacy of Design SAM Sample CSQ Certification of Applicator/Subcontractor CTR Certified Test Report RD Record Data CLS Certification of Local Field Service OM Operation and Maintenance Manuals EW Extended Warranty EIR Equipment Installation Report ESA Extended Service Agreement PPB Process Performance Bond Submittals 01300-12 KEL00483 Spec. No. Description S S C C D A T L M R S E W E S A C A D C S Q R D O M E P I P R B 16131 Pull and Junction Boxes CLS Certification of Local Field Service OM Operation and Maintenance Manuals EW X EIR Equipment Installation Report 16140 Wiring Devices PPB Process Performance Bond X 16150 Electrical Equipment X 16450 Grounding X 16500 Lighting X Legend END OF SECTION SD Shop Drawing CAD Certificate of Adequacy of Design SAM Sample CSQ Certification of Applicator/Subcontractor CTR Certified Test Report RD Record Data CLS Certification of Local Field Service OM Operation and Maintenance Manuals EW Extended Warranty EIR Equipment Installation Report ESA Extended Service Agreement PPB Process Performance Bond Submittals 01300-13 KEL00483 01310 PROGRESS SCHEDULES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Prepare and submit a progress schedule for the work and update the schedule on a monthly basis for the duration of the project. B. Provide schedule in adequate detail to allow Owner to monitor the work progress, to anticipate the time and amount of progress payments, and to relate submittal processing to sequential activities of the work. C. Incorporate and specifically designate the dates of anticipated submission of submittals and the dates when submittals must be returned to the Contractor into the schedule. D. Assume complete responsibility for maintaining the progress of the work per the schedule submitted. E. Take into consideration when preparing schedule all requirements of Section 01030, SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit progress schedules in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS. Submit schedules within the following times: 1. Preliminary schedule within 10 days after the Notice of Award. The schedule is to be available at the pre -construction conference. 2. Detailed schedule at least 10 days prior to the first payment request. B. Submit progress schedules with requests for partial payment. Schedules may be used to evaluate the requests for partial payment. Failure to submit the schedule may cause delay in the review and approval of progress payments. 1.03 SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS A. Schedule is to be in adequate detail to: 1. Assure adequate planning, scheduling, and reporting during the execution of the work. 2. Assure the coordination of the work of the Contractor and the various subcontractors and suppliers. 3. Assist in monitoring the progress of the work. 4. Assist in evaluating proposed changes to the contract and project schedule. 5. Assist the Owner in review of Contractor's monthly payment requests. B. Provide personnel with five (5) years minimum experience in scheduling construction work comparable to this project. C. Provide the schedule in the form of a time scaled horizontal bar chart which indicates graphically the work scheduled at any time during the project. The graph is to indicate: Progress Schedules 01310-1 KEL00483 1. Complete sequence of construction by activity. 2. Identification of the activity by structure, location, and type of work. 3. Chronological order of the start of each item of work. 4. The activity start and stop dates. 5. The activity duration. 6. Successor and predecessor relationships for each activity. Group related activities or use lines to indicate relationships. 7. A clearly indicated critical path. Indicate only one (1) critical path on the schedule. The subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path where several subsystems each have a critical path. Float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. 8. Projected percentage of completion, based on dollar value of the work included in each activity as of the first day of each month. D. Submit a separate submittal schedule indicating the dates when the submittals are to be sent to the Engineer. 1. List specific dates submittal is to be sent to the Engineer. 2. List specific dates submittal must be processed in order to meet the proposed schedule. 3. Allow a reasonable time to review submittals, taking into consideration the size and complexity of the submittal, the submission of other submittals, and other factors that may affect review time. 4. Allow time for re -submission of the submittals for each item. Contractor is responsible for delays associated with additional time required to review incomplete or erroneous submittals and for the time lost when submittals are submitted for products that do not meet specification requirements. E. Update the schedule at the end of each monthly partial payment period to indicate the progress made on the project to that date. 1.04 SCHEDULE REVISIONS A. Revise the schedule if it appears that the schedule no longer represents the actual progress of the work. 1. Submit a written report if the schedule indicates that the project is more than thirty (30) days behind schedule. The report is to include: a. Number of days behind schedule b. Narrative description of the steps to be taken to bring the project back on schedule c. Anticipated time required to bring the project back on schedule d. Submit a revised schedule indicating the action that the Contractor proposes to take to bring the project back on schedule. B. Revise the schedule to indicate any adjustments in contract time approved by change order. 1. Revised schedule is to be included with Contract Modification Request and in response to Proposed Contract Modifications by the Owner and Engineer for which an extension of time is requested. 2. Failure to submit a revised schedule indicates that the modification shall have no impact on the ability of the Contractor to complete the project on time and that the cost associated with the change of additional plant or work force have been included in the cost proposed for the modification. Progress Schedules 01310-2 KEL00483 C. Updating the project schedule to reflect actual progress is not considered a revision to the project schedule. D. Payment estimates may not be recommended for payment without a revised schedule and if required, the report indicating the Contractor's plan for bringing the project back on schedule. 1.05 FLOAT TIME A. Define float time as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of a chain of activities on the construction schedule. B. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or Owner. C. Contract time cannot be changed by the submission of this schedule. Contract time can only be modified by approved change order. D. Schedule completion date must be the same as the contract completion date. Time between the end of construction and the contract completion date is to be indicated as float time. END OF SECTION Progress Schedules 01310-3 KEL00483 01380 PROJECT PHOTOGRAPHS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the project site to clearly depict pre-existing conditions. 1. Provide a minimum of 2 different views. 2. Photograph a panoramic view of the entire project site. 3. Photograph areas of adjacent property, unusual site conditions, or other areas of special concern. B. Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the project site monthly to clearly depict the progress of construction from the last time photographs were taken. 1. Provide a minimum of 2 different views. 2. Photograph a panoramic view of the entire project site. 3. Photograph significant areas of construction progress. 4. Submit photographs with the monthly pay request. C. Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the project site to clearly depict the completed project. 1. Provide a minimum of 3 different views. 2. Photograph a panoramic view of the entire project site. 3. Photograph all significant areas of completed construction. 4. Completion photographs are not to be taken until all construction trailers, excess materials, trash and debris have been removed. 5. Employ a professional photographer approved by the Engineer to photograph the project. D. All photographs and negatives are to become the property of the Owner. Photographs may not be used for publication, or public or private display without the express written consent of the Owner. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE Photographs shall be clear with proper exposure. New photographs are to be taken immediately if photos of an adequate quality cannot be produced from the negative. Photographs shall be of a quality to permit enlargements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS. Project Photographs 01380-1 KEL00483 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 PHOTOGRAPHS A. Photographs shall betaken with quality 35 mm camera as a minimum. Polarized prints are not acceptable. B. Photographs shall be taken at locations acceptable to the Engineer. C. Provide two (2) glossy 3" x 5" color prints and the negatives for each photograph taken. D. Identify each print on back with: 1. Project name. 2. Date, time, location, and orientation of the exposure. 3. Description of the subject of photograph. E. Submit photograph in clear plastic sheets designed for that purpose. Place only one (1) photograph in each section to allow description on the back to be read without removing the photograph. F. Final photographs are to include, in addition to normal prints and negatives, two (2) 8" x 10" glossy color prints for each of ten (10) photographs selected by the Owner. 3.00 EXECUTION [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Project Photographs 01380-2 KEL00483 01400 QUALITY CONTROL 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Control the quality of work produced and verify that the work performed meets the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. Inspect the work performed by the Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers. Correct defective work. 2. Inspect products to be incorporated into the project. Provide only those products that comply with the Contract Documents. 3. Verify conformance of the work and products with the Contract Documents before notifying the Owner of need for testing. 4. Provide consumable construction materials of adequate quality to provide a finished product that complies with the Contract Documents. 5. Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing laboratory to insure that products proposed for use fully comply with the Contract Documents. 6. Perform tests as indicated in this and other sections of the specifications. Schedule the time and sequence of testing with the Owner and Engineer. Testing is to be observed by the Owner, Engineer, or designated representative. 7. Provide labor, materials, tools, equipment, and related items for testing by the Owner including, but not limited to temporary construction required for testing and operation of new and existing utilities. B. Provide Certified Test Reports on products or constructed works to be incorporated into the project as required by Section 01300, SUBMITTALS. Reports are to indicate that products or constructed works are in compliance with the Contract Documents. C. Provide and maintain a written Quality Control Program that establishes the methods of assuring compliance with the Contract Documents. D. Designate Quality Control personnel at the start of the project. These personnel shall have the authority to monitor the work effectively and to implement and enforce the Quality Control Program. E. Assist the Engineer, Owner, and Owner's testing organization to perform quality assurance activities. 1. Provide access to the work and to the Manufacturer's operations at all times work is in progress. 2. Cooperate fully in the performance of sampling, inspection, and testing. 3. Furnish labor and facilities to: a. Provide access to the work to be tested. b. Obtain and handle samples for testing at the project site or at the source of the product to be tested. c. Facilitate inspections and tests. d. Store and cure test samples. 4. Furnish copies of the tests performed on products. Quality Control 01400-1 KEL00483 5. Provide adequate quantities of representative product to be tested to the laboratory at the designated location. 6. Give the Owner adequate notice before proceeding with work that would interfere with testing. 7. Notify the Engineer and the testing laboratory prior to the time that testing is required. Lead time is to be adequate to allow arrangements to be made for testing. 8. Do not proceed with any work until testing services have been performed and results of tests indicate that the work is acceptable. 9. Provide complete access to the site and make Contract Documents available. 10. Provide personnel and equipment needed to perform sampling or to assist in making the field tests. 11. Testing performed by the Owner will be paid for by the Owner. F. Provide a recognized testing laboratory capable of performing a full range of testing procedures complying with the standards or testing procedures specified. Obtain Owner's approval for the testing laboratory before testing is performed. G. Provide personnel certified to perform the test required. H. Should requirements of this Section of the specification conflict with the requirements of the detailed specifications, the technical specifications shall govern. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE ACTIVITIES BY THE OWNER A. Quality assurance activities of the Owner and Engineer through their own forces or through contracts with materials testing laboratories and survey crews are for the purpose of monitoring the results of the Contractor's work to see that it is in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Quality assurance activities of the Owner and Engineer in no way relieves the Contractor of the obligation to perform work and furnish products and constructed work conforming to the Contract Documents. 2. Failure on the part of the Owner or Engineer to perform or test products or constructed works in no way relieves the Contractor of the obligation to perform work and furnish materials conforming to the Contract Documents. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0 13 00, SUBMITTALS, and shall include: 1. The name of the proposed testing laboratory along with documentation of qualifications, a list of tests that can be performed, and a list of recent projects for which testing has been performed with references from those projects. 2. Test reports per Paragraph 1.07, TEST REPORTS of this specification. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Provide a testing laboratory that complies with the ACIL (American Council of Independent Laboratories) "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications". Quality Control 01400-2 KEL00483 B. Perform testing per recognized test procedures as listed in the various sections of the specifications, standards of the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), or other testing associations. Perform tests in accordance with published procedures for testing issued by these organizations. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the construction site in accordance with recognized test procedures. 1.06 VERIFICATION TESTING A. Provide verification testing when tests performed by the Owner indicate that materials or the results of construction activities are not in conformance with Contract Documents. B. Verification testing is to be provided at the Contractor's expense to verify products or constructed works are in compliance after corrections have been made. C. Tests must comply with recognized methods or with methods recommended by the Owner's testing laboratory and approved by the Engineer. 1.07 TEST REPORTS A. Test reports are to be prepared for all tests. 1. Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report forms. These reports must include the following: a. Name of the Owner, project title and number, equipment installer and general contractor. b. Name of the laboratory, address, and telephone number. c. Name and signature of the laboratory personnel performing the test. d. Description of the product being sampled or tested. e. Date and time of sampling, inspection, and testing. f. Date the report was issued. g. Description of the test performed. h. Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling. i. Location at the site or structure where the test was taken. j. Standard or test procedure used in making the test. k. A description of the results of the test. 1. Statement of compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents. in. Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. B. Distribute copies of the test reports to: No. of Copies Owner 2 Resident Project Representative 1 Engineer 1 Quality Control 01400-3 KEL00483 Contractor 1.08 NON -CONFORMING WORK A. Immediately correct any work that is not in compliance with the Contract Documents or submit a written explanation of why the work is not to be corrected immediately and when the corrective work will be performed. B. Payment for non -conforming work shall be withheld until work is brought into compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.09 LIMITATION OF AUTHORITY OF THE TESTING LABORATORY A. The testing laboratory representatives are limited to providing consultation on the test performed and in an advisory capacity. B. The testing laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Alter the requirements of the contract documents. 2. Accept or reject any portion of the work. 3. Perform any of the duties of the Contractor. 4. Stop the work. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TESTING APPARATUS Furnish testing apparatus and related accessories necessary to perform the tests. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTIVE COATINGS Test protective coatings per Section 09905, PROTECTIVE COATINGS, and per Section 13413 COMPOSITE ELEVATED WATER STORAGE TANK. 3.02 PIPING SYSTEMS A. TEST REQUIREMENTS 1. Perform test on piping systems including piping installed between or connected to existing pipe. 2. Conduct tests on buried pipe to be hydrostatically tested after the trench is completely backfilled. If field conditions permit and if approved by the Engineer, partially backfill the trench and leave the joints open for inspection and conducting of the initial service leak test. Do not conduct the acceptance test until backfilling is complete. 3. Pneumatically test the buried piping and expose joints of the buried piping for the acceptance test. 4. Conduct the test on exposed piping after the piping is completely installed, including supports, hangers, and anchors, but prior to insulation. 5. Do not perform testing on pipe with concrete thrust blocking until the concrete has cured at least five (5) days. Quality Control 01400-4 KEL00483 6. Determine and remedy the cause of the excessive leakage for any pipe failing to meet the specified requirements for water or air tightness. 7. Tests must be successfully completed and reports filed before piping is accepted. File test reports on forms per Section 01800, FORMS. 8. Submit the plan for testing to the Engineer for review at least 10 days before starting the test. 9. Remove and dispose of temporary blocking material and equipment after completion and acceptance of the piping test. 10. Repair any damage to the pipe coating. 11. Clean pipelines so they are totally free flowing prior to final acceptance. 12. Test piping independently from tests on structures. 13. Test method and test pressure depend upon the application of the piping. a. Pressure pipe is defined as piping that is part of a pumped or pressurized system. Perform test for pressure pipe per the procedures indicated in Paragraph B of this section. b. Gravity pipe is defined as piping that depends upon the force of gravity for flow through the pipe, with the exception of process piping described in paragraph d. Perform test for gravity pipe per the procedures indicated in Paragraph C, D, or E of this section. c. Chemical processing lines are to be tested as pressure pipe regardless of the operating conditions. The test pressure is to be 1.5 times the pressure rating of the pipe. d. Process piping between hydraulic structures is to be considered as pressure pipe. Perform the test for this pipe per Paragraph B of this section. The test pressure is to be the maximum hydrostatic head plus 10'. The maximum hydrostatic head is the difference in elevation of the pipe at it lowest point and the maximum top of the wall B. PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTS OF PRESSURE PIPING 1. Perform hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests using methods, and per performance requirements of Section 4 of AWWA C-600. a. The pressure required for hydrostatic pressure test shall be 50% above the normal working pressure. If the normal working pressure cannot be determined, use the pipe pressure rating as the normal working pressure. b. Provide temporary plugs and blocking necessary to maintain the required test pressure. Where piping is cast in the walls for a structure, brace the walls prior to testing as required to prevent load of test pressure from being imposed upon the structure. c. Provide corporation cocks at least 3/4" in diameter, pipe riser, and angle globe valves at each pipe dead-end in order to bleed air from the line. d. Duration of pressure test shall be at least 24 hours. 2. Perform a separate leakage test after the pressure test. a. Perform test at maximum operating pressure as determined by the Engineer for a duration of not less than two (2) hours. b. Repair any visible leaks regardless of the total leakage shown by the test. c. Repair pipelines which fail to meet the test and retest as necessary until the results conform to the test requirements. d. Remove and replace defective materials, pipes, valves, and accessories. e. Test the pipelines in sections by shutting valves or installing temporary plugs as necessary. Quality Control 01400-5 KEL00483 f. Fill the pipeline with water and remove the air. g. Maintain the test pressure in the pipe for the entire test period by means of a force pump. h. Accurately measure the water required to maintain the pressure. The amount of water required is a measure of the leakage. 3. The maximum allowable leakage is determined by the following formula: L = SD(P)1/2 133,200 L is the allowable leakage in gallons per hour; S is the length of pipe tested in feet; D is the nominal diameter of the pipe in inches; and P is the test pressure in pounds per square inch gauge. Leakage is defined as the volume of water provided to maintain the test pressure after the pipe has been filled with water, the air expelled and the pipe brought to test pressure. 4. Pipe with visible leaks or leakage exceeding the maximum allowable leakage is considered defective and must be corrected. 3.03 ELECTRICAL TESTING A. QUALIFICATIONS 1. Unless otherwise specified, testing shall be performed by qualified personnel with a minimum of five (5) years' experience installing and testing electrical equipment and machinery. 2. Except as permitted by the Owner, the firm and individuals performing the tests shall be "third party", not providing other services or materials, or otherwise related or affiliated with other contractors or suppliers for this project. B. REPORT FORMS The appropriate test report for the items being tested shall be completed in its entirety. Listed data that is not applicable or cannot be obtained shall be noted "N/A" or documented with an explanation for the omission. Incomplete test forms will not be witnessed by the Owner or his representative and the test shall be required to be repeated before acceptance is granted. Substitute forms, when provided by the Engineer, shall require recording similar data and test equipment as that specified. C. TEST EQUIPMENT 1. The testing firm or individuals shall provide and test equipment and materials necessary to perform the requested tests. 2. Test equipment and apparatus shall be appropriate for the full range and duration of the test to be performed. 3. The test operator shall demonstrate to the Owner or his representative, that the test equipment is functioning properly, prior to the commencement of the test. If a failure of the test equipment should occur during any portion of a test, the test shall be suspended and the equipment repaired or replaced. The test shall then be repeated in its entirety or as otherwise required by the Owner or his representative. 4. A copy of the test equipment calibration certificate shall be provided to the owner prior to the commencement of the test. Most recent test equipment calibration dates shall not Quality Control 01400-6 KEL00483 exceed six (6) months prior to the date of the test, and accuracy shall be traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology. D. EXECUTION 1. If the circuit, equipment or machinery being tested does not pass, appropriate repairs or replacements shall be made and the test shall be repeated as directed by the Owner or his representative. 2. The general provisions of Section 01400-1.00 and other applicable sections of these specifications and plans regarding testing, shall apply to all tests. If test procedures or equipment conflicts occur between the various sections and/or Manufacturer's recommendations, the more rigid requirement shall prevail. E. ELECTRICAL CABLE 1. COMMUNICATION CABLE AND CONDUCTORS: Test forms shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be submitted for the Owner's approval prior to performing the following tests: a. Shielded pair, telephone, paging, signaling and computer cables shall be tested for continuity, short circuits and grounds with a low voltage source, not to exceed the insulation rating of the conductors or jacket. b. Fiber-optic cable shall be tested, per the Manufacturer's recommendation, between terminating ends for each circuit. Cables, splices (where permitted), and connectors shall be tested for continuity, band width (maximum), and attenuation losses. 2. 600 VOLT CABLE AND CONDUCTORS: Power and control conductors rated at 600 volts shall be tested with an insulation resistance tester at 1,000 volts, with respect to ground, and at 1,000 volts with respect to all other conductors in each circuit. Suitable ground connections shall be verified and maintained throughout the test. The test shall be performed and recorded as required by the "600 Volt Cable Test Report" or form provided by the Engineer. Each circuit shall be tested and recorded for continuity between terminating ends, with a low voltage source. 3. 5KV CABLE AND CONDUCTORS: a. 5KV cable shall be insulation resistance tested at 2,500 volts with respect to ground at 2,500 volts with respect to all other conductors in each circuit. b. 5KV cables shall be H -Pot tested, incrementally to 25 KVDC 15 minutes per ANSI/IEE STD 400. Leakage current shall be recorded in the spaces provided, at the time intervals shown, on the "Medium Voltage Cable Test Report," or the form provided by the Engineer. In no case shall the cable Manufacturer's maximum test values or procedures be exceeded. c. Individual conductor resistance tests shall be performed and recorded in the spaces provided. Each circuit shall be tested and recorded for continuity between terminations ends. Provide additional tests and checks as requested by the Manufacturer. 4. 15KV CABLE AND CONDUCTORS: a. 15KV cable shall be insulation resistance tested at 2500 volts with respect to all other conductors in each circuit. Quality Control 01400-7 KEL00483 b. 15KV cable shall be Hi -Pot tested, incrementally to 55KVDC for 15 minutes per ANSI/IEE STD. 400. Leakage current shall be recorded in the spaces provided, at the time interval, shown, on the "Medium Voltage Cable Test Report," or form provided by the Engineer. In no case shall the cable Manufacturer's recommended maximum test values or procedures be exceeded. Individual conductor resistance tests shall be performed and recorded in the spaces provided. Each circuit shall be tested and recorded for continuity between terminating ends. Provide additional tests and checks as required by the manufacturer. F. TRANSFORMERS 1. Single and 3-phase, liquid filled and dry transformers rated 5KVA and larger, shall be tested in accordance with the "Transformer Test Report," or form provided by the Engineer. 2. Record the following information and attach to the test report. a. Verify proper operation of all fans, alarms, and other auxiliary and monitoring devices. b. Verify "tap changer" operation, if applicable, in all positions. Set and secure "tap changer" to position recommended by the Owner or Engineer. c. Obtain insulating liquid sample from all liquid filled transformers. Submit sample to testing laboratory, approved by the Owner for analysis. Standard insulating liquid tests, as required by the Owner or Engineer, shall be performed. Test results shall be delivered to the Owner within 30 days from sampling. d. Perform insulation resistance tests at the test values shown below for the following equipment. e. Tests shall be performed from each winding to ground and winding to winding. Primary and secondary sections shall be tested separately. f. In no case shall the Manufacturer's recommended maximum test values or procedures be exceeded. _,a 0-600 VOLTS 1,000 VOLTS 601-5,000 VOLTS 2,500VOLTS 5,001-15,000VOLTS 5,000 VOLTS 15,001-39,000 VOLTS 10,000 VOLTS g. Provide additional tests and checks as recommended by the manufacturer before energizing. h. Energize transformer. Measure and record primary and secondary volts and amps under no load and connected load conditions. END OF SECTION Quality Control 01400-8 KEL00483 01568 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to provide erosion and sediment control for the duration of the construction period including furnishing, installing and maintaining erosion and sediment control structures and procedures and the proper removal when no longer required. The intent of this specification is to provide guidelines for the Contractor to adhere to all State, Federal, and Local environmental regulations. It is also the intent to provide preventive measures to keep sediment from entering any storm water system, including open channels. It is the Contractor's responsibility to adhere to all State, Federal and Local requirements. While the Resident Representative may require the Contractor to install erosion control devices during construction, this will in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of all governing authorities having jurisdiction. The Specifications and the Plans are not represented as being comprehensive, but rather to convey the intent to provide complete slope protection and erosion control for both the Owner's and adjacent property. B. Erosion control measures shall be established at the beginning of construction and maintained during the entire length of construction. On-site areas which are subject to severe erosion and off-site areas which are especially vulnerable to damage from erosion and/or sedimentation are to be identified and receive additional erosion control measures as directed by the Owner, the Engineer, or the Resident Representative. C. All land -disturbing activities shall be planned and conducted to minimize the size of the area to be exposed at any one time and to minimize the time of exposure. D. Surface water runoff originating upgrade of exposed area shall be controlled to reduce erosion and sediment loss during the period of exposure. E. When the increase in the peak rates and velocity of storm water runoff resulting from a land - disturbing activity is sufficient to cause accelerated erosion of the receiving ditch or stream, the Contractor shall install measures to control both the velocity and rate of release so as to minimize accelerated erosion and increased sedimentation of the stream as directed by the Owner, the Engineer, or the Resident Representative. F. All land -disturbing activities shall be planned and conducted so as to minimize off-site sedimentation damage. G. The Contractor shall be responsible for periodically cleaning out and disposing of all sediment once the storage capacity of the drainage feature or structure receiving the sediment Erosion and Sediment Control During Construction 01568-1 KEL00483 is reduced by one-half. The Contractor shall also be responsible for cleaning out and disposing of all sediment at the time of completion of the Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS. Record Data for various erosion and sediment control devices. 1.04 STANDARDS [NOT USED] 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE [NOT USED] 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS; CODES AND ORDINANCES Comply with the local codes and ordinances. If local codes and ordinances require more stringent or additional erosion and sediment control measures during construction, Contractor shall provide such measures. 1.07 OPTIONS [NOT USED] 1.08 GUARANTEES [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. STRAW BALES: Straw bales shall weigh a minimum of fifty (50) pounds and shall be at least 30" in length. Bales shall be composed entirely of vegetable matter and be free of seeds. Binding shall be either wire or nylon string, jute or cotton binding is unacceptable. Bales shall be used for not more than three months before being replaced. However, if weather conditions cause biological degradation of the straw bales, they shall be replaced sooner than the three month time period to prevent a loss of structural integrity of the dike. B. SILT FENCE: Silt fence fabric shall be a nylon reinforced polypropylene fabric which has a built-in cord running the entire length of the top edge of the fabric. The fabric must meet the following minimum criteria: Tensile Strength, ASTM D4632 90 lbs., Puncture Rating, ASTM D4833 60 lbs., Mullen Burst Rating, ASTM D3786 200 psi, Apparent Opening Size, U.S. Sieve No. 40 Silt fence shall be "Enviro Fence" preassembled silt fence, AMXCO Silt Stop prefabricated silt fence, AMOCO Style 2155 preassembled silt fence or approved equal. C. SILT FENCE POSTS: A minimum 2" x 2" (nominal) x 54" pressure treated wood posts of Number 2 Grade southern yellow pine or approved equal. Erosion and Sediment Control During Construction 01568-2 KEL00483 D. SAND BAG: Sand bag material shall be polypropylene, polyethylene, polyimide or cotton burlap woven fabric, minimum unit weight four (4) ounces per square yard, mullen burst strength exceeding 300 psi and ultraviolet stability exceeding 70%. Length shall be 24 to 30 inches, width shall be 16 to 18 inches and thickness shall be six (6) to eight (8) inches and having an approximate weight of 40 pounds. Sand bags shall be filled with coarse grade sand, free from deleterious material. All sand shall pass through a No. 10 sieve. E. SOIL RETENTION BLANKET: Soil retention blankets shall consist of a geocomposite of excelsior or fiber blanket with an extruded plastic net attached to the tope side. The plastic net shall be photodegradable and the excelsior or fiber blanket shall be made smolder resistant without the use of chemicals. Soil retention blankets shall be high velocity type to resist severe runoff. The soil retention blanket shall be one (1) of the following classes and types: 1. Class 1. "Slope Protection" a. Type A. Slopes of 3:1 or flatter - Clay soils b. Type B. Slopes of 3:1 or flatter - Sandy soils c. Type C. Slopes steeper than 3:1 - Clay soils d. Type D. Slopes steeper than 3:1 - Sandy soils 2. Class 2. "Flexible Channel Liner" a. Type E. Short-term duration (Up to 2 Years) Shear Stress (tD)< 1.0 lb./sq. ft. b. Type F. Short-term duration (Up to 2 Years) Shear Stress (td) 1.0 to 2.0 lb./sq. ft. c. Type G. Long-term duration (Longer than 2 Years) Shear Stress (td) > 2.0 to < 5.0 lb./sq. ft. d. Type H. Long-term duration (Longer than 2 Years) Shear Stress (td) greater than 0 Equal to 5.0 lb./sq. ft. The Contractor has the option of selecting an approved soil retention blanket provided that selection conforms to the following list of approved soil retention blankets for slope protection applications: 3. CLASS I. SLOPE PROTECTION a. TYPE A: Slopes of 3:1 or Flatter -Clay Soils 1) Airtrol(& ANTI-WASH®/GEOJUTE® (Regular) 2) Contech Standards® 3) Contech Standards Plus® 4) Green Triangle Regular® 5) Green Triangle Superior® 6) GREENSTREAKO PEC MAT 7) Curlex(9 8) North American Green® S150 9) North American Green® S75 10) North American Green(lD SC150 11) POLYJUTETm 407/GT 12) SOIL SAVER® 13) TerraJute® Erosion and Sediment Control During Construction 01568-3 KEL00483 14) Verdyol(V ERO-MAT® 15) Xcel Regular(& 16) Xcel Superior® b. TYPE B: Slopes of 3:1 or Flatter -Sandy Soils 1) Contech Standards® 2) Contech Standards Plus(& 3) GEOCOIR®/DEKOWE(& 700 4) Green Triangle Superior(& 5) Green Triangle Regular® 6) North American Green(& S75 7) North American Green® SC150 8) North American Green® S150 9) POLYJUTETM 407/GT 10) TerraJute(V 11) Verdyol(& ERO-MAT(& 12) Xcel Superior® 13) Xcel Regular® c. TYPE C: Slopes Steeper than 3:1 -Clay Soils 1) Airtrol® 2) ANTI-WASH®/GEOJUTE(V (Regular) 3) Contech Standards Plus® 4) Curlex® 5) Green Triangle Superior(& 6) GREENSTREAKO PEC -MAT 7) North American Green® SC 150 8) North American Green(& S 150 9) POLYJUTETm 407/GT 10) SOIL SAVER® 11) TerraJute(& 12) Xcel Superior(& d. TYPED: Slopes Steeper than 3:1 -Sandy Soils 1) Contech Standards Plus(& 2) GEOCOIR(&/DEKOWE® 700 3) Green Triangle Superior(& 4) North American Green(& S 150 5) North American Green(& SC 150 6) POLYJUTETM 407GT 7) TerraJute(& 8) Xcel Superior(& 4. CLASS II: FLEXIBLE CHANNEL LINER PROTECTION e. TYPE E: Shear Stress (td) 1) < 1.0 Lbs/Sq Ft 2) GEOCOIR®/DEKOWE® 900 3) Hi -Velocity Curlex(& 4) Xcel® Super Duty(& f. TYPE F: Shear Stress (td) 1) 1.0 - 2.0 Lbs/Sq Ft 2) GEOCOIR®/DEKOWE® 900 Erosion and Sediment Control During Construction 01568-4 KEL00483 3) Hi -Velocity Curlex(& 4) Xcel® Super Duty(& g. TYPE G: Shear Stress (td) 1) > 2.0 Lbs/Sq Ft < 5.0 Lbs/Sq Ft 2) BonTerra(& SFB 12 3) Enkamat(& 7020 4) GREENSTREAKO PEC -MAT 5) LANDLOK ERCM 450 6) MIRAMAT 1000 7) North American Green® P300 8) TENSAR(& Erosion Blanket TB -1000 h. TYPE H: Shear Stress (td) 1) > 5.0 Lbs/Sq Ft 2) BonTerra(& SFB 12 3) Enkamat® 7020 4) GREENSTREAKO PEC -MAT 5) LANDLOK ERCM 450 6) MIRAMAT 1000 7) North American Green® P300 8) TENSARV Erosion Blanket TB -1000 F. FILTER AGGREGATE: Class 1 Aggregate Fill in accordance with Section 02256, AGGREGATE FILL CLASSIFICATIONS. G. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU): Nominal 8" x 8" x 16" hollow concrete masonry units unless indicated otherwise. CMU shall meet the requirements of ASTM C-90, Grade N. H. FASTENERS: Fasteners shall conform to the requirements of the various soil retention blanket manufacturers. I. STONE STABILIZATION: Class 4 Aggregate Fill in accordance with Section 02256, AGGREGATE FILL CLASSIFICATIONS. J. GEOTEXTILE - EROSION CONTROL: Geotextile shall be in accordance with Section 02263, GEOTEXTILE - EROSION CONTROL. 2.02 MIXES [NOT USED] 2.03 FABRICATIONS [NOT USED] 2.04 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.02 INSTALLATION Erosion and Sediment Control During Construction 01568-5 KEL00483 A. TEMPORARY STRAW BALE DIKE 1. Straw bales shall be embedded a minimum of 4" and securely anchored using 2" x 2" wood stakes driven through the bales into the ground a minimum of 6". Straw bales are to be placed directly adjacent to one another leaving no gap between them. 2. Bales shall be placed in a single row, lengthwise on proposed line, with ends of adjacent bales tightly abutting one another. In swales and ditches, the barrier shall extend to such a length that the bottoms of the end bales are higher in elevation than the top of the lowest middle bale. Additional bales shall be placed behind the first row where the bales abut each other. The additional bale is used to prevent unfiltered runoff from escaping between the bales. 3. The excavated soil shall be backfilled against the barrier. Backfill shall conform to ground level on the downhill side and shall be built up to 4" above ground level on the uphill side. Loose straw shall be scattered over the area immediately uphill from a straw barrier. B. SILT FENCE The purpose of a silt fence is to intercept and detain water -borne sediment from unprotected areas to a limited extent. The Contractor shall excavate a 6" by 6" trench for site fence bedding along the lower perimeters of the site where necessary to prevent sediment from entering any drainage system. The Contractor shall install the silt fence in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. Silt fence is used during the period of construction near the perimeter of a disturbed area to intercept sediment while allowing water to percolate through. This fence shall remain in place until the disturbed area is permanently stabilized. Silt fence should not be used where there is a concentration of water in a channel or drainage way or where soil conditions prevent a minimum toe -in depth of 6" or installation of support post to depth of 12". Fabric shall overlap at abutting ends a minimum of 3' and shall be jointed such that no leakage or bypass occurs. If concentrated flow occurs after installation, corrective action must be taken such as placing rock berm in the areas of concentrated flow. C. SAND BAG BERM 1. The purpose of a sandbag berm is to intercept sediment -laden water from disturbed areas such as construction in steam beds, create a retention pond, detain sediment and release water in sheet flow. 2. A temporary sand bag bern shall be installed across a channel or right of way in a developing or disturbed area and should be used when the contributing drainage area is greater than 5 acres. The berm shall be a minimum height of 18", measured from the top of the existing ground at the upslope toe to the top of the berm. The berm shall be sized to have a minimum width of 48" measured at the bottom of the berm and 18" measured at the top of the berm. 3. The sand bag berm shall be inspected after each rain. The sand bags shall be reshaped or replaced as needed during inspection. Additional inspections shall be made daily by the responsible party and when the silt reaches 6", the accumulated silt shall be removed and disposed of at an approved site in a manner that will not contribute to additional siltation. The sand bag berm shall be left in place until all upstream areas are stabilized and accumulated silt removed; removal must be done by hand. Erosion and Sediment Control During Construction 01568-6 ICEL00483 D. SOIL RETENTION BLANKETS 1. A soil retention blanket (SRB) is a geotextile or biodegradable fabric placed over disturbed areas to limit the effects of erosion due to rainfall impact and runoff across barren soil. Soil retention blankets are manufactured by a wide variety of vendors addressing a wide variety of conditions such as vegetation establishment and high velocity flow. Blankets are used in areas which are difficult to stabilize such as steep slopes, drainage swales or high pedestrian traffic areas. 2. The soil retention blanket, whether installed as slope protection or as flexible channel liner, shall be placed within 24 hours after seeding or sodding operations have been completed, or as approved by the Engineer. Prior to placing the blanket, the area to be covered shall be relatively free of all rocks or clods over 1-1/2" in maximum dimension and all sticks or other foreign material which will prevent the close contact of the blanket with the soil. The area shall be smooth and free of ruts and other depressions. If as a result of rain, the prepared bed becomes crusted or eroded or if any eroded places, ruts or depressions exist for any reason, the Contractor shall be required to rework the soil until it is smooth and to reseed or resod the area at the Contractor's expense. Installation and anchorage of the soil retention blanket shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. E. PROTECTION OF BARE AREAS 1. Apply seeding and soil retention blanket to bare areas including new embankment areas, fills, stripped areas, graded areas or otherwise disturbed areas, which have a grade greater than 5% or which will be exposed for more than 30 days. 2. Bare working areas on which it is not practical or desirable to install seeding and soil retention blankets, as determined by the Engineer, such as areas under proposed building slabs, shall be temporarily sloped to drain at a minimum of 0.2% and a maximum of 5% grade. These areas shall then be "trackwalked" with a crawler dozer traveling up and down the slope to form the effect of small "terraces" with the tracks of the dozer. Apply a minimum of three (3) coverages to each area with the dozer tracks. 3. Route runoff from the areas through the appropriate silt fence system. 4. Protect earth spoil areas by "trackwalking" and silt fences. F. INTERCEPTOR SWALE I . Interceptor swales may have a v -shape or be trapezoidal with a flat bottom and side slopes of 3:1 or flatter. These are used to shorten the length of exposed slope by intercepting runoff and can also serve as perimeter swales preventing off-site runoff from entering the disturbed area or prevent sediment -laden runoff from leaving the construction site or disturbed area. The outflow from a swale must be directed to a stabilized outlet or sediment trapping device. The swales should remain in place until the disturbed area is permanently stabilized. 2. Stone Stabilization shall be used when grades exceed 2% or velocities exceed 6' per second and shall consist of a layer of crushed stone 3" thick, or flexible channel liner soil retention blankets. Stabilization shall extend across the bottom of the swale and up both sides of the channel to minimum height of 3" above the design water surface elevation based on a two year storm. 3. Interceptor swale shall be installed across exposed slopes during construction and should intercept no more than five (5) acres of runoff. Swales shall have a minimum bottom width of T-0" and a maximum depth of 1'-6" with side slopes of 3:1 or flatter. Swale Erosion and Sediment Control During Construction 01568-7 KEL00483 must have positive drainage for its entire length to an outlet. When the slope exceeds 3%, or velocities exceed 4' per second (regardless of slope), stone stabilization is required. Check dams are also recommended to reduce velocities in the swales possibly reducing the amount of stabilization necessary. Swales should be inspected on a weekly basis during wet weather and repairs should be made promptly to maintain a consistent cross section. 4. All trees, brush, stumps, obstructions and other material shall be removed and disposed of so as not to interfere with the proper functioning of the swale. 5. The swale shall be excavated or shaped to line, grade, and cross-section as required to meet criteria specified herein and be free of bank projections or other irregularities which will impede normal flow. 6. All earth removed and not needed in construction shall be disposed of in an approved spoils site so that it will be conveyed to a sediment trapping device. 7. Diverted runoff from a disturbed or exposed upland area shall be conveyed to a sediment trapping device. 8. The on-site location may need to be adjusted to meet field conditions in order to utilized the most suitable outlet. 9. Minimum compaction for the swale shall be 90% standard proctor. G. DIVERSION DIKE 1. A diversion dike intercepts runoff from small upland areas and diverts it away from exposed slopes to a stabilized outlet, such as a rock berm, sandbag berm, or stone outlet structure. Dikes are generally used for the duration of construction to intercept and reroute runoff from disturbed areas to prevent excessive erosion until permanent drainage features are installed and/or slopes are stabilized. 2. Stone Stabilization (required for velocities in excess of 6 fps) shall consist of Class 4 aggregate fill in accordance with Section 02256, AGGREGATE FILL CLASSIFICATIONS, and shall be placed in a layer of at least 3" thickness and shall extend a minimum height of 3" above the design water surface up the existing slope and the upstream face of the dike. 3. Geotextile shall be placed under the stone stabilization and shall be in accordance with Section 02263, GEOTEXTILE-EROSION CONTROL. 4. Diversion dikes shall be installed prior to and maintained for the duration of construction and should intercept no more than ten (10) acres of runoff. Dikes shall have a minimum top width of 2'-0" and a minimum height of compacted fill of 18" measured from the top of the existing ground at the upslope toe to top of the dike and having side slopes of 3:1 or flatter. The soil for the dike shall be placed in lifts of 8" or less and be compacted to 95% standard proctor density. The channel which is formed by dike must have positive drainage for its entire length to an outlet. When the slope exceeds 2%, or velocities exceed 6' per second (regardless of slope), stabilization is required. Situations in which velocities do not exceed 6 fps, vegetation may be used to control erosion. 5. Diverted runoff from a protected or stabilized area shall have its outlet flow directed to an undisturbed stabilized area or into a level spreader or grade stabilization structure. 6. Diverted runoff form a disturbed or exposed area shall be conveyed to sediment trap such as a rock berm, temporary sediment trap or sediment basin or to an area protected by any of these measures. Erosion and Sediment Control During Construction 01568-8 KEL00483 H. TEMPORARY STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE 1. The work shall consist of constructing temporary stabilized construction entrances at all entry points to the project site and shall remain in place for the duration of the construction period to prevent sediment from leaving the project site and becoming a nuisance in a public right-of-way. This includes all labor and materials associated with installation and maintenance of the entrance and a sediment trap. 2. Stone Stabilization used for the entrance shall be Class 4 aggregate fill in accordance with Section 02256, AGGREGATE FILL CLASSIFICATIONS. 3. Geotextile shall be placed under the stone stabilization and shall be in accordance with Section 02261, SOIL STABILIZATION. 4. A temporary construction entrance shall be installed at any point where traffic will be entering or leaving a construction site to or from a public right-of-way, street, alley, sidewalk or parking area. The purpose of a stabilized construction entrance is to reduce or eliminate the tracking or flowing of sediment into graded or incorporate a drainage swale to prevent runoff form leaving the construction site. 5. The temporary construction entrance shall be maintained in a condition which will prevent tracking or flowing of sediment into public right-of-way. This may require periodic top dressing with additional stone as conditions demand. All sediment spilled, dropped, washed or tracked into public rights-of-way must be removed immediately by the contractor. 6. When necessary, vehicles must be cleaned to remove sediment prior to entrance onto public right-of-way. When washing is required, it shall be done on an area stabilized with crushed stone which drains into an approved sediment trap or sediment basin or other sedimentation/filtration device. All sediment shall be prevented from entering any storm drain, ditch or watercourse using approved methods. I. LOCATION OF EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL STRUCTURES 1. Locate erosion and sediment control structures as required to prevent erosion and removal of sediment from the project site. Silt fences shall be required for disturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. Each silt fence installation shall have a minimum net length (exclusive of embedments into diversion dikes or other ineffective areas) of 25'. The runoff from a maximum of one (1) acre of disturbed area or soil stockpile/ spoil area shall be routed through any individual silt fence installation. 2. Install diversion dikes to divert runoff to the silt fence installation. 3. Install silt traps at the inlet (upstream) end of the drainage structures, including open channels, through which runoff from disturbed areas or soil stockpiles/spoil areas may drain. 4. Provide an overall erosion and sediment control system which protects disturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. The system shall be modified by the Contractor from time to time to effectively control erosion and sediment during construction. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain erosion and sediment control structures and procedures in full working order at all times during construction. This shall include any necessary repair or replacement of items which have become damaged or ineffective. Remove sediment on a regular basis which accumulates in sediment control devices and place the material in approved earth spoil areas or return the material to the area from which it eroded. Erosion and Sediment Control During Construction 01568-9 KEL00483 B. Upon completion of construction, properly remove the temporary erosion and sediment control structures and complete the area as indicated. C. Soil retention blankets will not require removal if installed on a finished graded area specified to receive seeding. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL In the event of conflict between the requirements and storm water pollution control laws, rules or regulations or other Federal, State or Local agencies, the more restrictive laws, rules or regulations shall apply. 3.05 CLEAN AND ADJUST [NOT USED] 3.06 SCHEDULES Prior to start of construction, submit schedules to the Owner and Engineer for accomplishment of temporary and permanent erosion control work as area applicable for clearing and grubbing, grading, construction and paving. Also submit a proposed method of erosion and dust control on haul roads and borrow pits and a plan for disposal of waste materials. END OF SECTION Erosion and Sediment Control During Construction 01568-10 KEL00483 01600 PRODUCTS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide products for this project that comply with the requirements of this section. Specific requirements of the detailed equipment specification govern in the case of a conflict with the requirements of this Section. B. Comply with applicable specifications and standards. C. Comply with size, make, type, and quality specified or as modified per Section 01040, PROJECT ADMINISTRATION. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. DESIGN CRITERIA 1. Assume responsibility for the design of the products to include structural stability and operational capability. 2. Design members to withstand all loads imposed by installation, erection, and operation of the product without deformation, failure, or adversely affecting the operational requirements of the product. Size and strength of materials for structural members are specified as minimums only. 3. Design mechanical and electrical components for all loads, currents, stresses, and wear imposed by start-up and normal operations of the equipment without deformation, failure, or adversely affecting the operation of the unit. Mechanical and electrical components specified for equipment are specified as the minimum acceptable for the equipment. B. COORDINATION 1. Provide coordination of the entire project, including verification that structures, piping, and equipment components to be furnished and installed by the Contractor or by others for this project are compatible. 2. Determine that the equipment furnished by Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier employed in this project is compatible with the Contract design requirements and with the equipment and materials furnished by the others. 3. Electrical components provided for equipment shall comply with all provisions of Division 16 of these Contract Documents. 4. Protective coatings and paints applied to equipment shall be fully compatible with the final coatings to be field applied in accordance with Section 09905, PROTECTIVE COATINGS. C. ADAPTATION OF EQUIPMENT 1. Drawings and specifications are prepared for the specified products. Make modifications to incorporate the products into the project at no cost to the Owner, if a substitution for a product is requested and approved in accordance with Section 01040, PROJECT ADMINISTRATION. Products 01600-1 KEL00483 2. Do not provide a product with a physical size that exceeds the available space. Consideration may be given to the acceptance of these products equipment if the Contractor assumes all costs necessary to incorporate the item and the Engineer approves such revisions. 3. Coordinate electrical requirements for the products to be installed in the project, including revisions in electrical equipment components wiring and other factors necessary to incorporate the component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS, and shall include: 1. Certificates of Adequacy of Design, as described in SECTION 01300, SUBMITTALS; 2. Equipment Installation Reports per SECTION 01650, STARTING SYSTEMS; 3. Other documentation as required by detailed equipment specifications. 1.04 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standard shall apply as if written here in its entirety: ASTM A-48 "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Casting" B. Except where otherwise indicated, structural and miscellaneous fabricated steel used in items of equipment shall conform to the Standards of the American Institute of Steel Construction. 1.05 GUARANTEES A. Guarantee products furnished by the Contractor under this contract against: 1. Faulty or inadequate design 2. Improper assembly or erection 3. Defective workmanship or materials 4. Leakage, breakage, or other failure B. Guarantee the products installed under this contract, including products furnished by the Owner, against leakage, breakage, or other failure due to improper assembly or erection and against improper installation of the equipment. The guarantee period shall be as defined in the General Conditions. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Design, fabricate, assemble, deliver and install according to normally accepted engineering and shop practices, except where a higher standard of quality is required by the Contract Documents. B. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gages. Like parts are to be interchangeable. Products 01600-2 KEL00483 C. Two (2) or more items of the same kind are to be identical and made by the same manufacturer. D. Provide products suitable for the intended service. E. Adhere to the equipment capacities, sizes, and dimensions indicated by the Contract Documents. F. Do not use products for any purpose other than that for which it is designed. G. Provide new products unless previously used products are specifically allowed in the Contract Documents. H. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests. I. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions. J. Iron castings shall be tough, close -grained gray iron free from blowholes, flaws, or excessive shrinkage and shall conform to ASTM A-48. K. Structural members shall be considered as subject to shock or vibratory loads. L. Unless otherwise indicated, steel which will be submerged, all or in part, during normal operation of the equipment shall be at least 1/4" thick. All edges are to be chamfered to preclude any sharp exposed edges. 2.02 ELECTRIC MOTORS A. Unless otherwise required by the detailed equipment specifications, motors furnished with equipment shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Motors shall be designed and applied in compliance with NEMA, ANSI, IEEE, and AFBMA standards and the NEC for the specific duty imposed by the driven equipment. 2. Where frequent starting occurs, motors shall be designed for frequent starting duty equivalent to the duty service required by the driven equipment. 3. Unless recognized and defined by the standards and codes for intermittent duty as a standard industry practice, motors shall be rated for continuous duty at 40 degrees C ambient. Motor temperature rise above 40 degrees C ambient on continuous operation at nameplate horsepower shall not exceed the NEMA limit. 4. Motors shall be designed for full voltage starting. 5. Motor bearing life shall be based upon the actual operating load conditions imposed by the driven equipment. 6. Motors shall be sized for the altitude at the location where the equipment is to be installed. 7. Motors with 1.0 service factor shall not be loaded more than 87 percent of the nameplate horsepower. Motors with a 1.15 service factor shall not be loaded more than 100 percent of the nameplate horsepower. Products 01600-3 KEL00483 8. Where the detailed specifications call for encapsulated motor windings, the motor shall have a sealed insulation system designed for a more severe environment than usual varnish treatments can withstand. The insulation system shall be General Electric "Polyseal", Allis-Chalmers "Poxeal", or U.S. Motors "Everseal". Motors in this case may not be single voltage rated. 9. Motors shall have a clamp -type grounding terminal inside the motor conduit box. 10. Motors with external conduit boxes shall have oversized conduit boxes. B. It is intended that the Manufacturer use his standard motor on integrally constructed motor driven equipment such as appliances, hand tools, etc., which would otherwise require redesign of the complete unit in order to provide a motor having the specified features. C. Unless otherwise required by the detailed equipment specifications, motors within the horsepower ranges indicated below shall be rated and constructed as follows: 1. Below 1/2 HP: a. 115 volt, 60 hz, single-phase. b. Dripproof in clean and dry locations; TEFP in all other locations. c. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings. d. Built-in manual -reset thermal protector; or furnished with integrally mounted stainless steel enclosed manual motor -overload switch. 2. 1/2 to 1 HP: a. 230/460 volt, 60 hz, 3 -phrase. b. Dripproof in clean and dry locations; TEFC in all other locations. c. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings. 3. 1-1 /2 HP and Above: d. 230/460 [208] volt, 60 hz, 3 -phrase. e. Dripproof in clean and dry locations; TEFC in all other locations. f. Oil or grease lubricated anti -friction or oil lubricated sleeve bearings. g. Vertical motors shall have fifteen (15) year average life thrust bearings. D. Motors with horsepower ratings of 15 horsepower or greater shall be provided with space heaters to operate on 120 volt single-phase service. 2.03 EQUIPMENT APPURTENANCES Cover belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, and other moving or rotating parts on all sides by a safety guard. A. Fabricate safety guards from 16 USS gage or heavier galvanized or aluminum -clad sheet steel or 1/2" mesh galvanized expanded metal. B. Design guards for easy installation and removal. C. Provide galvanized supports and accessories for each guard. D. Provide stainless steel bolts and hardware. Products 01600-4 KEL00483 E. Provide safety guards in outdoor locations designed to prevent the entrance of rain and dripping water. 2.04 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Provide suitable anchor bolts for each product. B. Provide anchor bolts, with templates or setting drawings, sufficiently early to permit setting the anchor bolts when the structural concrete is placed. C. Provide two (2) nuts for each bolt. D. Provide anchor bolts for products mounted on baseplates that are long enough to permit 1-1/2" of grout beneath the baseplate and to provide adequate anchorage into structural concrete. E. Provide stainless steel anchor bolts, nuts, and washers. 2.05 SPECIAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES Furnish tools, instruments, lifting and handling devices, and accessories necessary for proper maintenance and adjustment that are available only from the Product Vendor or are not commonly available. 2.06 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLAQUES [NOT USED] 2.07 LUBRICATION SYSTEMS FOR EQUIPMENT A. Provide equipment lubricated by systems which: 1. Require attention no more frequently than weekly during continuous operation. 2. Do not require attention during start-up or shutdown. 3. Do not waste lubricants. B. Provide lubricants to fill lubricant reservoirs and to replace lubricant consumed during testing, start-up, and operation prior to acceptance of equipment by the Owner. 2.08 INSULATION OF PIPING Insulate all piping on or related to equipment as required to prevent freezing under any condition. Insulate piping per the Manufacturer's written instruction. 3.00 EXECUTION Products 01600-5 KEL00483 3.01 INSTALLATION Install equipment including equipment pre -selected or furnished by the Owner as part of this project as if this equipment had been selected and purchased by the Contractor. Assume responsibility for proper installation, start-up and making the necessary adjustments so that the equipment is placed in proper operating condition per SECTION 01650, STARTING SYSTEMS. 3.02 LUBRICATION Lubricate all products provided or installed for this project, including products furnished by the Owner, per the Manufacturer's written recommendations until the product is accepted by the Owner. END OF SECTION Products 01600-6 KEL00483 01650 STARTING SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide step-by-step procedures for the starting of various systems, including equipment, instrumentation and SCADA. A. Provide pre -start up inspections by equipment manufacturers. B. Provide instruction and demonstration of operation, adjustment, and maintenance of each system and the component parts. C. Place each system in service and operate the system to prove performance and provide for initial correction of defects in workmanship, calibration, and operation. D. Provide for initial maintenance and operation. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS, and shall include: 1. A Plan of Action for testing, checking, and starting major equipment and process piping systems. Submit reports as required by this specification. 2. Equipment Installation Reports on form shown in SECTION 01800, FORMS per Section 01300, SUBMITTALS. 3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals per Section 01730, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS. 1.03 STANDARDS Comply with any standards associated with the testing or start-up of equipment, as listed in the various sections of the specifications. 1.04 SPECIAL JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not start or test any apparatus until the complete unit has been installed and thoroughly checked. B. A representative of the Manufacturer shall be in attendance of tests and start-up procedures when required by these specifications. B. Submit an Equipment Installation Report per Section 01800, FORMS for the equipment installed on the project. Starting Systems 01650-1 KEL00483 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TESTING INSTRUMENTATION Furnish any instrumentation or other testing devices needed to conduct tests. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURERS' REPRESENTATIVES A. The Manufacturer's representative for inspection, supervision of installation, and training must be an experienced and competent technical (not sales) representative of the Manufacturer or Supplier. B. Perform installation, adjustment, and testing of the equipment under the direct supervision of the Manufacturer's representative where specified. C. The Manufacturer's representative is to instruct the Owner or his authorized personnel on operational procedures and maintenance requirements. D. Include the cost of the services of the Manufacturer's representative as part of the equipment price. 3.02 INSPECTION AND START-UP A. Inspect equipment prior to placing any equipment or system into operation. Make adjustments as necessary for proper operation. 1. Check for adequate and proper lubrication. 2. Determine that parts or components are free from undue stress from structural members, piping or anchorage. 3. Adjust equipment for proper balance and operations. 4. Determine that vibrations are within acceptable limits. 5. Determine that equipment operates properly under full load conditions. 6. Determine that the equipment is in true alignment. B. Have the Manufacturer's representative present when the equipment is placed in operation. 1. The Representative is to be on site as often as necessary for proper and trouble free operation. 2. The cost for the services of the technical representative required for the proper start-up and operation of the equipment is to be included in the cost for the equipment. 3. Ensure that the proper procedure is employed in start up of systems. C. Provide Equipment Installation Reports for Equipment on the form indicated in Section 01800, FORMS. 1. Certify that the equipment and related appurtenances have been thoroughly examined and approved for start-up and operation. Starting Systems 01650-2 KEL00483 2. The report is to indicate the date when Owner's personnel were instructed in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment. 3.03 STARTING REQUIREMENTS Refer to the individual sections of the specifications for specific start up procedures. 3.04 INITIAL OPERATION A. Start, test, and place equipment and systems into operation for 30 days to allow the Owner and Engineer to observe the operation and overall performance of the equipment and to determine that controls function as intended. B. Equipment which operates on a limited or part-time basis shall be operated in the presence of the Engineer to demonstrate that controls function as specified. C. Perform acceptance test as specified in individual specification sections. Demonstrate that equipment and systems meet the specified performance criteria. D. Equipment and systems shall not be accepted prior to this initial operation period. 3.05 OPERATOR TRAINING A. Provide instruction and demonstration of the care and operation of the equipment to the Owner's personnel. Instruction is to include classroom and hands-on training. B. The scope of the training program is to be in adequate detail to ensure that the trainees who complete the program will be qualified and capable of operating and maintaining the equipment, products, and systems installed under this contract. C. Operations Training is to include but not be limited to: 1. Orientation to provide an overview of system/subsystem configuration and operation. 2. Terminology, nomenclature, and display symbols. 3. Operations theory. 4. Equipment appearance, functions, concepts, and operation. 5. Operating modes, practices and procedures under normal, diminished, and emergency conditions. 6. Start-up and shutdown procedures. 7. Safety Precautions. 8. On-the-job operating experience for monitoring functions, supervisory, or command activities. Include functions and activities associated with diminished operating modes, failure recognition, and responses to system/subsystem and recovery procedures. 9. Content and use of Operation and Maintenance manuals and related reference materials. D. Provide training required to perform on-site routine, preventive, and remedial maintenance of the equipment, product, or system. Maintenance Training is to include but not be limited to: Starting Systems 01650-3 KEL00483 1. Orientation to provide an overview of system/subsystem concept, configuration, and operation. 2. Operations theory and interfaces. 3. Instructions necessary to ensure a basic theoretical and practical understanding of equipment appearance, layout and functions. 4. Safety Precautions. 5. Use of standard and special tools and test equipment. 6. Adjustment, calibration, and use of related test equipment. 7. Detailed preventive maintenance activities. 8. Troubleshooting, diagnostics, and testing. 9. Equipment assembly and disassembly. 10. Repair and parts replacement. 11. Parts ordering practices and storage. 12. Failure and recovery procedures. 13. Cabling and/or interface connectors. 14. Content and use of Operation and Maintenance manuals and related reference materials. 15. Procedures for warranty repairs. 16. Lubrication. 17. Procedures, practices, documentation, and materials required to commence system maintenance. E. Provide a training plan that indicates the schedule and sequence of the training programs. The training plan is to include for each course: 1. Number of hours for the course. 2. Agenda and narrative description, including the defined objectives for each lesson. 3. Draft copy of training handbooks. 4. A descriptive listing of suggested reference publications. 5. Audio-visual equipment required for training. 6. Type and number of tools or test equipment required for each training session. F. Provide and use training aids to complement the instruction and enhance learning. 1. Provide training handbooks in the form proposed for use in both classroom and hands-on phases of training for each course. 2. Instructional materials shall include references to the Operation and Maintenance Manuals and identify and explain the use of the manual. 3. Training aids such as films, slides, audio/visual tapes, charts, and other materials are to become the property of the Owner. G. Provide qualified instructors to conduct the training. 1. Instructors must have knowledge of the theory of operation and practical experience with the equipment, product, or system. 2. Instructors must have successfully conducted similar training courses. Starting Systems 01650-4 KEL00483 H. Training shall be video-taped by the Owner or its consultants for use in future training. Provide legal releases or pay additional fees required for training by the manufacturer. I. Schedule for training is to be approved by Owner. 1. Schedule training and start-up operations for no more than one (1) piece of equipment or system at a time. 2. Owner may require re -scheduling of training if operations personnel are not available for training on a scheduled date. 3. Provide a minimum of two (2) weeks notice if training must be rescheduled. 4. Training is to be limited to 8 hours per week. 5. Time required for training is to be considered in the development of the project schedule. J. Schedule and coordinate training for equipment, products, or systems which depend upon other equipment or systems for proper operation so that trainees can be made familiar with the operation and maintenance of the entire operating system. 3.06 INITIAL MAINTENANCE A. Maintain equipment until the project is accepted by the Owner. 1. Contractor shall insure that mechanical equipment is properly greased, oiled, or otherwise cared for as recommended by the Manufacturer. 2. Do not operate air handling equipment unless filters are in place and are clean. Filters shall be changed weekly during construction. B. Service equipment per the Manufacturer's instructions just prior to the Owner taking possession. Replace filters on all air handling equipment operated during construction. 1. Replace replaceable filters and clean permanent filters associated with air handling units or other packaged equipment. 2. Remove and clean screens at strainers in piping systems. 3. Clean insects from intake louver screens. END OF SECTION Starting Systems 01650-5 KEL00483 01656 DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER FACILITIES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Disinfect the facilities for pumping, storing, or conveying potable water to comply with the standards for potable water of the regulatory agency of jurisdiction. Potable water is defined as any water that has been filtered, disinfected or otherwise treated to the meet regulatory standards. (In the water treatment plant this includes the inside surfaces of the filters.) B. Disinfect piping systems that are used to convey water, solutions, or chemicals to the potable water facilities. C. Test water from the disinfected system per regulatory standards to verify that water is acceptable. Repeat procedure if tests do not meet standards. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. LIQUID CHLORINE: Meeting the requirements of AWWA B-301. B. CALCIUM HYPOCHLORITE: Meeting the requirements of AWWA B-300. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 NEW FACILITIES A. During construction keep basins, pipe, fittings, equipment, and appurtenances free from dirt and debris. 1. Clean basins thoroughly before disinfection. 2. Seal the open ends of pipe with water -tight plugs when pipe is not being laid. 3. Pump water from trenches before removing the plug when water accumulates in the trench. B. Complete hydrostatic test of the line prior to disinfection. C. Wash the surfaces to be disinfected. 1. Flush pipelines. The minimum quantity of water used for flushing must exceed the capacity of the line to insure that clean water has traversed the entire length of pipe. 2. Power wash the surfaces of basins and reservoirs using high pressure wash systems. D. Disinfect facilities per the following procedures of AWWA: 1. Water Mains C651-86 Disinfection of Potable Water Facilities 01656-1 KEL00483 2. Water Storage Facilities C652-86 E. Fill the system with potable water. Test the water to see that it meets the requirements of the regulatory agency of jurisdiction for potable water. Monitor the system for two (2) days. If water test fails to meet the prescribed standards, repeat the disinfection process until water meets quality standards for disinfection. 3.02 REPAIRS OR CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES A. Clean and sterilize the interior surfaces of new piping, fittings, equipment, and appurtenances to be installed in an existing potable water system or connected to an existing system. B. Clean and sterilize the existing pipe or facilities for a minimum distance of 3 pipe diameters back from the ends of the pipe. Plug the ends of the line when work is not being performed on the pipe. C. Perform sterilization by swabbing each item with a concentrated chlorine solution. 1. Each piece is to be disinfected prior to being assembled for installation in the existing pipe. 2. Disinfect each piece just prior to assembly to help prevent re -contamination. 3. Plug the ends of the assembly until a new item is to be added to the assembly. 4. Store disinfected materials on blocks to prevent contact with the ground. END OF SECTION Disinfection of Potable Water Facilities 01656-2 KEL00483 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Comply with requirements of the General Conditions and specified administrative procedures in closing out the Construction Contract. 1.02 SUBMITTALS Submit affidavits and releases on forms shown in Section 01800, FORMS. 1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Submit written notification that the work or designated portion of the work is substantially complete to the Engineer when the work is considered to be substantially complete per the General Conditions. Include a list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected before the project will be considered to be complete. B. Engineer shall visit the project site to observe the work within a reasonable time after notification is received to determine the status of completion. C. Engineer shall issue notification to the Contractor that the work is either substantially complete or that additional work must be performed before the project may be considered substantially complete. 1. Engineer shall notify the Contractor in writing of items that must be completed before the project can be considered substantially complete. a. Correct the noted deficiencies in the work. b. Issue a second written notice with a revised list of deficiencies when work has been completed. C. Engineer shall revisit the site and the procedure shall begin again. 2. Engineer shall issue a tentative Certificate of Substantial Completion to the Owner when the project is considered to be substantially complete. Certificate shall include a tentative list of items to be corrected before final payment. a. Owner will review and revise the list of items and notify the Engineer of any objections or other items that are to be included in the list. b. Engineer shall prepare and send to the Contractor a definite Certificate of Substantial Completion with a revised tentative list of items to be corrected or completed. C. Review the list and notify the Engineer in writing of any objections within 10 days of receipt of Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1.04 FINAL INSPECTION A. Submit written certification in the form indicated in Section 01800, FORMS when the project is complete and: 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2. Work has been completed in compliance with the Contract Documents. 3. Equipment and systems have been tested per Contract Documents and are fully Contract Closeout 01700-1 KEL00483 operational. 4. Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been provided to the Owner and all operator training has been completed. 5. Specified spare parts and special tools have been provided. 6. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. B. Engineer shall make an inspection with the Owner and appropriate regulatory agencies to determine the status of completeness within a reasonable time after the receipt of the Certificate. C. Engineer shall issue notice that the project is complete or notify the Contractor that work is not complete or is defective. 1. Submit the request for final payment with Closeout submittals described in Paragraph 1.07 if notified that the project is complete and the work is acceptable. 2. Upon receipt of notification from the Engineer that work is incomplete or defective, take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies. Send a second certification to the Engineer when work has been completed or corrected. 3. Engineer shall re -visit the site and the procedure will begin again. 1.05 REINSPECTION FEES A. Pay fees to the Owner to compensate the Engineer for reinspection of the work required by the failure of the work to comply with the claims of status of completion made by the Contractor. B. Owner may withhold the amount of these fees from the Contractor's final payment. C. Cost for additional inspections will be billed to the Owner by the Engineer for the actual hours required for the inspection and preparation of related reports in accordance with the following rates: Principal -in -Charge $ 175 Project Manager $ 125 Design Engineer $ 80 Engineering Technician $ 75 Clerk $ 45 1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TO THE ENGINEER A. Record Drawings per Section 01040, PROJECT ADMINISTRATION. B. Keys and keying schedule. C. Warranties and bonds. D. Evidence of payment or release of liens on the form indicated in Section 01800, FORMS and as required by the General Conditions. E. Consent from Surety to Final Payment. F. Equipment installation reports on equipment. G. Shop drawings, record data, Operations and Maintenance Manuals, and other submittals as required by the Contract Documents. Contract Closeout 01700-2 KEL00483 H. Specified spare parts and special tools. I. Certificates of Occupancy, operating certificates, or other similar releases required to allow the Owner unrestricted use of the work and access to services and utilities. J. Evidence of final, continuing insurance, and bond coverage as required by the Contract Documents. 1.07 FINAL PAYMENT REQUEST A. Submit a preliminary final payment request. This request is to include adjustments to the Contract Amount for: 1. Approved Change Orders 2. Allowances not previously adjusted by Change Order 3. Unit prices 4. Deductions for defective work that has been accepted by the Owner 5. Penalties and bonuses 6. Deductions for liquidated damages 7. Deductions for reinspection payments per Paragraph 1.05 8. Other adjustments B. Engineer shall prepare a final Change Order, reflecting the approved adjustments to the contract amount which have not been covered by previously approved Change Orders. C. Submit the final application for payment per the General Conditions, including the final Change Order. 1.08 TRANSFER OF UTILITIES A. Transfer utilities to the Owner when the Certificate of Substantial Completion has been issued, final cleaning has been completed per Section 01710, FINAL CLEANING, and the work has been occupied by the Owner. B. Submit final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of the date the Owner occupied the work. 1.09 WARRANTIES, BONDS, AND SERVICES AGREEMENTS A. Provide warranties, bonds, and service agreements required by Section 01300, SUBMITTALS or by the individual sections of the specifications. B. The date for the start of warranties, bonds, and service agreements is established per the General Conditions. C. Compile warranties, bonds, and service agreements and review these documents for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Each document is to be signed by the respective manufacturer, supplier, and subcontractor. 2. Each document is to include: a. The product or work item description Contract Closeout 01700-3 KEL00483 b. The firm, with the name of the principal, address, and telephone number C. Scope of warranty, bond or services agreement d. Date, duration, and expiration date for each warranty bond and service agreement e. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failure f. Specific instances that might invalidate the warranty or bond D. Submit two (2) copies of each document to the Engineer for review and transmittal to the Owner. 1. Submit duplicate sets. 2. Documents are to be submitted on 8-1/2" x 11" paper, punched for a standard three-ring binder. 3. Submit each set in a commercial quality three-ring binder with a durable and cleanable plastic cover. The title "Warranties, Bonds, and Services Agreements", the project name and the name of the Contractor are to be typed and affixed to the cover. E. Submit warranties, bonds and services agreements: 1. At the time of final completion and before final payment. 2. Within 10 days after inspection and acceptance for equipment or components placed in service during the progress of construction. 1.10 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES Claims and disputes must be resolved prior to recommendations of final payment. Acceptance and final payment by the Contractor will indicate that any outstanding claims or disputed issues have been resolved to the full satisfaction of the Contractor. END OF SECTION Contract Closeout 01700-4 KEL00483 01710 FINAL CLEANING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Perform a thorough cleaning of the site, buildings, or other structures prior to Owner occupancy of the buildings, and prior to Final Completion. Leave the project clean and ready for occupancy. 1.02 SUBMITTALS Provide data for maintenance per Section 01730, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS. 1.03 QUALITY CONTROL Use experienced workmen or professional cleaners for final cleaning. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Furnish the labor and products needed for cleaning and finishing as recommended by the Manufacturer of the surface material being cleaned. B. Use cleaning products only on the surfaces recommended by the Cleaning Product Manufacturer. C. Use only those cleaning products which will not create hazards to health or property and which will not damage surfaces. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 FINAL CLEANING A. Thoroughly clean the entire site and make ready for occupancy. 1. Remove construction debris, boxes, and trash from the site. 2. Remove construction storage sheds and field offices. 3. Restore grade to match surrounding condition and remove excess dirt. B. Clean floors and inspect for damage. 1. Remove oil, grease, paint drippings, and other contaminants from floors, then mop repeatedly until thoroughly clean. Replace damaged flooring. 2. Clean resilient flooring with an approved cleaner and give one (1) coat liquid floor polish as recommended by the Flooring Manufacturer. Polish to a buffed appearance with powered floor buffer. 3. Vacuum carpets with powered floor sweepers to remove dirt and dust. Remove glue or other substances from nap of carpet. C. Clean and polish inside and outside glass surfaces. Wash with window cleaner and water, apply a coat of high quality glass polish and wipe clean. Do not scratch or otherwise mar glass Final Cleaning 01710-1 KEL00483 surfaces. D. Clean wall surfaces to remove dirt or scuff marks. Remove excess adhesive along top edges of wall base. Remove adhesive from surfaces of vinyl wall coverings. E. Align tile to fit properly in grid and replace cracked or damaged tile. Remove smear marks and other dirt from tile and clean surface of grid system. F. Spot paint nicks and other damage. If spot -painting does not blend into the existing color and texture of the surrounding surfaces, repaint wall from inside corner to inside corner. Touch up damaged surfaces on factory finished equipment using special paint furnished by the Manufacturer. G. Clean plumbing fixtures, valves, and trim. Clean toilet seats and covers. Remove labels and adhesive from fixtures. Remove floor drains and clean baskets or buckets. Polish strainers and exposed chrome or brass. H. Remove dirt, oil, grease, dust and other contaminants from floors, equipment and apparatus in mechanical rooms with vacuum or compressed air. I. Clean and polish ceramic tile floors and wall surfaces to remove mildew or other stains. Tuck point defective joints. J. Inspect exterior painted surfaces. Spot paint any damaged surfaces. K. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters on heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. L. Clean roof areas of debris; flush roof drainage systems with water until clear. M. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces and rake clean other surfaces of the grounds. END OF SECTION Final Cleaning 01710-2 KEL00483 01800 FORMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Use the forms following this section for contract administration, making submittals and documentation of test results. A single copy of these forms with project information inserted will be provided to the Contractor at the pre -construction conference. Make additional copies of the forms as required. Contractor may substitute computer generated forms with the approval of the Engineer if these forms include the same information, statements and certifications and the same general format as the forms included in this section. Forms included are listed below: A. Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment B. Consent of Surety Company to Reduction of or Partial Release of Retainage. C. Consent of Surety Company to Payment Procedures D. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims E. Contractor's Modification Request F. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens G. Moisture -Density Field Test Report H. Notification by Contractor I. O&M Manual Review Report J. Payment Request Forms 1. Attachment "A" - Tabulation of Values for Original Contract Work Performed. 2. Attachment "B" - Tabulation of Values for Approved Change Orders 3. Attachment "C" - Tabulation of Values for Materials on Hand 4. Attachment "D" - Project Summary K. Pipeline Test Report Exfiltration Test L. Pressure Pipe Test Report M. Protective Coating Test Report N. Request for Information O. Submittal Transmittal P. Certificate of Substantial Completion END OF SECTION Forms 01800-1 KEL00483 ra FREESE - NICHOLS CONSENT OF SURETY COMPANY TO FINAL PAYMENT (4.86 / ) PROJECT: PROJECT NUMBER: OWNER: CONTRACTOR: ENGINEER: Freese & Nichols, Inc. The Surety Company, on bond of the Contractor listed above for the referenced project, in accordance with the Contract Documents, hereby approves final payment to the Contractor, and agrees that final payment to the Contractor shall not relieve the Surety Company of any of its obligations to the Owner under the terms of the Contract and as set forth in said Surety Company's bond. In witness whereof, the Surety Company has hereunto set its hand this day of 20 Surety Company By Authorized Representative Title Address: Attach Power of Attorney S:\Div. 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS\CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT.doc rn FREESE • NICHOLS CONSENT OF SURETY COMPANY TO REDUCTION OF OR PARTIAL RELEASE OF RETAINAGE (4.86 / ) PROJECT: PROJECT NUMBER: OWNER: CONTRACTOR: ENGINEER: Freese & Nichols, Inc. The Surety Company, on bond of the Contractor listed above for the referenced project, in accordance with the Contract Documents, hereby approves a reduction of or partial release of retainage to the Contractor in the amount of and agrees that payment of this amount to the Contractor shall not relieve the Surety Company of any of its obligations to the Owner under the terms of the Contract, and as set forth in said Surety Company's bond. In witness whereof, the Surety Company has hereunto set its hand this day of 20_ Surety Company By: Authorized Representative Title: Address: Attach Power of Attorney S:\Div. 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS\CONSENT OF SURETY TO RELEASE OF RETAINAGE.doc Ea m, CONSENT OF SURETY COMPANY TO PAYMENT PROCEDURES S:\Div. 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTSICONSENT OF SURETY CO^ PAYMENT PROCEDURES.doc rM FREESE • NICHOLS PROJECT: OWNER: CONTRACTOR: ENGINEER: Freese & Nichols Inc. CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF DEBTS AND CLAIMS (4. / ) PROJECT NUMBER: The Contractor, in accordance with the Contract Documents, hereby certifies that, except as listed below, all obligations for all materials and equipment furnished, for all work labor, and services performed, and for all known indebtedness and claims against the Contractor for damages arising in any manner in connection with the performance of the Contract referenced above for which the Owner or his property might in any way be held responsible have been paid in full or have otherwise been satisfied in full. EXCEPTIONS: (If none, write "NONE". The Contractor shall furnish a bond, acceptable to the Owner, for each exception.) CONTRACTOR BY TITLE Subscribed and sworn to before me this Notary Public: My Commission Expires: day of S:\Div. 01 GENERAL REQUI REMENTS\AFFI DAVIT OF PAYMENT OF DEBTS AND CLAIMS.doc ,20 rM FREESE•NICHOLS PROJECT: OWNER: CONTRACTOR: ENGINEER: Freese & Nichols, Inc. DESCRIPTION: NOTIFICATION BY CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR'S MODIFICATION REQUEST (4.421 ) PROJECT NUMBER: NO. The Contractor proposes to make the additions, modifications, or deletions to the Work described in the Contract Documents, as shown in Attachment "A" and requests that you take the following action: ❑ Notify us that you concur that this change does not require a change in Contract time or amount and issue a Field Order. ❑ Issue a Change Order for performing the described change. Change in Contract amount is indicated in the attached detailed cost breakdown of labor, materials, equipment and all other costs associated with this change. Impacts on Contract Time are shown in the attached revised schedule. ❑ Authorize the Contractor to proceed with the described change. Payment will be requested at the unit price bid. ❑ Authorize the Contractor to proceed with the change under the time and materials provisions of the Contract. By: Date: CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S RESPONSE We respond to your request as follows: ❑ We concur that this is a no cost or time change. See attached/forthcoming Field Order No. _/ comments. ❑ Your proposal is recommended to the Owner. See attached/forthcoming proposed Change Order. ❑ Proceed with the change at the unit price bid. ❑ Proceed with the change under the time and materials provisions of the Contract. ❑ Additional information is required to evaluate this request. Provide information as described in the attached comments and resubmit. ❑ Contractor's Modification Request is not accepted. 0 S:\Div. 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS\CONTRACTOR _MODIFICATION _REQUEST.doc Date: CONTRACTOR'S MODIFICATION REQUEST ATTACHMENT A E,K,Y11 S:\Div. 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS\CONTRACTOR _MODIFICATION _REQUEST.doc rM PROJECT: OWNER: CONTRACTOR: ENGINEER: Freese & Nichols, Inc. CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIENS rA PROJECT NUMBER: The Contractor, in accordance with the Contract Documents, and in consideration for the full and final payment to the Contractor for all services in connection with the project, does hereby waive and release any and all liens, or any and all claims to liens which the Contractor may have on or affecting the project as a result of its contract(s) for the Project or for performing labor and/or furnishing materials in any way connected with the construction of any aspect of the project. The Contractor further certifies and warrants that all subcontractors of labor and/or materials for the Project, except as listed below, have been paid in full for all labor and/or materials supplied to, for, through or at the direct or indirect request of the Contractor prior to, through and including the date of this affidavit. EXCEPTIONS: CONTRACTOR By Title (If none, write "NONE". The Contractor shall furnish a bond, acceptable to the Owner, for each exception.) Subscribed and sworn to before me this Notary Public: My Commission Expires: S:\Div. 01 GENERAL REQU I REMENTS\AFFI DAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIENSAOC day of 120 rm FREESE - NICHOLS MOISTURE -DENSITY FIELD TEST RESULTS (4. / ) PROJECT: PROJECT NUMBER: OWNER: CONTRACTOR: ENGINEER: Freese & Nichols, Inc. DESCRIPTION: REPORT NO.: TEST DATE RETEST TEST LOCATION LABORATORY MOISTURE DENSITY DATA FIELD DENSITY FIELD MOISTURE TEST STATUS STRUCTURE FILL ITEM MC DD NO. of TEST of TEST# STA.& OFFSET ZONE LIFT/ ELEV. NO. MDD- PCF OMC PCF %MDD WT % C NC C NC LEGEND N NUCLEAR GAUGE- ASTM D2922 & D3017 S SAND CONE -ASTM D1556 P STANDARD PROCTOR -ASTM DA698 PM MODIFIED PROCTOR -ASTM D1557 R RELATIVE DENSITY -ASTM D4253 & D4254 cS MOISTURE DENSITY RELATIONS OF SOIL -CEMENT -ASTM D558 AC LAB. MOLDED DENSITY OF ASPHALT CONCRETE -ASTM D1559 OR D1560 MDD MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY; DD - FIELD DRY DENSITY OMC OPTIMUM MOISTURE CONTENT; MC = FIELD MOISTURE CONTENT PCF POUNDS PER CUBIC FOOT; WT = WEIGHT; SG - SUBGRADE; PL PLATING c COMPLIANCE WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS NC NONCOMPLIANCE WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS REMARKS: TESTED BY: WITNESSED BY: DATE: SADiv. 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTSW OISTURE-DENSITY FIELD TEST RESULTS.doc WMI11 FREESE • NICHOLS NOTIFICATION BY CONTRACTOR (4.15 PROJECT: OWNER: CONTRACTOR: ENGINEER: Freese & Nichols, Inc. PROJECT NUMBER: DESCRIPTION: NO.: NOTIFICATION IS GIVEN OF THE FOLLOWING: ❑ Concrete Placement Notice ❑ Electrical Observation Request ❑ Concrete Testing Request ❑ Mechanical Observation Request ❑ Soils Testing Request ❑ Facility Shutdown Request ❑ Mechanical Testing Request ❑ Request to Work Outside Regular Hours ❑ Structural Observation Request ❑ Other (See Below) Date When Work is to be Accomplished: Description: Requested by: Date: RESPONSE TO NOTIFICATION: Response by: Date: S:\Div. 01 GENERAL REOUIREMENTSWOTIFICATION BY CONTRACTOR.doc rM FREESE•NICHOLS O & M MANUAL REVIEW REPORT (4.341 PROJECT: PROJECT NUMBER: OWNER: CONTRACTOR: CONSTRUCTION MANAGER: Freese & Nichols, Inc. REFERENCE DATA: O&M No.: Description: Specification Section No.: Page No.: Par. No.: Sheet No.: Entitled: Detail Designation: Drawing Attached: ❑ Yes ❑ No EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION: Name (from drawings): Identification No.: Unit No.: Manufacturer: Capacity: Model No.: Serial No.: LOCATION: Structure: N/S Coord.: E/W Coord.: Station: Elevation: SUBMITTAL: ❑ Preliminary O & M ❑ Final O & M ❑ Revised Final DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION ❑ Equipment Functions ❑ Normal Operating Characteristics ❑ Engineering Data ❑ Limiting Conditions ❑ Safety Conditions EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED STEP BY STEP PROCEDURES FOR ❑ Start-up ❑ Normal Operations ❑ Shut Down ❑ Regulation ❑ Control ❑ Emergency Conditions ❑ Limiting Operating Conditions MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION ❑ Preventive/Routine Maintenance Schedule ❑ Guide to Troubleshooting MAINTENANCE - LUBRICATION ❑ Lubricant Chart ❑ Lubrication Schedule ❑ Cross Reference MAINTENANCE - ASSEMBLY ❑ Exploded View ❑ Cross Sectional Views ❑ Parts List and Number EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED STEP BY STEP PROCEDURES FOR ❑ Disassembly ❑ Repair/Parts Replacement ❑ Reassembly ❑ Installation ❑ Alignment/Adjustment/Calibration ❑ Preventive Maintenance Procedures PARTS ❑ Generic Name ❑ Part ID Number ❑ Predicted Life ❑ Parts Subject To Wear ❑ Recommended Spare Parts Page 1 of 2 S:\Div. 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS\08M MANUAL REVIEW REPORTAOC ELECTRICAL ❑ Operating Procedure ❑ Electrical Components (by model) ❑ Circuit Directories ❑ As -installed Wiring Diagrams ❑ Maintenance Procedures ❑ As -Installed Control Diagrams by Control Mfg. ❑ Written Description of the Sequence of Operation for Electrical Controls WARRANTY AND SERVICE ❑ Warranty Included ❑ Extended Service Agreement ❑ Service Data MANUAL PRESENTATION ❑ Manual Text and Drawings Legible ❑ Text Pages 8-1/2 x 11 ❑ Binder ❑ Drawing 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 placed in envelopes bound in Manual ❑ Non Pertinent Data Deleted ❑ Table of contents Comment Number Reviewed By Review Comments la SADiv. 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS\O&M MANUAL REVIEW REPORTAOC Page 2 of 2 WE PAYMENT REQUEST FREESE - NICHOLS (4.511 ) PROJECT: PROJECT NUMBER: OWNER: CONTRACTOR: ENGINEER: Freese & Nichols, Inc. PAYMENT PERIOD FROM: TO: ESTIMATE NO.: SUMMARY OF PAYMENT ESTIMATE VALUES FROM ATTACHED TABULATIONS Original Contract Amount Approved Change Orders Current Contract Amount Total Value of Original Contract Performed (Attachment "A" consisting of _ pages) Extra Work on Approved Change Orders (Attachment "B" consisting of_ pages) Total Value of Work to Date Less Amount Retained at _% Net Amount Earned on Contract Less Amount of Previous Payments BALANCE DUE THIS STATEMENT Percentage of Contract Paid to Date The undersigned Contractor certifies that all work, including materials on hand, covered by this Periodical Payment has been completed or delivered and stored in accordance with the Contract Documents, that all amounts have been paid by him for work, materials, and equipment for which previous Periodical Payments were issued and received from the Owner, and that the current payment shown herein is now due. Contractor: By Date Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20 Notary Public: My Commission expires: Recommended for Payment By: Approved for payment by: Freese and Nichols, Inc. [Owner] [Name] Date [Name] Date Approved for Payment by: Approved for payment by: [Owner] [Owner] [Name] Date [Name] Date S:Tiv. 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS\PAYMENT REQUEST.doc ATTACHMENT "A" PAYMENT REQUEST TABULATION OF VALUES FOR ORIGINAL CONTRACT WORK PERFORMED PROJECT: PROJECT NUMBER: OWNER: CONTRACTOR: ENGINEER: Freese & Nichols, Inc. PAYMENT PERIOD FROM: TO: ESTIMATE NO: ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION OF ITEM QUANTITY ORIGINAL ESTIMATE UNIT OF MEASURE UNIT PRICE TOTAL CONTRACT AMOUNT QUANTITY THIS ESTIMATE WORK COMPLETED FROM PREVIOUS ESTIMATE BALANCE OF MATERIALS ON HAND TOTAL VALUE OF WORK COMPLETED % OF WORK COMP. TOTAL FOR PAGE/PROJECT S:\Div. 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS\PAYMENT REQUEST.doc ATTACHMENT "B" PAYMENT REQUEST TABULATION OF VALUES FOR APPROVED CHANGE ORDERS PROJECT: PROJECT NUMBER: OWNER: CONTRACTOR: ENGINEER: Freese & Nichols, Inc. PAYMENT PERIOD FROM: TO: ESTIMATE NO: CHANGE DESCRIPTION OF ITEM QUANTITY UNIT OF UNIT TOTAL QUANTITY WORK COMPLETED BALANCE OF TOTAL VALUE % OF ORDER/ ORIGINAL MEASURE PRICE CONTRACT THIS FROM PREVIOUS MATERIALS OF WORK WORK ITEM No. ESTIMATE AMOUNT ESTIMATE ESTIMATE ON HAND COMPLETED COMP. TOTAL FOR PAGE/PROJECT SADiv. 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS\PAYMENT REQUEST.doc ATTACHMENT "C" PAYMENT REQUEST TABULATION OF VALUES FOR MATERIALS ON HAND PROJECT: PROJECT NUMBER: OWNER: CONTRACTOR: ENGINEER: Freese & Nichols, Inc. PAYMENT PERIOD FROM: TO: ESTIMATE NO: ATTCHMENT TOTAL SCHEDULED VALUE NAME OF SUPPLIER INVOICE TOTAL INVOICE TOTAL STORED AMOUNT INSTALLED BALANCE OF MATERIALS WOR B" ITEM NO. AMOUNT THIS ESTIMATE MATERIAL AT LAST PAY ESTIMATE TO DATE ON HAND No. TOTAL FOR THIS PAGE/PROJECT S:\Div. 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS\PAYMENT REQUEST.doc PROJECT: _ OWNER: _ CONTRACTOR: ENGINEER: Freese & Nichols, Inc. PAYMENT PERIOD FROM: CONTRACT TIME SUMMARY Date of Notice to Proceed TO: ATTACHMENT "D" PROJECT SUMMARY PROJECT NUMBER: ESTIMATE NO.: Original Contract Duration Days Original Date of Contract Substantial Completion $ Original Date of Contract Final Completion $ Approved Time Extensions Days Current Contract Duration Days Current Date of Contract Substantial Completion $ Current Date of Contract Final Completion $ Days Charged to Project to Date Days Days Remaining in Contract Days Percent of Current Project Duration % Current Scheduled Completion Date $ Project is (Ahead/Behind) Schedule Days CONTRACT COST SUMMARY Original Contract Amount $ Approved Change Orders $ Current Contract Amount $ Contract Earnings to date on Original Contract $ Earnings on Approved Change Orders $ Materials on Hand $ Total Current Project Amount Earned $ Percent of Contract Earned to Date % Retainage $ Amount Paid to Date $ Percent of Contract Paid to Date % S:\Div. 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS\PAYMENT REQUESTAOC WMM FRFFSF� NICHOLS PIPELINE TEST REPORT EXFILTRA TION TEST (4. PROJECT: PROJECT NUMBER: OWNER: CONTRACTOR: ENGINEER: Freese & Nichols, Inc. DESCRIPTION: REPORT NO.: Test No. Station Length of Line (ft) Pipe Diam. (in) Min.Test Time (Sec) Allowable Loss (PSI) Initial Pressure (PSI) Final Pressure (PSI) Actual Loss (PSI) Observed By Date From To S:\Div. 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS\PIPELINE EXFILTRATION TEST REPORT.doc rM FREESE - NICHOLS PRESSURE PIPE TEST REPORT (4. / PROJECT: OWNER: CONTRACTOR: ENGINEER: Freese & Nichols, Inc. DATE: PROJECT NUMBER: REFERENCE DATA: No.: Description: Specification Section No.: Page No.: Par. No.: Entitled: Sheet No.: Detail Designation: Drawing Attached: ❑ Yes ❑ No PIPELINE IDENTIFICATION: System Fluid: Pipe Size: Pipe Material: Identification No.: LOCATION: Structure: N/S Coord.: E/W Coord.: Station: Elev.: Test Section: From: To: Test Fluid Test Pressure Allowable Pressure Loss/Fluid Make-up Test Time Required Test No. Test Time Initial Pressure Final Pressure Pressure Change Fluid Added Test Pass/Fail Tested By Date S:\Div. 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS\PIPELINE PRESSURE TEST REPORT.doc rM FREESE • NICHOLS PROTECTIVE COATING TEST REPORT (4. / PROJECT: PROJECT NUMBER: OWNER: CONTRACTOR: ENGINEER: Freese & Nichols, Inc. DATE: REFERENCE DATA: Report No.: Description: APPLICATION AREA: Item coated (from drawings): Identification No.: Unit No.: LOCATION: Structure: N/S Coord.: E/W Coord.: Station: Elev.: SURFACE PREPARATION: ❑ Shop Primer ❑ Field Blast -Commercial Gray ❑ Field Blast- Near White ❑ Brush Blast ❑ Power Tool & Solvent Cleaning ❑ Field Blast -White Metal COATING APPLICATION: DRY FILM THICKNESS Coat Type Description Color Req'd Test Retest (Brand, Series, Name/No.) Primer Interim Interim Finish CHECKED FOR HOLIDAYS ❑ Not Required ❑ Tested and Defects Marked Date: ❑ Tested and No Defects Discovered Date: Testing By: With:_ Witnessed by: With: S:1Div. 01 GENERAL REOUIREMENTS\PROTECTIVE COATINGS TEST REPORT.doc rM FREESE•MCNOL3 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (4.141 PROJECT: OWNER: CONTRACTOR: ENGINEER: Freese & Nichols, Inc. PROJECT NUMBER: REFERENCE DATA: Specification Section No. Page No. Paragraph No. Drawing No. Detail description: CONTRACTOR REQUESTS: ❑ Information ❑ Interpretation for the items described below or in the attached material referenced below: ❑ Clarification CONTRACTOR'S PROPOSED SOLUTION: REQUESTED BY: DATE: ENGINEER'S RESPONSE: ❑ Information ❑ Interpretation for the items described above or in the attached material referenced: ❑ Clarification RESPONSE BY: DATE: S:1Div. 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS\REQUEST FOR INFORMATION.doc rM FREESE - NICHOLS SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL (4. PROJECT: PROJECT NUMBER: OWNER: CONTRACTOR: ARCHITECT/ENGINEER: Freese & Nichols, Inc. REFERENCE DATA: Contractor's Submittal No. Specification Section: Plan Sheet No.: Description: CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION: /hereby certify that this submittal has been reviewed by the Contractor and is in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Orders and Field Orders. CERTIFIED BY: DATE: TYPE # DESCRIPTION #SENT #RET'D STATUS CMR Contractor's Modification Request ❑ Approved ❑ Approved As Corrected ❑ Not Approved ❑ Revise & Resubmit ❑ Filed As Received ❑ Final Distribution ❑ Change Order Issued ❑ Field Order Issued ❑ Recommended For Approval ❑ Returned W/O Review ❑ Add'I Information Required ❑ Cancelled ❑ See Review Comments ❑ Pending Change Order CTR Certified Test Report EIR Equipment Installation Report O&M Operation & Maintenance Manual NBC Notification By Contractor PCM Proposed Contract Modification PR Payment Request PP Project Photographs RD Record Data RFI Request For Information SAM Sample SCH Schedule Of Progress SD Shop Drawing FOR ARCHITECT / ENGINEER'S USE ONLY DATE RECEIVED BY DATE RETURNED BY COMMENTS: DISTRIBUTION REVIEW NO SENT TO. NO. SENT TO. DEPT. BY DATE SENT DATE RET'D S:\Div. 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS\SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL Am rm FREESE • NICHOLS CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION (4.831 PROJECT: PROJECT NUMBER: OWNER: CONTRACTOR: ENGINEER: Freese & Nichols, Inc. The work performed under this contract has been inspected by authorized representatives of the Owner, Contractor and Engineer and the Project (or part of as described below) is declared to be substantially complete in accordance with the Contract Documents on the date indicated below. A tentative list of items to be corrected is appended to this certificate as Attachment "A". The failure to include an item on the list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The following items are considered to be substantially complete as of this the day of 120 Critical items Description Completion Date Recommended By Approved By FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. [CONTRACTOR] By By [Name] Date [Name] Date Approved By [OWNER] By [Name] Date S:\Div. 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS\CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL CONPL.ETION.doc CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ATTACHMENT A S:\Div. 0l GENERAL REQUIREMENTSTERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL. COMPLETION.doe DIVISION 2 SITEWORK 02110 GENERAL CLEARING AND GRUBBING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to perform operations in connection with clearing, grubbing, and disposal of cleared and grubbed materials. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE; DEFINITIONS A. CLEARING: Clearing is defined as the removal of trees, shrubs, bushes, and other organic matter at or above original ground level. B. GRUBBING: Grubbing is defined as the removal of stumps, roots, boards, logs, and other organic matter found at or above ground level. 2.00 PRODUCTS [Not Used] 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Mark areas to be cleared and grubbed prior to commencing clearing operations. Engineer shall approve clearing and grubbing limits prior to commencement of clearing operations. B. Trees and shrubs outside of the clearing limits, which are within 10' of the clearing limits, shall be clearly marked to avoid damage during clearing and grubbing operations. C. Remove trees and brush outside the clearing limits, but within the immediate vicinity of the work, upon receipt of approval by the Engineer, when the trees or brush interfere with or retard the progress of construction operations. D. Clearly mark trees and shrubs within the clearing limits, which are to remain, and protect the trees and shrubs from damage during the clearing and grubbing operations. E. The clearing limits shall not extend beyond the project limits. F. Establish the clearing and grubbing limits as follows: 1. Roadways and parking areas plus 5' beyond the edge of pavement or R.O.W. limits. 2. Underground utility trench top width plus 8'. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. CLEARING Clearing shall consist of the felling, cutting up, and the satisfactory disposal of trees and other vegetation, together with the down timber, snags, brush, rubbish, fences, and debris occurring within the area to be cleaned. General Clearing and Grubbing 02110-1 KEL00483 B. GRUBBING Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of stumps, roots and other organic matter larger than 1" in diameter, boards, and logs to a depth of 12" below the ground surface. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Completely remove timber, logs, roots, brush, rotten wood, and other refuse from the Owner's property. Disposal of materials in streams shall not be permitted and no materials shall be piled in stream channels or in areas where it might be washed away by floods. Timber within the area to be cleared shall become the property of the Contractor, and the Contractor may cut, trim, hew, saw, or otherwise dress felled timber within the limits of the Owner's property, provided timber and waste material is disposed of in a satisfactory manner. Materials shall be removed from the site daily, unless permission is granted by the Engineer to store the materials for longer periods. END OF SECTION General Clearing and Grubbing 02110-2 KEL00483 02210 SITE GRADING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary for site grading, including site preparation, clearing and grubbing, site excavation, and fills. B. Grade to the subgrade elevations required for pavements, driveways, curbs, gutters, steps, sidewalks, and similar use areas. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. CLASSIFICATION Excavation shall be unclassified without regard to materials encountered. B. QUALITY CONTROL TESTING 1. The Owner will provide for quality control tests on the materials incorporated in the work, including classification testing of borrow materials from on-site sources. Copies of the results of the tests performed will be furnished to the Contractor upon request. The testing performed by the Owner in no way relieves the Contractor of the responsibility of completing the work in accordance with the specifications. The Contractor shall assist the testing personnel in taking tests to the extent of furnishing labor and equipment to prepare the areas for testing and curtailing operations in the vicinity of the test area during testing. 2. The Contractor has the right to conduct such tests as deemed necessary to assure compliance with the contract specifications. Conflicting results between the Owner's tests and those made by the Contractor will be resolved by the Engineer, and his decision shall be final. 3. The Contractor shall have the sole responsibility for seeing that the appropriate class of earth fill is placed in each zone. To this end, the Contractor will be responsible for determining any changes in materials from borrow sources, excavations, and stockpiles, and see that appropriate classification tests are requested in a timely manner. Any earth fill which does not meet the classification requirements for the zone in which it is placed, shall be removed and properly replaced with conforming material by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. PROTECTION PROTECTION OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS Site Grading 02210-1 KEL00483 a. Provide protection to prevent damage to existing improvements and structures to remain in place on the Owner's property and adjoining properties. b. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to parties having jurisdiction. C. Land areas outside the limits of permanent work performed under this contract shall be preserved in their present condition. Confine construction activities to areas defined for work or specifically assigned by the Owner's representative for his use. 2. PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES a. Verify all existing utility locations. b. Immediately notify the Owner's representative and applicable utility company of any damages to existing utilities. C. Make repairs to damaged utilities in accordance with the requirements of the Owner's representative and applicable utility company at no additional cost to the Owner. d. Coordinate with the Owner and the applicable utility company for shut-off of or connection to active utilities. Do not interrupt existing utility services except as authorized in writing by the Owner's representative. PROTECTION OF WORK SITE Provide barricades or other types of protectors necessary to warn and prevent unauthorized personnel. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATION 1. No classification shall be made to differentiate the various surface and subsurface conditions. 2. It is the Contractor's sole responsibility to verify the site surface and subsurface conditions. B. DEWATERING 1. Perform excavation and embankment so that the area of the site and the area immediately surrounding the site drains continually and effectively by gravity or temporary pumps. 2. Water shall accumulate in elevations or other areas of the site. 3. Drain the excavation by methods which prevent the softening of subgrades and embankments. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. FILL AND BACKFILL Materials shall be free of debris, roots, organic or frozen materials, stones having a maximum dimension of 4" in the upper 6" of the fill and stones having a maximum dimension of 6" in the remainder of the fill. Site Grading 02210-2 KEL00483 2. Otherwise suitable material which is unsuitable due to excess moisture content shall not be classified as unsuitable material unless it cannot be dried by manipulation, aeration, or blending with other materials to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative. 3. Unsuitable materials shall include those materials that are determined by the Owner's representative to be inadequate for providing a stable slope, fill, subgrade, or foundation for structure. 4. Expansive clay soils shall be classified as unsuitable unless treated or mixed in a manner approved by the Owner's representative. 5. Sand backfill shall conform to the unified classification (SW) for well graded course to medium gradation ranging from a sieve size of 4 to 40. B. SPOT SUBGRADE REINFORCEMENT MATERIAL Spot subgrade reinforcement material shall consist of sound, tough, durable crushed stone or gravel with a filler of broken stone chips or sand. Material shall meet the requirements of the following gradation: Sieve Percent Passing I to 100 211 75-95 3/8" 40-75 No. 4 30-60 No. 10 20-45 No. 40 15-30 No. 200 5-20 2.02 SELECTION OF BORROW MATERIAL Select borrow material to meet requirement and conditions of the particular fill used. For borrow material obtained outside the limits of the project site, obtain the right to procure material and pay all royalties and other charges involved. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. Perform excavation regardless of material encountered to the lines and grades indicated. B. Transport and place excavated material in fill areas within the limits of the work. Excavate unsuitable material encountered within the limits of the work below the grade indicated and replace with suitable material as directed by the Owner's representative. C. Excavated material shall not be wasted without the authorization of the Owner's representative. Disposal of surplus excavated material and unsuitable material shall be at the Contractor's expense and responsibility. Dispose of surplus and unsuitable materials at the waste areas indicated. Dispose of authorized waste material so that there is no obstruction to the flow characteristics of any stream or impairment to the efficiency or appearance of any structure. D. Excavated material shall not be deposited in a manner that endangers a partly finished structure by direct pressure or by overloading banks contiguous to the operations or that may otherwise be detrimental to the completed work. Site Grading 02210-3 KEL00483 3.02 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill adjacent to structures uniformly to prevent wedging action or eccentric loading upon or against the structures. B. Step or serrate slopes bounding or within areas to be backfilled to prevent sliding of the fill. C. During backfilling operations and in formation of embankments, equipment that will overload the structure in passing over and compacting these fills shall not be used. 3.03 PREPARATION OF GROUND SURFACE FOR FILL A. Clear and grub areas upon which fills are to be placed before the fill is started. B. Plow, step, bench, and break-up slopped ground surfaces steeper than one (1) vertical to four (4) horizontal on which fill is to be placed as directed by the Owner's representative, so that the fill material bonds with the existing surface. C. When surfaces on which fills are to be placed do not meet the specified density requirements, break-up, pulverize, and compact the ground surface to the indicated density. D. When surfaces on which fills are to be placed do not meet the specified moisture content requirements, wet, aerate, and dry the ground to the indicated moisture content. E. When subgrade is part fill and part excavation, scarify the excavated portion to a depth of 12" and compact as indicated for the adjacent fill, unless directed otherwise by the Owner's representative. 3.04 FILL A. Construct fills and embankments at the locations and to the lines and grades indicated, allowing for surfacing, base courses and topsoil. B. Place material in successive horizontal layers of 8" to 12" in loose depth for the full width of the cross section and compact. 3.05 COMPACTION A. Over-all and pavement subgrade compaction densities and moisture contents shall not be less than 95% standard proctor density as determined by TEX 114-E Method. B. Accomplish compaction by sheep's -foot rollers, pneumatic -tired rollers, steel -wheeled rollers, or power -driven hand tampers well suited to the soil being compacted. Aerate and moisten material to maintain the required moisture content. 3.06 SPOT SUBGRADE REINFORCEMENT A. The use of spot subgrade reinforcement shall be at the direction of and subject to the approval of the Owner's representative. Site Grading 02210-4 KEL00483 B. Remove unsuitable subgrade materials, uniformly shape and firmly compact the bottom of the resulting excavation to the density indicated for subgrade, and make the necessary provisions for adequate drainage. C. Place the subgrade reinforcement material in the prepared excavation in layers not exceeding 5" thickness. Spread and compact the material until level with the surrounding subgrade surface. D. Fill the voids with the necessary finer selected material and roll the area, or tamp if a roller is not accessible. Continue to fill and roll or tamp until the entire mass is thoroughly compacted to not less than the density of the surrounding or adjacent areas. E. Finish the surface are to conform accurately to the grade and cross section indicated. END OF SECTION Site Grading 02210-5 KEL00483 02217 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND PIPE EMBEDMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipments and incidentals necessary to perform operations in trenching, pipe bedding, backfilling, clearing, grubbing and site preparation; handling, storage, transportation and disposal of excavated material; pumping and dewatering; preparation of subgrades; protection of adjacent property; fills, grading; and other appurtenant work. Trenching, backfilling, and pipe embedment procedures shall be in full compliance with Section 02220, TRENCH SAFETY. Earth removed from excavations and which is not required for backfill shall be removed from the site by the Contractor at his own expense, unless arrangements are made with the Owner through his representative to allow disposal on site. If permitted, the Contractor shall dump and spread excess earth in a manner agreed upon by the Contractor and the Owner. Excavation, other than trench excavation and embankment fills are not part of this specification section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE CLASSIFICATION A. Excavations shall include material of whatever nature encountered, including but not limited to clays, sands, gravels, conglomeritic boulders, weathered clay shales, rock, debris and abandoned existing structures. Excavation and trenching shall include the removal and subsequent handling of materials excavated or otherwise handled in the performance of the work. B. Bidders must satisfy themselves as to the actual existing subsurface conditions prior to the submittal of a proposal to complete the proposed work. C. Trench excavation shall consist of excavation to the lines and grades indicated, required for installation of the pipe, pipe bedding, backfill, and to accommodate trench safety systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: Sieve analysis on embedment materials. 2. Test results indicating soil resistivity for embedment material used on metal pipe. 1.04 STANDARDS The following publications, referred to hereafter by basic designation only, form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the references thereto: ASTM D-448 "Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction" ASTM D-698 "Moisture -Density Relationship of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5 -lb. Rammer and 12 Inch Drop" Trenching, Backfilling, & Pipe Embedment 02217-1 KEL00483 ASTM D-1556 "Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method" ASTM D-2487 "Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes" ASTM D-2922 "Density of Soil and Soil - Aggregate In -Place by Nuclear Methods" ASTM D-3017 "Moisture Content of Soil and Soil - Aggregate In -Place by Nuclear Methods" ASTM D-4253 "Test Methods for Maximum Index Density of Soils Using a Vibratory Table" ASTM D-4254 "Test Methods for Minimum Index Density of Soils and Calculations of Relative Density" Any other testing required by these specifications and not specifically referenced to a standard shall be performed under ASTM or other appropriate standards as designated by the Engineer. Reference herein or on the drawings to soil classifications shall be understood to be according to ASTM D-2487, "Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes" unless indicated otherwise. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Excavated materials to be used for backfill may be deposited in stockpiles at points convenient for rehandling the material during the backfilling process. The location of stockpiles shall be within the limits of construction easements or public right-of-way. The location of stockpiles is subject to the approval of the Owner or the Owner's representative. Keep drainage channels clear of stockpiled materials. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS Place no embedment or backfill material during freezing weather or upon frozen subgrades or previously placed frozen embedment or backfill materials. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. CONCRETE FOR BACKFILL, BLOCKING, CRADLING AND ENCASEMENT: Unless other strength requirements are designated, concrete used shall be 1500 psi as specified in Section 03305, CONCRETE. B. CLASS 1 EARTH FILL: Limited to clays and sandy clays classified as CH material with a liquid limit greater than or equal to 50, a plasticity index greater than or equal to 25, and a minimum of 60% passing the No. 200 sieve, which are free of organic materials. C. CLASS 3 EARTH FILL: Consist of trench excavated materials with less than or equal to 50% rock by volume and with greatest rock dimension of 3". All rock must be uniform in distribution throughout the backfill. When insufficient quantity of trench excavated material is available the Contractor may bring in material which is superior to the Class 3 Earth Fill provided Engineer=s approval is obtained, 35% or less of the total volume shall pass the #200 sieve, and soil Trenching, Backfilling, & Pipe Embedment 02217-2 KEL00483 characteristics will stabilize without the use of lime or similar additives. No additional payment will be made for material substituted by this alternate. Material unsuitable for Class 3 Earth Fill shall be considered as spoil material. D. CLASS 12 EARTH FILL: Consist of soils suitable for topsoil which are relatively free of stones or other objectionable debris, which have sufficient humus content to readily support vegetative growth. The suitability of soils for topsoil shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. E. CLASS 2 AGGREGATE FILL: [For Reinforced Concrete or Concrete Cylinder Pipe] Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM Method C-131 or C-535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C-88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D-448, size number 67: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1" 100 3/4" 90-100 3/8" 20- 55 No. 4 0 - 10 No. 8 0 - 5 F. CLASS 3 AGGREGATE FILL: [For Ductile Iron] Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C-131 or C-535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C-88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D-448, size number 7: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 3/4" 100 2" 90- 100 3/8" 40- 70 No.4 0- 15 No. 8 0- 5 G. CLASS 10 AGGREGATE FILL: [For PVC Pipe] Consist of washed and screened natural sands or sands manufactured by crushing stones complying with the requirements and tests of "Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates,@ ASTM C-33. The gradation as included in ASTM C-33 is as follows: Trenching, Backrilling, & Pipe Embedment 02217-3 KEL00483 Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 3/8" 100 No. 4 95-100 No. 8 80- 100 No. 16 50- 85 No. 30 25- 60 No. 50 10- 30 No. 100 2- 10 Class 10 Aggregate Fill shall have not more than 45% passing any sieve and retained on the next consecutive sieve of those shown above, and its fineness modulus, as defined in ASTM C-125, shall be not less than 2.3 nor more than 3.1. H. CEMENT: Type I Portland Cement. 2.02 MIXES; SAND -CEMENT BACKFILL A. A minimum sand and cement mixture of 27 parts sand and 2 parts cement will be required. Fine Sand 1 Cubic Yard Cement 1 Bag (Minimum) Water Optimum Moisture B. Sand shall be free of any cohesive material and shall meet the following gradation and plasticity index requirements: Sieve Size Percent Passing 1" 100 2" 95-100 No. 40 80-100 Plasticity Index 10 Maximum Liquid Limit 25 or less 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. SITE 1. Clear sites of logs, trees, roots, brush, tree trimmings and other objectionable materials and debris which are to be occupied by pipe trenches, and grub stumps. Designate material not salvaged for reuse as surface material as spoiled and dispose of material in accordance with Paragraph E - DISPOSAL OF SPOIL MATERIAL, of this section. 2. Do not remove trees outside of the required working area unless their removal is Trenching, Backfilling, & Pipe Embedment 02217-4 KEL00483 authorized in writing by the Engineer and with the approval of the local governing authority. Adequately protect the trees left standing from permanent damage by construction operations. Standing trees may be trimmed where necessary to facilitate construction, but only with written authorization from the Engineer. B. DEWATERING Provide and maintain adequate dewatering equipment to remove and dispose of surface and ground water entering the excavations, trenches, or other parts of the work. Keep each excavation dry during subgrade preparation and continually thereafter until the proposed pipe is installed. Maintain the proper procedures necessary to protect against damage to the proposed work from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other water related causes. 2. Dewater excavations which extend down to or below ground water elevation by lowering and keeping the ground water level a minimum of 2 -feet below the bottom of the excavation. Divert surface water or otherwise prevent water from entering excavated areas to the fullest extent possible without causing damage to adjacent property. 4. Provide and maintain any piping or conduit necessary to facilitate drainage. Do not alter area drainage patterns to the extent that adjacent property and landowners become threatened with localized flooding and/or water damage. Should such a situation occur, the Contractor shall be responsible for repairing the damage at no additional cost to the Owner. C. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES 1. Prior to the start of construction, communicate with the local representatives of utilities companies, including but limited to oil, gas, telephone, and communications companies, as well as, local water and sewer utilities operating in the location of the proposed construction area. Seek the utility companies= assistance in locating existing facilities to avoid conflicts during construction. The location, number, depth, and owner of utilities indicated are for information purposes only, and all utilities and structures may not be shown or may not be in the location shown. 2. Where construction endangers adjacent structures, utilities, embankments and/or roadways, the Contractor shall, at this own expense, carefully support and protect such structures so that no damage occurs throughout the construction process. In case damage should occur, the Contractor shall be responsible for restoring the damaged structure to a condition acceptable to the Owner of that structure and shall bear all cost of such reparations. 3. Repair or replace damaged street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curbs, gutters, fences, drainage structures, or other such facilities to the satisfaction of the Owner. Structures shall be returned to a condition equal to or better than the original condition and of same or better material and quality. Trenching, Backfilling, & Pipe Embedment 02217-5 KEL00483 D. BLASTING Blasting shall not be allowed in any instance. E. DISPOSAL OF SPOIL MATERIAL 1. Suitable material from excavations which meets the requirements for pipe backfill material as indicated, except stripping excavation, may be reused. Designate the remaining excavated materials as spoiled material and dispose of material off the site in accordance with all applicable laws, ordinances, and codes. Contractor shall be responsible for the storage, transportation, and deposition of spoiled material and shall be responsible for acquiring the necessary permits, and the payment of fees and duties at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. No burning of materials shall be permitted on the site. 3.02 TRENCH EXCAVATION A. GENERAL The trenches shall be excavated to the alignment and depth indicated or as necessary for the proper installation of the pipe and appurtenances. Brace and Dewater the trench if necessary so that the workmen may work therein safely and efficiently. Any specific requirement listed in Part 3.00 EXECUTION may be modified as necessary to meet OSHA requirements. However, if trench widths are wider than indicated, the Contractor shall be responsible for determining the proper class of embedment and piping and the installation. It is intended that the pipeline be laid to the depth of cover as shown on the plans. The minimum depth of cover shall be maintained at all locations. The approximate ground profile and the top of pipe profile show the relationship intended by the Engineer. The precise and detailed pipe layout is to be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for information and review. The responsibility for the workability of the detailed layout remains with the Contractor. High points shall be located at air valves and the pipe sections containing air valves shall have a horizontal grade. When unforeseen existing utilities or other conditions warrant a revised grade during construction, the Contractor shall submit a revised pipe layout to the Engineer for approval. No intermediate Ahighs@ or Alows@ will be allowed in the pipe grade without the approval of the Engineer. No additional compensation will be made for adjustments in line and grade. B. TRENCH WIDTH The trench widths shall be as shown on the drawings. C. PIPE FOUNDATION SUBGRADE 1. Excavate the trench to an even grade to permit the installation of the pipe so that the full length of the pipe barrel is supported on the proper depth of bedding material. The entire foundation subgrade area in the bottom of the excavations shall be firm, stable material, and the material shall not be disturbed below required grade except as described in this specification. Where the character of the subgrade material is such that proper subgrade cannot be obtained at the elevation indicated, deepen the excavation to a satisfactory subgrade material. Trenching, Backfilling, & Pipe Embedment 02217-6 KEL00483 2. Remove the material until a firm, stable, and uniform bearing is reached and the subgrade brought back to the required grade with the specified bedding material compacted in place or with lean concrete material. The expense of replacing any unsatisfactory subgrade shall be borne by the Contractor. D. CORRECTING FAULTY GRADE Should any part of the trench be excavated below required grade, correct the trench with bedding material, thoroughly compacted, or with lean concrete, at no additional compensation to the Contractor. E. CARE OF SURFACE MATERIAL FOR REUSE If local conditions permit reuse, keep surface material suitable for reuse separate from the general excavation material. F. TRENCHING METHODS The use of any suitable trench digging machinery is permitted except in places where such operations may cause damage, above or below ground, in which case, employ hand methods. G. PIPE CLEARANCE IN ROCK Remove ledge rock, rock fragments, shale, or other rock to provide proper clearance for bedding materials. Provide adequate clearance for properly jointing pipe laid in rock trenches at bell holes. 3.03 BACKFILL A. BEDDING WITHIN PIPE ZONE 1. CONCRETE CRADLE, ENCASEMENT OR CONCRETE ARCH Where indicated, install the pipe in concrete cradle, encasement, or concrete arch. Take precautions to prevent pipe movement or deflection during construction. Where pipes are placed below structures, completely encase pipes in 1500 psi concrete, and extend up to bottom of structure. 2. CONCRETE BLOCKING Place blocking to rest against firm undisturbed trench walls. The supporting area for each block shall be at least as great as that indicated and shall be sufficient to withstand the thrust, including water hammer, which may develop. Each block shall rest on a firm undisturbed foundation of trench sides and bottom. B. AGGREGATE FILL BEDDING 1. After the trench has been cut to the depths indicated, bring up the bedding layer to a point slightly above grade in maximum 4" lifts and uniformly compact to the density indicated. Form bell holes and scoop out a trough to grade so that the pipe is uniformly supported by the embedment material. Lay and joint the pipe. Bring up the embedment material in Trenching, Backfilling, & Pipe Embedment 02217-7 KEL00483 maximum 4" lifts on either side of the pipe to the elevation above the pipe shown on the plans. Uniformly compact the pipe as indicated. 2. After moisture is gone from the embedment material, place and compact the remaining backfill by tamping or other appropriate methods. Water jetting shall not be permitted. C. COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS Compact earth fill and cohesive aggregate fill in maximum 4" lifts with pneumatic rollers or power hand tampers and make a minimum of eight (8) passes. 2. Compact cohesionless aggregate fill in maximum 4" lifts with vibratory rollers or vibratory plate power hand compactors and make a minimum of eight (8) passes. The acceptability of the compaction equipment shall be based upon the results of a test section. 4. Compact earth fill and cohesive aggregate fill to a minimum of 95% of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D-698, Standard Proctor. 5. Compact earth fill Class 1 and 2 at a moisture content within minus 0 to plus 5 percentage points of the optimum moisture content. Compact the remaining classes of earth fill and cohesive aggregate fill at a moisture content within minus 2 to plus 5 percentage points of optimum moisture content. The moisture ranges listed above are minimum and maximum limits. A tighter moisture range within these limits may be required to consistently achieve the specified density. 6. Compact cohesionless aggregate fill on which it is not practical to control the density by "Proctor" methods to a minimum of 75% of relative density as determined by ASTM D- 4253 and D-4254, or at the discretion of the Engineer, by a field compaction mold method correlated to ASTM D-4253 and D-4254. 7. Compact cohesionless aggregate fill at a moisture content within a range that accommodates consistent placement and compaction to the minimum relative density specified above. 8. The Owner will arrange and pay for density and moisture testing. The testing frequency and methods shall be as requested by the Engineer. The Engineer may waive testing requirements on cohesionless bedding where testing is not practical because of limited space between the pipe and trench walls, however, the minimum number of passes of the compaction equipment specified above shall be achieved. 3.04 FINISHING A. Grade and rake areas smooth and even which do not receive any type of paved surface, to allow drainage to drain away from the structures and toward the roads and streets or the natural drainage course. Break up large clods of earth and remove rocks, trash or debris near the surface. B. Finish the top portion of backfill beneath established sodded (lawn) areas with not less than 6" of topsoil corresponding to, or better than, that underlying adjoining sodded areas. Trenching, Backfilling, & Pipe Embedment 02217-8 KEL00483 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Compact backfill and appropriate embedment material to a minimum of 95% of maximum density at a moisture content of 0 to + 5% of optimum for backfill and at optimum for sand - cement embedment as determined by ASTM D-698-78 (Standard Proctor). B. Make periodic tests of compaction for conformance with this section by an approved testing laboratory selected and paid for by the Owner. Contractor shall pay for retesting until acceptable test results are obtained. 3.06 CLEAN AND ADJUST Remove surplus pipeline materials, tools, rubbish and temporary structures and leave the construction site clean, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. END OF SECTION Trenching, Backfilling, & Pipe Embedment 02217-9 K-EL00483 02219 EXCAVATION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to perform the operations in connection with removing, hauling, and disposing of materials from the locations specified in accordance with these specifications. Conduct excavations to be placed in the compacted fills to segregate different materials in accordance with their suitability in the various zones of the work. B. Excavation for pipelines is not a part of this specification section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. CLASSIFICATIONS Classifications of excavation shall include material of whatever nature encountered, including but not limited to clays, sands, gravels, conglomeritic boulders, weathered clay shales, shales, rock, debris, and miscellaneous abandoned subsurface structures. The Engineer will, in accordance with the specifications, determine the classification of required excavations. All required excavation shall be considered to fall within one (1) of the following classifications. 1. STRIPPING EXCAVATION Stripping Excavation shall consist of excavation, down to a maximum depth of 9", required to remove topsoil, rubbish, vegetation not removed by clearing and grubbing operations, and other unsatisfactory material from the subgrade area of the compacted fills for the embankments, from the surfaces underneath roadways or other structures and from the surface areas of all required excavations. 2. GENERAL REQUIRED EXCAVATION General Required Excavation shall consist of the material required to be excavated which is not classified or subsidiary to another class of excavation or other work. General required excavation includes but is not limited to the water storage pond, diversion ditches and drainage channels. ROADWAY EXCAVATION Roadway Excavation shall consist of the excavation required for the entrance road and ditches. B. EXCLUSIONS Excavation required for the elevated tank foundation and yard piping are not included under this specification section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS [Not Used] 1.04 STANDARDS [Not Used] Excavation 02219-1 KEL00483 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE [Not Used] 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS [Not Used] 1.07 OPTIONS [Not Used] 1.08 GUARANTEES [Not Used] 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS [Not Used] 2.02 MIXES [Not Used] 2.03 FABRICATIONS [Not Used] 2.04 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS [Not Used] 2.05 EQUIPMENT Excavation of materials may be performed by the use of any excavating and hauling equipment adaptable to the work and by any method generally accepted for this type of work, which is compatible with project requirements and conditions. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION [Not Used] 3.02 REMOVAL A. GENERAL Excavations shall be to the lines and grades shown on the drawings within a tolerance of + or - 0.1 feet unless specified otherwise herein. Any and all excess excavation for the convenience of the Contractor or over -excavation performed by the Contractor for any purpose or reason, except when requested by the Engineer, and whether or not due to the fault of the Contractor, shall be at the expense of the Contractor. Where required to complete the work, refill the excess excavation and over -excavation with materials furnished, placed and compacted at the Contractor's expense, using procedures approved by the Engineer. 2. Excavations shall be to the full dimensions shown on the drawings. Finish excavations to the prescribed lines and grades. Following completion of the excavation and prior to placement of roadway material upon the prepared subgrade surface, the Engineer will approve the subgrade surface. If the subgrade material, in the opinion of the Engineer, is unsuitable for use as the subgrade, perform additional excavation and backfill as requested by the Engineer. Such additional excavation and backfill shall be paid for in accordance with the appropriate bid items. Following approval of the subgrade surface, assume all responsibility for maintaining the subgrade surface and remove or recompact the weathered or unsatisfactory subgrade material and replace with compacted fill at Contractor's expense. Following approval of the subgrade, diligently prosecute the work of placing the appropriate embankment Excavation 02219-2 KEL00483 material on the prepared subgrade. Maintenance of all slopes is the Contractor's responsibility. 3.03 BLASTING No blasting shall be allowed. 3.04 DISPOSAL Suitable material from excavations which meets the requirements for the various fills, except stripping excavation may be placed in the fill zones of the embankments. When necessary, dry excavation suitable for use in the embankments to the proper moisture content prior to placing on the fill. When necessary, stockpile excavated materials suitable for use at convenient locations in an approved manner. Place materials determined not useable by the Engineer in the spoil disposal areas at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.05 SPOIL DISPOSAL AREAS Place materials designated as spoil in spoil disposal areas as approved by the Engineer. Leave spoil disposal areas neat and sightly conditioned and sloped to provide positive drainage away from the embankments and present and proposed future construction work. Compaction of materials in the spoil disposal areas will not be required. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [Not Used] 3.07 CLEAN AND ADJUST [Not Used] 3.08 SCHEDULES [Not Used] END OF SECTION Excavation 02219-1 KEL00483 02220 TRENCH SAFETY 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This specification consists of the basic requirements which the Contractor must comply with in order to provide for the safety and health of workers in a trench. This specification is for the purpose of providing minimum performance specifications, and the Contractor shall develop, design, and implement the trench safety system. The Contractor shall bear the sole responsibility for the adequacy of the trench safety system and providing "a safe place to work" for the workman. B. Should the trench safety protection system require wider trenches than specified elsewhere, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs associated with determining adequacy of pipe bedding and class, as well as, purchase and installation of alternate materials. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE [Not Used] 1.03 SUBMITTALS [Not Used] 1.04 STANDARDS . A. The following standard shall be the minimum governing requirement of this specification and is hereby made a part of this specification as if written in its entirety. Occupational Safety and Health Standards - Excavations (29CFR Part 1926), U.S. Department of Labor, latest edition. B. Comply with the applicable Federal, State, and local rules, regulations, and ordinances. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE [Not Used] 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS [Not Used] 1.07 OPTIONS [Not Used] 1.08 GUARANTEES [Not Used] 2.00 PRODUCTS [Not Used] 3.00 EXECUTION [Not Used] END OF SECTION Trench Safety 02220-1 KEL00483 02255 EARTH FILL CLASSIFICATIONS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED This section of the specifications describes the various classes of Earth Fill. All of the classes of Earth Fill contained in this specification may not be used on this project. The classes of Earth Fill used on this project are shown on the drawings or specified in other sections of the specifications. This specification section does not include specifications for placement and compaction of Earth Fill. Specifications for placement and compaction of Earth Fill are included in other sections of the specifications and/or shown on the drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE [Not Used] 1.03 SUBMITTALS [Not Used] 1.04 STANDARDS Soil materials shall be classified into the appropriate class of Earth Fill shown below according to ASTM D-2487 "Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes" or other appropriate methods as designated by the Engineer. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE [Not Used] 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS [Not Used] 1.07 OPTIONS [Not Used] 1.08 GUARANTEES [Not Used] 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS; CLASSIFICATIONS A. CLASS 1 EARTH FILL: Limited to clays and sandy clays classified as CH material with a liquid limit greater than or equal to 50, a plasticity index greater than or equal to 25, and a minimum of 60% passing the No. 200 sieve, which are free of organic materials. B. CLASS 2 EARTH FILL: Limited to clays and sandy clays classified as CH and CL materials with a coefficient of permeability less than or equal to 1.0 x 10-7 cm/sec, a liquid limit greater than or equal to 30, a plasticity index greater than or equal to 15, and more than 50% passing the No. 200 sieve, which are free of organic materials. C. CLASS 3 EARTH FILL: Consist of any materials classified as CH, CL, SM, SP, SP -SM, SC, and GC, which have a minimum plasticity index of 4, which are free of organic materials. D. CLASS 4 EARTH FILL: Consist of materials which are classified as SP, SM, SC, CL, or dual classifications thereof, which have a liquid limit less than or equal to 35 and a plasticity index of a minimum of 4 and a maximum of 15, which are free of organic materials. Earth Fill Classifications 02255-1 KEL00483 E. CLASS 5 EARTH FILL: Consist of materials classified as SP or SP -SM which have a plasticity index less than or equal to 4 and a maximum of 12% passing the No. 200 sieve, which are free of organic materials. (Class 6 through Class 11 reserved) F. CLASS 12 EARTH FILL: Consist of soils suitable for topsoil which are relatively free of stones or other objectionable debris, which have sufficient humus content to readily support vegetative growth. The suitability of soils for topsoil shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. 2.02 MIXES [Not Used] 2.03 FABRICATIONS [Not Used] 2.04 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS [Not Used] 3.00 EXECUTION [Not Used] END OF SECTION Earth Fill Classifications 02255-2 KEL00483 02256 AGGREGATE FILL CLASSIFICATIONS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED This section of the specifications describes the various classes of Aggregate Fill. All of the classes of Aggregate Fill contained in this specification may not be used on this project. The classes of Aggregate Fill used on this project are shown on the drawings or specified in other sections of the specifications. This specification section does not include installation. Installation of Aggregate Fill is included in other sections of the specifications and/or on the drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE CLASSIFICATION TESTING A. CONTRACTOR TESTING 1. Arrange and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to sample and test proposed Aggregate Fill materials. 2. Submit the test results to the Engineer, and obtain approval prior to providing Aggregate Fill. B. OWNER TESTING The Owner shall arrange and pay for additional testing on the Aggregate Fill after delivery to the project site as determined necessary by the Engineer. C. CONTAMINATION CERTIFICATION Obtain a written, notarized certification from the Supplier of each proposed Aggregate Fill source stating that to the best of the Supplier's knowledge and belief there has never been contamination of the source with hazardous or toxic materials. 2. Submit these certifications to the Engineer prior to proceeding to furnish Aggregate Fill to the site. The lack of such certification on a potential Aggregate Fill source shall be cause for rejection of that source. 1.03 SUBMITTALS [Not Used] 1.04 STANDARDS Aggregate Fill shall be classified into the appropriate class listed below according to ASTM testing procedures as specified for the various classes. American Society for Testing Materials standards: ASTM C33 Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates ASTM C88 Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate Aggregate Fill Classifications 02256-1 KEL00483 ASTM C125 Terminology relating to concrete and concrete Aggregates ASTM C131 Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small -Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine ASTM C535 Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Large -Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine ASTM D448 Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction" 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE [Not Used] 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS [Not Used] 1.07 OPTIONS [Not Used] 1.08 GUARANTEES [Not Used] 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS; CLASSIFICATIONS A. CLASS 1 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 57: Aggregate Fill Classifications 02256-2 KEL00483 1-1/2" 100 1" 95-100 1/2" 25- 60 No. 4 0- 10 No. 8 0- 5 Aggregate Fill Classifications 02256-2 KEL00483 B. CLASS 2 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM Method C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 67: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing... 1" 100 3/4" 90-100 3/8" 20- 55 No. 4 0 - 10 No. 8 0 - 5 C. CLASS 3 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 7: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 3/4" 100 1/21' 90-100 3/8" 40- 70 No. 4 0- 15 No. 8 0- 5 D. CLASS 4 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM Method C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 467: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 2" 100 1-1/2" 95-100 3/4" 35- 70 3/8" 10- 30 No. 4 0- 5 Aggregate Fill Classifications 02256-3 KEL00483 D. CLASS 5 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 357: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 2-1/2" 100 2" 95-100 1" 35- 70 1/2" 10- 30 No. 4 0- 5 E. CLASS 6 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 1: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 4" 100 3-1/2" 90-100 2-1/2" 25- 60 1-1/2" 0- 15 3/4" 0- 5 Aggregate Fill Classifications 02256-4 KEL00483 G. CLASS 7 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and shall have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 6: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1" 100 3/4" 90-100 1/2" 20- 55 3/8" 0- 15 No. 4 0- 5 H. CLASS 8 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and shall have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 56: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1-1/2" 100 1" 90-100 3/4" 40- 85 1/2" 10- 40 3/8" 0- 15 No. 4 0- 5 CLASS 9 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of washed and screened gravel and natural sands or sands manufactured by crushing stones complying with the requirements of ASTM C33, "Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates", except that the gradation shall be as follows: u 1/2" 100 3/8" 95-100 7 No. 4 80 - 95 No. 8 65 - 85 No. 16 50 - 75 No. 30 25 - 60 No. 50 10- 30 No. 100 0- 10 Aggregate Fill Classifications 02256-5 KEL00483 Class 9 Aggregate Fill shall have not more than 45% passing any sieve and retained on the next consecutive sieve of those shown above, and its fineness modulus, as defined in ASTM C125, shall be not less than 2.3 nor more than 3.1. J. CLASS 10 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of washed and screened natural sands or sands manufactured by crushing stones complying with the requirements and tests of "Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates", ASTM C33. The gradation as included in ASTM C33 is as follows: MY 0-4 3/8" 100 No. 4 95-100 No. 8 80-100 No. 16 50- 85 No. 30 25- 60 No. 50 10- 30 No. 100 2- 10 Class 10 Aggregate Fill shall have not more than 45% passing any sieve and retained on the next consecutive sieve of those shown above, and its fineness modulus, as defined in ASTM C125, shall be not less than 2.3 nor more than 3.1. K. CLASS 11 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable material and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation: L. CLASS 12 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable material and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation: Aggregate Fill Classifications 02256-6 KEL00483 Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1-1/2" 100 1" 85-100 3/4" 60- 95 3/8" 50- 80 No. 4 40- 65 No. 16 20- 40 No. 100 0 - 12 (Wet Sieve Method) M. CLASS 13 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable material and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and shall meet the following gradation: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1-3/4" 100 7/8" 65- 90 3/8" 50- 70 No. 4 35- 55 No. 40 15- 30 No. 100 0 - 3 (Wet Sieve Method) N. CLASS 14 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable material and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1-1/2" 100 1" 85-100 3/4" 60- 95 3/8" 50- 80 No. 4 40- 65 No. 16 20- 40 No. 100 0 - 3 (Wet Sieve Method) O. CLASS 15 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of silica sand, washed clean, chemically inert, and packaged by the Supplier. The material shall meet applicable regulatory requirements for monitor well filter pack. The source of the material shall be approved by the Aggregate Fill Classifications 02256-7 KEL00483 Engineer and shall meet the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing No. 20 No. 40 98- 100 0- 2 2.02 MIXES [Not Used] 2.03 FABRICATIONS [Not Used] 2.04 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS [Not Used] 3.00 EXECUTION [Not Used] END OF SECTION Aggregate Fill Classifications 02256-8 KEL00483 02261 GEOTEXTILE - SOIL STABILIZATION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install geotextile fabric. Use the geotextile in conjunction with aggregate to stabilize soft soils for roads, storage yards, parking areas, or other areas as specified. The geotextile shall be designed to allow passage of water while retaining insitu soil without clogging. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. DESIGN CRITERIA The geotextile fabric shall be inert to commonly encountered chemicals, hydrocarbons, mildew and rot resistant, resistant to ultraviolet light exposure, insect and rodent resistant, and conform to the properties in the following table. 2. The average roll minimum value (weakest principal direction) for strength properties of any individual roll tested from the manufacturing lot or lots of a particular shipment shall be in excess of the average roll minimum value (weakest principal direction) stipulated herein. Test Requirements: Physical Properties Average Roll Minimum Value (Weakest Principal Direction)* Grab Strength* ASTM D4632 (Lbs.) 180 Grab Elongation* 40 ASTM D4632 (%) Mullen Burst Strength 290 ASTM D3786 (psi) Permeability - k 0.1 (cm/sec.) ASTM D4491 Water Flow Rate 80 (gal/min/ft2) ASTM D4491 Geotextile - Soil Stabilization 02261-1 KEL00483 Physical Properties Average Roll Minimum Value (Weakest Principal Direction)* AOS(O95) mm, ASTM D4751 0.25 Trapezoid Tear Strength* 50 ASTM D4533 (Lbs.) Puncture Resistance 75 ASTM D4833 (Lbs.) B. PACKING AND IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS Provide the geotextile in rolls wrapped with protective covering to protect the geotextile from mud, dirt, dust, and debris. The geotextile shall be free of defects or flaws which significantly affect its physical properties. Label each roll of geotextile in the shipment with a number or symbol to identify that production run. C. SAMPLING AND COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS A competent laboratory must be maintained by the producer of the geotextile at the point of manufacture to insure quality control in accordance with ASTM testing procedures. The laboratory shall maintain records of its quality control results and provide a manufacturer's certificate upon request to the Engineer prior to shipment. The certificate shall include: 1. Name of manufacturer 2. Chemical composition 3. Product description 4. Statement of compliance to specification requirements 5. Signature of legally authorized official attesting to the information required 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: 1. Record data 2. Samples 1.04 STANDARDS [Not Used] 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE [Not Used] 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS [Not Used] 1.07 OPTIONS [Not Used] 1.08 GUARANTEES [Not Used] Geotextile - Soil Stabilization 02261-2 KEL00483 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS GEOTEXTILE: Non -woven fabric consisting of U.V. stabilized polypropylene, formed into a stable network by needle punching. 2.02 MIXES [Not Used] 2.03 FABRICATIONS [Not Used] 2.04 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS [Not Used] 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION [Not Used] 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Exposure of geotextiles to the elements between laydown and cover shall be a maximum of 14 days to minimize potential damage. Install the geotextile on the prepared subgrade in accordance with the plans. The geotextile shall be placed so that placement of the overlying materials will not excessively stretch or tear the fabric. Successive geotextile sheets shall be overlapped so that the upslope sheet is placed over the downslope sheet. Where seams are required in the longitudinal trench direction, they shall be joined by either sewing or overlapping. Seams shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Damaged geotextile shall be repaired with a geotextile patch, placed over the damaged area and extended 3' beyond the perimeter of the tear or damage. B. The aggregate should be back dumped onto the fabric and spread in a uniform lift maintaining the design aggregate thickness. Construction vehicles will not be allowed to traffic directly on the fabric. C. Avoid over -stressing the soil by utilizing equipment in spreading and dumping that exerts only moderate pressures on the soil. Severe rutting at the time of placement is an indication of over- stressing the soil. Such soil over -stressing must be avoided. Increasing aggregate depths and reducing loads are two (2) methods of reducing the pressures on the soil. D. Fill any ruts which develop during spreading or compacting with additional aggregate rather than blading from surrounding areas. E. Thoroughly compact the aggregate with vibratory rollers after placement. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [Not Used] 3.04 CLEAN AND ADJUST [Not Used] 3.05 SCHEDULES [Not Used] END OF SECTION Geotextile - Soil Stabilization 02261-3 KEL00483 02263 GEOTEXTILE -EROSION CONTROL 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install geotextile fabric. Use the geotextile in erosion control applications under bedding stone or riprap along channels, shores, and waterways, and under slope protection along highway cut or fill slopes as specified. The geotextile shall be designed to allow passage of water while retaining insitu soil without clogging. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. DESIGN CRITERIA 1. The geotextile fabric shall be inert to commonly encountered chemicals, hydrocarbons, mildew and rot resistant, resistant to ultraviolet light exposure, insect and rodent resistant, and conform to the properties in the following table. 2. The average roll minimum value (weakest principal direction) for strength properties of any individual roll tested from the manufacturing lot or lots of a particular shipment shall be in excess of the average roll minimum value (weakest principal direction) stipulated herein. Test Requirements: Geotextile - Erosion Control 02263-1 KEL00483 Average Roll Minimum Value Physical Properties (Weakest Principal Direction)* Grab Tensile Strength* 200 ASTM D4632 (Lbs) Elongation at Failure* 15 ASTM D4632 (%) Mullen Burst Strength 320 ASTM D3786 (psi) Water Flow Rate 60 (gal/min/ft2) ASTM D4491 AOS(095) mm, ASTM D4751 0.25 Trapezoid Tear Strength* 50 ASTM D4533 (Lbs.) Permeability — k 0.1 (cm/sec) ASTM D4491 Puncture Resistance 90 ASTM D4833 (modified) (Lbs.) Geotextile - Erosion Control 02263-1 KEL00483 B. PACKING AND IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS Provide the geotextile in rolls wrapped with protective covering to protect the geotextile from mud, dirt, dust, and debris. The geotextile shall be free of defects or flaws which significantly affect its physical properties. Label each roll of geotextile in the shipment with a number or symbol to identify that production run. C. SAMPLING AND COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS A competent laboratory must be maintained by the producer of the geotextile at the point of manufacture to insure quality control in accordance with ASTM testing procedures. The laboratory shall maintain records of its quality control results and provide a manufacturer's certificate upon request to the Engineer prior to shipment. The certificate shall include: 1. Name of manufacturer 2. Chemical composition 3. Product description 4. Statement of compliance to specification requirements 5. Signature of legally authorized official attesting to the information required 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: A. Record Data B. Samples 1.04 STANDARDS (NOT USED] 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE [NOT USED] 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.07 OPTIONS [NOT USED] 1.08 GUARANTEES [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS GEOTEXTILE: Non -woven fabric consisting of U.V. stabilized polypropylene, formed into a stable network by needle punching. 2.02 MIXES [NOT USED] Geotextile - Erosion Control 02263-2 KEL00483 2.03 FABRICATIONS [NOT USED] 2.04 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Exposure of geotextiles to the elements between laydown and cover shall be a maximum of 14 days to minimize damage potential. Install the geotextile fabric in accordance with the plans. Construction vehicles will not be allowed to traffic directly on the fabric. Place and anchor geotextile on a smooth graded surface approved by the Engineer. The geotextile shall be placed so that placement of the overlying materials will not excessively stretch or tear the fabric. Anchoring of the terminal ends of the geotextile shall be accomplished through the use of key trenches or aprons at the crest and the toe of the slope. Successive geotextile sheets shall be overlapped so that the upstream sheet is placed over the downstream sheet and/or upslope over downslope. In underwater applications, the geotextile and required thickness of backfill material shall be placed the same day. The geotextile shall be placed so that placement of the overlying materials will not excessively stretch or tear the fabric. Overlaps when necessary shall be 12" minimum except when placed under water where the overlap shall be a minimum of 36". Use securing pins when necessary to insure proper anchoring of the fabric, with securing pins spaced at 5' to 10' centers. Securing pins shall be 3/16" steel bars, pointed at one end and fabricated with a head to retain a steel washer having an outside diameter of not less than 1-1/2". The pin length shall not be less than 19". U- shaped pins or special staples shall be an acceptable option, if approved by the Engineer. B. The backfill placement shall begin at the toe and proceed up the slope. Back -dump the aggregate onto the fabric and spread in a uniform lift maintaining design aggregate thickness. Avoid over -stressing the soil by utilizing equipment in spreading and dumping that exerts only moderate pressures on the soil. Severe rutting at the time of placement is an indication of over -stressing the soil. Such soil over -stressing must be avoided. Increasing aggregate depths and reducing loads are two methods of reducing pressures on the soil. Fill any ruts that develop during spreading or compacting with additional aggregate rather than blading from surrounding areas. C. Either sewing or overlapping shall join the geotextile. Seams shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Damaged geotextile shall be repaired with geotextile patch, placed over the damaged area and extended 3' beyond the perimeter of the tear or damage. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.04 CLEAN AND ADJUST [NOT USED] 3.05 SCHEDULES [NOT USED] Geotextile - Erosion Control 02263-3 KEL00483 4.00 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Geotextile shall be measured for payment by the square yard in place. Measurement will be the nearest square yard. No allowance will be made for material in laps and seams. Payment will be made at the contract unit price bid for "Geotextile - Erosion Control", which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing labor, material, equipment, and performing operations in connection with placing the geotextile as shown on the plans. No measurement of, nor payment for, will be included for securing pins, and costs incidental thereto shall be included in the contract unit price bid for "Geotextile - Erosion Control". Neither measurement nor payment for will be made for damaged fabric due to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. END OF SECTION Geotextile - Erosion Control 02263-4 KEL00483 02266 GEOGRID-SOIL REINFORCEMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install geogrids for soil reinforcement purposes in conjunction with constructed or reconstructed earth slopes and other earth structures. B. Not necessarily all of the geogrids listed in this specification section are used on this project. The required geogrids are indicated on the drawings and identified by the appropriate "GB" or "GU" designations contained in this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. DESIGN CRITERIA BIAXIAL GEOGRID PROPERTIES: The properties specified below are minimum average roll values. Test methods other than those listed in the tables below may be considered by the Engineer if the test method is comparable to that specified and is performed by an independent testing organization acceptable to the Engineer. Consideration and acceptance of alternate test methods shall be at the sole discretion of the Engineer and the decision shall be final. MD = Machine Direction (along roll length) CMD = Cross Machine Direction (across roll width) 5 70_erty est; Methodnits x Min. Value Tensile Strength 2% Strain -MD ASTM D-4595-8 % 265 enst a trengt oD-4-5T5-96---- Strain -CMD Tensile Modulus o Strain -MD - - , Tensile Modulus o Strain -CMD - - 7 1, 900 Junction Strength -MID- - 7 2 GB265 Property Test Metho-d Units Min. Value Junction Strength -CMD Open Area RI- 2-87 COE-CW02215 % 1,200 70 Geogrid - Soil Reinforcement 02266-1 KEL00483 GB350MAW Property sw P,raperty, . Test Method Units Tensile Strength @ 2% Tensile Strength @ 2% Strain -MD Strain -MD ASTM D-4595-86 Lb/ft 350 Tensile Strength @ 2% Strain -MD Strain -CMD ASTM D-4595-86 Lb/ft 570 Tensile Modulus @ 2% Lb/ft 1,965 Junction Efficiency Strain -MD GRI-GG1-87 Lb/ft 17,500 Tensile Modulus @ 2% % 55 Strain -CMD GRI-GG1-87 Lb/ft 28,500 Junction Strength -MD GRI-GGI-87 Lb/ft 995 Junction Strength -CMD GRI-GGI-87 Lb/ft 1,800 Open Area COE-CW02215 % 70 2. UNIAXIAL GEOGRID PROPERTIES: The properties specified below are minimum average roll values. Test methods other than those listed in the tables below may be considered by the Engineer if the test method is comparable to that specified and is performed by an independent testing organization acceptable to the Engineer. Consideration and acceptance of alternate test methods shall be at the sole discretion of the Engineer and the decision shall be final. Upon prior approval of the Engineer, a biaxial geogrid, which in its MD meets or exceeds the properties of a specified uniaxial geogrid and which meets the other requirements of this specification section, may be substituted for the specified uniaxial geogrid. MD = Machine Direction (along roll length) CMD = Cross Machine Direction (across roll width) f; GU570'' Property Test 1vlethad Units hWin. Value Tensile Strength @ 2% Strain -MD ASTM D-4595-86 Lb/ft 570 Tensile Modulus @ 2% Strain -MD GRI-GG1-87 Lb/ft 28,500 Junction Strength -MD GRI-GG2-87 Lb/ft 1,965 Junction Efficiency GRI-GG2-87 % 90 Open Area COE-CW02215 % 55 G "1050 Property Test 1vlethad Units Min. Value Tensile Strength @ 2% Strain -MD ASTM D-4595-86 Lb/ft 950 Tensile Modulus @ 2% Strain -MD GRI-GG1-87 Lb/ft 47,500 Junction Strength -MD GRI-GG2-87 Lb/ft 3,150 Open Area COE-CW02215 % 55 Geogrid - Soil Reinforcement 02266-2 KEL00483 GU1900 Property Test Method Units Min. Value Tensile Strength @ 2% Strain -MD ASTM D-4595-86 Lb/ft 1,900 Tensile Modulus @ 2% Strain -MD GRI-GG1-87 Lb/ft 95,000 Junction Strength -MD GRI-GG2-87 Lb/ft 4,750 Open Area COE-CW02215 % 55 B. LABELING, PACKAGING AND CERTIFICATION 1. The Manufacturer shall clearly label each roll of geogrid in a weather resistant manner prior to shipment. The label shall identify the specific product and the production run. 2. A certificate of specification compliance shall be furnished by the Manufacturer on each production run of each specific product. The production run numbers shall be coordinated to the production run numbers on the individual roll labeling. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: A. Standard roll widths and lengths to be furnished. 1.04 STANDARDS Standards published by the following agencies or organizations are referenced in this specification section: ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA. GRI Geosynthetics Research Institute, Drexel University, Philadelphia, PA. COE U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Washington, D.C. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Store the geogrid in a suitable location and in a manner which prevents damage to the product. Do not store different types or strengths of geogrid directly together. Take care to Geogrid - Soil Reinforcement 02266-3 KEL00483 Property Test Method Units Min. Value Tensile Strength Strain -MD - ,o Tensile Modulus o Strain -MD G RI - G GT --97—,5 Junction Strength -Ml)- - 7 , Open Area - o 55 B. LABELING, PACKAGING AND CERTIFICATION 1. The Manufacturer shall clearly label each roll of geogrid in a weather resistant manner prior to shipment. The label shall identify the specific product and the production run. 2. A certificate of specification compliance shall be furnished by the Manufacturer on each production run of each specific product. The production run numbers shall be coordinated to the production run numbers on the individual roll labeling. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: A. Standard roll widths and lengths to be furnished. 1.04 STANDARDS Standards published by the following agencies or organizations are referenced in this specification section: ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA. GRI Geosynthetics Research Institute, Drexel University, Philadelphia, PA. COE U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Washington, D.C. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Store the geogrid in a suitable location and in a manner which prevents damage to the product. Do not store different types or strengths of geogrid directly together. Take care to Geogrid - Soil Reinforcement 02266-3 KEL00483 maintain the labels until the product is used. Provide ultra -violet and weather protective coverings until the product is used and properly cover any interim unused portion until used. B. Take care during unloading and handling of geogrid to prevent damage from construction equipment or other sources. Do not use any damaged product. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.07 OPTIONS [NOT USED] 1.08 GUARANTEES [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS The geogrid shall consist of a polypropylene or high density polyethylene material as specified below. A. POLYPROPYLENE GEOGRID: A grid structure formed by biaxially or uniaxially drawing a continuous sheet of polypropylene material. The sheets shall contain a minimum of 98% of Group 1, Class 1, Grade 2 materials in accordance with ASTM D-4101. The sheets shall contain a minimum of 0.50% carbon black in accordance with ASTM D-1603. B. HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE GEOGRID: A grid structure formed by biaxially or uniaxially drawing a continuous sheet of high density polyethylene material. The sheets shall contain a minimum of 97% of Type III, Class A, Grade 5 materials in accordance with ASTM D-1248. The sheets shall contain a minimum of 2% carbon black in accordance with ASTM D-4218. 2.02 MIXES [NOT USED] 2.03 FABRICATIONS [NOT USED] 2.04 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS; ANCHORING DEVICES A. Anchoring devices shall be as recommended by the Geogrid Manufacturer and shall be constructed of metal or plastic material. B. Anchoring devices for connecting geogrid joints shall consist of split rings, draw -ties, or other suitable devices which will not damage the geogrid nor interfere with adjacent work. Geogrid - Soil Reinforcement 02266-4 KEL00483 C. Anchoring devices for attaching the geogrid to the subgrade or embankment shall consist of soil staples, stakes, or pins of suitable length with anchoring lugs or washers at the top. The anchors shall not have significant protrusion above grade when installed and shall not be of a type that will damage the geogrid nor interfere with adjacent work. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION Perform subgrade preparation as specified in 02219, EXCAVATION. 3.02 INSTALLATION In the event that any of the Manufacturer's recommendations for geogrid installation are more restrictive or stringent than the requirements of this section, the Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed, if requested by the Engineer. A. EARTH SLOPE REINFORCEMENT 1. If a geotextile is indicated, install the geotextile on the subgrade in accordance with Section 02261, GEOTEXTILE - SOIL STABILIZATION prior to installing the geogrid. 2. The limits of the geogrid shall be as indicated. Roll out the geogrid onto the prepared subgrade or previously placed lift of embankment. Pull tightly by hand to take up the slack and anchor to the subgrade with appropriate anchoring devices at a maximum of 30' feet on center (or closer if required) along the centerline of the roll and along the edges and ends. A minimum of two (2) anchors is required on any edge or end. 3. Place the length of the roll (MD) of the geogrid perpendicular to the longitudinal centerline of the embankment. Do not allow end joints unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings. Butt side joints without overlap unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings. 4. Repair any damaged areas in the geogrid by replacing with undamaged geogrid. Perform the necessary cutting of the geogrid with suitable shears or similar devices so that the adjacent geogrid is not damaged. 5. Do not expose the geogrid to sunlight for more than three (3) consecutive days before being covered with the appropriate earth fill. Process the indicated earth fill and bring to proper moisture content in accordance with Section 02254, COMPACTED EARTH FILL [LANDFILLS AND HEAVY EARTHWORK PROJECTS, EXCLUDING DAMS] prior to spreading on the geogrid in the embankment. Disc plows or any other equipment which might damage the geogrid through the earth fill lift shall not be allowed on the lift. Backdump the earth fill onto the installed geogrid and spread ahead of the equipment to the prescribed thickness by low ground pressure track -type equipment equivalent to a D- 3 Caterpillar bulldozer. Spread the material in a direction that will not be against exposed edges of the geogrid at side joints or ends. Do not allow equipment or vehicles to traffic directly on the geogrid. The lift thickness, processing, and compaction of the earth fill shall be in accordance with the requirements of the appropriate specification section. Geogrid - Soil Reinforcement 02266-5 KEL00483 6. Fill any ruts or depressions which develop during the placement of the earth fill with additional material instead of blading material from adjacent areas. B. EARTH STRUCTURE REINFORCEMENT 1. If a geotextile is indicated, install the geotextile on the subgrade in accordance with Section 02261, GEOTEXTILE - SOIL STABILIZATION prior to installing the geogrid. The term "subgrade" as used in this Paragraph "B" shall be understood to apply to the original subgrade or to the surface of a lift in the embankment. 2. The limits of the geogrid shall be as indicated. Roll out the geogrid onto the prepared subgrade or previously placed lift of embankment. Pull tightly by hand to take up the slack and anchor to the subgrade with appropriate anchoring devices at a maximum of 30 feet on center (or closer if required) along the centerline of the roll and along the edges and ends. A minimum of two (2) anchors shall be required on any edge or end. 3. Place the length of the roll (MD) of the geogrid perpendicular to the longitudinal centerline of the embankment. Do not allow end joints unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings. Butt side joints without overlap unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings. 4. Repair any damaged areas in the geogrid by replacing with undamaged geogrid. Perform the necessary cutting of the geogrid with suitable shears or similar devices so that the adjacent geogrid is not damaged. 5. Do not expose the geogrid to sunlight for more than three (3) consecutive days before being covered with the appropriate earth fill. Process the earth fill indicated and bring the material to the proper moisture content in accordance with Section 02254, COMPACTED EARTH FILL [LANDFILLS AND HEAVY EARTHWORK PROJECT, EXCLUDING DAMS] prior to spreading the geogrid in the embedment. Do not allow disc plows or any other equipment which might damage the geogrid through the earth fill lift on the lift. Backdump the indicated earth fill onto the installed geogrid and spread ahead of the equipment to the prescribed thickness by low ground pressure track -type equipment equivalent to a D-3 Caterpillar bulldozer. Spread the material in a direction that will not be against exposed edges of the geogrid at side or end laps. Do not allow equipment or vehicles to traffic directly on the geogrid. The lift thickness, processing, and compaction of the earth fill shall be in accordance with the requirements of the appropriate specification section. 6. Fill any ruts or depressions which develop during placement of the earth fill with additional material instead of blading material from adjacent areas. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.04 CLEAN AND ADJUST [NOT USED] 3.05 SCHEDULES [NOT USED] 4.00 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. GEOGRID - SOIL REINFORCEMENT OF EARTH SLOPES 1. Measure the geogrid by the square yard of authorized geogrid actually placed. Geogrid - Soil Reinforcement 02266-6 KEL00483 2. Make payment at the unit price bid per square yard for the various designations of geogrid listed in the proposal for soil reinforcement of earth slopes. This price is full compensation for furnishing and installing the geogrid as indicated. B. GEOGRID - SOIL REINFORCEMENT OF EARTH STRUCTURES 1. Measure the geogrid by the square yard of authorized geogrid actually placed. 2. Make payment at the unit price bid per square yard for the various designations of geogrid listed in the proposal for soil reinforcement of earth structures. This price is full compensation for furnishing and installing the geogrid as indicated. C. GEOGRID - SOIL REINFORCEMENT FOR RETAINING WALLS 1. Geogrid for Concrete Segmental Retaining Walls will not be measured for payment, but shall be considered subsidiary to the items requiring geogrid. END OF SECTION Geogrid - Soil Reinforcement 02266-7 KEL00483 02271 RIPRAP AND BEDDING MATERIAL 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to produce and place the riprap and bedding material. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE [Not Used] 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include soundness, gradation, and unit weight. 1.04 STANDARDS Sampling and testing of material shall be in compliance with the latest revision of the following except where specifically modified: ASTM C-88 "Standard Specification for Soundness of Aggregates By Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate" ASTM C-127 "Standard Specification for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregates" ASTM C-136 "Standard Specification for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates" 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE; RIPRAP STOCKPILE Riprap temporarily stockpiled for construction purposes shall be located in an area approved by the Owner. Riprap materials shall not be located so as to block or restrict equipment and vehicle access to existing structures. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS [Not Used] 1.07 OPTIONS [Not Used] 1.08 GUARANTEES [Not Used] 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. BEDDING MATERIAL 1. Bedding material shall be crushed stone, gravel or a blend of crushed stone and gravel. Bedding material shall be composed of tough durable particles; shall be reasonably free from thin, flat, and elongated pieces; shall be well graded between the prescribed limits; Riprap and Bedding Material 02271-1 KEL00483 and shall contain no organic matter or soft, friable particles in quantities considered objectionable by the Owner. 2. Bedding material shall have a loss of less than eighteen (18%) percent weighted average at five (5) cycles when tested for soundness in magnesium sulfate in accordance with ASTM C-88 using particles passing a 2-1/2" sieve and retained on a 1-1/2" sieve. After final drying, the material shall be screened over the 1-1/4" sieve. A minimum of one (1) soundness test shall be performed on materials delivered to the site. Bedding material shall have a gradation as given below when tested in accordance with ASTM C-136. Sieve Size Z. MAR Percent Passing 11 1 100%311 65-90 • #4 ' The material shall not be skip graded, scalped of certain sizes, or have other irregularities which would be detrimental to the proper functioning of the bedding. Acceptance of bedding material shall be based on in-place gradations. B. RIPRAP Stone for riprap shall be durable and of a suitable quality to insure permanence in the structure and in the climate which it is to be used. The stone shall be free from cracks, seams, and other defects which would tend to increase unduly its deterioration from natural causes and shall be reasonably well graded between the prescribed limits as specified herein. 2. Riprap shall have a minimum unit weight of one hundred forty five (145) pounds per solid cubic foot based upon the bulk specific gravity (saturated surface dry) when tested in accordance with ASTM C-127. A minimum of one (1) bulk specific gravity (saturated surface dry) shall be performed on riprap material delivered to the site. 3. Riprap shall have a loss of less than eighteen (18%) percent after five (5) cycles when tested for soundness in magnesium sulfate in accordance with ASTM C-88. The test shall be run using particles passing a 2-1/2" sieve and retained on a 1-1/2" sieve. After final drying, the material shall be screened over the 1-1/4" sieve. A minimum of one (1) soundness in magnesium sulfate test shall be performed on riprap material delivered to the site. 4. Riprap gradation shall be as given below: Riprap and Bedding Material 02271-2 KEL00483 Sieve Size Percent Passin 1811 100% 1211 75% 8 60% 6 i 4V2110-10% Acceptance of riprap material shall be based upon in-place gradations. 2.03 FABRICATIONS [Not Used] 2.04 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS [Not Used] 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 FOUNDATION PREPARATION Trim and dress areas on which bedding and riprap are to be placed to conform to cross sections shown on the drawings within an allowable tolerance of plus or minus 2" from the theoretical slope lines and grades. 3.02 FILTER CLOTH [Not Used] 3.03 BEDDING PLACEMENT Uniformly spread bedding material on the prepared surface, in a satisfactory manner, to the slope lines and grades indicated on the drawings. Placing of material by dumping from top of slope or by any method which tends to segregate particle sizes within the blanket shall not be permitted. Compaction of the blanket will not be required, but it shall be finished to present a reasonably even surface free from mounds or windrows. 3.04 RIPRAP PLACEMENT A. Place stone for riprap on the blanket in such manner as to produce a reasonably well -graded mass of rock with the minimum practicable percentage of voids, and construct within the specified tolerance to the lines and grades shown on the drawings or staked in the field. A tolerance of plus 6" or minus 0" from the slope lines and grades shown on the drawings shall be allowed in the finished surface of the riprap. Place riprap to its full course thickness at one operation and in such a manner as to avoid displacing the blanket material. Distribute the larger stones evenly and conform the entire mass of stones in their final position to the specified gradation. B. The finished riprap shall be free from objectionable pockets of small stones and clusters of larger stones. Place riprap loads along horizontal rows and progress up the slope. Place each load against previously placed riprap. Placing riprap in layers shall not be permitted. Placing riprap by dumping from top of slope, dumping into chutes, or by similar methods likely to cause segregation of the various sizes shall not be permitted. The desired distribution of the various Riprap and Bedding Material 02271-3 KEL00483 sizes of stones throughout the mass shall be obtained by methods of placement which produces the specified results. Rearrange individual stones by mechanical equipment or by hand to the extent necessary to obtain a reasonably well graded distribution of stone sizes. Maintain the riprap protection until accepted and replace any material displaced by any cause to the lines and grades shown on the drawings. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL; TESTING The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all testing to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Gradation testing of the riprap and bedding materials shall be performed on all the materials within a 10'x 10' square area designated by the Engineer. Gradation tests shall be representative of no greater than one-third of the material placed. The Contractor shall bear all costs, including additional testing, of the correction of materials which fail to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. 3.06 CLEAN AND ADJUST [Not Used] 3.07 SCHEDULES [Not Used] END OF SECTION Riprap and Bedding Material 02271-4 KEL00483 02276 CONCRETE SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work shall consist of furnishing and installing concrete segmental retaining wall (CSRW) units to the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the plans and details and as specified herein. B. Work includes furnishing leveling pad, unit fill and backfill material as specified herein and as shown on the construction shop drawings. C. Work includes furnishing approved CSRW facing and cap units as shown on the construction shop drawings. D. Work includes installation of wall drainage system as shown on the construction drawings. E. Work includes furnishing soil reinforcement as shown on the construction shop drawings. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Concrete Segmental Retaining Wall Facing (CSRW) Units B a preapproved facing unit which meets all physical and performance criteria in this specification, as determined by the ENGINEER prior to award of the contract, machine made from Portland Cement, water and mineral aggregates. B. CSRW Cap Unit B a unit designed specifically to top or finish an approved CSRW Unit. C. Unit Fill B aggregate fill placed in the open areas of CSRW units. D. Foundation Soil B compacted or in-situ soil beneath the entire wall. E. Soil Reinforcement Geogrid B a structural geotextile formed by a regular network of integrally connected tensile elements with apertures of sufficient size to allow interlocking with surrounding soil, rock or earth and function primarily as structural reinforcement, as specified in Section 02266 GEOGRID B SOIL REINFORCEMENT. F. Reinforced Backfill B compacted soil which is reinforced with geogrid, as defined by the reinforced soil volume indicated on the plans. G. Retained Soil B compacted or in-situ soil behind the reinforced backfill zone. H. Leveling Pad B a level compacted gravel or unreinforced concrete footing upon which the first course of CSRW units are placed. Concrete Segmental Retaining Walls 02276-1 KEL00483 1.03 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS A. Geosynthetic Research Institute GG1-87 Standard Test Method for Geogrid Rib Tensile Strength GG2-87 Standard Test Method for Geogrid Junction Strength GG3 (a&b)-91 Tension Creep Testing of (Stiff & Flexible) Geogrids GG4 (a&b)-91 Determination of Long -Term Design Strength of (Stiff & Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units Flexible) Geogrids GG5-91 Geogrid Pullout B. American Society for Testing and Materials Standards H. Project geotechnical report entitled AGeotechnical Engineering Study B Channel Improvements, Creeks 17 and 23, Big Bear Tributary, Grapevine, Texas@, Report No. 514-5-018-01 prepared by Rone Engineers, September 1995. Concrete Segmental Retaining Walls 02276-2 KEL00483 ASTM CB -90 Specification for Concrete Aggregates ASTM C-90-85 Hollow Load -Bearing Masonry Units ASTM C-140-90 Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units ASTM C-145-85 Solid Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units ASTM C-150-89 Specification for Portland Cement ASTM C-595-89 Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements ASTM D-698 Moisture Density Relationship for Soils, Standard Method ASTM D-1557 Modified Proctor Density ASTM D-422 Gradation Analysis ASTM D-4318 Atterberg Limits ASTM D-4595 Tensile Properties of Geotextiles by the Wide -Width Strip Method ASTM D-4632 Tensile Properties of Geotextiles ASTM D-52 Tensile Creep Testing of Geosynthetics ASTM G-57-78 Resistivity ASTM G-51-77 Alkalinity C. NCMA TEK 50 A Specifications for Segmental Retaining Wall Units D. NCMA SRWU-1 Determination of Connection Strength between Geosynthetics and Segmental Concrete Units E. NCMA SRWU-2 Determination of Shear Strength between Segmental Concrete Units F. NCMA Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls G. AASHTO 1994 Interim Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges H. Project geotechnical report entitled AGeotechnical Engineering Study B Channel Improvements, Creeks 17 and 23, Big Bear Tributary, Grapevine, Texas@, Report No. 514-5-018-01 prepared by Rone Engineers, September 1995. Concrete Segmental Retaining Walls 02276-2 KEL00483 1.04 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS, and shall include: A. CONTRACTOR or his sub -Contractor shall have a minimum of the previous two years experience and a minimum of 40,000 square feet of documentable satisfactory experience installing Soil Reinforced Segmental Retaining Walls over eight feet in height. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a project list indicating the required experience to the OWNER before beginning construction of CSRW walls. B. Manufacturer's specifications (latest edition) for proposed materials, method of installation, and list of materials proposed for use. C. Samples of CSRW units showing finish and potential color variation shall be provided to the OWNER prior to construction. D. A notarized manufacturer's certification prior to start of work stating the CSRW system meets the requirements of this specification. E. A certificate of compliance certifying that the reinforced backfill materials comply with Section 2.03 of this specification. F. CONTRACTOR shall submit detailed CSRW shop drawings, sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas including: 1. Proprietary product literature indicating specifically which CSRW units are proposed for use on the project, including color, face style, and texture. 2. Proprietary product specifications indicating compressive strength, unit weight, aggregate mix, and percent absorption for the units proposed. Proprietary product literature for soil reinforcements proposed for use in the CSRW system indicating exactly which reinforcements are to be used, wide width tensile strength, and results of 10,000 hour testing. This information should also include manufacturer recommended reduction factors for creep, biological/chemical damage, installation damage, factor of safety for uncertainties, and any other reductions identified by the manufacturer to be used for design with the proposed reinforcement. 4. Results of connection strength testing performed by a certified testing laboratory for the specific CSRW unit and specific soil reinforcements proposed according to NCMA test method SRWU-1. 5. Results of shear strength testing between CSRW units performed by a certified testing laboratory according to NCMA test method SRWU-2. 2. Wall profiles, reinforcement elevations, reinforcement lengths, reinforcement types, top of wall, bottom of wall, proposed grades at top of wall, and stations showing beginning of and ending of wall as well as the beginning and ending of turns and radii. Concrete Segmental Retaining Walls 02276-3 KEL00483 6. Design parameters for the retaining wall, including the design criteria specified in Paragraph H of Section 1.06 below, required bearing capacity of wall subgrade, and construction details. 7. Hand calculations and/or computer output accompanied by hand calculations addressing required design parameters according to NCMA recommendations. 8. A certificate of Errors and Omissions Insurance with a minimum value of $500,000 per occurrence for the Registered Professional Engineer sealing the shop drawings. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. CONTRACTOR shall check the materials upon delivery to assure the specified type, grade, color and texture of CSRW units have been received. B. CONTRACTOR shall prevent excessive mud, wet concrete, epoxies, and like materials which may affix themselves, from coming in contact with the materials. C. CONTRACTOR shall protect the materials from damage. Damaged material shall not be incorporated into the retaining wall structure. 1.06 SPECIAL PROVISIONS A. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, wall batter shall be a maximum of 40. Blocks shall be placed horizontally, and positive means of obtaining batter shall be provided. B. The OWNER's Representative shall interpret subsurface conditions within the CSRW foundation area, and shall provide recommendations for any subsoil improvements required. Foundation area of concrete segmental retaining walls shall be take to extend from a minimum of 6 inches from the front face of the block to the horizontal extent of the geogrid reinforcement. C. The CONTRACTOR shall include the cost of all means of subsoil improvement as recommended by the OWNER's Representative in the unit price bid per SF of facing area. D. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for complying with all federal, state, and local requirements for execution of the work, including local building inspection and current OSHA excavation regulations. E. Prior to undertaking any grading or excavation of the site, the CONTRACTOR shall perform surveying procedures to confirm the location of the retaining walls, as well as any underground features, including utility locations within the area of construction. F. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate installation of underground utilities with wall installation. Concrete Segmental Retaining Walls 02276-4 KEL00483 G. Minimum geogrid length shall be five feet or 70 percent of the wall height, whichever is greater. H. The Design Criteria for the CSRW system shall be: Internal Stability of Walls: Minimum Factor of Safety on Tensile Overstress 1.0 Minimum Factor of Safety on Geogrid Pullout 1.5 (peak load criterion) Minimum Factor of Safety on Geogrid Pullout 1.0 (serviceability criterion) Minimum Factor of Safety on Facing Shear 1.5 (peak load criterion) Minimum Factor of Safety on Facing Shear 1.0 (serviceability criterion) Minimum Factor of Safety for Connections 1.5 (peak load criterion) Minimum Factor of Safety for Connections 1.0 (serviceability criterion) Minimum Factor of Safety for Uncertainties 1.5 2. External Stability of Walls: Minimum Factor of Safety Against Base Sliding 1.5 (static condition) Minimum Factor of Safety Against Overturning 2.0 Minimum Factor of Safety for Global Stability 1.5 Minimum Factor of Safety for Bearing Capacity 2.0 3. Design shall address hydrostatic loading, seismic loading, rapid drawdown, surcharge, velocity effects, and backslopes where appropriate. 2.00 MATERIALS 2.01 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL UNITS A. CSRW units shall meet all physical and performance criteria set forth in this specification. CSRW units made by the following manufacturers have been determined to meet the requirements of this specification. 1. Anchor Vertica Pro, as manufactured by Pavestone Anchor Wall Systems. 2. Standard Unit, as manufactured by Keystone Retaining Wall Systems. B. CSRW units shall meet the following structural requirements: 1. Concrete used to form all CSRW units including cap units shall have a minimum net 28 -day compressive strength of 3,000 psi. The CSRW units shall have adequate freeze/thaw protection, as indicated by a maximum absorption rate of 8 percent. Concrete Segmental Retaining Walls 02276-5 KEL00483 2. Cementitious materials used in the manufacture of the units shall be Type I, Type II or Type III Portland cement in accordance with ASTM C 150. 3. Other constituents B Air entraining agents, coloring pigments, integral water repellents, finely ground silica and other constituents previously established as suitable for use in segmental retaining wall units, conforming to applicable ASTM Standards or shown by test or experience to be not detrimental to the durability of the segmental concrete facing units or to any material used in masonry construction. 4. Exterior dimensions of units may vary in accordance with ASTM C90-90. CSRW concrete facing unit dimensions shall not differ more than 1/8 inch from the manufacturer's molded dimension, nor more than 1/16 inch in height from front to back of unit. 5. CSRW units shall provide a minimum weight equivalent to 125 pcf. Unit fill placed within the dimensions of the units may be considered as 80 percent of the effective unit weight. 6. Only CSRW Systems with positive interlocking fascia connections such as pins, locators, lips, keyways, or clips are acceptable. 7. If fiberglass connecting pins are required, the pins shall be 2@ diameter thermoset isopthalic polyester resin -protruded fiberglass reinforcement rods, with a minimum flexural strength of 128,000 psi and a short beam shear of 6,400 psi. 8. CSRW units shall be greater than 20" in depth. C. FINISH AND APPEARANCE All CSRW units shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects that would interfere with the proper placing of the unit or significantly impair the strength or permanence of the construction. D. SAMPLING AND TESTING Compressive strength test specimens shall conform to the saw -cut coupon provisions of Section 5.2.4 of ASTM C 140-90 with the following exception: 1. Coupon shall have a minimum thickness of 1-1/2 inches. 2.02 BASE LEVELING PAD MATERIAL AND UNIT FILL FOR BLOCK A. Base Leveling Pad Material: For channel walls, the base leveling pad material shall be either an extension of the 6@ concrete channel lining, or lean, unreinforced Class E concrete 6@ thick. For overbank walls, the base leveling pad shall be lean, unreinforced Class E concrete 2@ thick or compacted Class 2 aggregate fill as specified in Section 02256, AGGREGATE FILL CLASSIFICATIONS. The base leveling pad shall be constructed to the elevations shown in the approved construction shop drawings. Concrete Segmental Retaining Walls 02276-6 KEL00483 B. Unit Fill: Fill for units shall consist of Class 2 aggregate fill as specified in Section 02256, AGGREGATE FILL CLASSIFICATIONS. C. Drainage Backfill: For all CSRW wall sections, place a minimum of 12@ of Class 2 aggregate fill behind the CSRW units, as shown in the shop drawings and plans. 2.03 REINFORCED WALL BACKFILL A. Soils with more than 35% passing the No. 200 sieve, soils with Plastic Index greater than 10, soils with Angle of Internal Friction less than 30 degrees as indicated by Consolidated Drained Triaxial Testing and soils not free of organic material shall not be permitted for use in the reinforced zone. B. Wall backfill material reinforced with geogrid shall have a pH in the range of 3 to 10 as determined in accordance with ASTM G-51-77. C. CONTRACTOR shall not run mechanical vibrating plate compactors on top of the CSRW units. Compaction of fill between CSRW units and the three foot zone behind the CSRW units shall be accomplished by running hand -operated compaction equipment just behind units. CONTRACTOR shall compact fill to minimum 95% Standard Proctor Density (ASTM D 698). D. The reinforced backfill shall be placed in maximum 8 -inch -thick compacted lifts, and shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor Density (ASTM D698). E. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the ENGINEER a Certificate of Compliance certifying that the reinforced backfill materials comply with this section of the specifications. 2.04 RETAINED BACKFILL OR COMMON BACKFILL A. Soil placed behind the reinforced backfill shall be general earth backfill, as described in Section 02221, STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL. B. Retained backfill shall be compacted to a minimum 95% maximum Standard Proctor Density (ASTM 698) as recommended in Section 02221, STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. CONTRACTOR shall excavate to the lines and grades shown on the Plans. CONTRACTOR shall take precautions to minimize over -excavation. Over -excavation shall be filled with approved compacted material at the CONTRACTOR=s expense. CONTRACTOR shall be careful not to disturb embankment materials beyond the lines shown on the Plans. Concrete Segmental Retaining Walls 02276-7 KEL00483 B. The OWNER'S Representative shall inspect the excavation to assure that the foundation soil satisfies paragraph 3.0213 of this specification, and the OWNER's Representative shall approve the foundation prior to construction of the base leveling pad. C. Excavation of unsuitable soils and replacement with approved compacted material shall be performed as directed by the OWNER'S Representative. D. Over -excavated areas in front of wall face shall be filled with approved compacted material at the CONTRACTOR's expense before the wall is built to over four feet in height. E. CONTRACTOR shall verify location of existing structures and utilities prior to excavation. CONTRACTOR shall ensure all surrounding structures are protected from the effects of wall excavation. F. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate installation of new utilities and improvements to existing utilities with wall installation. G. In areas where soft, disturbed or otherwise unsuitable soils are encountered within the zone of influence of the wall loading in the excavations, such unsuitable soils shall be over -excavated to the depths and extent indicated in the contract documents and replaced with suitable material as described in Section 02221, STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL. 3.02 LEVELING PAD CONSTRUCTION A. Leveling pad shall be placed as shown on the construction shop drawings. The leveling pad should extend laterally a minimum distance of 6 inches from the toe and heel of the lower most CSRW unit. B. Foundation soil for the leveling pad shall be proof rolled and the top 12 inches compacted to minimum 95% Standard Proctor Density (ASTM D698) and tested prior to placement of leveling pad materials. C. For overbank walls, compacted Class 2 Aggregate Fill is allowable. The granular leveling pad material shall be compacted to provide a level hard surface on which to place the first course of CSRW units. Well -graded sand can be used to smooth the top 2 to 3 inch of the leveling pad. Alternatively, the CONTRACTOR may use a bed of mortar on top of the leveling pad to level the first course of CSRW units. Compaction will be with mechanical plate compactors to minimum 95% of Standard Proctor Density (ASTM D698). 3.03 CSRW UNIT INSTALLATION A. First course of CSRW units shall be placed on the leveling pad. The CSRW units shall be leveled side-to-side, front -to -rear and aligned with adjacent units. The first course is the most important to ensure accurate and acceptable results. CONTRACTOR shall ensure CSRW units are in full contact with the leveling pad. Concrete Segmental Retaining Walls 02276-8 KEL00483 B. CONTRACTOR shall place the front of the CSRW units side-by-side, and shall not leave gaps between the front of adjacent units. Alignment may be done by means of a string line or offset from base line to the back of the units. Layout of curves and corners shall be in accordance with CSRW manufacturer=s installation guidelines. C. CONTRACTOR shall install fascia block connections per CSRW manufacturer's recommendations, and place fiberglass connecting pins (if required). CONTRACTOR shall then fill all voids of CSRW units with unit fill and tamp fill. D. CONTRACTOR shall place and compact drainage fill between and behind units, and place and compact infill soil behind drainage fill. E. CONTRACTOR shall sweep all excess debris from top of units and install next course. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that each course is completely unit filled, backfilled, and compacted prior to proceeding to the next course. F. CONTRACTOR shall repeat procedure to the extent of wall height, checking alignment every 3 courses to ensure level rows of CSRW units. Stacking of CSRW units without placing core fill in the previous course of units will not be permitted. G. As appropriate where the top of the wall changes elevation, units can be stepped with grade or turned into the embankment with a convex return end. CONTRACTOR shall provide appropriate buried units on compacted leveling pad in the area of the convex return end. 3.04 CAP INSTALLATION A. CONTRACTOR shall place CSRW Cap units per manufacturer's recommendations. Backfill and compact to finished grade. B. Permanent mechanical connection of Cap units to CSRW units shall be provided by construction epoxy. CONTRACTOR shall apply adhesive to bottom surface of Cap unit and install on CSRW units below. Adhesive shall be as recommended by the CSRW manufacturer. 4.00 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.01 The CSRW walls shall be measured by the square foot of facing area installed within the dimensions indicated on the Plans or shop drawings. Payment for CSRW walls shall be made at the unit price bid per square foot for ACSRW Walls@. These payments shall be considered full compensation for all work, time, materials, necessary geogrid reinforcing, placement of fill, compaction of fill, backfilling, cap units, and all other items incidental to this work. END OF SECTION Concrete Segmental Retaining Walls 02276-9 KEL00483 02435 REINFORCED CONCRETE DRAINAGE PIPE 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install reinforced concrete pipe and/or conduits or drainage lines, including pipe fittings, connecting drain lines to curb inlets, joints, connections to new or existing pipe or headwalls, manholes etc., to the lines and grades indicated. Pipe and fittings shall be of the classes, sizes, and dimensions indicated. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. PHYSICAL TEST REQUIREMENTS 1. The acceptability of the pipe shall be determined by the results of the three -edge -bearing test for the load to produce the 0.01" crack and the ultimate load; by such material tests as are required in ASTM C-76, ASTM C-506, or ASTM C-507; by absorption tests on selected samples from the wall of the pipe; and by inspection of the finished pipe to determine its conformance with the design prescribed in these specifications and its freedom from defects. Three -edge -bearing tests for the 0.01" crack only shall be performed on 0.8% of the pipe joints. Three -edge -bearing tests for both the 0.01" crack and the ultimate load shall be performed on 0.2% of the pipe on two joints. [Pipe which has been tested only to the formation of a 0.01" crack and accepted for use shall be marked "TEST" or otherwise appropriately identified so that such may be used at the end of the structure or other location not subject to impact loads. The methods of testing shall conform to ASTM C-76, ASTM C-506, ASTM C-507 as appropriate, and ASTM C-497.] 2. As an alternate to the three -edge -bearing test, concrete pipe 60" in diameter and over may be accepted, at the option of the Manufacturer, on the basis of material tests and inspection of the completed product. Acceptability of pipe on this basis shall be determined by the results of material tests as required in ASTM C-76, ASTM C-506, or ASTM C-507; by crushing tests on cores taken from the barrel of the completed and cured pipe; by absorption tests on samples from the wall of the pipe; and by inspection of the finished pipe including amount and placement of reinforcement, to determine its conformance with the design prescribed in these specifications and its freedom from defects. The Manufacturer shall furnish facilities and personnel for taking the cores from the pipe barrel and for determining the compressive strength of the samples. When the cores cut from a section of pipe successfully meet the strength requirement, the core -holes shall be plugged and sealed by the manufacturer in a manner such that the pipe section shall meet the tests requirements of ASTM C-76, ASTM C-506, or ASTM C-507. Pipe sections, so sealed, shall be accepted for use. B. PROTECTION Reinforced Concrete Drainage Pipe 02435-1 KEL00483 02480 LANDSCAPING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary, including trees, bushes, and plants to complete all landscaping and planting as specified herein. B. Install turf by sodding as specified at any area which has been excavated or graded by operations under this contract, to existing areas damaged by storage, movement of equipment or other operations, and to areas specified in the drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. PLANT LISTS Furnish planting as specified according to the Landscaping schedule. Plants shall conform to the varieties specified, with no substitutions allowed unless approved in advance. B. NOMENCLATURE The scientific, as well as, common names listed in the schedule are the standardized plant names authorized by the American Joint Committee on Horticulture Nomenclature. In the event of any question concerning plant type, notify the Engineer before any planting operations, other than preparing the planting beds. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: A. Product data sheets B. Plant lists of plants furnished under this contract 1.04 STANDARDS The following documents, used as standards, are to be considered a part of these specifications by reference: American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature, "Standardized Plant Names", Second Edition, 1942. American Association of Nurserymen, Inc., "USA Standard for Nursery Stock", Z60.1, latest edition. 02480 Landscaping 02480-1 KEL00483 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Notify Engineer 48 hours in advance of delivery date. Unload and display plants and trees at a central location. A suitable method of handling plants must be employed to insure the careful, workmanlike delivery of heavy balled plants to preclude cracked or "mushroomed" plant balls at the point of delivery. Properly identify plants by name with a legible waterproof label securely attached to each bundle. Remove plants not approved from the site and replace with acceptable plantings. Furnish an itemized list in duplicate of the actual quantity of plant materials to expedite the required inspection. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Plants shall conform to the measurements specified in the plant list. Plants shall have been grown under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of the project site, or shall have been acclimated to the conditions of the locality for at least two (2) years unless otherwise approved. Plants shall not be pruned prior to delivery. B. Trees shall generally be selected for appearance and shall be well matured, single trunk (unless multi -trunk trees are listed in the plant list), well shaped and reasonably straight trunks, with a balance of branches on each side of the main stem, and branches reasonably bushy. Trees shall generally be symmetrical in appearance from all directions. C. Plants and trees shall be handled so that the roots are adequately protected at all times. The balls of balled and burlapped plants which cannot be planted immediately upon delivery shall be well protected with soil or other acceptable material. Bare rooted plants shall be planted or heeled -in immediately upon delivery. If heeled- in, all bundles of plants shall be open and the plants separated before the roots are covered. D. BALLED AND BURLAPPED PLANTS: (Designated by B&B); Plants shall have firm natural balls, wrapped securely with burlap. E. CONTAINER PLANTS: Plants which have been grown in greenhouses or under lath must be hardened off and acclimated to site conditions prior to delivery to site. Plants which cannot be immediately planted will be left in containers and watered. 1.07 OPTIONS [NOT USED] 1.08 GUARANTEES [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. LAWN PLANTING: Sod shall be Buffalo Grass, healthy, vigorous, freshly dug and free of weeds. 02480 Landscaping 02480-2 KEL00483 B. PLANTS AND SHRUBS: Plants shall be nursery grown, and freshly dug. No helled-in plants or plants from cold storage shall be accepted. C. TREES: Trees shall conform to the plant list and shall be balled and burlapped. They shall be dug with firm natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to contain the feeding root system. Balls shall be wrapped with burlap or similar material and bound with twine or cord. D. ROOT STIMULATOR: Approved standard brand. E. MANURE: Stable or cattle manure, unleached, free of harmful chemicals. F. TOP SOIL: Top soil removed by excavation under this contract may be reused in new work. Additional top soil, if necessary, shall be from an approved source and shall be free of weeds, nutgrass, trash and debris. Top soil shall be approved by the Engineer. G. COMMERCIAL FERTILIZER: Fertilizers must conform to all applicable state fertilizer laws, is to be delivered in original, unopened containers, and must be uniform in composition, dry, and free flowing. A complete fertilizer with a Nitrogen -Phosphorus -Potash analysis approved by the Engineer. H. MULCH: Horticultural grade, nugget pine, redwood, fir or cypress bark, free of sticks, stones, clay or other foreign materials; 3/4" to 1" graded size, of such character as not be easily displaced by wind. I. PEAT MOSS: Horticulture grade Canadian stock, fibrous type which is low in wood content, having a moisture content of not more than 30%. J. REDWOOD BARK: Natural 100% redwood bark, approximately 2" x 3" in size, delivered in packages. K. HOSE: Two-ply garden hose, 1/2" diameter, factory seconds or used. L. STAKES: Sound, unused, untreated wood stakes. M. WRAPPING MATERIAL: Double layer wrinkled kraft tree wrap, 4" to 6" width. N. WIRE: No. 10 or No. 12 gauge steel tie wire. O. GRASS SEED: Hulled, extra fancy grade, fungicide treated having germination and purity content not less than 85% (purity % x germination % + sound seal %). P. GRASS SOD: Healthy, vigorous sod, minimum size and thickness of 12" x 12" x 1 obtained from state certified commercial groves, and harvested within 48 hours of planting. Q. LIME: Hydrated lime. R. GYPSUM: Commercial quality, granulated agriculture type. S. POLYETHYLENE: 6 mil polyethylene plastic, in rolls; black. 02480 Landscaping 02480-3 KEL00483 T. SOIL STERILANT: Dazomat or Metham, used in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions. U. HYDRO -MULCH FIBER: Virgin wood cellulose wood fiber having a moisture content of 10.0% f 3%, organic matter of 99.2% f 0.8% and ash content of 0.8% and a pH of 4.8; equal to Conwed "Hydro -mulch Fiber" [moisture content of 10.0%, organic matter of 96.2% f 0.8%, a tackifier having 3.0 f 0.5% organic matter, a pH of 4.8; equal to Conwed "Hydro - mulch 2000" fiber.] A biodegradable green dye which does not inhibit plant growth will be added to the mulch. V. LANDSCAPING ACCESSORIES 1. METAL EDGING: 3/32" thick x 5" steel strap with steel hold down stakes. 2. LANDSCAPING NETTING: Commercial grade jute netting having approximate I" x 1" mesh. 3. PLASTIC SHEET: 10 mil polyethylene plastic sheets, black. 4. ROCKS: Large rocks at locations specified. Approximately 30 cubic feet in size and selected for appearance; either a hard, sound red streaked limestone, or red granite; landscaping grade. 5. RAILROAD TIES: Used, treated railroad ties of sound quality, selected for appearance; landscaping grade. 6. PLASTIC NETTING: Extruded oriented plastic net having a strand count of 1.375 x 1.3 strands per inch, a weight of 2.875 lbs per 1000 square feet and a mesh opening of 3/4" x 3/4"; Conwed "erosion control netting". 2.02 MIXES [NOT USED] 2.03 FABRICATIONS [NOT USED] 2.04 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PLANTING SEASONS A. Plants, trees and seeded areas shall be planted in seasons as follows: 1. Plants and seeded areas shall be planted from March 1 to September 1. 2. Warm Season Grass from April 1 to September 30. 3. Cool Season Grass from September 30 to November 1. B. Trees and shrubs shall be planted from December 1 to March 20. However, actual planting shall be done only during periods within these seasons which are normal for such work as determined by weather conditions and be accepted practice in the project locality. 02480 Landscaping 02480-4 KEL00483 C. The preparation of seeding and planting areas may begin prior to the specified planting season provided the subgrade has been established and finish grading completed, and grass areas can be protected from construction traffic. 3.02 FERTILIZER TYPES In general, fertilizer compositions shall be used in according to the season of the year at which applied. They are as follows: A. Early Season: (April 1 to June 1) -- 21-0-5 B. Normal Season: (June 1 to Sept. 1) -- 10-10-5 C. Late Season: (Sept. 1 to Nov. 1) -- 6-12-12 3.03 PLANTING, GENERAL A. The location for trees and shrubs noted on the drawings are approximate only, and the Engineer shall establish the exact location on site. The Contractor shall stake each location for reference using red stakes for trees and blue stakes for bushes. B. In the event that tree locations conflict with underground utilities, move the location as required to clear the said utility by 3'. C. In preparing plant excavations, remove rocks or underground obstructions to a depth necessary to permit proper planting. Planting pits shall be circular in outline with vertical sides and conical bottoms. The minimum depth of the pits for trees shall be at least 2' from finished grade and as much deeper as necessary to allow a minimum of 6" of firmed prepared topsoil under the ball or roots. Minimum diameter of pits will be P greater than the ball, container, or spread of the roots. 3.04 BACKFILL MIXTURE A. Backfill for filling in excavations around planting shall be pre- mixed on grade before shoveling into the planting pit. Backfill mixture shall consist of good quality topsoil and peat moss having a 3 to 1 ratio, thoroughly mixed. B. Backfill shall be shoveled into the pit around the plant balls in 9" layers and thoroughly wet and lightly hand tamped before the next layer is added. 3.05 TREE PLANTING A. Prepare excavation as described above and place approximately 2" of manure in bottom of pit. Add 8" inches of prepared backfill material and soak and allow to settle. Set tree ball in center of pit on prepared backfill and complete backfilling in 9" layers. After pit excavation is filled, construct an earthen saucer approximately T-0" in diameter, 4" high and 8" wide around tree trunk. Flood twice in the first 24 hours. 02480 Landscaping 02480-5 KEL00483 B. After planting, where necessary, prune branches in accordance with standard practice, but not over 1/6 of branch length. Maintain shape of tree. Spray trunks of smooth bark trees with 10% insecticide and wrap with waterproof tree wrap held with twine. For trees with trunks less than 1" in diameter, trees shall be braced with three (3) stakes evenly around tree trunk and guy wires run to trunk. Protect trunk with sections of plastic hose. 3.06 SHRUBBERY A. Shrubbery pit diameters shall be 16" larger than ball diameter and 6" greater in depth. Apply gypsum to bottom of pit at the rate of four (4) pounds per 100 square feet. Add 2" of manure and 6" of prepared topsoil mixture. Mix thoroughly, wet, and allow to settle. Set plant ball in center of excavation on top of prepared topsoil. B. Apply root stimulator to each plant and backfill remainder of excavation in 9" layers, and water thoroughly. Construct earthen saucer around shrub as described above for trees. Cover entire planting bed with a 2" layer of mulch, lightly raking into soil around plant. 3.07 PLANTS AND PLANTING BEDS A. Planting beds shall be prepared by excavating the entire bed to a depth of 8". Place gypsum in excavation at the rate of 4 pounds per 100 square feet, followed by a 2" layer of manure and a 2" layer of peat moss. Fill the remainder with good quality topsoil and rototill to mix thoroughly. B. Each individual plant shall be removed from container and planted in a furrow with dirt pressed firmly around roots. After all plants are in place, apply a 2" layer of mulch over the entire planting bed. 3.08 TURF PLANTING A. LIME Test the prepared topsoil for pH. For pH readings between 4.0 and 5.0, add 90-140 pounds of lime per 1,000 square feet. For readings of 5.1 to 6.0, add 40 to 90 pounds per 1000 feet. B. PREPARATION All areas to receive turf shall be prepared prior to planting. Six (6") inches of topsoil shall be distributed over the entire site. Add peat moss at the rate of 100-150 pounds per 1,000 square feet, mixed with top 3" of topsoil. Scarify the top 8" by means of plows and disc harrows, or in small areas by rototillers. Remove large sticks, roots, stones, debris or other objectionable material. Mix in 10-10-5 fertilizer at the rate of 20 pounds per 100 square feet and lime at the rate established by pH reading, as determined above. Level soil by means of steel matt drags, tiller rakes, and hand raking as required to eliminate bumps, ridges and depressions. C. SODDING 02480 Landscaping 02480-6 KEL00483 Buffalo Grass shall be planted by sodding. Sod shall be freshly cut from living turf and cut into 12" x 12" squares. Sod shall be neither excessively wet or dry when harvested and shall be kept damp until planted. Space squares in rows in checkerboard fashion with 12" space between each planted square in all directions. Fill in between sod with topsoil -peat moss mixture, wet slightly and hand tamp. 3.09 STRAW/HAY MULCH A. All areas noted to seeded shall be covered with a straw or hay mulch, having a tackifier, and covered with nylon netting. The ground shall be prepared, seeded and fertilized, followed by the application of straw or hay at a rate of 1-1/2 to 2 tons per acre. B. Wood fiber mulch used as a straw tackifier shall be manufactured of whole wood chips and shall be mixed in water and distributed evenly over the straw to form a continuous matting. Recycled wood or paper pulp is not acceptable as mulch. C. Install a polypropylene 3/4" x 3/4" erosion control netting over the straw and mulch. Unroll and staple in place using 11 ga. wire staples having 1 " tops and 6" legs, at the rate of one (1) per square yard. Overlap edges of netting 4" on all sides. D. [OPTIONAL] Hydro -mulching for erosion control on sloped earthen berms shall include mulch having a colloidal polysaccharide tackifier adhered to the fibers. The wood cellulose fibers must maintain a uniform suspension in water under agitation, and when applied shall form a blotter -like mat covering the ground. 3.10 FERTILIZER APPLICATION Except as otherwise specified, fertilizer shall be applied uniformly at the rate of 300 pounds per acre for sodding and 400 pounds per acre for seeding. [Hydro -mulched lawns shall be fertilized at the time of application, at the end of the first three (3) week period after application, and at the end of the maintenance period.] [Fertilize grass areas within three (3) weeks of the applications, once during the maintenance period and once at the end of the maintenance period. 3.11 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain plants, trees and lawns during all stages of construction and a minimum of 60 days after planting operations have been completed, regardless of the date of Owner's acceptance of the project. B. The lawn shall be kept in a healthy growing condition by watering, weeding, moving, rollings, trimming, edging, and any other necessary maintenance operations. At the end of the maintenance period, lawns shall have a solid turf, free of weeds. Replant as frequently as necessary to produce a close stand of grass over the entire lawn area. Protect grass from insect infestation, traffic or washing. Trees and shrubs shall be watered regularly. 02480 Landscaping 02480-7 KEL00483 3.12 PLANTER BED CONSTRUCTION [NOT USED] 3.13 RECONDITIONING EXISTING LAWNS [NOT USED] 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL At the completion of the maintenance period, the Engineer shall make a final inspection of plants, seeded and sodded areas. Any plant not found to be in a healthy, growing condition at this time shall be replaced at no charge to the Owner. Grass shall be healthy and growing, with close stands; otherwise, shall be replanted as required to replace dead areas. 3.15 CLEAN AND ADJUST Burlap, empty containers, rocks, clods and other debris must be removed daily and the site kept as tidy as possible at all times. Any excess excavated subsoil or topsoil shall be placed where and as directed by the Engineer. After planting operations are finished, paved areas which may have become strewn with soil or other material shall be thoroughly cleaned by sweeping and washing if necessary. 3.16 SCHEDULES [NOT USED] END OF SECTION 02480 Landscaping 02480-8 KEL00483 02515 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to construct finished pavement of portland cement concrete on the prepared subgrade, crushed stone drainage course, geotextile with reinforcement, and with monolithic curbs, in conformity with the plans, and as specified herein to the lines and grades as established by the Engineer. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. DESIGN CRITERIA 1. The concrete shall be designed for a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 pounds per square inch at the age of 28 days and a flexural strength of 500 pounds per square inch at the age of seven (7) days when Type I cement is used; a flexural strength of 600 pounds per square inch at the age of seven (7) days when Type III cement is used. Flexural strength is to be determined as a simple beam with center point loading (ASTM C-293). While concrete placing operations are in progress, beam and cylinder specimens, of such dimension and numbers as may be required, shall be made by the Owner's independent testing laboratory each day. Beams and cylinders shall be continuously cured in water until tested. 2. If the concrete fails to meet the strength requirements, as shown by the failure of any flexural or compressive test specimen on two (2) out of three (3) consecutive days' tests, increase the cement factor in the increments of 1/2 sack per cubic yard of concrete until the strength requirements are met and redesign the concrete mix. No increase in price or extra compensation shall be allowed the Contractor for such increase in the cement factor. Failure of all the test specimens, either flexural or compressive, on any day's run of concrete, may be cause for rejection of that particular section of pavement. In such event, submit a redesign of the concrete mix. 3. Redesign of the concrete mix by the Contractor, when required, shall include the required corrective measures as indicated by the deficiencies in the original design mix. Material samples shall be resubmitted for the laboratory check of the redesign mix. Material samples shall be resubmitted for the laboratory check of the redesign mix. Sources of supply of materials may be changed, if desirable, at this time. B. CONCRETE MIX CONTROL Furnish, at the Contractor's own expense, continuous plant control of the concrete by securing the services of an independent local testing laboratory, sufficiently experienced. The following tests and inspections shall be required. 1. Check incoming aggregates, fine and coarse, for gradations, specific gravity, unit weight, abrasion wear, etc. 2. Determine moisture contents of the aggregates to adjust bin weights to comply with designs. 3. Make all concrete designs in accordance with the applicable specifications. 4. Check scales as needed for accuracy. 5. Help maintain proper slumps, as specified. Portland Cement Concrete 02515-1 KEL00483 6. Send inspection reports for each day's operations. 7. Check fibrous reinforcement for conformance as specified. 8. If the characteristics of the aggregate furnished in the design are such that when mixed with the minimum allowable amount of cement and the maximum allowable amount of water, the slump and workability requirements are not met or if free water comes to the surface of the slab during finishing operations, as specified, add mineral filler or cement only to the limits provided in Paragraph 2.01D, or may be required to redesign of the concrete mix. When the finishing machine has gone over an area twice and all surface voids are not filled, the workability shall be considered as unsatisfactory, terminate concreting operations and redesign the concrete mix. C. LABORATORY TESTING 1. Material samples submitted for approval shall be sufficiently large to permit the Owner's independent testing laboratory -to -laboratory batch the construction of test beams to check the adequacy of the design. When the design mix has been approved, there shall be no change or deviation from the proportions thereof or sources of supply except as hereinafter provided. No concrete shall be placed on the job site until the mix design has been approved by the Engineer in writing to the Contractor. 2. The concrete shall contain not less than five (5) sacks of cement per cubic yard. Total water shall not exceed seven (7) gallons per sack of cement. The mix shall be uniform and workable. The amount of coarse aggregate (dry -loose volume) shall not be more than 85% per cubic yard of concrete. 3. The net amount of water shall be the amount added at the mixer plus the free water in the aggregate or minus the amount of water needed to compensate for absorption by the aggregates. Free water or absorption determinations shall be based on a 30 minute absorption period. No water allowance shall be made for evaporation after batching. 4. When gauged by the standard slump test, the settlement of the concrete shall not be less than 3" nor more than 5". 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS. B. Within a period of not less than 10 days prior to the start of concreting operations, submit to the Engineer a design of the concrete mix he proposes to use together with samples of materials to be incorporated into the mix and a full description of the source of supply of each material component. The design of the concrete mix shall conform to the provisions and limitation requirements of these specifications. C. Manufacturer's Certified Test Reports for each lot of silicone joint sealant shipped to the project site. 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: Portland Cement Concrete 02515-2 KEL00483 ASTM A-82 Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM A-184 Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM A-185 Specification for Steel Welded Wire, Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM A-615 Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM A-616 Specification for Rail -Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM C-150 Specification for Portland Cement ASTM C-293 Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Center -Point Loading) ASTM C-309 Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete ASTM D-1751 Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non - extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE [NOT USED] 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Should the Contractor desire to use Type III cement in lieu of Type I, permission to do so must be secured from the Engineer in writing before use. When such use is granted, the concrete produced shall meet the requirements specified herein. B. When Type III cement is used, either as required on the plans or as an option to Type I cement, the average tensile strength of briquettes at the age of 28 days shall be higher than that attained at three (3) days. C. Any cement which, for any reason, has become partially set or which contains hard lumps or cakes shall be rejected. D. The following special requirements apply to this work. 1. After a joint has been sealed, promptly remove surplus sealant or other residue on the pavement or structure surfaces. 2. If a primer is recommended by the Manufacturer, use primer in accordance with such recommendations. When required, apply primer before installing backup material. 3. Equip air compressors used for cleaning joints with suitable traps capable of removing surplus water and oil in the compressed air. The Engineer shall check the compressed air daily for contamination. Do not use contaminated air. The compressor shall be capable of delivering compressed air at a continuous pressure of at least 90 psi. 4. Do not permit traffic over sealed joints until the sealant is tack free, cured sufficiently to resist displacement of the sealant due to slab movement or other causes, and until debris from traffic does not imbed into the sealant. 5. Any of the following conditions at the sealed joint shall be cause for rejection and repair of the joint: Portland Cement Concrete 02515-3 KEL00483 a. Adhesion or cohesion failure of joint sealant material. b. Unsatisfactory or improper workmanship by Contractor. c. Damage by Contractor's operations or public traffic. d. Damage to the sealant due to displacement of the sealant from slab movements or insufficient cure before opening to traffic. 1.07 OPTIONS Bulk cement meeting the above ASTM specifications may be used provided the manner and method of handling and storing is approved by the Engineer. When cement is delivered in bulk, the brand and the Manufacturer's name, as contained in the shipping invoices accompanying the shipment, shall be furnished to the Engineer prior to use of the cement. 1.08 GUARANTEES [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. CEMENT 1. Cement shall conform to ASTM C-150 for Type I. If high -early -strength Portland cement is required, it shall conform to ASTM C-150 for Type 111, and current revisions. 2. Cement delivered in bags shall be marked plainly with the brand and name of the Manufacturer on the bag. A bag shall contain 94 pounds net. Bags shall be in good condition at the time of use. Bags of cement varying more than 5% from the specified weight shall be rejected, and if the average net weight of bags in any shipment, as shown by weighing 50 bags taken at random, is less than 94 pounds, the entire shipment shall be rejected. Do not use cement salvaged from discarded or used bags. B. COARSE AGGREGATE 1. Coarse aggregate shall consist of gravel, crushed gravel, crushed stone, or a combination of these materials of which the maximum permissible percentage of deleterious substances, by weight, shall not exceed the following: Material removed by decantation 1.0% Shale, slate, or similar materials 1.0% Clay lumps 0.25% Soft fragments 3.0% Other deleterious substances including friable, thin elongated, or 3.0% laminated pieces The sum of all deleterious ingredients, exclusive of material removed 5.0% by decantation, shall not exceed by weight 2. The aggregate shall be free from an excess amount of salt, alkali, vegetable matter, or other objectionable matter. At the time of its use the aggregate shall be free from frozen material and all foreign material which may have become mixed with it in the stockpiles. 3. The coarse aggregate shall consist of sound particles having a percent of wear not more than 45 (Test Method TEX-410-A) and shall be mixed so that when tested by standard laboratory sieves, the course aggregate meets the following requirements: Portland Cement Concrete 02515-4 KEL00483 Retained on 1-1/4" sieve 0% Retained on 1-1/2" sieve 0% to 5% Retained on 3/4% sieve 30% to 65% Retained on 3/8" sieve 70% to 90% Retained on No. 4 sieve 95% to 100% Loss by Decantation Test I% max. Method TEX-604-A 4. Coarse aggregate of different characteristics, though tested and approved, shall not be mixed with other aggregates; but shall be stored, batched, and weighed separately. C. FINE AGGREGATE 1. Fine aggregate shall consist of sand or a mixture of sands with or without mineral filler. The sand or mixture of sand comprising one fine aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, durable, uncoated grains and shall be free from lumps. The maximum permissible percentage, by weight, of deleterious substances shall not exceed the following: Material removed by decantation 3.0% Other deleterious substances such as 3.0% coal, shale, coated grains, and soft flaky particles 2. An additional loss of 2% by decantation may be allowed provided this additional loss is material of the same quality as specified for fine aggregate or mineral filler. a. The fine aggregate shall be free from an excess amount of salt or alkali and at the time of use shall be free from frozen material and foreign material. b. When tested for organic impurities the fine aggregate shall not have a color darker than the standard color. c. The fine aggregate shall be well graded from fine to coarse and when tested by standard laboratory sieves shall meet the following requirements: Retained on 3/8" sieve 0% Retained on No. 4 sieve 0% to 5% Retained on No. 8 sieve 0% to 20% Retained on No. 16 sieve 15% to 50% Retained on No. 30 sieve 35% to 75% Retained on No. 50 sieve 70% to 90% Retained on No. 100 sieve 90% to 100% Retained on No. 200 sieve 97% to 100% 3. Fine aggregate of different characteristics shall not be mixed prior to batching, but shall be weighed and batched separately. 4. Fine aggregate will be subjected to the sand equivalent test (test method TEX-203-F). The sand equivalent value shall not be less than 80. D. MINERAL FILLER Stone dust, crushed sand, or crushed shell may be added as a mineral filler, if so directed by the Engineer, in amounts not to exceed 5% of the fine aggregate to improve the workability or plasticity of the concrete mix. Such mineral filler must be of the quality specified for fine or coarse aggregate and when tested by standard laboratory sieves shall meet the following requirements: Portland Cement Concrete 02515-5 V.EL00483 Retained on No. 30 sieve 0% Retained on No. 200 sieve 0% to 35% E. MIXING WATER Water for use in concrete and for curing shall be free from oil, acids, organic matter or other deleterious substances and shall not contain more than 1,000 parts per million of chlorides as Cl nor more than 1,000 parts per million of sulfates as SO4. Water from municipal supplies approved by the State Health Department will not require testing, but water from other sources shall be sampled and tested before use. F. STEEL DOWEL BARS Steel dowel bars, if shown and required on the plans, shall be of the size and type indicated and shall be open hearth, new billet steel of intermediate or hard grade conforming to the requirements of ASTM A-615. The free end of dowel bars shall be smooth and free of shearing burrs. G. DOWEL CAPS Provide dowel caps when required by the drawings. Encase one end of each dowel bar with an approved cap having an inside diameter of 1/16" greater than the diameter of the dowel bar. The cap shall be of such strength, durability, and design as to provide free movement of the dowel bar and shall be filled with a soft felt plug or shall be void in order to permit free movement of the dowel bar for a distance of 1-1/2 times the width of the expansion joint used. Securely hold the dowel caps and dowel bars in place. H. BAR COATING When bar coating is required, the material may be any standard grade of oil asphalt and shall be applied hot. I. STEEL BAR REINFORCEMENT Steel reinforcing bars shall be of the size and type indicated and shall be open hearth new billet steel of structural, intermediate, or hard grade, ASTM A-615, Grade 60 or shall be rail steel concrete reinforcement bars, ASTM A-616, Grade 60. Steel shall be bent cold. When tie bars are to be bent they shall be Grade 40 conforming to requirements of ASTM A-615. J. REINFORCING MATS When deformed bars are specified, the forms of the bar shall be such as to provide a net sectional area at all points equivalent to that of a plain square or round bar of equal nominal size. Fabricated steel bar or rod mats shall meet the current requirements of ASTM A-184. K. STEEL WIRE FABRIC REINFORCEMENT When steel wire fabricated reinforcement is specified, or permitted as an option, the wire fabric shall conform to the gauge and wire spacing shown on the plans and the requirements of ASTM A-82. Longitudinal and transverse wires shall be electrically welded together at all points of intersection and the welds shall be of sufficient strength so not to break during handling or placing. Welding and fabrication of the fabric sheets shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A-185. Welded steel wire fabric shall be furnished in flat sheets as per plan dimensions and steel fabric having been previously bundled into rolls shall not be Portland Cement Concrete 02515-6 KEL00483 accepted. If wire fabric is used, it shall replace only the longitudinal and transverse bars. The tie bars and load transmission units at joints shall not be affected. L. DRAINAGE COURSE The crushed stone drainage course shall be Class 1 aggregate fill as specified in Section 02256, AGGREGATE FILL CLASSIFICATIONS. 2.02 MIXES Concrete shall be composed of Type I cement or Type III cement, coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, mineral filler, and water. Type III cement shall be used only when specifically approved by the Engineer in writing and the concrete made therewith shall be subject to all applicable provisions of these specifications. Mix shall comply with approved laboratory design or adjusted mix proportions. 2.03 FABRICATIONS [NOT USED] 2.04 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. REINFORCEMENT CHAIRS Reinforcing steel, tie bars, dowels, etc., shall be placed and held securely in place during placing of concrete by steel or plastic chairs approved by the Engineer. These chairs shall be placed at every other intersection of longitudinal and transverse bars. B. JOINT FILLER Joint filler shall consist of boards or a pre -molded bituminous fiber of the size, shape, and type indicated. 1. Redwood Boards: Boards used as a filler shall be sound heartwood obtained from redwood. Boards shall be of selected stock and shall be free from sapwood, knots, cluster bird'seye, checks, and splits. Occasional sound or hollow bird'seye, when not in clusters, shall be permitted, provided the board is otherwise free of any defects that may impair the usefulness as a joint filler. The board, when tested in the condition as used in the pavement, shall have a compressive resistance of not more than 1,500 pounds per square inch in compressing to 1/2 of its original thickness. 2. Fiber Board: Fiber used for filler shall be preformed strips which have been formed of cane or other suitable fibers of a cellulose nature securely bound together and uniformly and thoroughly impregnated with a suitable asphaltic binder. Fiber joint fillers shall meet the requirements of ASTM D-1751. C. JOINT SEALING MATERIAL 1. The sealant shall be furnished in a one -part silicone formulation which does not require a primer for bond to concrete. The compound shall be compatible with the surface to which it is applied. Acid cure sealants are not acceptable for use on concrete. Apply the sealant with a pressure applicator that forces it into the joint. Silicone rubber joint seals shall exhibit an adequate bond to concrete when subjected to testing. 2. The silicone sealant shall meet the requirements of Table I. Sealant may be accepted for immediate use on the basis of Manufacturer's certified test results which indicate the material meets the requirements of Table I. Each lot of sealant shall be delivered in containers plainly marked with the Manufacturer's name or trademark and a lot number. Portland Cement Concrete 02515-7 KEL00483 The Manufacturer shall furnish certified test results of each lot of joint sealant shipped to the project. The Manufacturer shall also indicate the date of shipment on each lot. Material shall not be used after six (6) months from the date of shipment from the manufacturer without first being sampled and tested. Foam back-up rod may be accepted based on visual inspection by the Engineer. D. MEMBRANE CURING COMPOUND The membrane curing compound shall be Type 2 white pigmented and shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C-309. E. ADMIXTURES Concrete shall be air -entrained and the volume of air in the freshly mixed concrete shall be 5%, fl% of the total volume. The entrained air shall be obtained either by using air - entrained cement or air -entraining admixture. 2.05 EQUIPMENT A. GENERAL The equipment necessary for the construction of this item shall be on the project and shall be approved by the Engineer as to condition before the Contractor is permitted to begin construction operations on which the equipment is to be used. B. FIELD LABORATORY A field laboratory structure shall be required only when specifically required and provided for in the Special Provisions. C. CEMENT WEIGHING AND BATCHING EQUIPMENT Where bulk cement is used, the method of handling and the handling equipment shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer. Cement shall be fully protected from contamination or damage during handling. 1. Cement shall be batched by weight and scales shall be of the beam or springless dial type and shall be the product of a reputable manufacturer. Scales not accurate to a tolerance of four (4) pounds per 1,000 pounds net load in the hopper shall not be used. The value of the minimum gradation on any type scale shall not be greater than five (5) pounds. 2. The scales shall be so constructed as to indicate to the operator that the required load in the hopper or container is being approached; similarly they shall also indicate when the hopper or container is empty. The indicator shall show at least the last 50 pounds of the load. After cement is weighed, protect cement from damage or loss in handling or in transit. D. AGGREGATE WEIGHING EQUIPMENT Aggregate weighing equipment shall conform to the following general requirements and shall be approved by the Engineer prior to use. 1. The storage bins shall be of a suitable size and shape to adequately meet the needs of the weighing and batching equipment. The framework and foundation shall be adequate to support the total imposed loads. 2. The weighing hopper or container shall be of sufficient size and tight enough to hold the entire load without leakage, shall be supported entirely upon the scales, and shall be free of other supports. The hopper or container shall be so constructed as to permit easy and Portland Cement Concrete 02515-8 KEL00483 sufficient removal of any overload. The discharge gate shall have a substantial latch which holds tightly in place during introduction of the aggregate into the hopper. When more than one aggregate size is to be weighed in a single hopper there shall be a separate compartment for each size so arranged that each could be discharged separately and the overload of any compartment easily removed. 3. Scales shall conform to the requirements as provided under Section 2.05C of this specification and in addition thereto the indicator requirement (paragraph 2) shall be amended to show at least the last 200 pounds of the load. 4. Aggregate weighing equipment shall be fully loaded for five (5) hours before testing and using in order to allow settlement and adjustment under working conditions. E. PLANER AND TEMPLATES 1. A subgrade planer shall be furnished and shall be operated immediately ahead of the paving operations. The planer shall be equipped with adjustable blades which trim the subgrade to the exact section as shown on the plans. The planer shall be supported on wheels that travel on the side forms and shall be so constructed on wheels that are plainly visible during operations and must be heavy enough to remain on the form at all times. The frame shall be of such strength and rigidity that should the support of the planer be transferred from the wheels to the center, there shall not be a deflection of more than 1/8". 2. A template shall be provided having adjustable rods projecting downward at F intervals. The bottom of these rods shall be adjusted to the true cross-section of the bottom of the slab when the template rests upon the side forms. The template shall be of sufficient strength and rigidity that the deflection at the center shall be no greater than 1/8", should the support be transferred to that point. F. MIXER Unless otherwise provided for or approved by the Engineer, the paving mixer shall be of a capacity of not less than a 27-E paver; mixer rating to be as established by the Mixer Manufacturer's Bureau of the Associated General Contractors. The paving mixer shall be provided with a boom and bucket for placing concrete or with a full width mechanical spreading or placing machine of approved design. The motor shall be provided with a governor to regulate the speed of the mixer drum within a limit of 16 to 20 revolutions per minute. The mixer shall be equipped with an automatic attachment for satisfactorily timing the mix and locking the discharging device so as to prevent the discharging of the mixer until the materials have been mixed together for the minimum time required. This attachment shall be operated independently of the drum and shall have a bell in operation at all times to indicate the completion of the mixing time. The bell shall be such that it can be plainly heard at a distance of 50' from the mixer. 1. Dual drum mixers may be used provided their operations shall be properly synchronized so as to permit a minimum mixing time of 60 seconds exclusive of the time required to transfer the materials from the first to the second drum. 2. The distribution bucket shall be tightly constructed and of a sufficient capacity to hold an entire batch of concrete. The discharge gate shall be so constructed as to give a uniform distribution of the concrete on the subgrade without segregation. 3. The paver shall be equipped with a water measuring device of sufficient accuracy that it will measure the water within one (1) percent of the amount required per batch. The measuring device shall be so constructed that it opens to atmospheric pressure when the measured amount of water is in it and shall be so placed and constructed that the Portland Cement Concrete 02515-9 KEL00483 measured amount of water required for a single batch of concrete can be discharged into a calibrated tank or weighing device. The water measuring device shall be checked daily for accuracy. 4. When the use of a mixer of a capacity less than 27-E paver is permitted, it shall be of an approved type and so designed as to positively insure the uniform distribution of the materials throughout the mass and insure the discharge of the batch without segregation. G. FORMS The side forms shall be metal, of approved cross-section and bracing, of a height not less than the prescribed edge thickness of the concrete section, and a minimum of 10' in length for each individual form. Forms shall be of ample strength and shall be provided with adequate devices for secure setting so that when in place forms withstand the impact and vibration of equipment imposed thereupon without appreciable springing or settlement. In no case shall the base width be less than 8" for a form 8' or more in height. The forms shall be free from warps, bends, or kinks and shall show no variation from the true plane for face or top. Each 10' length of forms shall be provided with at least three (3) pins for securely staking in position. Sufficient forms shall be provided for satisfactory prosecution of the work. Ten (10) foot metal form sections shall be used in forming curves with a 250' and larger radius. For curves with a radius of less than 250', acceptable flexible metal forms or wood forms may be used upon approval of the Engineer. H. FINISHING EQUIPMENT Pavement shall be machine [or hand finished] except as hereinafter provided. The finishing machine shall be power -driven, equipped with two (2) screeds, and a tamp. The finishing machine shall be so designed, equipped, and operated as to strike off, consolidate, and compact the concrete. Strike -off grade shall be to the flowline of the gutter. 1. Alternate floating and finishing equipment may be substituted for the equipment specified herein, when approved by the Engineer in writing, provided the finished surface conforms to the surface test requirements of Paragraph 3.07. 2. Hand finishing shall not be permitted except in intersections, driveways, and parking areas inaccessible to a finishing machine. Provide a strike template 2" x 6" lumber at least 2' longer than the width of the pavement to be finished. The strike template shall be so constructed as to leave a sufficient amount of concrete above the finished surface to allow for tamping. The tamping template shall be cut to the crown section and shall have a 3/8" steel face. There shall also be provided a hand operated longitudinal float with wood face, of approved design, 12' to 16' in length, or an approved type of mechanical float with not less than 10' of longitudinal screed. There shall be furnished a sufficient number of bridges for the operation of the longitudinal float and for finishing all joints. Furnish edging and finishing tools required to complete the slab in accordance with the plans and specifications. 3. Furnish a belt of canvas -rubber composition, two to four ply, not less than 8" nor more than 10" wide, and at least 2' longer than the width of the slab, or furnish a burlap drag consisting of not less than two (2) layers of burlap, not less than 3' wide, and at least 2' longer than the width of the pavement. 4. Furnish and maintain at least two (2) standard 10' straightedges on the job at all times. Portland Cement Concrete 02515-10 KEL00483 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION Prepare subgrade to receive the pavement drainage course and geotextile as specified in Sections 02219, EXCAVATION and 02261, GEOTEXTILE-SOIL STABILIZATION. Any section of the subgrade which does not meet the requirements of those sections of the specifications immediately prior and following to the placement of the geotextile and drainage course shall be reprocessed and re -compacted to be in full compliance with specification requirements. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. DRAINAGE COURSE 1. Install the drainage course on the prepared subgrade in conjunction with the geotextile as specified in Section 02261. 2. After being spread to the specified thickness, compact the drainage course by rolling with a minimum of eight (8) passes of a vibratory roller of the type specified in Section 02254, COMPACTED EARTH FILL, Paragraph 3.05, COMPACTION. The drainage course shall not require specific compaction testing, but shall receive not less than eight (8) passes by the specified vibratory roller. Increase the number of passes, if necessary, to fully densify and interlock the aggregate particles. 3. The completed surface of the drainage course shall be within a tolerance of +0.00' and - 0.04' of the lines and grade indicated. The minimum thickness of the drainage course at any point in the completed course shall not be less than the thickness indicated on the plans. 4. If regrading or reshaping of the surface of the drainage course is required to meet the specified tolerances, reroll the surface with the vibratory roller as specified. 5. Protect the completed drainage course from all traffic which might loosen, contaminate with soil or otherwise damage the course, until the next course of surface course is installed. If the drainage course should become contaminated with soil from runoff or otherwise, replace those contaminated areas prior to proceeding with the next course. 3.03 PLACING AND REMOVING FORMS Set forms to line and grade at least 100', where practicable, in advance of the paving operations. Adequately stake forms with at least three (3) pins per 10' section. Forms shall be capable of resisting the pressure of concrete placed against them and the thrust and the vibration of the construction equipment operating upon them without appreciable springing or settlement. Neatly and tightly join the forms and set with exactness to the established grade and alignment. Forms must be in firm contact with the subgrade throughout the length and base width. If the subgrade becomes unstable, reset the forms using heavy stakes or other additional supports as necessary to provide the required stability. A. When forms settle over 1/8" under finishing operations, stop paving operations, reset the forms to line and grade, and bring the pavement to the required section and thickness. B. Thoroughly clean forms after each use and oil forms before reuse. C. Forms shall remain in place until the concrete has taken its final set. At the time the forms are removed, bank earth against the sides of the slab and immediately and thoroughly wet. Portland Cement Concrete 02515-11 KEL00483 D. Form super -imposed curb from the flowline of the gutter to the top of curb. Expansion joints in the curbs shall conform to the joint locations in the slab. 3.04 PLACING REINFORCING STEEL, TIE, AND DOWEL BARS Reinforcing steel, welded wire mesh, tie bars, dowels, etc. shall conform to the provisions set out under Paragraph 2.01 F -K and 2.04A and shall be placed as shown on the plans. Reinforcing shall be clean, free from rust in the form of loose or objectionable scale, and of the type, size, and dimensions shown on the plans. Securely wire reinforcing bars together at all intersections and splices and securely wire to each dowel and load transmission unit intersected. Install bars in their required position. A. Install reinforcing bars and bar mats in the slab at the required depth below the finished surface and support by and securely wiring to reinforcement chairs installed on prescribed longitudinal and transverse centers as shown by section and detailed drawings on the plans. After the reinforcing steel is securely installed above the subgrade, there shall be no loading imposed upon (or walking upon) the bar mats or individual bars before or during the placing or finishing of the concrete. B. Where welded wire fabric reinforcement mats are necessary, place and stuck off the concrete by means of a template to the depth below the finished surface as specified for the location of the mesh. Place welded wire mats, conforming to the specified side lap and end splice requirements upon the struck surface, and place the remainder of the concrete with finishing operations proceeding immediately. There shall be no loading imposed upon the mesh mats after installation in the slab concrete. C. Expansion joints or dummy joints which may require an assembly of parts supported by special devices shall be completely assembled and rigidly supported in the correct position well in advance of the placing of concrete. 3.05 JOINTS A. EXPANSION JOINTS Install expansion joints perpendicular to the surface and to the center line of the pavement at the locations indicated. Joint filler shall be a pre -molded asphaltic type or redwood boards of the size and shape specified. The oven -dry weight of the wood shall not exceed 30 pounds per cubic foot. Board joint material with less than 25% of moisture at the time of installation shall be thoroughly wetted on the job. Green lumber of much higher moisture content is desirable and acceptable. 1. Appropriately drill the joint filler to admit the dowel bars. Extend the bottom edge of the filler to or slightly below the bottom of the slab and hold the top edge approximately 1/2" below the finished surface of the pavement in order to allow the finishing operations to be continuous. Where the joint filler is of a pre -molded asphaltic type, protect the top edge by a metal cap of at least 10 gauge material having flanges not less than 1-1/2" in depth. The channel cap may remain in place during the joint finishing operations to serve as a guide for tooling the edges of the joint. After the removal of the side forms, carefully open the ends of the joints at the edges of the slab for the entire depth of the slab. The joint filler may be composed of more than one length of board in the length of Portland Cement Concrete 02515-12 KEL00483 the joint, but no board of a length less than 6' may be used unless otherwise shown on the plans. 2. Where a monolithic curb or a separate curb and gutter is used, the expansion joints therein shall coincide and be continuous with the pavement joint and of the same size and type. 3. When the pavement is adjacent to or around existing structures, construct expansion joints in accordance with the details shown on the plans. 4. Install dowel bars through the pre -drilled joint filler and rigidly support in true horizontal and vertical positions by an assembly of bar chairs and dowel holders welded to transverse bars extending across the slab and placed on each side of the joint. B. CONTRACTION JOINTS Install contraction joints at the locations and at the intervals indicated. Construct the joints by sawing to the width and to the depth indicated. Saw joints into the completed pavement surface as soon after initial concrete set as possible to control cracking, but with enough lapsed time to prevent any damage by blade action to the slab surface and to the concrete immediately adjacent to the joint. Restore any portion of the curing membrane which has been disturbed by sawing operations by spraying the areas with additional curing compound. In the absence of joint sawing instructions on the plans, conduct and complete sawing operations within a time period of five (5) to 12 hours after the concrete slab is poured including the sealing operation. C. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Construct construction joints formed at the close of each day's work or when the placing of concrete has been stopped for 30 minutes or longer by use of metal or wooden bulkheads cut true to the section of the finished pavement and clean and oil. Wooden bulkheads shall have a thickness of not less than 2-1/2". Longitudinal bars shall be continuous through the construction joints. Securely hold the bulkheads in place in a plane perpendicular to the surface and at right angles to the center line of the pavement. Round edges to a 1/4" radius. Remove any surplus concrete on the subgrade upon the resumption of the work. In no case shall an emergency construction joint be placed within 8' following a regular installation of expansion or contraction joint. If the emergency construction joint should fall within this limitation, remove the concrete back to the previously installed joint. D. LONGITUDINAL PARTING STRIPS Accurately place longitudinal parting strips or planes of weakness, when required. E. LONGITUDINAL CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Longitudinal construction joints shall be of the type indicated. Longitudinal construction joints shall be constructed accurately to the required lines in order to coincide with traffic lane lines. No width between longitudinal construction joints shall exceed 24', unless specifically authorized or directed by the Engineer in writing. Construct concrete curbs as an integral part of the pavement. 3.06 MIXING Mix concrete in an approved method conforming to the requirements of this specification. Ready -mix concrete shall be permitted in lieu of the paver -mixer. When ready -mix concrete is used, provisions of ASTM C-94 Alternate No. 2 shall govern. Materials for concrete placed in pavements shall conform to the requirements of the governing item of this specification. Portland Cement Concrete 02515-13 KEL00483 A. BATCH MIXING INCLUDING MATERIAL TRANSPORTATION Mix the concrete in a batch -mixer, as indicated and only in the quantities required for immediate use. The mixing of each batch shall continue for a period of not less than one (1) minute after all materials comprising the batch are in the mixer. The mixer discharge gate shall be locked by the automatic timing device until the required time has elapsed. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before any materials are placed therein for the succeeding batch. Retempering or remixing shall not be permitted. 1. Batch boxes, containers, or vehicle bodies used in transporting material from the proportioning plant to the mixers shall be tight and of a sufficient size to hold a batch of maximum size with a margin of safety to prevent spillage. The batch must be protected when hauling is in progress so as to positively prevent any loss of material and minimize loss of moisture by evaporation. On long length hauls, this may require tarpaulin covers. Partitions intended to separate batches shall be adequate and effective in preventing material spilling from one compartment into an other while in transit or when being dumped. 2. When cement is transported in the original package, do not empty from the bags at a greater distance from the mixer than 1,000'. 3. The mixer shall produce a concrete of uniform consistency and appearance. Correct spilling of the mixer by reducing the size of the batch. When a 27-E mixer is used, a maximum overload of 20% above the rated capacity of the mixer shall be permitted. In other size mixers, a maximum overload of 10% above the rated capacity of the mixer shall be permitted. Replace pick-up and throw -over blades inside the mixer drum when worn down 3/4". 4. When the use of a mixer of a capacity greater than that of a 5. 27-E mixer is used, increase the mixing time to 1-1/2 minutes. 6. Do not use concrete which has developed initial set or has been mixed longer than 30 minutes. 7. Thoroughly clean the mixer each time when out of operation for more than 30 minutes. B. TRANSIT MIXING When transit mixing is used, the transit mixer shall be of an approved revolving drum or revolving blade type so constructed as to produce a thoroughly mixed concrete with a uniform distribution of the materials throughout the mass and shall be equipped with a discharge mechanism which insures the discharging of the mixed concrete without segregation. 1. The mixer drum shall be water -tight when closed and equipped with a locking device which automatically prevents the discharging of the mixer prior to receiving the required number of revolutions. 2. Accurately measure the entire quantity of mixing water by visible calibrated mechanism. Leaking water valves shall be considered as ample reason for condemnation of the mixer unit by the Engineer and removal from the job. Mix each batch not less than 70 nor more than 100 revolutions at the rate of rotation specified by the Manufacturer as mixing speed. Any additional mixing shall be done at a slower speed specified by the Manufacturer for agitation, and shall be continuous until the batch is discharged. 3. Truck mixers shall be equipped with actuated counters by which the numbers of revolutions of the drum may be readily verified. The counters shall be actuated at the time of starting mixing at mixing speeds. Portland Cement Concrete 02515-14 KEL00483 4. The rate of delivery of the mixed concrete shall be such that the interval between loads shall not exceed 10 minutes. Deliver the concrete to the site of the work and discharge from the mixer within a period of 90 minutes, or before the drum has been revolved 300 revolutions, whichever comes first, after the introduction of the mixing water with the dry materials. C. CENTRAL MIXING PLANT A central mixing plant shall be allowed provided the method of mixing and handling has first been approved by the Engineer and concrete produced is in conformity with the specification requirements as herein provided. 1. Mix the concrete in a batch mixer of approved type and in the same manner as indicated. 2. Haul the concrete in vehicles so constructed and operated as to provide continuous mechanical agitation during the transportation period. The rate of delivery of the mixed concrete shall be such that the interval between loads shall not exceed 10 minutes. Deliver the concrete to the site of the work and discharge from the transporting vehicle within a period of 90 minutes after the introduction of water into the batch at the central mixing plant. D. COMMERCIAL CONCRETE PLANTS In the event the Contractor elects to use concrete produced by a commercial concrete plant, an agreement shall be drawn and executed by the responsible executive management of said plant granting the Engineer ingress and egress to all parts of the plant with full authority to have any and all required tests of aggregates and to observe all batching plant and/or central mixing plant operations. This regulatory access shall be applicable only to the concrete produced by the commercial plant for the work herein specified. 3.07 PLACING CONCRETE Unless otherwise provided for on the plans, the full width of the finished pavement shall be constructed monolithically. Rapidly deposit the concrete on the crushed stone drainage course in successive batches and distribute to the required depth and for the entire width of the pavement by shoveling or other approved methods. Where bar mats or wire mesh reinforcing is specified, see Paragraph 3.04A and B for method of concrete placement. Do not use rakes in handling concrete. The placing operation shall be continuous. At the end of the day, or in case of unavoidable interruption or delay of more than 30 minutes, place a transverse construction joint at the point of work stoppage, provided the point at which work has been suspended is not less than 8' from the last regularly established joint. If the length is less than 8', remove the concrete back to the last regularly established joint. (Refer Paragraph 3.05C.) A. Take special care in placing and spading the concrete against the forms and at joints and assemblies so as to prevent honeycombing. Excessive voids and honeycombing in the edge of the pavement, revealed by the removal of the side forms, may be cause for rejection of the section of slab in which the defect occurs. B. Do not place concrete when the air temperature is less than 35 degrees Fahrenheit, unless permission to do so is granted by the Engineer in writing. When and if such permission is granted, furnish sufficient protective material and devices to enclose and protect the fresh concrete in such a way as to maintain the temperature of the air surrounding the fresh concrete at not less than 45 degrees Fahrenheit for a period of at least five (5) days. It is to Portland Cement Concrete 02515-15 KEL00483 be distinctly understood that the Contractor is responsible for the quality and strength of the concrete placed under any weather conditions. Do not place concrete on a frozen subgrade. C. Do not place concrete before the time of sunrise, and do not place later than will permit the finishing of the pavement during sufficient natural light. 3.08 FINISHING A. MACHINE FINISHING When the concrete has been deposited, level and strike off concrete to such elevation that when mechanically screeded and tamped the concrete is thoroughly compacted and finished to the required line, grade, and section with surface voids filled. Where bar mats or wire mesh reinforcing is specified, see Paragraph 3.04A and B for method of procedure. 1. After the finishing machine has processed the concrete surface, use the longitudinal float on the surface. Operate the float from parallel bridges or float carriages moving on the side forms. Operate the float transversely across the slab with a sawing motion, always maintaining the float parallel to the center line of the pavement, in such a manner as to remove variations in the surface. Add concrete to fill minor depressions, if needed, during the longitudinal floating operation. The longitudinal float shall not be moved ahead more than 1/2 its length at each time. The longitudinal float must be maintained straight and free from warp at all times. Take care to preserve the true cross-section of the pavement. 2. While the concrete is still workable, test for irregularities with a 10' straightedge placed parallel to the center line of the pavement so as to bridge depressions and to touch high spots. Ordinates measured from the face of the straightedge to the surface of the pavement shall at no place exceed 1/16" per foot from the nearest point of contact, and in no case shall the maximum ordinate to a 10' straightedge be greater than 1/8". Rework and refinish any surface not within the tolerance limits. 3. While the concrete is still workable, give the surface final belting in order to produce a uniform surface of gritty texture. This belting shall be of short, rapid, transverse strokes combined with a longitudinal sweeping motion. When the burlap drag is permitted in lieu of the belting, accomplish the burlap drag finish by drawing a wet drag over the surface in a longitudinal direction to produce a uniform surface of a gritty nature. 4. Carefully tool the edges of slabs and joints requiring edging with an edger, of the radius required by the plans, at the time the concrete begins to set and becomes non -workable. Leave work smooth and true to lines. B. HAND FINISHING 1. Hand finishing shall be permitted only in intersections, driveways, and parking areas inaccessible to a finishing machine. 2. When the hand method of striking off and consolidating is permitted, level and strike off the concrete, as soon as placed, and screed to such elevation above grade that when consolidated and finished the surface of the pavement is at the grade elevation shown on the plans. Vibrate the entire surface to consolidate the concrete so as to insure maximum compaction and a minimum of voids. For the strike off and consolidation, provide both a strike template and tamping template on the work. Once in operation, move the strike template forward with a combined longitudinal and transverse motion and manipulate so Portland Cement Concrete 02515-16 KEL00483 that neither end of the template is raised from the forms during the striking off process. Keep a slight excess of material in front of the cutting edge at all times. The longitudinal floating, straightedging, belting, and joint finishing shall be as specified above. 3.09 CURING A. The curing of concrete pavement shall be thorough and continuous throughout the entire curing period. Failure to provide proper curing as specified herein shall be considered sufficient cause for immediate suspension of the paving operations. The curing method specified herein does not preclude the use of any of the other commonly used methods of curing, and the Engineer may approve them if so requested by the Contractor. If any selected method of curing does not afford the desired results, the Engineer shall have the right to order that another method of curing be instituted. Immediately after the finishing of the surface, cover the pavement with a continuous, uniform, water -impermeable coating. The impermeable coating shall be of the type specified in Paragraph 2.04-D. After removal of the side forms, the sides of the slab shall receive a like coating before earth is banked against them. Apply the solution under pressure with a spray nozzle in such a manner as to cover the entire surfaces thoroughly and completely with a uniform film. B. The rate of application shall be such as to ensure complete coverage and shall not exceed 200 square feet per gallon of curing compound when applied mechanically and 150 square feet per gallon of curing compound when applied by hand sprayers. When thoroughly dry, it shall provide a continuous and flexible membrane, free from cracks or pinholes, and shall not disintegrate, check, peel, or crack during the curing period. If for any reason the seal is broken during the curing period, immediately repair the seal with additional sealing solution. C. When tested in accordance with ASTM C-156, the curing compound shall provide a film which will have retained within the test specimen the following percentages of the moisture present in the specimen when the curing compound was applied: Time After 24 hours After 3 days After 7 days 3.10 CLEANING JOINTS Retained Moisture Min. 97% 95% 91% Immediately after sawing the joint, completely remove the resulting slurry from the joint and clean the immediate area by flushing with a jet of water under pressure, and by the use of other tools as necessary. After flushing, blow out the joint with compressed air. When the surfaces are thoroughly clean and dry and just before the joint sealer is placed, use compressed air having a pressure of at least 90 psi to blow out the joint and remove traces of dust. Equip air compressors, used for cleaning joints, with suitable traps capable of removing surplus water and oil in the compressed air. A. In the event freshly cut sawed joints become contaminated before they are sealed, reclean the joints as outlined above. Portland Cement Concrete 02515-17 KEL00483 B. Cleaning methods shall not alter the joint profile, including rounding of the top corners, or alter the texture of the concrete riding surface. Accomplish cleaning of the joint faces by sandblasting. 3.11 INSTALLING BACKER -ROD IN JOINT Prior to placing the backer -rod, thoroughly dry and clean the joint. Complete any necessary cleaning, air blasting, or air -drying before placing backer -rod and sealant. If backer -rod specified for applicable joint detail are on joints less than 1" wide after cleaning, install a round backer -rod of resilient material, compatible with silicone sealant, and slightly oversized to prevent movement during the sealing operation in the joint at the depth specified on the appropriate joint detail in the plans. The thickness of the backer -rod shall be greater after squeezing it into the joint and some "rebound" may occur allowance must be made for this to ensure placing at correct depth. Backer -rod shall be a readily compressible, non-reactive, non-absorptive type material such as expanded closed cell polyethylene foam rod. 3.12 INSTALLING SILICONE SEALANT A. The installation of the silicone sealant is to be done as soon after cleaning and after placing the backer -rod as reasonably possible to ensure that joint is still clean and dry. In the event the joint does become contaminated, damp, or wet, remove the backer -rod, clean and dry the joint, and reinstall a new backer -rod prior to placing the sealant material. The sealant material used shall be a low modulus silicone sealant material as specified. The temperature of the concrete surface and air at time of placement must be 40 degrees Fahrenheit or higher. Apply the silicone sealant by pumping only. B. The pump shall be of sufficient capacity to deliver the necessary volume of material to completely fill the joint to the specified width and height of sealant in one (1) pass. The nozzle shall be of sufficient size and shape to closely fit into the joint and introduce the sealant inside the joint with sufficient pressure to prevent voids occurring in the sealant and to force the sealant into contact with the joint faces. Tool the sealant, after being placed, to provide the specified recess depth, thickness, and shape of sealant. Apply sufficient force or pressure to the sealant in this tooling operation to force the sealant against the joint faces to ensure satisfactory wetting and bonding of the sealant to the joint faces. The silicone sealant is not self -leveling and will not position itself correctly in the joint under its own weight. Place the sealant to reasonably close conformity with the dimensions and shape shown on the plans. Any unreasonable deviation shall be cause for rejection and necessary corrective action shall be made by the Contractor. 3.13 OPENING PAVEMENT TO TRAFFIC Exclude traffic from the pavement for a period of not less than fourteen (14) days unless the Engineer directs that sections be opened to traffic at an earlier date. On sections of the pavement where the use of Type III cement is required, or permitted, the pavement may be opened to traffic after four (4) days. Should tests of beam specimens show a flexural strength of not less than 500 pounds per square inch, the Engineer may direct that the pavement so represented be opened to traffic in less than 14 days and for Type III cement in less than four (4) days. In all cases, clean the pavement and fill and trim the joints before opening to public. Portland Cement Concrete 02515-18 KEL00483 A. When it is necessary to provide for traffic across the pavement, construct, at the Contractor's own expense, suitable and substantial crossings over the concrete which will be adequate for the traffic using same. B. Opening pavement to traffic shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the work and shall not in any way affect the time charge on the entire project. The number of days stated in the contract shall govern for the completion of the entire work covered by the contract. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL; TESTING OF MATERIALS Samples of all materials for test shall be made at the expense of the Owner. In the event the initial sampling and testing does not comply with the specifications, all subsequent testing of the material in order to determine if the material is acceptable, shall be at the Contractor's expense at the same rate charged by the commercial laboratories. 3.15 CLEAN AND ADJUST [NOT USED] 3.16 SCHEDULES See Table I for silicone sealant requirements. Portland Cement Concrete 02515-19 KEL00483 TABLE SILICONE SEALANT REQUIREMENTS Silicone sealant material shall meet or exceed Federal Specifications TT -S -001543A (COM- NBS) and TT -S -00230C (COM-NBS). END OF SECTON Portland Cement Concrete 02515-20 KEL00483 REQUIREMENT a ` -TEST METHQD , Flow 0.3" maximum MIL S 8801 ASTM D-2202 Extrusion rate 75-350 grams/minute MIL S 8802 Tack free time 20-90 minutes MIL S 8802 @ 77°F t1 ASTM C-679 Specific Gravity 1.010 - 1.515 ASTM D-792, Method A Durometer hardness, 10-25 (0°F) ASTM D-2240 Shore A. (7 days cured @ 77°F f3 and 45-55% Relative Humidity) Tensile stress @ 150% 45 psi maximum ASTM D-412 elongation ( 7 day cure @ 77°F (Die C) f3 and 45-55% Relative Humidity) Elongation: (7 day cure @ 700% minimum ASTM D-412 77°F f3 and 45-55% Relative (Die C) Humidity) Ozone and UV Resistance No chalking, cracking, or bond ASTM D-793 loss after 5,000 hours Movement Capability and +100% and -50%; no adhesive ASTM C-719 Adhesion or cohesive failure after 10 cycles at 0°F Shelf Life 6 months from date of shipment from manufacturer Silicone sealant material shall meet or exceed Federal Specifications TT -S -001543A (COM- NBS) and TT -S -00230C (COM-NBS). END OF SECTON Portland Cement Concrete 02515-20 KEL00483 02575 PAVING REPAIR AND RESURFACING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to repair and resurface pavement. This section shall govern for the repair or replacement of pavement or other improved surfaces damaged or destroyed in performing the construction of water and sewer lines. Construction of such projects below pavement subgrade is covered by Section 02203, PIPELINE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR PIPING. 1.02 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: 1. Proposed material list and sources 2. Experience record of proposed paving subcontractor 1.03 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: Texas Department of Transportation (TDOT), Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets, and Bridges, latest edition. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS Do not place materials when, in the opinion of the Engineer, weather conditions are unsuitable. Do not place concrete when the temperature is 40 degrees F and falling. Concrete may be placed when temperature is above 35 degrees F and rising. Do not place asphalt or asphaltic concrete when the temperature is below 50 degrees F and falling. Asphalt or asphaltic concrete may be placed when temperature is above 40 degrees F and rising. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. CONCRETE PAVEMENT CONCRETE: 3,000 psi conforming to Section 03305, CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE. 2. REINFORCING STEEL: Of the same size and spacing as in the existing concrete pavement unless otherwise indicated. New billet steel, deformed bars, conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60. B. ASPHALT PAVEMENT HOT MIX ASPHALTIC CONCRETE a. HMAC Surface Course: Conforming to TDOT Standard Specifications, Item 340, Type D. Paving Repair and Resurfacing 02575-1 KEL00483 b. Asphaltic Materials Used in the Mix: Conforming to TDOT Standard Specifications, Item 300. The grade of asphalt shall be AC -20. Other grades of asphalt will be considered if weather conditions or mix design appear to warrant a change. C. AGGREGATE: Conforming to TDOT Standard Specification, Item 340.2. d. PRIME COAT: Conforming to TDOT Standard Specifications, Item 300, Grade MC -30, or an appropriate asphalt emulsion. e. TACK COAT: Cut-back asphalt RC -2 or MC -2 conforming to ASTM D598, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 2. TWO -COURSE SURFACE TREATMENT: Conforming to TDOT Standard Specifications, Item 316. Asphaltic materials shall conform to TDOT Standard Specifications, Item 300, AC -10 for hot weather and AC -5 for cooler weather. Aggregates shall conform to TDOT Standard Specifications, Item 302. First course shall be Grade 1 and second course shall be Grade 2. 3. FLEXIBLE BASE: Of the depth and to the extent shown on the plans. Unless otherwise shown on plans, flexible base shall be one (1) or more of the following listed options: a. Flexible Base Material: Conforming to TDOT Standard Specifications, Item 248, Type A, Grade 1 or Grade 2. b. Full Depth Asphaltic Concrete Item 340, Type A, B, or C. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. CONCRETE PAVEMENT Conforming to TDOT Standard Specifications, Cut pavement in parallel straight lines a minimum of 1' outside trench walls on each side to permit pavement removal before trench excavation. Make cuts by sawing partial pavement depth to avoid cutting reinforcing steel. After concrete pavement is broken up and removed, cut off existing reinforcing steel to provide a minimum of 30 bar diameters lap with new reinforcing steel on each side and bent back to clear the trench for excavation and pipe laying. B. ASPHALT PAVEMENT Cut paved surface in parallel straight lines outside trench walls prior to trench excavation. Before pavement replacement has begun, make additional straight line cuts and remove pavement a minimum of F outside trench walls. C. SUBGRADE The subgrade, including granular trench backfill, shall be approved by the Engineer before any base or pavement surface is replaced. Moisten, reshape, and re -compact subgrade as necessary to receive the base material. Paving Repair and Resurfacing 02575-2 KEL00483 3.02 INSTALLATION A. CONCRETE PAVEMENT REPLACEMENT 1. Install reinforcing steel on the approved subgrade and securely tie in place. Bend down existing reinforcing into proper position and securely tie each bar to new reinforcing bars. Support and tie reinforcing to steel bar chairs or other suitable supporting devices. New reinforcement shall be of equal size and spacing to existing steel, unless otherwise indicated. Install substantial forms to proper grade at pavement edges. 2. Rapidly deposit concrete on the subgrade in successive batches and distribute to the required depth and for the entire width of the pavement by shoveling or other approved methods. Do not use rakes in handling concrete. The placing operation shall be continuous. Level the concrete, as soon as placed, and then struck off and screed to such elevation above grade that when consolidated and finished the surface of the pavement shall be at the proper elevation. Tamp the entire surface and consolidate the concrete so as to insure maximum compaction and a minimum of voids. 3. After final floating and while the concrete is still workable, finish the surface to provide a uniform surface of gritty texture by brooming, use of belting, burlap drags or other approved methods. 4. Cure the concrete with an approved curing compound or other approved means. Concrete pavement shall not be opened to traffic until it has gained sufficient strength to withstand traffic without damage unless approved protective devices are provided. Concrete pavement at an age of seven (7) days or a strength of 2,000 psi may be opened to traffic. B. FLEXIBLE BASE 1. Where the base course exceeds 6" in thickness, construct the flexible base in two (2) or more courses of equal thickness. Wet, manipulate, and compact material to 95% maximum density as determined by ASTM D698. Where deemed necessary by the Engineer, apply a uniform application of prime coat asphaltic material to the surface of the prepared subgrade, applied at a rate of not less than 0.30 gallon per square yard of surface. 2. Where plant mix asphalt material is used for base, construction shall be in accordance with TDOT Standard Specifications, Item 351, as applicable to small areas. C. ASPHALT PAVEMENT REPLACEMENT HOT MIX ASPHALTIC CONCRETE: Apply prime coat to base or tack coat base as indicated. Coat contact surfaces of pavement edges and structures with asphalt before any pavement is placed. Do not place pavement until the Engineer has approved the base. Hauling or transporting of the material to the project site, placing, compaction, and shaping shall be in accordance with TDOT Standard Specification Item 340.6 as applicable for small areas. After final compaction of the pavement, no vehicular traffic of any kind shall be permitted until the pavement has cooled and hardened for at least six (6) hours. Smooth the finished surface course, upon completion of final rolling true to grade and cross section. Immediately correct low or defective areas by cutting out the faulty areas and replacing with fresh, hot mixture. Compact the area to conform to the remainder of the pavement. Paving Repair and Resurfacing 02575-3 KEL00483 2. TWO -COURSE ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENT: On the approved surface of the finished base, asphalt at the rate of 0.20 to 0.30 gallons per square yard shall be applied by an approved distributor so operated to result in a uniform, proper distribution at the correct temperature. Immediately cover the surface with No. 1 aggregate, distribute at a rate of one cubic yard per 80 square yards, broom as necessary for uniform distribution, and roll with a flat wheel roller of ample weight. Make a second application of asphalt in the manner specified for the first application, at a rate of 0.30 to 0.40 gallon per square yard. Make the second application with No. 2 aggregate at a rate of one cubic yard per 110 square yards and process as specified for the first application. After the work has been completed, there should be a slight excess of aggregate on the surface. D. OTHER IMPROVED SURFACES Where water, storm drains, or sewer lines to be constructed traverse or cross through gravel surfaced public roads or shoulders, or private dirt or gravel driveways or parking areas, replace the surface with a quality material, workmanship and at a thickness at least equal to the existing surfaces. END OF SECTION Paving Repair and Resurfacing 02575-4 KEL00483 02614 PRETENSIONED CONCRETE CYLINDER PIPE 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install pretensioned concrete cylinder pipe and fittings, and specials, including connections and appurtenances as required for the proper installation and function of the system as indicated herein. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. EXPERIENCE REQUIREMENTS Finished pipe shall be the product of one (1) manufacturer which has had not less than 10 years successful experience manufacturing pipe of the types and sizes indicated. Pipe Manufacturing operations (pipe, fittings, lining, coating) shall be performed at one (1) location. B. FACTORY TESTING The Owner reserves the option to have an independent testing laboratory, at the Owner's expense, inspect pipe and fittings at the Pipe Manufacturer's plant. The Owner's testing laboratory and Engineer shall have free access to the Manufacturer's plant. The pipe manufacturer shall notify the Owner, in writing, at least two (2) weeks ahead of pipe fabrication as to start of fabrication and fabricating schedule so that the Owner can advise the Manufacturer as to Owner's decision regarding tests to be performed by an independent testing laboratory. In event the Owner elects to retain an independent testing laboratory to make material tests and weld tests, it is the intent that the tests be limited to one (1) spot testing of each category unless the tests do not show compliance with the standard. If these tests do not show compliance, the Owner reserves the right to have the laboratory make additional tests and observations. 2. The Owner may require the Manufacturer to furnish mill test certificates on reinforcing steel or wire, steel plate, and cement. The Manufacturer shall perform the tests described in AWWA C-303, for all pipe, fittings, and specials. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: 1. Prior to the fabrication of the pipe, submit fabrication and laying drawings to the Engineer for record purposes. Record drawings shall include a complete description of the pipe offered, including cuts, tabulated layout and pertinent design data. Record drawings shall reference stationing on the plan profile sheets and shall incorporate changes necessary to avoid conflicts with existing utilities and structures. Details for the design and fabrication of all fittings and specials and provisions for thrust shall be included. 2. Prior to delivery of the pipe to the project site, the Manufacturer shall furnish an affidavit certifying that all pipe, fittings, and specials, and other products and materials furnished, comply with this specification. Copies of results of factory tests and mill certificates for steel and cement shall be provided, if requested. Pretensioned Concrete Cylinder Pipe 02614-1 KEL00483 1.04 STANDARDS Except as modified or supplemented herein, pretensioned concrete cylinder pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following standard specifications, latest edition. AWWA C-303 "Standard for Reinforced Concrete Pressure Pipe - Steel Cylinder Type, Pretensioned, for Water and Other Liquids" AWWA M-9 Manual: "Concrete Pressure Pipe" ASTM A-33 "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" ASTM A-570 "Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot Rolled, Structural Quality" ASTM C-144 "Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar" ASTM C-150 "Specification for Portland Cement" ASTM D-698 "Test for Moisture -Density Relations for Soils" 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Properly support and secure pipe for storage. The Pipe Manufacturer shall obtain the necessary transportation permits. Upon delivery of the pipe, notify the Engineer so that an inspection may be performed. The inspection shall not relieve the Contractor's responsibility of providing pipe which meets the contract requirements. Other handling and storage requirements shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS [Not Used] 1.07 OPTIONS [Not Used] 1.08 GUARANTEES [Not Used] 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. CEMENT: Cement for use in concrete and mortar shall be Type II Portland Cement, with not more than 5% tricalcium aluminate (Ca3A). B. AGGREGATES: Aggregates for concrete lining and coating shall conform to ASTM C-33. C. SAND: Sand used for inside and outside joints shall be of silica base, conforming to ASTM C- 144. D. SPECIAL COATING: Pipe to be laid in casing shall have two (2) built-up rings or mortar each approximately 2' long and slightly higher than the pipe bell to prevent pipe being supported, by the bell. Rings to be at the quarter points of the pipe section. Pretensioned Concrete Cylinder Pipe 02614-2 KEL00483 E. BRASS REDUCING BUSHINGS: Where outlets or taps are threaded, furnish and install brass reducing bushings for the outlet size indicated. 2.02 MIXES; CEMENT MORTAR Cement mortar used for pouring joints shall consist of one (1) part Portland Cement to two (2) parts clean, fine, sharp silica sand, mixed with water. Exterior joint mortar shall be mixed to the consistency of thick cream. Interior joint mortar shall be mixed with as little water as possible so that the mortar is very stiff, but workable. Cement shall be ASTM C-150, Type Il or Type III with the modification that the cement shall contain not more than 5% tricalcium aluminate (Ca3A). Sand shall conform to ASTM C-144. Cement mortar used for patching shall be mixed as per cement mortar for inside joints. 2.03 FABRICATIONS [Not Used] 2.04 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. PIPE GENERAL Pipe, bench, and specials shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C-303 and AWWA M-9, and the special requirements of this specification. 2. PIPE DESIGN CRITERIA Sizes and pressure classes (working pressure) shall be as specified. For the purposes of pipe design, working pressure plus transient pressure shall be equal to 1.5 times the pressure class specified. Fittings, specials and connections shall be same class as the associated pipe. Pipe and fittings shall be clearly marked with the pressure class and piece number to permit easy identification in the field. Pipe design shall be based on trench conditions and design pressure class specified. Pipe shall be designed according to the methods indicated in AWWA C-303 and AWWA Manual M-9 for trench construction, using the following parameters: a) Unit Weight of Fill (w) = 130pcf b) Live Load = AASHTO HS 20 c) Trench Depth = As indicated d) Coefficient Ku' = 0.150 e) Trench Width (Bd) as indicated. f) Bedding Conditions = As indicated g) Soil Reaction Modulus (E') = 700 h) Coefficient k = 0.090 Trench depths indicated shall be verified after existing utilities are located. Vertical alignment changes required because of existing utility or other conflicts shall be accommodated by an appropriate change in pipe design depth. In no case shall pipe be installed deeper than its design allows. 3. PROVISIONS FOR THRUST a. Thrusts at bends, tees, plugs, or other fittings shall be resisted by restrained joints. Pretensioned Concrete Cylinder Pipe 02614-3 KEL00483 Thrust blocking or anchors shall be used to restrain thrust at bends, fittings, etc. adjacent to casing pipe and where indicated. b. Restrained joints shall be used for a sufficient distance from each side of the bend, tee, plug, or other fitting to resist thrust which will be developed at the design pressure of the pipe. For the purpose of thrust restraint, design pressure shall be 1, times pressure class (working pressure). Restrained joints shall consist of welded joints or harnessed joints. Harnessed joints shall be clamp or snap ring type in accordance with AWWA Manual M-9. Clamp type joint restraint shall be used where indicated. In areas where restrained joints are used for thrust restraint, the pipe shall have adequate cylinder thickness to transmit the thrust forces. C. The length of pipe with welded joints to resist thrust forces shall be determined by the Pipe Manufacturer in accordance with AWWA Manual M-9 and the following: 1) The Weight of earth (We) shall be calculated as the weight of the projected soil prism above the pipe. 2) Soil density = 110 pcf (maximum value to be used). 3) Coefficient of friction = 0.3 (maximum value to be used). The above applies to unsaturated soil conditions. In locations where ground water is encountered, the soil density shall be reduced to its buoyant weight for the backfill below the water table, and the coefficient of friction shall be reduced to 0.25. 4. INSIDE DIAMETER The inside diameter, including the cement mortar lining, shall be a minimum of the nominal diameter of the pipe specified. B. JOINT WRAPPERS: similar and equal to those manufactured by Mar -Mac Manufacturing Company. C. INSULATED CONNECTIONS: Where insulated connections are indicated, furnish dielectric insulation gaskets, sleeves, and two (2) plastic washers for each bolt. Insulating kits shall be Insulket or approved equal. D. FLEXIBLE JOINT COUPLINGS: Dresser Style 38, Rockwell Style 411, or approved equal. E. BONDING WIRES: Bonding wires shall be furnished by the Pipe Manufacturer. F. PIPE ENDS: The standard pipe end shall include steel joint ring and a continuous solid rubber ring gasket as per AWWA Manual M-9. G. FLANGES: ANSI Drilling of class equal to or greater than the pipe class, unless otherwise specified, and shall match class of valves or appurtenances which are attached. Nuts and bolts shall conform to ASTM A-307, Grade B. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION [Not Used] Pretensioned Concrete Cylinder Pipe 02614-4 KEL00483 3.02 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL Install pipe, fittings, specials, and appurtenances as specified herein, as specified in AWWA Manual M-9, and in accordance with the Pipe Manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Lay pipe to the lines and grades as indicated. B. PIPE HANDLING 1. Haul and distribute pipe, fittings at the project site. Handle piping with care to avoid damage. Before lowering into the trench, inspect each joint of pipe, and reject or repair any damaged pipe. 2. Keep the pipe clean during and after the laying operation and free of sticks, dirt, animals, and trash, and at the close of each operating day, effectively seal the open end of the pipe using a gasketed night cap. C. PIPE JOINTING 1. GENERAL a. Thoroughly clean the bell and spigot rings before laying each joint of pipe by brushing and wiping. If any damage to the protective coating on the metal has occurred, repair the damage before laying the pipe. Lubricate the gasket and the inside surface of the bell with an approved lubricant (flax soap) which will facilitate the telescoping of the joint. Tightly fit together sections of pipe and exercise care to secure true alignment and grade. When a joint of pipe is being laid, place the gasket on the spigot ring and enter the spigot end of the pipe into the bell of the adjoining pipe and force into position. The inside joint space between ends of the pipe sections shall have an opening within the tolerances as recommended by the Pipe Manufacturer. No "blocking up" of pipe or joints will be permitted, and if the pipe is not uniformly supported or the joint not made up properly, remove the joint and properly prepare the trench. After joining, check the position of the gasket with a feeler gauge. If the gasket is out of position, disassemble the joint and repeat the joint laying procedure. b. For interior welded joints, complete backfilling before welding. For exterior field - welded joints, provide adequate working room under and beside the pipe. 2. EXTERIOR JOINTS: Make the exterior joint by placing a joint wrapper around the pipe and secure in place with two (2) metal straps. The wrapper shall be 9" wide for pipe 36" and larger, and 7" wide for smaller pipe, hemmed on each side. The wrapper shall be fiberglass reinforced or burlap cloth, with lengths encircling the pipe, leaving enough opening between ends to allow the mortar to be poured inside the wrapper into the joint. Fill the joint with mortar from one side in one (1) continuous operation until the grout has flowed entirely around the pipe. During the filling of the joint, pat or manipulate the sides of the wrapper to settle the mortar and expel any entrapped air. Leave wrappers in place undisturbed until the mortar has set-up. INTERIOR JOINTS: Upon completion of backfilling of the pipe trench, fill the inside joint recess with a stiff cement mortar. Prior to placing of mortar, clean out dirt or trash Pretensioned Concrete Cylinder Pipe 02614-5 KEL00483 which has collected in the joint, and moisten the concrete surfaces of the joint space by spraying or brushing with a wet brush. Ram or pack the stiff mortar into the joint space and take extreme care to insure that no voids remain in the joint space. After the joint has been filled, level the surfaces of the joint mortar with the interior surfaces of the pipe with a steel trowel so that the surface is smooth. Interior joints of pipe smaller than 21 " shall have the bottom of the bell buttered with mortar, prior to inserting the spigot, such that when the spigot is pushed into position it will extrude surplus mortar from the joint. The surplus mortar shall be struck off flush with the inside of the pipe by pulling a filled burlap bag or an inflated ball through the pipe with a rope. 4. WELDED JOINTS: Telescope together the joints to be welded with a rubber gasket as specified above and align perfectly with the adjacent section of pipe. Accomplish welding by laying a filler rod between the steel bell of one (1) section and the steel spigot of the other, and welding the bell to the outside of the spigot. Use no less than three (3) complete passes to make the weld. When the joint weld is completed, pour the exterior joint with mortar as specified above. After all sections are in final position, fill the interior joint as specified above. Welded joints shall meet the requirements of AWWA Manual M-9. D. PROTECTION OF EXPOSED METAL 1. Protect exposed ferrous metal by a minimum of 1" coating of cement mortar as previously specified for inside joints. Exposed large flat surfaces such as, flanges, bolts, caulked joints, threaded outlets, closures, etc., shall have coating reinforced with galvanized wire mesh. 2. Thoroughly clean and wet the surface receiving a cement mortar coating with water just prior to placing the cement mortar coating. After placing, take care to prevent cement mortar from drying out too rapidly by covering with damp earth or burlap. Cement mortar coating shall not be applied during freezing weather. E. PATCHING 1. Excessive field -patching of lining or coating shall not be permitted. Patching of lining or coating will be allowed where area to be repaired does not exceed 100 square inches and has no dimensions greater than 12". In general, there shall not be more than one patch on either the lining or the coating of any one joint of pipe. 2. Wherever necessary to patch the pipe, make patch with cement mortar as previously specified for interior joints. Do not install patched pipe until the patch has been properly and adequately cured and approved for laying by the Engineer. Promptly remove rejected pipe from the site. F. PIPE BEDDING AND BACKFILL Pipe bedding and backfill shall be as specified in Section 02202, PIPELINE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL. Remove sheeting and shoring in a manner such that a good bond is achieved between the backfill material and the undisturbed trench walls. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform a hydrastic test as specified in Section 01400, QUALITY CONTROL. Pretensioned Concrete Cylinder Pipe 02614-6 KEL00483 B. Disinfect the piping system as specified in Section 01656, DISINFECTION. 3.04 CLEAN AND ADJUST [Not Used] 3.05 SCHEDULES [Not Used] END OF SECTION Pretensioned Concrete Cylinder Pipe 02614-7 KEL00483 02810 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Provide skilled labor, materials, equipment for a complete operable irrigation system as specified herein, and as indicated on the contract drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers of irrigation specialties shall be experienced in the production of this type of equipment. Substitutions shall conform to Section 01300, SUBMITTALS. Recognized manufacturers are as follows: 1. The Toro Company, Irrigation Division 2. Weathermatic, Division of Telsco Industries 3. HIT Products 4. Hunter Industries 5. Rainbird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp. 6. Buckner by Storm 7. L.R. Nelson Corp. 8. K - Rain (Rotary Heads) 9. Irritrol B. INSTALLERS REQUIREMENTS Contractor shall be licensed by the Texas Board of Irrigators and hold a current business registration in the City of Keller, Texas. At least one licensed irrigator shall be on the jobsite during construction at all times and shall provide their TNRCC irrigators card when requested by the OWNER, or ENGINEERS REPRESENTATIVE. 1. Design of the irrigation shall be performed by an irrigation professional licensed by the Texas Natural Resource Conservation Commission. 2. Design of the pipe system shall be based on a 5 feet per second (FPS) maximum velocity. Pop-up spray sprinklers shall be a minimum 4" body, unless otherwise indicated. 4. The system shall be multi -zoned and fully automatic. 5. Provide manual drain valve at low points in mainline. 6. Provide automatic drain valves for each zone. 7. Provide freeze and rainstats for entire system. Rainstats shall be non -clog type, with override by-pass switch or restraints. Provide wind stat where the prevailing wind exceeds 15 mph. Weather stations are acceptable as an integrated system. Landscape Irrigation System 02810-1 KEL00483 The sprinklers shall be spaced no further than manufacturers current specification. 9. Irrigation system shall be compatible to and coordinated with new or existing turf, landscape and irrigation system. 10. Layout and spacing of spray heads shall take into consideration the prevailing wind conditions. Low angle trajectory sprays shall be used for prevailing winds exceeding 10 mph. 11. Part -circle or adjustable arc heads shall be used on borders at streets, walks, fences and buildings (unless otherwise indicated). Overspray shall be minimized. Spray onto entrances and windows is prohibited and spray onto buildings should be avoided. 12. Nozzles shall be selected from manufacturers specifications that provide matched precipitation rates. 13. Precipitation rates for heads covering common turf or landscaping shall be similar. Zone rotary, turfgrass and shrub areas separately. Rotary and spray heads shall not be on the same zone. 14. Irrigation shall provide a minimum of 1 inch of water per week on turf. Shrubs and trees shall have 1.5 inches per week for new plantings and 1 inch per week for established, or the difference between the evapotranspiration rate and the annual rainfall received, whichever is greater. 15. Application rate shall be the optimum condition for the soil type, accomplished by the nozzle style and/or the controller timing and sequencing. Turf water application rate shall be as recommended by Texas Agricultural Extension Service, Lawn Watering, by R.L. Duble and W.E. Knoop, or other recognized source. 16. Power wiring to the controller shall be installed by a licensed master electrical contractor, and is the responsibility of this contractor. 17. Each controller be connected to a separate, unswitched circuit with its own ground fault circuit breaker. 18. Wire size for power supply shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code. 19. Wiring of controllers and valves shall comply with the manufacturers instructions and NEC. Thermostat wire shall not be used for valves. 20. Provide thrust blocks or restraints on all pressure mains exceeding 65psig at 90 degree elbows. 21. Provide metal location tape on all sleeves beneath concrete drives and walks. Provide threaded caps on both ends of sleeves installed for future use. Extend sleeves a minimum of 12" beyond concrete on both sides. 22. System shall be zoned and timed at non -peak water periods (e.g. early morning before 6:00 a.m.). Zones shall not water at afternoon or nights unless absolutely necessary (alternate days where required to accomplish this). Landscape Irrigation System 02810-2 KEL00483 23. Products of like nature shall be of the same manufacturer in the following categories: 1. Controllers 2. Valves 3. Sprinklers 4. Drain valves 5. Freeze and Rainstats 6. Turf boxes, valve or meter boxes 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section, SUBMITTALS and shall include: Manufacturer's product data for the following: a. Controller b. Sprinkler heads and nozzles C. Electric, manual and drain valves d. Rain, freeze, or wind stats and moisture sensors e. Pipe and fittings f. Wiring, watertight connectors, conduit, ground -fault circuit breakers, pull boxes. g. Turf and valve vaults or boxes h. Backflow preventers 2. Shop drawings include the following: a. A scale drawing (minimum 1" = 30'-0") indicating: (1) sprinkler heads with nozzle styles, arcs and radius (2) controller location (3) valve locations, with zone identification for electric globe valves (4) pipe and sleeve locations with sizes, provide flow capacities in gallons per minute (GPM) and velocities in feet per second (FPS) for all sprinkler pipe (5) rainstat, freezestat and windstat locations with mounting details (6) wiring routing, details of wet connections in valve boxes (7) landscape features; e.g. trees, shrub and turfed areas, perennials and annual beds (8) all site features affecting the irrigation system; e.g. transformers, walks, drives, structures, curbs, easements, utilities (9) the direction of true north, and the prevailing wind in miles per hour 3. As -built drawings shall be true, scaled drawings with every deviation from the shop drawings legibly indicated, including all amendments, addendums and change orders. All pipe and main components shall be exactly to scale or dimensioned from a fixed measuring point. 4. Provide a copy of the current TNRCC Irrigators License card for every person that will be on site or designing, installing or supervising the installation with the shop drawings. 1.04 STANDARDS AND REFERENCES A. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Comply with the codes and ordinances of the City of Keller, Texas. Landscape Irrigation System 02810-3 KEL00483 2. All fees, permits and inspections shall be secured by and paid by the contractor. 3. Comply with the requirements of the Texas Water Commission. Article 8751, Section 7 Vernons Texas Civil Statutes, Texas Irrigators Advisory Council. B. REFERENCES Materials and methods of the following referenced standards and specifications of the latest edition form a part of this specification section as applicable. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valves and Fittings Industry (MSS) Standard: SP -80 Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch) B16.3 Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings, 150 LB and 300 LB B 16.26 Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) B 88 Seamless Copper Water Tube A 120 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Use D 1784 Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds D 1785 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 48, 80, and 120 D 1869 Rubber Rings for Asbestos (R1983) Cement Pipe D 2241 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR -PR) D 2464 Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 D 2466 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40 D 2467 Socket -Type Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Fittings, Schedule 80 D 2564 Solvent Cement for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings D 2657 Heat -Joining Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings D 2855 Making Solvent -Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings Landscape Irrigation System 02810-4 KEL00483 4. American Water Works Association (AWWA) Standards C 203 Coal -Tar Enamel Protective Coatings for Steel Water Pipelines -Enamel and Tape -Hot Applied C 207 Steel Pipe Flanges C 500 Gate Valves 3 Inches through 48 and Correction In. for Water and Other Liquids C 506 Backflow Prevention Devices (R 1983) Reduced Pressure Principles and Double Check Valve Types C 600 Installation of Cast Iron Water Mains C 603 Installation of Asbestos -Cement Water Pipe C 900 Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 Inches & Erratum through 12 Inches for Water 4. Miscellaneous Turf Irrigation Manual by James A Watkins Lawn Watering by R.B. Duble and W.E. Knoop. Texas Agricultural and Extension Service Drip Irrigation Design for Landscaping Form No. 490-2047 by the Toro Company Basic Drip Irrigation Design for Landscaping Form No. 490-2113 by the Toro Company Rainfall -Evapotranspiration Data Form No. 490-1358 by the Toro Company R&G Sloane, GSR. Bulletin No. SCJ -1, Solvent Cementing Procedure Simplified Irrigation Design by Pete Melby 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Deliver manufactured products to the site in the original cartons or other protective coverings. Products shall remain packaged until ready for installation. Store piping on wood runners raised above grade. Security and protection from the elements are the contractor --s responsibility. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. EXISTING UTILITIES: Verify, on the jobsite, the exact location of all existing underground utilities before beginning construction. Contact the utility companies prior to excavation for line locations and notification. Hand excavate trenches and valve box vaults near existing utilities. Repair or pay for repairs to damaged utilities without cost to the Owner. B. SYSTEM LAYOUT: Layout the system prior to installation. Drive surveyors flags or stakes in the ground to indicate the location of the sprinkler heads. Stakes or flags with color -coded tops shall be used to identify location of mains and risers. In the event that layout conflicts with trees or other obstructions, adjust as necessary. 1.07 GUARANTEES A. Materials, equipment and workmanship furnished under this contract shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance. The guaranty shall include but not be limited Landscape Irrigation System KEL00483 02810-5 to the following: Filling and repairing depressions due to settlement of irrigation trenches for 45 days following acceptance of project. 2. Ensuring that the irrigation system can be adequately drained to protect from freeze damage. 3. That the system has been adjusted to supply proper water coverage of areas designated to receive water. 4. Existing sod or grass damaged as a result of irrigation system installation will be replaced by this contractor. B. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner or his authorized representative of failure of any part of the guaranteed equipment, material or workmanship during the guaranty period, the affected part or parts shall be replaced promptly with new parts, by and at the expense of the contractor. The contractor shall acknowledge his responsibility under these guaranty provisions by letter, stating that the equipment, materials and workmanship referred to herein are guaranteed and stating the inclusive dates of the guaranty period. C. All work under this contract shall not be finally accepted until expiration of the guaranty period. During this period, the irrigation contractor is responsible for the work until final acceptance. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. GENERAL Pipe shall be permanently marked with the ASTM classification No., pipe size and manufacturer's name. B. PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) PIPE AND FITTINGS SDR -PR (ASTM 2241) SDR2, Class 200 (Class 315 for 1/2" pipe) Type 1. 2. Fittings, and Schedule 40 PVC Pipe, (ASTM 1785) and (ASTM2466), solvent cement joint (ASTM D2467). Threaded fittings, schedule 80 PVC (ASTM D2464). 3. Elastomeric-Gasket Joint: Pipe shall be to dimensional requirements of ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 with joints meeting the requirements of 150 psi working pressure, 200 hydrostatic test pressure, unless otherwise shown or specified, or it may be pipe conforming to requirements of ASTM D 2241, elastomeric joint, with the following applications: Landscape Irrigation System 02810-6 KEL00483 SDR Maximum Working Pressure Minimum Hydrostatic Pressure 21 120 160 17 150 200 13.5 200 266 C. Copper Tubing: ASTM Standard B88, type K, hard drawn. Fittings: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder Grade 95 TA, or AWS A5.8, B cup silver braze. D. Joints shall be made up using purple primer and clear solvent cement meeting the requirements of ASTM D 2564; the joint assembly shall be made in accordance with ASTM D 2588 and GSR, R&G Sloane Bulletin No. SCJ -1 Solvent Cementing Procedure. 2.02 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Double Check 1. Double check backflow preventer 2" and smaller: ANSI/ASSE 1015; complete unit of two independently acting check valves, two ball valves, strainer and four test cocks, bronze or iron body with bronze internal parts, 150 psi working pressure, and shall comply with AWWA Standard C506. Acceotable Manufacturers and Models: Cla-Val Co. D-2 (1-1/2" & smaller) Watts 700 Hersey FDC Febco 805Y Wilkins 550 2.03 VALVES A. GATE VALVES Gate valves 3" and less: MSS -SP -70, rated 175 lb. minimum water pressure, brass or bronze construction screw-in bonnet, rising stem, solid wedge disc, threaded or soldered connections. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models: Crane 438, 1334 Nibco T-lll, S-111 ITT Grinnell 3010, 3010SJ B. BALL VALVES 1. Ball valves 2" and less: rated 175 lb. minimum water, oil, air and gas pressure, brass or Landscape Irrigation System KEL00483 02810-7 bronze construction, seat material as recommended by manufacturer for material conveying, lever handle, threaded or soldered connections. Acceptable manufacturers and Models: Crane 9302, 9322 ITT Grinnell 3500, 3500SJ Milwaukee BA -200, BA -250 Watts 13-6000,13-6001 Nibco T-580, & S-580 2. Control (zone) valves shall have glass -filled poly -propylene body cover with stainless steel spring and nylon exhaust fitting. Diaphragm shall be nylon reinforced Buna N molded with heavy Buna N seat to form an integral unit. Valve shall be packless, without sliding seals, and completely serviceable without removing body from pipeline. Design shall be "normally -closed", requiring solenoid to be energized to open valve, thereby causing automatic closure in event of power failure. Solenoid shall comply with Class II National Electric Code and when operating require a maximum of 0.23 amperes, 3.0 watts at 24 volts A.C. Solenoid shall be integrally mounted in valve cover and molded in epoxy to form a -corrosion- and moisture -proof unit with exposed metal components of non -corrosive material. FLOW CONTROL shall be brass with O-ring seal and adjustable from outside the valve for permanent throttling or complete closing of valve. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models: a. Plastic Valves, less Flow Control: Hunter ICV Toro 252 Weathermatic 21000 series Rainbird PGA Series Nelson 7901/7916 b. Plastic Valves, Flow Control: Hunter ICV Toro 252 Weathermatic 21000 series Rainbird 100 DV SS F Nelson 7911/7917 C. Plastic Valves, Contamination Resistant: Hunter ICV - (XXX) - FS Weathermatic 11000CR Rainbird 100 PES B d. Brass Valves: Hunter HBV Toro 216 series Weathermatic 7000 series Landscape Irrigation System 02810-8 KEL00483 Rainbird GB series 4. Automatic Drain Valve: Machined brass with monel screens on both ends, and a five ounce phosphor -bronze spring. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models Buckner 40,000 Champion DV Weathermatic 910 Bronze globe valves with renewable disks, specially designed for lawn sprinkler installation, tee -handle key operated. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models Champion Irrigation Products 100-100 2.04 IRRIGATION SPECIALTIES A. CONTROLLER (ELECTRIC POWER) Free standing mounted weatherproof solid state non - volatile memory automatic sprinkler controller capable of operating 24 VAC electric remote control valves via an integral transformer. Controller shall be equipped with a 365 -day calendar, 24-hour programmable clock, each station capacity shall be adjustable up to 60 minutes each. Changes to station timing and program start time shall be easily made without interfering with the set program. Multi -cycle programming with 4 independent programs, independent day schedule options, seasonal adjustment from 10 to 150% minimum. Controller shall be equipped with a manual start program for activation of a semi-automatic watering cycle. Provide rain sensor override, Controller housing shall be weatherproof aluminum, or industrial grade steel with locking hinged cover. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hunter ICC Weathermatic Mark "400" series Irritrol IBOC series Toro System C L.R. Nelson Smartzone series (8536, 8586) 2.05 SPRINKLERS, SPRAY NOZZLES AND QUICK COUPLERS A. ROTARY GEAR DRIVE SPRINKLERS High impact molded ABS plastic body, sealed gear -drive assembly, full and adjustable arc design. ABS riser, minimum of 4" pop-up, stainless steel retraction spring, riser seal and wiper. Acceptable Manufacturers Weathermatic Toro Hunter Rainbird Landscape Irrigation System KEL00483 1 02810-9 Nelson I. SWING -JOINT RISER PVC construction Type I double joint "O" ring and buttress threads at each swivel joint, inlet/outlet socket threads ASTM D2467/D2464. Acceptable Manufacturers Lasco Dura Spears 5800 series J. POLYETHYLENE "CUT-OFF" RISERS Polyethylene "cut-off' risers; 1/2" x 311, 1/2" x 6" or 3/4" x 3", 3/4" x 6" with 1/2" cut-offs. Acceptable Manufacturers Toro Rainbird K. POLYETHYLENE TUBING Flexible in 20, 50 and 100 -foot coils, with adapters compatible to the tubing. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models Toro "Funny Pipe" Series 850 including fittings Rainbird "Swing Pipe" Series SP -20, including fittings L. SENSORS 1. Rain Sensor: Aluminum or PVC mounting bracket, thermoplastic housing, interrupts circuit to common or pump relay in controller. Adjustable in 1/8" increments, automatic reset, 5 -year warranty, 24 VAC. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models Weathermatic Figure 950 Glen Hilton Mini-Clik II Rainbird Rain -Check Toro 850-74 Rainswitch 2. Freeze Sensor: Aluminum or PVC mounting bracket and housing. Temperature setpoint 39EF with a temperature differential of +IEC, 5 -year warranty, 24 VAC. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models Glen Hilton Mini-Clik Model 401 Landscape Irrigation System 02810-10 KEL00483 2.06 VALVE. BACKFLOW PREVENTER BOXES AND ENCLOSURES A. HEAVY TRAFFIC WEIGHT PRE -CAST CONCRETE VAULT FOR BACKFLOW PREVENTER 4500 PSI precast concrete meter vault (ASTM C-858) with traffic weight concrete cover with cast-iron hinged lid 13" x 24" x 12". Acceptable Manufacturers and Models Brooks Products Series 38 Dalworth Quickset B. CAST-IRON METER VAULT FOR BACKFLOW PREVENTER. Heavy-duty grey cast-iron (ASTM A 48) uniform in quality, free from blow holes, porosity, shrinkage, defects and cracks. Factory coat with bituminous paint, 14" x 22" x 10". Acceptable Manufacturers and Models McKinley Iron Works Type MB 14 C. PLASTIC BACKFLOW PREVENTER BOXES Polyolefin and fibrous compound box with green lid, provide manufactured extension from bottom of pipe as required. (ASTM D638, D790 - D695, D2240) Acceptable Manufacturers Ametek Carson Brooks 2. Structural foam, injection molded box. 15" x 21" x 12" with extensions as required. Acceptable Manufacturers Brooks Products Ametek D. VALVE BOXES Injection molded foam or polyolefin enclosure, 6" diameter for V control valves, 10" diameter for 1-1/2" and above valves. Acceptable Manufacturers Brooks Products Ametek Carson Landscape Irrigation System 02810-I1 KEL00483 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. LOCATION TAPE Plastic, 2" inches wide with a foil liner for location by means of a magnetic locator, such as "Terra -foil" Model D as manufactured by Griffolyn Company; Houston, Texas. Color shall be blue, having lettering which reads "WATER LINE BELOW". To be installed above main line. B. WIRE CONNECTIONS All wire connections to be installed in valve boxes only. Do not bury any splices without a valve box. All wire connections shall be with proper size wire nut and sealed with 3M #DBY-6 Scotchcast kit. All wire splice kits must be UL approved. C. Direct bury, low voltage electrical wire: Type OF 314 single stand copper with 4/64" inch thick PVC insulation, U.L. approved for direct burial. Minimum wire shall be #14GA. D. PEA GRAVEL ASTM D 448, ASTM C 33, and M SHTO M43, minimum diameter of 1/8" and maximum of 3/4", mo more than 3% of pea gravel shall pass through a No. 3 sieve. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Trenching shall be such that pipe is buried below the frost line, or a minimum of 18" below grade; over excavate 28" minimum for rock, and backfill with clean sand bed before laying pipe. Lay pipe to allow for expansion and contraction. Backfill with compacted clean sandy loam, and the remainder, rock -free excavation material and topsoil. Mechanically tamp trench to 90% proctor to 2" above surrounding grade. B. Excavation for backflow preventer shall be 18" minimum to the top of the backflow preventer. Provide 12" of washed pea gravel beneath backflow preventer. Provide brick supports to hold backflow preventer and valve box, rest brick on undisturbed soil. Valve box shall not rest on pipe entering or exiting, provide 3" minimum clearance all around pipe. Valve box shall be level with the surrounding grade. C. Cut pipe clean with pipe cutters, remove burrs or foreign matter from pipe before assembly. Apply colored primer to both the pipe and fitting and then apply compatible PVC cement to the pipe. Home pipe to the fitting and hold in place for a minimum of 45 seconds until pipe has set in place. Replace pipe and fittings which slide during this time, do not re -use fittings. D. Install each electrical globe valve and series of wire splices in a separate turf box. Bury box level with surrounding grade, install valves level and plumb. E. Each branch sprinkler supply system shall be automatically drainable at the low point, with a spring-loaded ball drip valve, designed for lawn sprinkler service, and draining into a 12" excavation containing pea gravel. Dry well and gravel shall be provided by the Contractor. Top of gravel shall be below valve at drain point. F. Provide manual drain valves on main lines, with opening for drain into a 12" pea gravel sump. Landscape Irrigation System 02810-12 KEL00483 Manual drain valves shall be in a valve box with the top flush with finished grade. G. INSTALLATION OF SPRINKLERS AND RISERS 1. Install sprinkler heads flush with the finish grade elevation. On sloping sites, position the heads to match the slope of the finish grade, otherwise set heads plumb. Sprinkler heads shall follow a uniform pattern and individual head placement shall not vary more than 2" from a straight line established by the other heads in either direction. 2. Make piping to individual sprinkler heads to allow adjustments in heights of heads and to permit weights to be applied to the sprinkler without placing stress on the lateral piping. This may be achieved by installing the sprinkler head on a flexible polyethylene riser, or swing joints for QCV (quick couplers) or "funny pipe" with proper fittings. 3. Electrical Wiring a. Install a separate colored wire from the automatic controller to each solenoid valve. Run a common neutral from the controller to each solenoid valve common wire shall be continuous white color. Provide 12" expansion coils in each valve box. b. Make splices with 3M DBY or DBR-6 wire connection kits. Strip end of wire, twist together, twist wire nuts in place and install into sealant container. All splices must be installed in valve boxes. C. Install wiring in trenches along side the piping. Provide a minimum of 12" inches of coverage for wiring installed in separate trenches. Where several wires are installed in close proximity to each other, bundle the wiring and tape securely at 10' foot intervals. Wiring installed under driveways, parking lots or pavements, shall be in PVC sleeves. d. Refer Section 16450 GROUNDING for installation of grounding system. Install a valve box over all ground rods to allow for testing. e. Measure the ground grid resistance with the earth test meggar and install additional ground rods and conductors as required until the resistance to the ground conforms to the requirements of the irrigation control manufacturer 10 ohms or less. 5. Installation of the Irrigation Controller: Hard wire 120 VAC wires into control box. Weather proof all exterior connections. All wiring above ground to be installed in conduit. Mount controller 48" AFG. Mount freeze and rain sensors per manufacturer's recommendations. All 120 VAC wiring shall be installed by a licensed electrical contractor per Div. 16 specifications. 3.03 FLUSHING AND TESTING A. FLUSHING After sprinkler piping is in place, prior to installing heads, flush out lines by running water through the piping to remove debris and extraneous matter. Cemented joints shall be set and cured for 12 hours prior to beginning tests. B. TESTING AND OPERATION Before piping is pressure tested, sufficient backfill shall be installed around the piping to contain the piping under pressure. Tests shall be made in the presence of the Engineer. The entire piping system shall be placed under full pressure and left for 24 hours with pressure gauge attached, then pipe joints shall be examined for leaks. Cut out and remake any defective joint and re -test until the system performs without leaks or loss of pressure Landscape Irrigation System 02810-13 KEL00483 in excess of 5%. 2. Place the system into operation and test each section individually. Examine the operation of spray heads, and during a time when wind velocity is normal, observe the pattern of water produced by the heads. The complete system shall give full and adequate coverage to the area being watered. C. ADJUSTMENTS Check each sprinkler head for proper operation and spray pattern. 2. Adjust pressure on adjustable pressure valves by attaching a pressure gauge assembly to the solenoid valve pressure regulator, and adjust pressure as necessary. 3. Adjust all components so that water runoff and overspray is reduced. 4. The irrigation contractor shall personally notify the Licensed Irrigator for the Engineer, Owners representative and general contractor at least 72 hours in advance of all final testing and inspections. The system will be tested, pressurized and adjusted by the irrigation contractor before calling for final testing and inspection. The system will not be considered complete without certification by the Engineer. At time of final inspection, all hydrostatic tests must have been satisfactorily completed. The entire system shall then be operated in the presence of the engineer's authorized representative, and must operate in a satisfactory manner, with uniform coverage of the areas which are to be sprinkled. 6. All conditions of the contract documents shall be met before calling for final testing. All costs for re -testing due to failure to meet these conditions will be borne by the irrigation contractor including time and materials of the required inspection team. 3.04 MAINTENANCE In addition to the installation of the irrigation system, furnish a period of maintenance for the system equal to the warranty period. Maintenance will consist of the following: A. After the lawn has been established and grass achieved a good stand, return to the site and adjust height of sprinkler heads to conform to grass height. B. Clean and adjust heads two separate times 3 months apart the first year. C. After 11 months, return to site and adjust height of shrubbery risers to conform to plant growth. 3.05 IRRIGATION WATER SCHEDULES Contractor shall furnish an estimated water schedule for the irrigation system for the entire year, each month. The report shall include estimated operating time, days and frequency of watering for each zone, total run time per week and total water usage per week. This report should be based on 1" of precipitation per week, based on information obtained in Toro pamphlet 490-1358 "EVAPOTRANSPIRATION". Landscape Irrigation System 02810-14 KEL00483 3.06 OWNER TRAINING A. Prior to final acceptance, contractor shall provide a minimum of 2 hours or as long as required by the Owner to demonstrate to the Owner the proper operation of all irrigation system equipment and controls provided under this section. B. After completion of the demonstration, submit to Engineer a A Demonstration Certificate of Completion" signed by the Owner and the Contractor indicating that the demonstration of the irrigation system equipment and controls has been completed. END OF SECTION Landscape Irrigation System 02810-15 KEL00483 02830 ORNAMENTAL FENCING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to install ornamental fencing as specified herein. Ornamental fencing shall include vehicle cantilevered sliding gate and electric gate operator. B. The fence shall have a fabric height of 8 ft with three runner rails. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE The manufacturer shall be a company engaged in the manufacturing of ornamental fencing. The contractor shall provide laborers and supervisors who are thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and materials and techniques specified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: 1. Manufacturer's product data sheets and specifications 2. Certification for materials and coatings 3. Shop drawings showing material sizes and weights, fencing heights mounting details, gates and operators 1.04 STANDARDS Applicable standards shall apply. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Products shall be stored at the site on wood platforms raised above the surrounding grade, and covered with weather -resistant covering. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Contractor shall visit the site and determine the site conditions that exists and which must be taken into consideration in the installation of the fencing. Report any condition which could affect the quality of installation. B. Ascertain soil condition at the site and provide drilling equipment suitable for boring to the required depth. 1.07 GUARANTEE Products furnished in this section shall be guaranteed in writing by the manufacturer's standard warranty in addition to Contractor's one year warranty. 2.00 PRODUCTS Ornamental Fence 02830-1 KEL00483 2.01 MATERIAL A. The materials for fence framework (i.e., pickets, rails, and posts) shall be manufactured from coil steel having a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi. The steel shall be galvanized to meet the requirements of ASTM A526 with a minimum zinc coating weight of .90 ounces per square foot (coating Designation G-90), hot -dip process. Galvanized framework shall be subject to a six stage pretreatment/wash (with zinc phosphate), and two coat electrostatic powder paint system. The color shall be specified by the Owner. Coated galvanized framework shall have a salt spray resistance of 3,500 hours using ASTM B117 without loss of adhesion. B. Material for fence pickets shall be 1" square x 16ga. tubing. Rails The cross-sectional shape of the rails shall conform to the manufacturer's design. C. Accessories shall be assembled panels with ornamental accessories attached using industrial drive rivets to prevent removal and vandalism. 2.02 CONCRETE Concrete used for setting posts and other accessories shall obtain a minimum strength at 28 days of 2500 psi and shall otherwise meet the requirements of Section 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE. 2.03 GATES Ornamental cantilever sliding gate as specified in Section 02833. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION Accurate locate borings for setting posts. Intermediate posts shall be spaced at even spacings between terminal or gate posts. 3.02 INSTALLATION Fence posts shall be set at appropriate spacing. Gate posts shall be spaced according to the gate openings specified in the construction plans. The "Earthwork" and "Concrete" sections of this specification shall govern post base placement and material requirements. Ornamental fence panels shall be attached to posts using panel brackets supplied by the bolt -on hardware supplied by manufacturer. 3.03 CLEAN AND ADJUST Adjust all gates to permit free and easy openings without binding. END OF SECTION Ornamental Fence 02830-2 KEL00483 02831 CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to install chain link fencing as specified herein. Chain link fencing shall include personnel and vehicle gates, barbed wire security strands, cantilevered sliding gate and electric gate operators. B. The fence shall have a fabric height of 8 ft with a three- strand barbed wire top, making a total minimum height of 9 ft. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer shall be a company engaged in the manufacturing of chain link fencing and shall be in compliance with the Chain Link Fence Manufacturer's Institute (CLFMI). B. The chain link fencing shall be Standard [Heavy] Industrial grade as determined by the CLFMI, and shall meet the requirements of that grade, according to the CLFMI "PRODUCT MANUAL". 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: 1. Manufacturer's product data sheets and specifications 2. Certification for materials and coatings 3. Shop drawings showing material sizes and weights, fencing heights mounting details, gates and operators 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following references and standards shall apply as if written herein in their entirety: A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coatings on Products, Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strip ASTM A491 Aluminum -Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric ASTM A570 Hot Rolled Sheet and Strip, Structural Quality ASTM A585 Aluminum -Coated Steel Barbed Wire ASTM A817 Standard Specifications For Metallic -Coated Steel Wire For Chain Link Fence Fabric ASTM F567 Installation of Chain Link Fence ASTM F900 Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates ASTM F1083 Pipe, Steel, Hot -Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures ASTM F1184 Industrial and Commercial Horizontal Slide Gates ASTM F688 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric Chain Link Fence and Gates 02831-1 KEL00483 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Products shall be stored at the site on wood platforms raised above the surrounding grade, and covered with weather -resistant covering. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Contractor shall visit the site and determine the site conditions that exists and which must be taken into consideration in the installation of the fencing. Report any condition which could affect the quality of installation. B. Ascertain soil condition at the site and provide drilling equipment suitable for boring to the required depth. 1.07 GUARANTEE Products furnished in this section shall be guaranteed in writing by the manufacturer's standard warranty in addition to Contractor's one year warranty. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. CHAIN LINK FABRIC: 8 foot height, 9 gauge galvanized steel wire fabric, Class I, having a coating weight of 1.2 oz per cubic feet, and a 2" mesh. Top edge of mesh shall have selvage edge and bottom of fabric shall be twisted. B. TOP RAIL: 1.66" O.D. galvanized pipe, weighing not less than 2.27 pounds per foot, with outside sleeve -type couplings at least 7" long. C. LINE POSTS: Galvanized 2" H -column, weighing not less than 2.72 pounds per foot, or . 2.375" O.D. schedule 40 pipe, weighting not less than 3.65 lbs/ft. Spacing not to exceed 10'- 0". Fabric shall be tied to columns with 6 gauge galvanized clips on 14" centers and to pipe with 11 ga galvanized steel tie wire. D. TERMINAL POSTS: For fences having a fabric height under 6-0", the ends and corners pull posts shall be 2.375" O.D. galvanized pipe, weighing 3.65 lbs/sf. For fence fabric over 6' in height, the posts shall be 2.875" O.d. diameter, weighing 5.79 lbs /ft. Posts shall be equipped with 1/4" x 3/4" tension bars, 121 gauge x I" wide tension bands, and 3/8" carriage bolts, bands on approximately 14" centers. E. GATE POSTS: Posts for gates up to 6-0" wide shall be 2.875" O.D. Schedule 40 galvanized pipe, weighing not less than 5.79 lbs/ft. Posts for gate 6'-0" to 13'-0" shall be 4" O.D. weighing not less than 9.10 lbs/ft. Posts for gates over 13'-0" shall be 6.625" O.D. weighing not less than 18.97 lbs/lf. F. BOTTOM TENSION WIRE: No. 7 galvanized or aluminum -coating spring coil or tension wire which shall hold fabric in proper alignment and be resilient so as to restore alignment when fabric is deflected. Chain Link Fence and Gates 02831-2 K-EL00483 G. BARBED WIRE: 12 1/2 gage, twisted zinc coated barbed wire with 14 gauge 4 point barbs on 5" spacing, conforming to ASTM A121, Class 2. [ Aluminum coated barbed wire, conforming to ASTM A585, Type I.] H. BARBED WIRE SUPPORT ARMS: Heavy weight pressed steel arms having an incline of 45 degrees. the arms shall have holes which allow passage of top rail and slots to receive barbed wire at proper spacings. Arms shall be capable of a downward pull at the outside of the arm of 250 pounds. I. WIRE TIES: 11 gauge galvanized steel [ 9 gage aluminum wire ties]. J. POST TOPS: Pressed steel or malleable iron, galvanized. Top posts shall be designed to permit passage of the top rail. K. STRETCHER BARS: One piece galvanized steel having a minimum size of 1/4" x 3/4". L. STRETCHER BAR BANDS: Galvanized steel [or aluminum alloy conforming to ASTM F626]. Tension bars shall be formed from flat or beveled steel and shall have a minimum thickness after galvanizing of 0.078 inch by 3/4 inch for posts 4" O.D. or less, and 0.1.8 inch by 7/8 inch for posts larger than 4" O.D. M. BOLTS: 5/16" x 1-1/4" galvanized steel carriage bolts with nuts, or other appropriate fasteners according to the application. N. STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL: Rolled steel shapes conforming to ASTM A36 and shall be galvanized according to ASTM A123. O. GATE FRAMES: Gates having a height under 6'-0" and width under 8'-0" shall be fabricated of 1.66 O.D. pipe, weighing not less than 1.8061bs/ft. Gates having a height over 6'-0" or a width exceeding 8'-0" shall be fabricated of 1.90 O.D. pipe, weighing not less than 2.72 lbs/ft. 2.02 CONCRETE Concrete used for setting posts and other accessories shall obtain a minimum strength at 28 days of 2500 psi and shall otherwise meet the requirements of Section 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE. 2.03 GATE A. Provide vehicle gate as indicated on the drawings. Personnel gates shall have two hinges and a gate latch having a provision for pad -locks. Vehicle gates shall be cantilever sliding, electrically operated type. If fences are specified to have barbed security wire, the gates shall also have barbed security wiring. Sliding gates shall be as specified in Section 02832 and conform to ASTM F 1184. B. Personnel gates shall be fabricated of galvanized pipe using cast steel framing elbows and corrosive resistant fasteners up to a width of 4'-6". Larger swinging gates shall be fabricated using all welded frames. Chain Link Fence and Gates 02831-3 KEL00483 C. When barbed wire top is specified, the end members of the gate frames shall be extended 1' above the top horizontal member to which 3 strands of barbed wire, uniformly spaced, shall be attached by use of bands, clips or hook bolts. D. Gate hinges shall be of adequate strength with large bearing surfaces for clamping in position. The hinges shall not twist or turn under the action of the gate. E. Gate latches, stops and keepers shall be provided for all gates. Latches shall have a plunger - bar arranged to engage the center stop, except that for single gates of openings less than 10' wide a forked latch may be provided. Latches shall be arranged for locking. Center stops shall consist of a device arranged to be set in concrete and to engage a plunger bar of the latch of double gates. F. Hinged gate posts shall be galvanized steel pipe, as follows: �t � ,C'rAT�FQST SAES � Gate leaf Width Post Size 6 ft or less 2-1/2" square tubing 6 ft to 12 ft 4" O.D. Schedule 40 12 ft to 19 ft 6-5/8" O.D. Schedule 40 19 ft to 23 ft 8-5/8" O.D. Schedule 40 23 ft to 30 ft 10-3/4" O.D. Schedule 40 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION Accurate locate borings for setting posts. Intermediate posts shall be spaced at even spacings between terminal or gate posts. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. The gates shall be installed by skilled and experienced fence erectors and on level grades. Set line posts in concrete piers having a minimum size of 10" in diameter and 36" deep. Gate posts shall be set in concrete a minimum of 12" in diameter and 48" deep. The complete fence shall discourage tampering with connections and ends shall be secured to prevent easy removal or disconnecting. B. Post braces shall be provided for each gate, corner, pull, and end post for use when top rail is omitted or with fabric 6 feet or more in height, and shall consist of a round tubular brace extending to each adjacent line post at approximately mid -height of the fabric, and a truss consisting of a rod not less than 5/16" nominal diameter from the line post back to the gate, corner, pull, or end post, with a turnbuckle or other equivalent provision for adjustment. Truss rods may be eliminated in any line of fence where there is a continuous center rail. Chain Link Fence and Gates 02831-4 KEL00483 C. Post tops shall consist of combinations tops with barbed wire supporting arms. Top shall be provided with a hole suitable for the through passage of the top rail. The post tops shall fit over the outside of posts and shall exclude moisture from posts. D. Top rails shall be in lengths not less than 18 feet, and shall be fitted with couplings or swedged for connecting the lengths into a continuance run. The couplings shall be not less than 6 inches long, with .070 minimum wall thickness, and shall allow for expansion and contraction of the rail. Suitable ties or clips shall be provided in sufficient number for attaching the fabric securely to the top rail at intervals not exceeding 24". E. Ties or clips shall be provided for attaching the fabric to all line posts at intervals not exceeding 15"; and not exceeding 24" when attaching fabric to top rail or tension wire. F. Provide one tension bar for each end and gate post, and two for each corner and pull post. Bands or clips of galvanized steel shall be provided in for attaching the fabric and stretcher bars to all terminal posts not exceeding 15". G. Install PVC coated wire fabric when applicable in accordance with the CLFMI's recommendations. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Gate posts shall be accurately located to within 2". B. Intermediate posts shall not deviate from perfect alignment in a run by more than 1-1/2". C. Spacings between intermediate posts between corner and terminal post shall not exceed 3". 3.04 CLEAN AND ADJUST Adjust all gates to permit free and easy openings without binding. END OF SECTION Chain Link Fence and Gates 02831-5 KEL00483 02832 CHAIN LINK CANTILEVER SLIDING GATE 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Chain link cantilever sliding gates with enclosed aluminum track and hardware with electric operator. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE The manufacturer shall be a company engaged in the manufacturing of cantilever sliding gates. Contractor shall be a company with experience in the furnishing and installation of electrically operated gates. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: 1. Manufacturer's product data sheets and specifications 2. Certification for materials and coatings 3. Shop drawings showing material sizes and weights, fencing heights mounting details, gates and operators. 1.04 STANDARDS Applicable standards shall apply. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Products shall be stored at the site on wood platforms raised above the surrounding grade, and covered with weather -resistant covering. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Contractor shall visit the site and determine the site conditions that exists and which must be taken into consideration in the installation of the fencing. Report any condition which could affect the quality of installation. B. Ascertain soil condition at the site and provide drilling equipment suitable for boring to the required depth. 1.07 GUARANTEE Provide manufacturer's standard limited warranty covering cantilever slide gate and truck assembly against failure resulting from normal use for period of 5 years from date of purchase. Failure is defined as any defect in manufacturing that prevents the gate from operating in a normal manner 2.00 PRODUCTS Chain Link Cantilever Sliding Gate 02832-1 KEM0483 2.01 MATERIAL A. GATE FRAMES: Fabricate chain link cantilever slide gates in accordance with ASTM F 1184, Type II, Class 2, using 2 inch (50 mm) square aluminum members, ASTM B 221, alloy and temper 6063-T6, weighing 0.94 lb/ft (1.39 kg/m). Weld members together forming rigid one-piece frame integral with top track.(no substitution) Provide 2 truck assemblies for each gate leaf, except as indicated for gates larger than 30' (9144 mm).Frame sizes over 27' (8230 mm) in length shall be shipped in 2 parts and field spliced with special attachments provided by the manufacturer, Gate Leaf Sizes 6 ft (1829 mm) to 10 ft (3048 mm) 11 ft (3353 mm) to 14 ft (4267 mm) 15 ft (4572 mm) to 22 ft (6706 mm) Cantilever Support (Overhang) 6'-6" (1981 mm) 7'-6" (2286 mm) 10'-0" (3048 mm) For gate leaf size 23' (7010 mm) to 30' (9144 mm), weld an additional 2" (50 mm) square lateral support rail adjacent to top horizontal rail. Bottom rail shall consist of 2" x 4" (50 mm x 100 mm) aluminum member weighing 1.71 lb/ft (2.54 km) Gate Leaf Sizes 23 ft (70 10 mm) to 30 ft (9144 mm) Cantilever Support (Overhang) 12'-0" (3657 mm) B. GATE FRAME FINISH: Natural Aluminum or PVC Vinyl Coated thermally fused (except track) C. CHAIN LINK FILLER FINISH: Aluminized ASTM A 491 or PVC Thermally Fused ASTM Class - 2b in the color selected by the owner. D. BRACING: Provide diagonal adjustable length truss rods of 3/8" (9.5 mm) galvanized steel, in each panel of gate frames E. TOP TRACK/RAIL: Enclosed combination one-piece track and rail, aluminum extrusion with weight of 3.72 lb/ft (5.54 kg/m). Track to withstand reaction load of 2,000# (907.2 kg.) F. TRUCK ASSEMBLY: Swivel type, zinc die cast, with 4 sealed lubricant ballbearing rollers, 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter by 9/16" (14 mm) in width, and 2 side rolling wheels to ensure truck alignment in track. (no substitution) Mount trucks on post brackets using 7/8" (22 mm) diameter ball bolts with 1/2" (13 mm) shank. Truck assembly to withstand same reaction load as track, 2,000 # (907.2 kg). G. GATE HANGERS, LATCHES, BRACKETS, GUIDE ASSEMBLIES, AND STOPS: Malleable iron or steel, galvanized after fabrication. H. BOTTOM GUIDE WHEEL ASSEMBLIES: Each assembly shall consist of two, 3" (75 mm) diameter rubber wheels, straddling bottom horizontal gate rail, allowing adjustment to maintain gate frame plumb and in proper alignment. Attach one assembly to each guide post. I. GATE POSTS: For gates under 31'-0" (9449 mm): galvanized steel 4" (101.6 mm) OD schedule Chain Link Cantilever Sliding Gate 02832-2 KEL00483 40 pipe, ASTM F 1083, weighing 9.1 lb/ft (13.6 kg/m). Provide 1 latch post and 2 support posts for single slide gates and 4 support posts for double slide gates. Finish to match fence. 2.02 CONCRETE Concrete used for setting posts and other accessories shall obtain a minimum strength at 28 days of 3000 psi and shall otherwise meet the requirements of Section 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 CHAIN LINK CANTILEVER SLIDE GATE FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Install gate posts in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Concrete set gate posts: Drill holes in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. Holes shall have diameter 4 times greater than outside dimension of post, and depths approximately 6" (152 mm) inches deeper than post bottom. Excavate deeper as required for adequate support in soft and loose soils, and for posts with heavy lateral loads. Set post bottom 36" (914 mm) below surface when infirm, undisturbed soil. Place concrete around posts in a continuous pour, tamp for consolidation. Trowel finish around post and slope to direct water away from posts. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and maintain in position during placement and finishing operations. C. Install gates plumb, lever, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach hardware by means which will prevent unauthorized removal. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. Install electric gate operator. 3.02 CLEAN AND ADJUST Adjust all gates to permit free and easy openings without binding. END OF SECTION Chain Link Cantilever Sliding Gate 02832-3 KEL00483 02833 ORNAMENTAL CANTILEVERED SLIDING GATE 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Ornamental cantilever sliding gates with enclosed track and hardware with electric operator. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE The manufacturer shall be a company engaged in the manufacturing of cantilever sliding gates. Contractor shall be a company with experience in the furnishing and installation of electrically operated gates. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: 1. Manufacturer's product data sheets and specifications 2. Certification for materials and coatings 3. Shop drawings showing material sizes and weights, fencing heights mounting details, gates and operators. 1.04 STANDARDS Applicable standards shall apply. 1.05 GUARANTEE Provide manufacturer's standard limited warranty covering cantilever slide gate and truck assembly against failure resulting from normal use for period of 5 years from date of purchase. Failure is defined as any defect in manufacturing that prevents the gate from operating in a normal manner END OF SECTION Ornamental Cantilever Sliding Gate 02833-1 KEL00483 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 'A-MIRK4113MI R 1M" 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to place and mix concrete, consisting of Portland Cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, admixtures, and water in the proper proportions as specified hereinafter. Reinforced concrete shall have a minimum strength of 3000 psi at 28 days; concrete for blocking, cradle, or encasement shall have a minimum strength of 2000 psi at 28 days. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. DESIGN CRITERIA; CONCRETE PROPORTIONS AND CONSISTENCY 1. Concrete shall be proportioned to give the necessary workability and strength and shall conform to the following governing requirements: 2. In no case shall the amount of coarse material be such as to produce harshness in placing and honeycombing in the structure forms are removed. The proportions of fine and coarse aggregate shall be such that the requirements of the following table are complied with: Maximum Size of Coarse Min. Aggregate Aggregate on Basis of Dry and Rodded Volumes Min. 28 Day Cement Max. Size of Max. Water Slum p 2.0 Compressive Bags Per Coarse Gals. Per Inches Use Strength -psi Aggregate Bag Cu. Yd. 3,000 5.5 1'/2" 5.50 4-6 General 2,000 4.0 1'/z" 7.0 4 Blocking etc. 2. In no case shall the amount of coarse material be such as to produce harshness in placing and honeycombing in the structure forms are removed. The proportions of fine and coarse aggregate shall be such that the requirements of the following table are complied with: Maximum Size of Coarse Ratio of Coarse Aggregate to Fine Aggregate Aggregate on Basis of Dry and Rodded Volumes Minimum Maximum 1" and Over 1.0 2.0 B. FACTORY TESTING: The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of the concrete. A trial mix shall be designed by an independent testing laboratory, retained by the Contractor and approved by the Owner. The testing laboratory shall submit verification that the materials and proportions of the trial mix design meets the requirement of the specifications. In lieu of trial mix design, Contractor may submit a mix design used successfully in previous Concrete 03305-1 KEL00483 similar work, for similar materials for approval by Engineer. The Contractor shall not make changes in materials, either gradation, source, or brand, or proportions of the mixture after having been approved, except by specific approval of the Engineer. C. OWNER TESTING: It is the responsibility of the Contractor to achieve and maintain the quality of concrete required by this section of the specifications. However, the Owner may, at his option and at his expense, secure the services of an independent testing laboratory to verify the quality of the concrete. The Owner shall have the right to require additional testing, strengthening, or replacement of concrete which has failed to meet the minimum requirements of this section of the specifications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.04 STANDARDS [NOT USED] 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE [NOT USED] 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.07 OPTIONS [NOT USED] 1.08 GUARANTEES [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. CEMENT: Portland Cement conforming to the Specifications and tests for Type I Portland Cement of the American Society for Testing Materials, Designation C-150. B. FINE AGGREGATE: Fine aggregate consisting of natural, washed and screened sand having clean, hard, strong, durable, uncoated grains complying with the requirements for ASTM C-33. The sand shall generally be of such size that all will pass a 3/8" sieve, at least 95% pass a 1/4" screen and at least 80% pass a No. 8 sieve. Aggregate shall not contain strong alkali, or organic material which gives a color darker than the standard color when tested in accordance with ASTM Specification Designation C-40. C. COARSE AGGREGATE: Evenly graded and consisting of sound, washed and screened gravel, free of clay balls, or clean, crushed stone, having clean, hard, strong, durable, uncoated particles free from dust, clay balls, injurious amounts of soft, friable, thin, elongated, or laminated pieces, alkali, organic, or other deleterious matter. Coarse aggregates shall comply with ASTM C-33, Size 467. D. REINFORCING STEEL: New billet steel, deformed bars, conforming to ASTM A-615, Grade 60. E. ADMIXTURES: Concrete of 3000 psi or stronger shall contain air -entraining admixtures and when job conditions require, water reducing and set controlling admixtures may be used. Only admixtures specified herein may be used. Concrete 03305-2 KEL00483 1. AIR -ENTRAINING ADMIXTURE: Comply with ASTM C-260. The total average air content shall be in accordance with recommendations ACI 211.1; 4.5% + 1.0% for 1-1/2" maximum size aggregate. 2. WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURE: Comply with ASTM C-494, Types A and D only. Accurately measure and add to the mix in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. 3. SET RETARDING ADMIXTURES: Retarders may be used if approved by the Engineer. Comply with ASTM C-494, Types B and D only. Accurately measure and add to the mix in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. F. WATER: Water for concrete shall be clean and free from oil, acid, alkali, organic matter or other harmful impurities. Water which is suitable for drinking or for ordinary household use will be acceptable for concrete. Where available, water shall be obtained from mains of a waterworks system. G. EXPANSION JOINTS: Bituminous type preformed expansion joint filler complying with ASTM D-994, in the thickness specified. H. EXPANSION JOINT SEALANT: Two (2) component non -sag polysulfide base elastometric sealing compound conforming to Fed. Spec. TT -S -00227E, Type II., Class B. 2.02 MIXES A. In the determination of the amount of water required for mix, consideration shall be given to the moisture content of the aggregate. The net amount of water in the mix will be the amount added at the mixer; plus the free water in the aggregate; and minus the absorption of the aggregate, based on a 30 minute absorption period. No water allowance shall be made for evaporation after batching. B. The methods of measurement of materials shall be such that the proportions of water to cement can be closely controlled during the progress of the work and easily checked at any time by the Engineer or his representative. To avoid unnecessary or haphazard changes in consistency, the aggregate shall be obtained from sources which will insure a uniform quality and grading during any single day's operation and they shall be delivered to the work and handled in such a manner that the variation in moisture content will not interfere with the steady production of concrete of reasonable degree of uniformity. Sources of supply shall be approved by the Owner's representative. C. All material shall be separately and accurately measured. Measurement may be made by weight or by volume, as may be elected by the Contractor; however, all equipment for measurement of materials shall be subject to approval by the Owner's representative. D. The proportions of the mix shall be such as to produce concrete that can be puddled readily into the corners and angles of the forms and around the reinforcing without excessive spading or vibrating, and without segregation or undue accumulation of water or laitance on the surface. 2.03 FABRICATIONS [NOT USED] Concrete 03305-3 KEL00483 2.04 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION; ALUMINUM AND STEEL ITEMS A. Where aluminum anchors, aluminum shapes, or aluminum electrical conduits are embedded in concrete, contact surfaces shall be painted with zinc chromate primer. The paint shall be allowed to thoroughly dry before the aluminum is placed in contact with the concrete. B. Aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with concrete, wood, or masonry construction, except where the aluminum is to be embedded in concrete, shall be given a heavy coat of an alkali -resistant paint before installation. The paint shall be -applied as it is received from the Manufacturer without the addition of any thinner. C. Steel or other ferrous metal to be mounted on or placed in contact with dry/cured concrete such as piping, access manholes, electrical switchgear, etc., shall have contact surfaces coated with bituminous paint in accordance with previous paragraph. 3.02 INSTALLATION; PLACING CONCRETE A. Remove mill scale before placing reinforcing steel and keep bars clean until concrete is placed. Place the steel in the forms as specified and maintain in place. B. Give the Owner's representative sufficient advance notice before starting to place concrete in any unit of the structure to permit inspection of the forms, the reinforcing steel placement, and preparation for pouring. Unless authorized by the Owner's representative, no concrete shall be placed in any unit prior to the completion of the formwork and the placement of the reinforcement for that unit. C. The sequence of placing concrete shall be as provided on the Plans or in the Specifications. Conduct the operation of depositing and compacting the concrete so as to form a compact, dense, impervious mass of uniform texture, which will show smooth faces on surfaces. Regulate the placing so that the pressures caused by the plastic concrete shall not exceed the loads used in the design of forms. 3.03 CURING CONCRETE A. Careful attention shall be given by the Contractor to the proper curing of the concrete. The curing methods shall use sheet materials conforming to ASTM C-171 or membrane curing compound conforming to ASTM C-309. Membrane curing is not permitted on surfaces to be rubbed or on surfaces on which additional concrete, mortar or terrazzo is to be applied. B. Unless the curing method is otherwise noted or specified, the curing method shall be selected by the Contractor and submitted to the Owner's representative for approval. Concrete 03305-4 KEL00483 3.04 BLOCKING OF PIPE FITTINGS A. Concrete blocking shall be placed at bends, tees, wyes, crosses, plugs, etc. The concrete blocking shall be placed so as to rest against firm undisturbed trench walls. The supporting area for each block shall be sufficient to withstand the thrusts, shall rest on a firm, undisturbed earth. B. The concrete blocking shall be placed against undisturbed trench walls, with a minimum of 18" between trench wall and pipe. Blocking shall extend a minimum of 0.75 x pipe diameter below and above the centerline of pipe and shall not extend beyond any joints. C. If requested by the Owner's representative, the ends of the thrust blocks shall be contained in wood or metal forms. Where upward thrusts are to be representative. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.06 CLEAN AND ADJUST [NOT USED] 3.07 SCHEDULES; FINISHING Exterior exposed surfaces shall be given finish as scheduled herein: END OF SECTION Concrete 03305-5 KEL00483 DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09905 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to apply protective coatings to material and equipment as specified herein, including the preparation of surfaces prior to application of coatings. B. Protective coatings are special coatings to be used at specific locations or on specific surfaces as indicated herein. Every surface of every description, except those which are specifically noted not to receive a coating finish, shall be covered by a paint system as specified in this section. C. Protective coatings shall be applied to the following surfaces: 1. Metal surfaces located outside of buildings and other structures anywhere on the project site. 2. New piping. 3. For concrete or metal surfaces not covered by this specification section, refer to Section 03305, CONCRETE and 13413 COMPOSITE ELEVATED TANK. 4. Interior and exterior of welded steel tank and divider wall. D. Special applications for painting include the following: 1. Aluminum surfaces in contact with or embedded in concrete shall be treated in accordance with Section 03305, CONCRETE. 2. Buried pipe and valves shall receive a shop -applied protective coating as described in the appropriate section of the specifications. E. Contain, treat, and dispose of any dust, spray, drainage, or spillage resulting from coating operations. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to determine if the materials to be disposed of are classified as hazardous waste. Disposed of waste, hazardous or otherwise, shall be in accordance with applicable regulations. The Contractor shall be aware of and understand the regulations concerning disposal of waste generated by coating operations. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Products which meet the specifications manufactured by the following companies will be acceptable: 1. Tnemec 2. Valspar 3. Carboline 4. Kop-Coat Protective Coatings 09905-1 KEL00483 5. Ameron B. APPLICATOR'S QUALIFICATIONS Applicators must be qualified in this line of work and have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the application of the protective coatings of the types specified herein. Submit a list of recent projects and names of references for those projects. C. PRODUCT QUALITY 1. Use only the coating specified in this section. Use only those thinners and solvents recommended by the manufacturer, only in the amounts necessary to produce the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, and in amounts not exceeding the maximum quantities stated in the manufacturer's literature. 2. The coating material shall not show excessive settling in a freshly opened full can and shall be easily redispersed with a paddle to a smooth, homogeneous state. It shall show no curdling, livering, caking, or color separation and shall be free of lumps or skim surfaces. D. TESTING Protective coatings shall be applied under quality control procedures, which includes inspection of surface preparation and for each coat. Do not proceed with the next step until the Engineer has approved the previous step. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for testing for this section, at no further cost to the Owner. The Engineer shall also make such tests if it is considered necessary. Cooperate with the Engineer, providing equipment, scaffolds, and other equipment as requested by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide training in the use of testing equipment prior to commencing with painting operations. E. TESTING EQUIPMENT Furnish new testing apparatus necessary for testing coatings and for permanent use of the owner. The following testing equipment will remain property of the owner following completion of the project: 1. One (1) set of U.S. Department of Commerce thickness calibration plates, certified by the National Bureau of Standards, to test dry film thickness. 2. Five (5) wet -film thickness gauges. 3. One (1) dry film thickness gauge, Mikrotest III, 0 - 40 mils with calibration standard approved by the Bureau of Standards. 4. One (1) Bacharach Sling Psychrometer, Model 12-7011. 5. Tinker and Rasor Model M-1 Holiday Detector and recommended wetting agent. Protective Coatings 09905-2 KEL00483 F. TESTING REPORTS Submit an inspection report for each coating applied on the project. The testing report shall be completed on a form furnished by the Engineer and shall bear the signature of the Contractor and the Owner's Field Representative. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: Manufacturer's product data sheet for each paint type, including surface preparation requirements, recommended spreading rates, application procedures, recommended primers, and other instructions. 2. Color charts of each paint type. 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: ANSI American National Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018 NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers, P.O. Box 1499, Houston, TX 77001 OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor, Washington D.C. SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council, 4400 Fifth Avenue, Pittsburgh, PA 15213 In the event of a conflict between the published standards, codes, and this specification, the more stringent requirement shall govern. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver coating products to the site in original unopened containers, with manufacturer's label and batch number attached. Do not apply products until the Owner's field representative has approved the product for use. B. Use one (1) location at each site for the storage of coating products. Protect the floor from spills and other damage. Protect the products from extreme heat or cold. Keep containers covered. Keep the storage rooms clean of trash and debris. Dispose of oily or used rags daily. Under no circumstances shall they be allowed to accumulate. Take precautions to prevent fires. The storage of flammable liquids shall comply with the City, State, or other fire codes. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. It is desired that the paint products be furnished by as few manufacturers as possible to meet the requirements of the specifications. Coating products of the same type shall be supplied by the same manufacturer. Do not mix products from different sources. Apply finish coats in the field. The Owner shall select colors. B. Primers factory -applied to equipment shall be those specified. Where possible, notify manufacturers which shop prime coats will be required in order to be compatible with field - Protective Coatings 09905-3 KEL00483 applied finish coats. Where equipment is purchased which has the manufacturer's standard primer or a factory finish which is other than as specified in this section, remove the factory - applied paint system or apply passivators or other special coatings as required to make the surface compatible with the finish coat specified. C. Do not apply any coating to machinery, piping, or other surfaces before testing has been completed and systems approved. Any damage to coatings resulting from subsequent corrective procedures shall be stripped back to bare metal and repainted with the appropriate paint system as directed by the Engineer. D. Surfaces which will be inaccessible after installation shall be coated prior to installation, or shall be coated and approved in stages as the work is installed. E. The Engineer shall approve surfaces for application of coatings at each stage. Any material that is coated prior to the Engineer's approval shall be stripped back to bear metal and repainted. F. At least one (1) week shall be allowed for drying of finished surfaces before any machinery can be placed into service. G. Do not apply coating over nameplates or other identification plaques. Mask such plates and keep protected. Remove tape and polish nameplates after painting is complete. H. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 1. Do not apply coatings under conditions that are unsuitable for the production of good results. Remove trash and debris from enclosed buildings and thoroughly clean prior to application of coatings. Do not begin application of coatings in areas where other trades are working, or where construction activities result in airborne dust or other debris. Do not apply coatings in conditions which do not conform to the recommendations of the coatings manufacturer. 2. Coatings shall only be applied when conditions fall within the parameters listed in the manufacturer's printed data. Do not apply any coatings when weather conditions are unfavorable. In the event that climatic conditions are not conducive for best results, postpone application of coatings until conditions conform to the manufacturer's recommendations and the provisions of this specification. Do not apply coatings to a wet or damp surface in wet or damp weather conditions, or when there is dust in the air. Surfaces exposed to direct sunlight shall be shaded by awnings or other protective devices while coatings are being applied. When necessary, provide temporary heating devices of a type that produces no fumes which will discolor the paint system. 4. Apply coatings to surfaces which will be under water constantly or which periodically will be under water during operation of the project in accordance with requirements for submerged structures to a point P-0" above the maximum water level. Mask the line of demarcation between the coating systems to a straight level line. Protective Coatings 09905-4 KEL00483 I. WORKING CONDITIONS 1. Provide adequate lighting at any location that coatings are being applied or testing is performed. Illumination shall be of sufficient intensity to achieve good results. Provide explosion -proof lighting when required. 2. Temporary ladders and scaffolds shall conform to applicable safety requirements. Erect temporary scaffolds where needed to cover large areas. Provide ladders or scaffolding during testing procedures. 1.07 OPTIONS [Not Used] 1.08 GUARANTEES A. Protective coating shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the date of the Owner's acceptance of the project. B. A warranty inspection shall be conducted in the eleventh month following completion of painting and coatings. Any defective work discovered at this date shall be corrected by the Contractor in accordance with the specifications at no additional cost to the Owner. Other corrective measures may be required during the one (1) year warranty period. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS Materials shall be the manufacturer's top of line quality products, as listed herein. Products used on this project shall be as indicated below. Primers and finish coats shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer. Coatings shall be from the same batch. Products shall be as follows: TYPE A ALKYD -PHENOLIC UNIVERSAL PRIMER Tnemec Series 3711-77 "H.S. Chem -Prime" Valspar "Chromox Primer" V13 -R-28 Carboline "Rustbond" 8HB Kop-Coat #622LCF Ameron "Amercoat" 5105 TYPE B EPDXY-POLYAMIDE PRIMER Tnemec Series 20 Valspar Series 89 Carboline 893 Kop-Coat "Hi -Gard Epoxy" Ameron "Amercoat" 182 Protective Coatings 09905-5 KEL00483 TYPE C ALKYD ENAMEL Tnemec Series 23 "Enduratone" Valspar V20 Series Carboline DTM58 Kop-Coat "Hi -Gard Epoxy" Ameron "Amercoat" 5401 -HS TYPE D EPDXY-POLYAMIDE COATINGS Tnemec Series 20 Valspar 89 Series Carboline 890 Kop-Coat "Hi -Gard Epoxy" Ameron "Amercoat" 395 TYPE E EPDXY-POLYAMIDE COATINGS FOR POTABLE WATER Tnemec Series 20 "Pots -Pox " Valspar "Hi Build Epoxy" Series V78PR Carboline 891 Kop-Coat "Hi -Gard" Epoxy Ameron "Amercoat" 395 TYPE F EPDXY-POLYAMIDE COATINGS FOR WALKING SURFACES Tnemec Series 66 "H.B. Epoxline" Valspar 89 Series "Hi Build Epoxy" Carboline 890 Kop-Coat "Hi Gard Non -Skid" Ameron "Amerlock" 400 "Non-skid" TYPE G HIGH BUILD ACRYLIC POLYURETHANE ENAMEL Tnemec Series 73, "Endura -Shield III" Valspar V40 Series, "V -Thane Hi -Solid" Carboline 133HB Ameron "Amershield" TYPE H ALIPHATIC POLYURETHANE ENAMEL Tnemec Series 75 "Endura -Shield" Valspar 40 Series Carboline 134 HS Kop-Coat 134 HS Ameron "Amercoat" 450H Protective Coatings 09905-6 KEL00483 TYPE I MODIFIED ACRYLIC COATINGS Tnemec Series 29 "Tneme-Tuferyl" Valspar 19 Series "Zip -Dry" Ameron "Amercoat" 234 Carboline 3359 Kop-Coat 620 TYPE J SILICONE ALUMINUM COATINGS FOR HIGH TEMPERATURE Tnemec Series 39 Valspar 37 Series Ameron "Amercoat" 878 Carboline 4674 TYPE K EPDXY CONCRETE COATING Kop-Coat Bitumastic 300M Tnemec Series 46H-413 "Hi -Build Tneme-Tar" 2.02 MIXES [Not Used] 2.03 FABRICATIONS [Not Used] 2.04 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS [Not Used] 2.05 COLOR SELECTION A. The color chart shall include the complete available range of colors, including tints and shades. The Owner shall select the colors. B. Use a multi -color system coatings for any surface receiving more than one (1) coat. Each coat shall be tinted differently from the preceding coat in a manner that will allow the various coats to be easily distinguished. Colors shall generally be from light to dark shades, but the Contractor may have the option to select tint shades to insure coats will receive adequate coverage without bleeding or otherwise showing through the preceding coat. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Thoroughly clean surfaces before applying coating. Where field cleaning is required, apply one (1) coat of shop primer to the surface to protect the surface until field cleaning is performed. B. Each surface shall have a primer, except in the instance where field cleaning is required and the manufacturer's printed literature states that the coating may be applied without a primer and approval of the Engineer is obtained. Shop -applied primer shall be thoroughly cleaned of oil, grease, and other contaminants, and nicks or other defects shall be spot -primed before subsequent coats are applied. C. Thoroughly clean surfaces that are blasted of abrasive material, and apply coating to surfaces Protective Coatings 09905-7 KEL00483 before any corrosion occurs on the surface. Apply coatings no later than the same day they are blasted. In the event that surfaces are not coated immediately after cleaning, and rust reforms on the blasted surfaces, re -blast surfaces. Remove abrasives used in the blasting operations, rust, scale, and other foreign materials accumulating from the cleaning operations from the site. Sweep abrasive blasted surfaces clean after blasting is complete. D. The adequacy of the preparation of surfaces shall be determined by comparing the surface with SSPC-Vis-1 "Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces". Prepare surfaces in accordance with the following requirements: TYPE SP 1 NEAR WHITE BLASTING: Surfaces shall receive one (1) coat of shop primer to protect the surfaces until time for final preparation and coating at the site. Metal surfaces shall be cleaned to a "Near -white" condition by abrasive blasting in accordance with SSPC SP 10 "Near -White Blast Cleaning", using 16 to 35 mesh grit. Take precautions to prevent gouging and channeling of metal. The resulting surface profile shall be in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations. TYPE SP1A: Submerged equipment that contains mechanical parts that would be damaged by field cleaning shall be factory -blasted to a "Near White" condition by abrasive blasting and primed as described for Type SP1. TYPE SP2 COMMERCIAL BLAST CLEANING: Thoroughly clean metal surfaces of mill scale, rust, and other foreign matter by abrasive blasting to gray metal in accordance with SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". Perform abrasive blasting after erection, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. TYPE SP3 CONCRETE SURFACES: Thoroughly cure concrete surfaces prior to application of coatings. Allow a minimum of 30 days curing time to elapse before coatings are applied. Concrete surfaces which are scheduled to receive coatings shall be dry and shall be prepared by light abrasive blasting in accordance with SSPC-SP7 "Brush Blast Cleaning". Blasting shall be sufficient to remove dirt, dust, efflorescence, oil, grease, stains, and other foreign matter and shall provide adequate surface roughening for good adhesion. TYPE SP4 SHOP PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES: Exterior metal surfaces, except those specified for field preparation, may be shop cleaned by blasting to a gray metal finish in accordance with SSPC-SP-6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning", as described above. The blasted surface shall be primed immediately as scheduled. TYPE SP5 FIELD PREPARATION OF SHOP PRIMED SURFACES: Slag and weld metal accumulations and splatters not removed by the fabricator shall be removed in the field by chipping or grinding. Sharp edges shall be peened, ground or otherwise blunted. Areas adjacent to welds or any area where shop primer has been damaged shall be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP2 "Hand Tool Cleaning" preparation and reprimed. In order to prevent injury to surrounding painted surfaces, blast cleaning may require the use of a lower air pressure, a shorter blast distance to the surface, and shielding and masking. If damage is too extensive or uneconomical to touch-up, the entire item shall be recleaned and coated in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. Welds and irregular surfaces shall receive a field coat of the specified primer prior to the application of the first field coat. Protective Coatings 09905-8 KEL00483 3.02 APPLICATION A. Surface preparation and application of coatings shall be in accordance with applicable standards of the Steel Structure Painting Council (SSPC) and the manufacturer's recommendations. Do not apply the prime coat until the Owner's field representative is notified and approval is obtained for the surface preparation. Coating shall be applied by skilled workmen and shall be brushed out or sprayed evenly, without runs, crazing, sags, or other blemishes. Apply coating by brush or spray as noted in the specifications. B. Apply the first coat to the surface, including cutting in around edges, before the second coat is applied. The second coat and any successive coats shall not to be applied before notifying the Owner's field representative and obtaining approval. Each coat shall be tested before the successive coat is applied. C. Each coat shall be thoroughly dry before application of the successive coat. The full drying time recommended by the manufacturer shall be allowed. Sand enamel between coats. D. Protect adjacent materials from damage, including over spray or spillage. Provide drop cloths or other protective tarps to cover floors, equipment or other adjacent materials. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. FIELD TESTS Make wet -film tests during painting operations to assure proper thicknesses of coating are being applied. After each coat has been applied, test the paint film thickness with a non-destructive, magnetic type thickness gauge. The total dry -film thickness for each coat shall not be less than 75% of the amount specified. If the thickness is less than 75%, apply additional coats until the total specified thickness is obtained. The total thickness after the final coat has been applied shall be 100% of the thickness specified, minimum. Apply additional coats until the specified thickness is reached or exceeded. B. HOLIDAY TESTING Test the entire surface of coated submerged metal structures with a holiday detector. For thickness between 10 and 20 Mils (250 to 500 microns) a non-sudsing type wetting agent, as recommended by the holiday detector manufacturer shall be added to the water prior to wetting the detector sponge. Mark and repair pinholes in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, then retest pinholes. No pinholes or other irregularities shall be permitted in the final coats. Areas containing holidays shall receive additional coats until tests indicate no holidays. 3.04 CLEAN AND ADJUST A. Promptly remove trash and debris resulting from painting operation from the site. Remove drop cloths, masking tapes and other protective coverings. Remove paint spills, splatters, overlap of paint from adjacent material and other defects. Spot paint nicks and other defects. B. Remove paint containers and waste products. Thoroughly clean paint storage rooms, removing spilled paint from walls and floors. Protective Coatings 09905-9 KEL00483 3.05 SCHEDULES Protective coatings shall be applied in accordance with the following paint schedule: Protective Coatings 09905-10 KEL00483 PROTECTIVE COATINGS PAINT SCHEDULE SPEC PREP. SURFACE DESCRIPTION APPLICATION VEHICLE SHEEN NO. OF PRODUCT DFT NO. NO. TYPE COATS TYPE (MILS) SS -1 SP2 Structural Steel Brush or Spray Alkyd Gloss 1 TYPE A 2.0 or EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR Pheonolic 2 TYPE C 3.0 SP4 3 TYPE C 3.0 Total Dry Film Thickness 8.0 mils SS -2 SP2 Equipment, Pumps, Motors, Valves and Brush or Spray Acrylic Gloss 1 TYPE B 2.0 or Piping Polyurethane 2 TYPE D 4.0 SP4 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR 3 TYPE G 3.0 Total Dry Film Thickness 9.0 mils SS -3 SP2 Structural Steel and Misc. Metals Brush or Spray Acrylic Gloss 1 TYPE B 2.0 or SP4 ABOVE WATER SURFACES Polyurethane 2 TYPE D 5.0 3 TYPE G 3.0 Total Dry Film Thickness 10.0 mils SS -4 SPI Structural Steel and Misc. Metals Brush or Spray Epoxy Gloss 1 TYPE B 2.0 SUBMERGED Polyamide 2 TYPE D 5.0 3 TYPE D 5.0 Total Dry Film Thickness 12.0 mils SS -5 SPI Piping Brush or Spray Epoxy Gloss 1 TYPE B 2.0 SUBMERGED Polyamide 2 TYPE D 5.0 3 TYPE D 5.0 Total Dry Film Thickness 12.0 mils SS -6 SP1A Valves and Gates Brush or Spray Epoxy Gloss 1 TYPE B 2.0 Polyamide 2 TYPE D 5.0 3 TYPE D 5.0 Total Dry Film Thickness 12.0 mils Protective Coatings 09905-11 KEL00483 SPEC PREP. SURFACE DESCRIPTION APPLICATION VEHICLE SHEEN NO. OF PRODUCT DFT NO. NO. TYPE COATS TYPE (MILS) SS -7 SPI Water Storage Tanks Brush or Spray Epoxy Gloss 1 TYPE E 4.0 SUBMERGED OR ABOVE WATER Polyamide 2 TYPE E 5.0 Total Dry Film Thickness 9.0 mils SS -8 SP2 Water Storage Tanks Brush or Spray Epoxy Gloss 1 TYPE B 2.0 EXTERIOR Polyamide 2 TYPD D 5.0 Polyurethane 3 TYPE H 2.5 Total Dry Film Thickness 9.5 mils SS -9 SP3 Concrete Floor Surfaces of Chemical Brush or Spray Epoxy Gloss 1 TYPE F 5.0 mils Storage Area Polyamide INTERIOR SS -10 SP3 Concrete Surfaces as follows: Brush or Spray Epoxy Text. 1 TYPE K 14.0 mils INTERIOR Coating 1. Walls, beams, and slabs on interior surfaces of wet well 2. Interior wall, beams and slabs 3. Interior surfaces SS -11 SPI High Temperature Surfaces Brush Silicone Alum. 1 TYPE J 1.5 2 TYPE J 1.5 Total Dry Film Thickness 3.0 mils SS -12 SP4 Electrical Equipment Brush Alkyd Gloss 1 TYPE A 2.0 EXTERIOR Enamel 2 TYPE C 3.0 3 TYPE C 3.0 Total Dry Film Thickness 8.0 mils Protective Coatings 09905-12 KEL00483 DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work includes all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the design, construction, testing, and commissioning of a Composite elevated tank and related work including foundations, painting, and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES The latest edition of the following Specifications, Codes and Standards shall be used with regard to materials, design, construction, inspection and testing to the extent specified herein. A. ACI (American Concrete Institute) 117 Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials 304 Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete 305 Hot Weather Concreting 306 Cold Weather Concreting 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete 347 Guide to Formwork for Concrete 371R Guide for the Analysis, Design and Construction of Concrete -Pedestal Water Towers B. AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction) S335 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings C. ANSI (American National Standards Institute) B 16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings D. API (American Petroleum Institute) 650 Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage E. ASTM (American Society for Testing Materials) A 123 Zinc Coatings on Iron and Steel Products A 240 Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels A 285 Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel A 774 Welded Stainless Steel Fittings A 778 Welded Stainless Steel Tubular Products F. AWWA (American Water Works Association) D100 Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage D102 Coating Steel Water Storage Tanks C200 Steel Water Pipe C205 Cement -Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service C208 Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings C652 Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities Composite Elevated Tank 13413-1 KEL00483 G. FAA (Federal Aviation Administration) 70/7460-1H Obstruction Marking and Lighting H. NACE (National Association of Corrosion Engineers) RP0178 I. NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) NEC National Electric Code 780 Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems J. NFS (National Sanitation Foundation) 61 Standard for Drinking Water System Components K. OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration) 29 CFRPart 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards L. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) VIS -89 Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Elevated Tank The Composite elevated tank shall consist of the following: foundation, reinforced concrete support structure and a welded steel water tank. The support structure shall extend vertically from the foundation as a single circular concrete wall. A domed concrete slab shall be provided as structural support for the steel tank within the perimeter of the wall. A reinforced concrete ring beam shall be provided to connect the steel tank, concrete dome and concrete support wall. The steel tank shall be separated into two compartments by a circular divider wall. The elevated tank shall be in strict accordance with the shape, dimensions and details required by these specifications and drawings. B. Operating Parameters Composite Elevated Tank 13413-2 KEL00483 Inner Tank Outer Tank Westlake Keller Minimum capacity within operating range 1,000,000 gallon 1,500,000 gallon Maximum operating range 47.5 ft 40.0 ft Elevation - overflow/top capacity level 901.50 ft 900.00 ft - grade slab elevation 747.50 ft 747.50 ft Inlet / Outlet Pipe Diameter 16 In 16 in Overflow Pipe Diameter 12 in 12 in Maximum fill rate 8,340 gpm Composite Elevated Tank 13413-2 KEL00483 C. General Design 1. Design Standards - The structural design of the elevated storage tank shall conform to the following design standards except as modified or clarified by this section. Foundations and Support Structure ACI 318 Steel Tank AWWA D100 2. Design Parameters -The applicable design parameters are: Earthquake Zone 0 Design Wind Speed 100 mph Design Snow Load 25 psf D. Wind and Seismic Loads 1. Wind —Wind effects shall be determined in accordance with AWWA D100. 2. Seismic — Seismic design is not required. E. Foundation Loads The foundations shall be designed by the Contractor to safely support the structure based on the recommendations of the geotechnical report referenced in Paragraph 1.07B. Foundations shall be sized in accordance with AWWA D-100 subject to the following modifications: • Allowable soil pressure shall not be exceeded under D+F, 0.75(D+F+E) or 0.75(D+F+W) • No uplift under D+W or D+F+.75E unless anchorage is provided. • No overturning under D+1.5W or D+F+1.5E. D = Effect of dead load including structure weight and net weight of the foundation. F = Effect of water load when tank is filled to the top capacity level E = Effect of seismic load. W = Effect of wind load. 1.04 SUBMITTALS The following submittals shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS. A. Proposal Submit the following with the Proposal: 1. Experience List - A list of five Composite elevated tank structures of equal or greater capacity that have been designed, constructed and commissioned by the Bidder. These tanks shall be of the same design described in Paragraph 1.03A, except that they may be single compartment. Provide the location, capacity, year completed, contact names and phone numbers. Failure to provide this information shall be cause for rejection of the bid. 2. Tank Drawing - A preliminary section view drawing of the tank proposed for this project. The drawing shall include sufficient detail to illustrate tank geometry, materials of construction, primary dimensions, and the elevation of low and high water levels. The thickness of major steel plate and concrete sections as well as the concrete and reinforcement quantities for the foundation shall be provided. If the proposed design does not comply with the specifications, the bid shall be rejected. Composite Elevated Tank KEL00483 13413-3 B. Construction Drawings Provide elevation, plan and sectional view drawings of the foundation, support structure, tank and all appurtenant equipment and accessories. Show the location, dimensions, material specifications and finish requirements. The submission shall be sealed by professional engineer licensed in the State of Texas. Foundation details shall include excavation, soil protection and backfill. Reinforced concrete details shall include construction joints, openings and inserts. Reinforcement shall be clearly indicated on the structural drawings and identified by mark numbers that are used on the fabrication schedule. Location, spacing and splice dimensions shall be shown. Placement and fabrication details shall conform to ACI 318. Steel tank details shall include weld joints and a layout showing all primary and secondary shops and field welds. C. Construction Procedures Provide design, detail drawings and procedures for the support structure forming system. Details shall include location of form and construction joints, rustications and ties. Procedures shall include form removal criteria and minimum elapsed time for adjacent concrete placement. Provide shop and field weld procedures for all structural joints on the steel tank. D. Design Data Provide a table showing capacity of the inner and outer tank compartments in gallons at all levels in one -foot increments. Provide a summary of the design for the foundation, support structure, tank and other components. Include the design basis, loads and load combinations and results. E. Product Data Provide a separate concrete mix design for each specified concrete compressive strength indicated on the drawings. Provide technical data and color samples of all coating products. Provide manufacturers descriptive information for appurtenant equipment and accessories that are not detailed on the construction drawings. F. Reports/Certification Provide documentation of all tests, inspections and certifications required by this section. Provide qualifications of all welders. G. Operation & Maintenance Manual Provide O&M Manual with all operating instructions and maintenance procedures for the double -compartment elevated tank and applicable appurtenant equipment, mechanical components and accessories, including but not limited to, complete drawings, repainting requirements, and control valve maintenance procedures. Composite Elevated Tank 134134 KEL00483 H. Paint and Artwork Mock-up Provide the Town of Westlake and the City of Keller with an architectural rendering and mock- up of the tank color combination and artwork design prior to commencing paint work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualification of Manufacturer The work described in this section shall be performed by an experienced Contractor that has designed, constructed and commissioned a minimum of five composite elevated tanks of equal or greater capacity. These tanks shall be of the same design described in Paragraph 1.03A, with the exception that these tanks can be single compartment. Acceptable manufacturers are: CBI Na -Con Inc.; Landmark Structures, Inc.; or Pitt -Des Moines Inc. Other manufacturers may submit proposals only if they pre -qualify and show conformance with the above criteria. Request for qualification with supporting documentation must be received in writing fourteen (14) days prior to bid date. Documentation shall include an experience list in accordance with Paragraph 1.04A, of projects completed directly by the manufacturer that comply with this specification. The owner and/or Engineer shall be the sole judge as to the acceptability of the manufacturer. Elevated tank design, concrete support structure construction and steel tank construction shall not be subcontracted. These items shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall directly employ a full time professional engineer with a minimum five years cumulative experience in the design and construction of Composite elevated tanks as described in Paragraph 1.03A. The engineer shall be licensed in accordance with Paragraph 1.04B and shall be in responsible engineering charge of the work. A qualified supervisor directly employed by the Contractor shall be on site at all times during construction of the foundation, support structure and steel tank. B. Regulatory Requirements The elevated tank shall be designed and constructed in compliance with applicable federal, state and local regulations. Personnel safety equipment shall be provided in accordance with OSHA requirements and manufacturers documentation. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING A. Handling and Shipping The Contractor shall handle materials and fabricated components in a manner that will protect them from damage. Allow painted materials adequate cure time prior to stacking or shipping. B. Storage and Protection Protect delivered materials and equipment from damage. Store in well -drained areas and provide blocking to mmm ze contact with the ground. Composite Elevated Tank 13413-5 KEL00483 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Permits and Easements Permits, licenses, and easements required for permanent structures, changes in existing facilities or advancement of the construction as specified, shall be secured and paid for by the Owner prior to the start of construction. These include building permits, airspace authority approval, site access easements, highway crossing permits, etc. Licenses or permits of a temporary nature required by specific trades shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Existing Conditions A geotechnical investigation has been carried out at the site and a report has been incorporated within these specifications (Appendix A -Geotechnical Engineering Study). The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the adequacy of the report and its recommendations and for securing any further geotechnical information required. C. Access The Contractor shall provide access from Knox Road to the tank base as specified in the drawings. D. Working Conditions 1. Safety and Health - The Contractor shall comply with safe working practices and all health and safety regulations of OSHA, state and local health regulatory agencies and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Provide protective and lifesaving equipment for persons working at the site. 2. Times for Work - Times for work shall comply with local, state and federal regulations and laws. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule The Contractor shall provide a bar chart showing the anticipated schedule for design, submittals, site work and the major components of construction including foundation, support structure and steel tank. In addition, show tank painting, electrical installation and other significant activities. Update the schedule as required. B. Notification The Contractor shall provide notification of the intent to start work at least seven days prior to commencing each major phase of work. C. Certifications Provide certification from the engineer of record that the elevated tank has been designed in accordance with the requirements of the specification. Provide certification that testing and inspection requirements of Paragraph 3.07 have been performed and the results comply with the requirements of the specification. Composite Elevated Tank 13413-6 KEL00483 1.09 GUARANTEES A. Guarantee The Contractor shall guarantee the structure, appurtenant equipment and accessories provided under this section against defective design, workmanship or materials for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion. Substantial completion is defined as the date when the tank is placed, or is available to be placed, into service. If notified within this period, the Contractor shall repair any defects at no cost to the Owner. Defects caused by damaging service conditions are not covered. All guarantees for materials, equipment and accessories provided under this section shall be obtained by the Contractor and submitted. B. Maintenance Bond The Contractor shall also provide the Owner with a one-year maintenance bond. The period of the maintenance bond will extend from the end of the one-year warranty period. This bond shall cover defects in design, workmanship, or materials, which are not covered by routine operation and maintenance schedules. 1.10 INSURANCE A. General Liability The Contractor shall maintain General Liability insurance with a minimum limit of $5,000,000. B. Professional Liability The Contract shall maintain Professional Liability insurance with minimum limit of $5,000,000. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforced Concrete Concrete materials and reinforcement shall comply with ACI 318, except as modified in this Section. B. Steel Tank Steel tank components, including steel plates, sheets, structural shapes and filler metals shall be in accordance with AWWA D100, Section 2, "Materials". 2.02 CONCRETE FOUNDATION A. General The concrete foundation shall be designed in accordance with ACI 318. Minimum specified compressive strength shall be 3500 psi at 28 days. The service load reinforcement tension stress shall not exceed 30,000 psi under dead plus water load unless flexural cracking is otherwise controlled in accordance with ACI 318. Composite Elevated Tank 13413-7 KEL00483 2.03 CONCRETE SUPPORT A. General The concrete support structure shall be designed in accordance with ACI 318. The specified compressive strength of concrete shall be as required by design, but not less than 3500 psi at 28 days. The maximum specified compressive strength of concrete for the wall and dome shall be 5000 and 4000 psi respectively. B. Support Wall Support wall shall be reinforced concrete with a minimum thickness of 13 inches exclusive of any architectural relief. Wall thickness shall be provided such that the average compressive stress due to the weight of the structure and stored water is limited to 25% of specified compressive strength, but not greater than 1000 psi. A minimum total wall reinforcement of 0.15 % vertically and 0.20% horizontally shall be distributed approximately equally to each face. A minimum of 1.00% vertical reinforcement shall be provided in the top 6 -ft. of the wall extending into the concrete ring beam. Minimum concrete cover for interior / exterior faces shall be 1 inch and 1-% inches respectively. C. Tank Floor Tank floor shall be a reinforced concrete dome not less than 15 inches thick. The average compressive stress due to the weight of the structure and stored water shall not exceed 15% of the specified compressive strength, nor greater than 600 psi. Minimum total reinforcement in orthogonal directions shall be 0.40% distributed approximately equally to each face. Additional reinforcement shall be provided for stress caused by edge restraint effects. D. Openings The effects of openings in the wall shall be considered in the design. Not less than 60% of the interrupted reinforcement in each direction shall be placed each side of the opening. Reinforcement shall extend past the opening not less than half the transverse opening dimension. Openings wider than 3 -ft. 6 -in. shall be subjected to a rigorous analysis taking into account the stress concentrations and diminished lateral support that exist in the vicinity of such openings. Each side of the opening shall be designed as a column in accordance with ACI 318. Openings 8 -ft. 0 -in. or wider used for vehicle access shall be strengthened against vehicle impact and local buckling by means of an internal buttress located on each side of the opening. The buttress shall consist of a thickened, reinforced concrete wall section that is integrally formed and placed with the support wall. The buttress section shall be not less than 3 -ft. 0 -in. wide and 6 -in. thicker than the nominal wall dimension. 2.04 CONCRETE SUPPORT STRUCTURE / STEEL TANK INTERFACE A. Interface Region The interface region includes those portions of the concrete support structure and steel tank affected by the transfer of forces from the tank cone, tank divider wall and the tank floor to the concrete support wall. This includes a ring beam and connection details. The Contractor shall provide evidence that a thorough review of the interface region has been performed. Finite element analysis, capable of recognizing non-linear material properties of concrete is the required method for analyzing the stress distribution in the interface region. In particular, the influence of Composite Elevated Tank 13413-8 HEL00483 concrete cracking on the redistribution of the circumferential tensile forces shall be taken into account. The interface region shall be analyzed for all the relevant load cases including but not limited to the following: 1. Interior tank full, exterior tank empty. 2. Interior tank empty, exterior tank full. 3. Interior tank full, exterior tank full. The required strength of the structural concrete members comprising the interface region should be determined in conformance with the Design Strength Method per ACI 318. The base of the dome, the ring beam and the top of the wall should be capable of resisting the combination of axial loads, moments and shears. The structural resistance of such concrete sections should be - determined from the interaction diagrams relating the computed forces. The interface region shall be checked for the occurrence of cracking including the effects of creep, shrinkage and temperature. The maximum width of crack shall not exceed 0.013 inch. The geometry of the interface shall provide for positive drainage and not allow either condensation or precipitation to accumulate at the top of the concrete wall or ring beam. B. Ring Beam The ring beam shall be reinforced concrete with a nominal width and height of at least two times the support wall thickness. Minimum radial reinforcement shall be 0.25%. Circumferential reinforcement shall meet the requirements of Section 2.04.A and shall be not less than 1.0%. Ring beam design shall consider load conditions varying with water level, eccentricity of loads resulting from design geometry, and allowance for variations due to construction imperfection and tolerance. 2.05 STEEL TANK A. General The steel tank shall be all welded construction and shall be designed in accordance with applicable sections of AWWA D100. The required capacity and dimensions of the tank are noted on the drawings and in this section of the specifications. All exposed lap joints shall be fully seal welded on both sides. B. Plate Thickness All members shall be designed to safely withstand the maximum stress to which they may be subjected during erection and operation. The minimum thickness of any steel plate shall be 1/4 - in. C. Roof Support The roof shall be a stiffened plate cone, with 1:10 slope. All structural members supporting the roof of the steel tank shall be flat bar or sealed square tubular sections. I -beams or other sections with horizontal projections may be used if the nominal depth is 10 -in. or greater. Support beams shall be seal welded to the underside of the roof plate along the entire length of the beam. Composite Elevated Tank 13413-9 IKEL00483 D. Cone For areas of the elevated tank where the water is supported by a steel cone, the Contractor shall submit evidence that the design is based on a finite element shell analysis. The analysis shall include the effects of material and geometric non-linearaties and residual stresses. The modeled imperfection shall not be less than 0.04�RT over a length of 4gRT, where R is the radius normal to the plate surface at the point of consideration, and T is the plate thickness. The cone model should recognize the restraint conditions compatible with the actual response of the concrete support structure. The design shall have a minimum factor of safety of 2.0 against buckling. If the above analysis is not performed, the design shall be based on the use of Table 9 of AWWA D 100 to determine the allowable compressive stress. E. Divider Wall The circular divider wall shall extend from the tank floor to the tank roof. Wall roof interface shall be airtight. The wall shall be designed to safely withstand the effects of all gravity loads and hydrostatic pressure. Analysis shall consider all loading conditions in Section 2.04.A. Design shall comply with applicable provisions of AWWA D 100. Design for external hydrostatic pressure shall be by a properly substantiated method that considers restraint conditions at the boundaries. The design shall have a minimum factor of safety of 2.0 against buckling. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. General Accessories shall comply with the minimum requirements of the Specifications, Codes and Standards listed in Paragraph 1.02, current applicable safety regulations, and the operating requirements of the structure. B. Ladder Access Ladders shall be provided from the slab on grade inside the base of the support wall to the upper walkway platform located below the tank floor. The tank floor manhole shall be provided with ladder access from the upper platform. A ladder shall extend from the upper platform, through the access tube interior to the roof. Ladders mounted on the access tube exterior and the divider wall exterior shall be provided for access to Westlake's and Keller's tanks interiors, respectively. Ladders that terminate at platforms or landings shall extend a minimum of 48 -in. beyond the platform elevations. Ladders located in the concrete support structure and access tube interior shall be galvanized steel. Tank interior ladders shall be coated in accordance with the tank interior coating system. Ladder side rails shall be a minimum 3/8 -in. by 2 -in. with a 16 -in. clear spacing. Rungs shall be minimum 3/4 -in. diameter, spaced at 12 -in. centers and plug welded into holes drilled in the side rails. Tank interior ladders shall be provided with 1 -in. diameter rungs and 1/2 -in. x 2 -in. side rails and shall be fully seal welded. Ladder shall be secured to the adjacent structure by brackets located at intervals not exceeding 10 -ft. Brackets shall be of sufficient length to provide a minimum distance of 7 -in. from the center of rung to the nearest permanent object behind the ladder. Composite Elevated Tank 13413-10 KEL00483 C. Safe Climbing Device High strength aluminum, rigid rail safe climbing devices shall be provided on all ladders in accordance with OSHA requirements. Rails shall be center mounted and extend from 3 -ft. above the ladder bottom to the top of the ladder section. Mounting brackets, fasteners and splice bars shall be provided as required for a rigid installation. Three trolleys with snap hooks that are designed to be operated with the aluminum rail shall be provided. A safety body harness with front and side rings shall be supplied for each trolley. D. Intermediate Platforms and Ladder Cages Provide intermediate offset platforms on the support wall ladder at maximum 25 -ft. intervals. Platforms shall be a minimum 3 -ft. x 3 -ft. and provided with handrails, midrails and toe plates. Grating shall be used for the walking surfaces. All components shall be galvanized steel. Provide galvanized cages on support wall ladders between landings. E. Upper Platform A 4 -ft. wide upper walkway platform shall be located at the top of the support wall to provide access from the support wall ladder to the roof access ladder located on the interior of the access tube. Platforms shall be provided with handrails, midrails and toe plates in accordance with OSHA requirements. Grating shall be used for the walking surface. All components shall be galvanized steel. A fixed lanyard shall be provided at platforms to provide fall prevention. F. Support Wall Doors Personnel Door — Door frames shall be 14 -gauge with concealed reinforcement at hardware locations. Expansion type anchors for existing openings shall be installed near the top, bottom and intermediate point of each jamb to rigidly secure the frame. Doors shall be 1 3/4 -in. thick insulated, reinforced, full, flush type with 16 -gauge face sheets and concealed reinforcement at hardware locations. All edges shall be finished flush with watertight seams. Frame shall be galvanized. Shop applied finish for the door shall be baked on rust inhibitive primer. Field finish shall be compatible with the tank exterior. Standard hardware shall be stainless steel and include three 4 1/2 -in. by 4 1/2 -in. hinges, industrial duty closer and lockset keyed to the Owner's requirements. Quantity and location of personnel door(s) shall be as shown on the drawings. 2. Overhead Vehicle Door - Door installation shall be on the interior face of the support wall. The door frame shall be a steel plate fabrication detailed, fastened and reinforced to accept the door. Operation shall be manual with a chain hoist. The curtain shall be formed of 22 - gauge steel interlocking slats with end locks and wind locks designed for a wind loading of 20 psf. Torsion springs shall be mounted on a solid torsion rod, which is attached to an exterior mounted spring tension adjustment wheel. A 24 -gauge steel hood shall be provided with a weather seal to protect the assembly. Steel brackets shall be installed to the interior face of the wall with expansion anchors, which enclose and support the counterbalance assembly with sealed bearings. Steel curtain guides are mounted to the brackets. The Composite Elevated Tank 13413-11 KEL00483 curtain, bottom bar, brackets, guides, hood, pipe and chain shall be galvanized. Provide with locking device. Size, quantity and location of vehicle door(s) shall be as shown on the drawings. G. Tank Openings 1. Floor - Provide a 30 -in. diameter manhole through the tank floor. The manhole shall be operable from a ladder located on the upper platform and shall be designed to withstand the pressure of the tank contents without leakage. The manhole assembly shall include a stainless steel handwheel operator and threaded components. 2. Provide two 30 -inch diameter manholes through the steel tank divider wall, 180 degrees apart. The manholes shall be designed to withstand the pressure of the tank contents from either side without leakage. Manhole shall be operable from the inner tank, and shall be provided with a support mechanism that will allow the cover to be lifted and moved away from the opening. Provide corrosion resistant materials for any fasteners. Roof - Provide three 30 -in. diameter access hatches on the roof of the tank. One hatch shall allow egress from the access tube to the roof. A second hatch, located adjacent to the first, shall allow access to the interior of the Westlake tank via the ladder mounted on the exterior of the access tube. The third hatch shall allow access to the Keller tank. The openings shall have a minimum 4 -in. curb. Provide aluminum covers with a 2 -in. down turned edge and a locking mechanism. H. Access Drywell Provide a minimum 48 -in. diameter centrally located access drywell through the steel tank to provide access to the tank roof from the upper walkway platform and to house future telecommunication cabling. The area under the access tube shall be provided with a galvanized pan to prevent condensation from dripping onto the concrete floor slab below. The drip pan shall extend 3 -in. beyond the drip line of the access tube. A 3/4 -in. PVC drainpipe shall be provided. The drain shall exit the support wall 6 -in. above grade. I. Roof Railing A 42 -in. high roof guardrail with a minimum diameter of 78 feet shall be provided to enclose all roof accessories. Rigging Access Provide a 24 -in. x 36 -in. opening near the top of the support wall. This opening shall be accessible from a platform and shall provide access to the exterior -rigging rail located at the tank/support wall intersection. The access opening shall be provided with a hinged stainless steel louvered vent in accordance with Paragraph 2.06.M.2. Provide two manholes with minimum diameter of 24 -in. diameter on the tank roof to provide access to all tank interior rigging rails. The opening shall have a minimum 4 -in. curb. Provide an aluminum cover with a 2 -in. down turned edge and a locking mechanism. K. Painters Rails Composite Elevated Tank 13413-12 KEL00483 1. Interior Painters Rails. Provide permanently installed rails suitable for rolling trolleys at the interior of the tank near the tank wall/roof and access tube/roof connections and on both sides of the divider wall near the roof. Rails shall be galvanized and painted. 2. Exterior Painters Rail. Provide an exterior painter's rail at the base of the tank adjacent to the support structure and shall be accessible from the walkway via the upper platform and support wall painters vent. Rail shall be painted. L. Piping 1. Inlet/Outlet Pipe - Provide two inlet/outlet pipes that extend from the valve arrangements for the City of Keller and the Town of Westlake, respectively, at the base of the support structure to the tank floor elevation. Provide a minimum of 6 -in. high removable silt stop where the inlet/outlet pipe enters the inner tank or other appropriate silt stopping device. The bottom capacity level of the tank's operating range shall be at or above the elevation of the top of the silt stop. Pipe material within the support structure shall be stainless steel. The inlet/outlet pipe shall be designed to support all related static and dynamic loads. Galvanized steel brackets, guides and hangers shall be provided on the support wall and tank floor at a minimum of 20 -ft. intervals. The inlet/outlet pipe shall be designed and constructed to accommodate any differential movement caused by settlement and by thermal expansion and contraction over the range of extreme temperature differences expected for the support wall and pipe. The required flexibility shall be provided by an expansion joint located near grade in the vertical section of pipe. 2. Overflow Pipe — Provide separate overflows for the inner and outer tanks. The top of the overflow shall be located within the tank at the overflow elevation. It shall run adjacent to the access tube or divider wall and extend through the tank floor. The pipe shall run vertically beside the support wall to grade. A base elbow shall direct the overflows through the support wall, where the pipe shall be terminated with a flap valve. Pipe material within the support structure shall be stainless steel. If the top of overflow is located above top capacity level, the tank shall be designed for the additional capacity provided by the difference. The entrance to the overflow pipe shall be designed for the maximum inlet flow rate. The design shall be based on the water level cresting within 6 -in. above the overflow elevation. A conical weir or other vortex prevention device shall be provided if the entrance capacity of the overflow pipe diameter is not adequate. The overflow shall be designed to support all related static and dynamic loads. Galvanized steel brackets, guides and hangers shall be provided on the support wall and tank floor at intervals not exceeding 204 The overflow and weir section within the tank shall be supported by the access tube. The overflow pipe shall be designed and constructed to accommodate any differential movement caused by settlement and by thermal expansion and contraction over the range of extreme temperature differences expected for the support wall and pipe. A layout with sufficient upper offset to accommodate differential movement is acceptable. If this method is not applicable, the required flexibility shall be provided by an expansion joint located near grade in the vertical section of pipe. 3. Tank Drain — Provide a method for draining each of tank compartment independently to the low point of the floor. If the inlet/outlet pipe does not accommodate this, provide a separate Composite Elevated Tank 13413-13 KEL00483 6 -in. diameter pipe from the low point of the tank compartment floor to the corresponding overflow. The drain inlet shall be fitted with a threaded plug with handle. 4. Steel Pipe Requirements — Steel pipe and fittings shall comply with AWWA C200 and C208 respectively. Field connections shall be flanged in accordance with AWWA C207, Class D. Field welding, if required, shall be in accordance with AWWA C206 Steel pipe shall be minimum standard weight and comply with ASTM A53 Grade B. Interior lining shall comply with AWWA C205 with SSPC — SP10 preparation. Exterior lining shall comply with the tank interior system. AWWA M11 shall be used as a guide for the design and installation of pipe. 5. Stainless Steel Pipe Requirements - Pipe and fittings shall be Type 304L stainless steel fabricated from material meeting the requirements of ASTM A-240. Fabrication, inspection, testing, marking and certification of pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with ASTM A- 778 and A-774 respectively. Backing flanges shall be in accordance with ASTM A285 -C drilled to ANSI B 16.5 Class 150. Pipe, fittings and welds shall be cleaned and passivated. Pipe, fittings and flange thickness shall be in accordance with the manufacturers certified pressure rating for the applicable service pressures. For piping located within closed or valve sections, the design pressure rating shall be 125 -psi minimum. M. Ventilation Tank Ventilation - Two tank vents shall be provided, one for each tank compartment, conveniently located for maintenance on the tank roof. They shall consist of stainless steel or aluminum components, including a support frame, screened area and cap. The vents shall be easily dismantled to facilitate removal and cleaning of the screen. The support shall be fastened to a flanged opening in the tank roof. The vent caps shall be provided with sufficient overhang to prevent the entrance of wind driven debris and precipitation. A minimum of 4 -in. shall be provided between the roof surface and the vent cap. The tank vents shall have an intake and relief capacity sized to prevent excessive pressure differential during the maximum flow rate of water, either entering or leaving the tank. The overflow pipe will not be considered as a vent. The maximum flow rate of water entering the tank is specified in Paragraph 1.03B. The maximum flow rate of water exiting the tank shall be calculated assuming a break in the inlet/outlet at grade when the tank is full. The vent shall be provided with an aluminum or fiberglass insect screen. Vent capacity shall be determined based on open area provided by the screen. In addition to the tank vent, a pressure/vacuum relief mechanism shall be provided that will operate in the event of vent failure. The mechanism shall be designed to return automatically to its original position after operation. The pressure/vacuum relief mechanism shall be provided for each of the tank compartments and shall be located on the tank roof, and they may be incorporated in the vent assembly. 2. Support Structure Ventilation — Provide an aluminum louvered vent with insect screen near the top of the support wall. This vent shall be accessible from the upper platform and may also be designed to provide access to the exterior rigging rails located at the tank/support wall intersection. Composite Elevated Tank 13413-14 KEL00483 3. Access Tube Ventilation — Provide a 6 -in. diameter aluminum vent with insect screen on the access tube hatch cover. N. Interior Floors Slab on Grade - Provide a 6 -in. thick, 3500 -psi concrete floor slab in the base of the support structure. The slab shall be supported on compacted granular and shall be reinforced with #5 reinforcing steel at 12 -in. centers each way. Provide 1/2 -in. expansion joint between floor slab and support wall and at pipes and supports that extend through the floor. Place cap strip and sealant over the expansion joint. The slab shall be sloped at 0.5% toward the truck door for drainage. O. Level Monitoring 1. General - Provide three 3/4 -in. couplings welded to each inlet/outlet pipe 5 -ft. above grade. Each coupling shall be provided with a stainless steel nipple and an isolation gate valve. 2. Pressure Gauge - Provide a pressure gauges as shown on the drawings. Refer to Section 15170, PRESSURE GAGES AND COCKS. P. Lightning Protection Provide a lightning protection system for the elevated tank structure and any roof mounted equipment that may be damaged by lightning. Install the system in accordance with NFPA 780 with materials that meet UL96 and UL96a. Minimum requirements include two 28 strand by 14 gauge copper conductors bonded to the steel tank 180 degrees apart. The conductors shall be fastened to the interior support wall at 3 foot minimum spacing, and shall terminate with buried 5/8 -inch diameter by 8 -foot long copper clad ground rods. Lightning protection for obstruction lights shall consist of an air terminal mounted on the support and formed to fit around the fixture. The 1/2 inch diameter copper air terminal shall extend a minimum of 10 inches above the light fixture and shall connect to a copper conductor that terminates in a bonding plate secured to the tank roof 2.07 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING A. General All work shall be performed and all materials shall be provided in accordance with National Electric Code and the governing electrical, safety and inspection codes, regulations and ordinances. Refer to Division 16 2.08 STEEL TANK PAINTING Steel tank painting shall comply with AWWA D102 and NSF 61 and with Section 09905, PROTECTIVE COATINGS. Color selection shall be determined by consensus of the Town of Westlake and the City of Keller. Composite Elevated Tank 13413-15 KEL00483 The south side of the tank bowl shall be decorated with the City Keller logo as indicated in the drawings. The color and details of the artwork will be defined by the owner. 2.09 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests Review mill test certifications of all steel plate, structural components and reinforcement to ensure compliance with specification requirements. B. Inspections Provide inspection of shop fabricated components in accordance with AWWA D100. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Foundation Excavation The foundation bearing surface and excavation shall be inspected by a representative of the geotechnical engineer prior to foundation construction. Verification of the applicable design and construction recommendations is required. The geotechnical engineer shall be retained by the Contractor. B. Environmental Conditions Prior to performing any work, verify the expected temperature, humidity and weather conditions are within the specified limitations for executing the work. C. Elevated Tank Components After completion of each major component and prior to proceeding with the next stage of construction, verify that tolerance inspections and material quality control tests conform to the requirements of Paragraph 3.07. 3.02 REINFORCED CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION A. Reinforcement Fabrication, placement, development and splicing of reinforcement shall be in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 117. B. Formwork Formwork design, installation and removal shall comply with the minimum requirements of ACI 318 and ACI 117 and with the applicable requirements of ACI 347. Forming systems shall be designed with the provision of ties and bracing such that concrete components conform to the correct dimensions, shape, alignment and elevation without leakage of mortar. Formwork systems shall be designed to safely support all loading conditions. Embedded items shall be properly positioned and secured. Form surfaces shall be cleaned of foreign materials and coated with a release agent prior to placing reinforcement. Composite Elevated Tank 13413-16 KEL00483 C. Concrete Concrete proportioning, production, placement, quality control and curing procedures shall comply with ACI 318 and ACI 117. Concrete shall satisfy the specific structural, durability and architectural requirements of the completed components. Proportioning - The proportions of materials for concrete shall be established to provide adequate workability and proper consistency to permit concrete to be worked readily into the forms and around reinforcement without excessive segregation or bleeding. Unless otherwise specified, concrete without high range water reducer shall be proportioned to produce concrete slumps at the point of placement between 2 and 4 -in. If high range water reducer is used, concrete slump prior to addition shall be 3 to 4 -in. The slump, after addition of high range water reducer, shall be a maximum of 9 -in. Air shall be entrained to provide concrete with 3.0% to 6.0% air content. 2. Production - Concrete that arrives at the project with slump below that suitable for placing, may have water added within the limits of the maximum permissible water -cement ratio. Maximum slump shall not be exceeded. The water shall be incorporated by additional mixing equal to at least half of the total mixing time required. For concrete with site - administered high range water reducer, the preplasticized minimum slump requirement shall be attained as permissible by addition of water and mixing prior to the addition of the water reducer. Placement - Prior to concrete placement, all snow, ice, water or other foreign material shall be removed from the spaces that the concrete will occupy. Concrete shall be deposited in its final position in accordance with ACI 318. Drop chutes or tremies shall be used in walls and columns to prevent free -fall of the concrete over 5 -ft. and to allow the concrete to be placed through the cage of reinforcing steel. These shall be moved at short intervals to prevent stacking of concrete. All concrete shall be consolidated by vibration so that the concrete is thoroughly worked into the corners of forms and around the reinforcement and embedded items to eliminate all air or stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness. Internal vibrators shall be the largest practical size that can be used in the work and they shall be operated by competent workmen. D. Weather Concrete shall not be placed during precipitation or extreme temperatures unless protection is provided. During cold weather the recommendations of ACI 306 shall be followed. During hot weather the recommendations of ACI 305 shall be followed. 3.03 FOUNDATION A. Excavation After verification of the foundation -bearing surface, provide a 2 -in. thick concrete working slab within the lower excavation limits. Grade the site to prevent runoff from entering the excavation. B. Concrete Construction Composite Elevated Tank 13413-17 KEL00483 For shallow foundations, reinforcement placed adjacent to a concrete working slab shall have a 2 -in. minimum cover, and shall be supported by precast concrete block, metal or plastic bar supports. The sides of foundations shall be formed using any suitable system conforming to ACI 318. Earth cuts shall not be used as forms for vertical surfaces. Forms shall be provided on top sloping surfaces steeper than 2.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Straight form panels may be used to form circular foundation shapes. The minimum design radius shall be maintained at all sections. C. Finish Formed surfaces shall have a smooth form finish when exposed and a rough form finish when not exposed. Unformed surfaces shall have a troweled finish when exposed and floated finish when not exposed. 3.04 CONCRETE SUPPORT STRUCTURE A. Concrete Construction The concrete and formwork requirements of this section shall be strictly enforced to ensure concrete of the highest practicable structural and architectural standards. Support wall reinforcement shall be installed with plastic supports. Maximum spacing of supports for welded wire fabric shall be 5 -ft. centers, horizontal and vertically. The support wall shall be constructed with a jump form process using form segments prefabricated to match the wall curvature. Concrete pour height shall be a minimum of 6 -ft. and a maximum of 12 -ft. Formwork shall be secured using bolts through the wall prior to concrete placement. Panels shall be designed for lateral pressures associated with full height plastic concrete head, and support and bracing shall be provided for construction related impact loads and wind loads. Working platforms that allow safe access for inspection and concrete placement shall be provided. Form facing material shall be metal, or plywood faced with plastic or fiberglass. The form system shall incorporate a uniform pattern of vertical and horizontal rustication to provide architectural relief to the exterior wall surface. All construction joints and panel joints shall be located in rustication. Vertical panel joints shall be sealed using closures, which combine with the form pattern to prevent grout leakage and panel joint lines. The vertical and horizontal rustication shall be proportioned and combined to impart a symmetrical architectural pattern to the completed structure. Form ties shall be located in a uniform pattern. No architectural form treatment is required on the interior surface. Wall forms shall not be disturbed or removed until the concrete has attained sufficient strength to prevent forming operation or environmental loads from causing surface damage or excessive stress. The minimum concrete strength shall be established by the Contractor, based on an analysis of stress at critical stages throughout the forming and concrete operation. Support wall concreting operation shall occur a maximum of once per day. Multiple form movements and concrete placements within a day are not permitted. The formwork system for the domed structural floor shall be designed to support all construction loads. Adequate shoring and bracing shall be provided to transfer loads without appreciable movements. Form surfaces shall be steel, plastic or fiberglass coated material. Shoring and Composite Elevated Tank 13413-18 KEL00483 forms for the structural dome slab shall remain in place until the concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry the floor weight without damaging deflections. Concrete surfaces shall be protected in accordance with the recommendations of ACI 306 until the component attains 35% of the specified compressive strength. At this time, protection may be removed subject to the allowable temperature differential. A temperature differential shall be defined, based on component thickness and restraint conditions. B. Finish Provide a smooth form finish without rub for the interior and exterior support wall. Tie holes shall be plugged using grout on the interior and manufactured plugs on the exterior which match the color of the cured concrete as closely as possible. Provide a light sandblast to the exposed exterior concrete support wall surface. Provide a smooth form finish without rub for the interior dome slab. The unformed surface shall have a floated finish. C. Dimensional Tolerances Support structure concrete construction shall conform to the following: Variation in thickness: wall.................................................... -3.0% to +5.0% dome ................................................... -6.0% to +10% Support wall variation from plumb: in any 5 feet of height .......................... 3/8 inch in any 50 feet of height ........................ 1-1/2 inch maximum in total height......................3 inches Support wall diameter variation ..................0.4% not to exceed.......................................3 inches Dome floor radius variation ........................1.0% Level alignment variation: from specified elevation ....................... l inch from horizontal plane ..........................1/2 inch 3.05 STEEL TANK A. Welding Welding procedures and general welding requirements shall be in accordance with AWWA D 100, Section 8, "Welding". No structural welding is permitted to any steel embedded in hardened concrete, unless a weld procedure is utilized that will preclude damage to the concrete. B. Fabrication Layout, cutting, forming, edge preparation and workmanship for steel tank components and fabrications shall be in accordance with AWWA D100, Section 9, "Shop Fabrication". C. Tank Erection Steel tank erection procedures and general requirements shall be in accordance with AWWA D100, Section 10, "Erection". Composite Elevated Tank 13413-19 KEL00483 D. Tolerances Steel tank tolerances shall be in accordance with the requirements of API 650, Section 5.5. Steel cone shall be constructed to the following tolerance. The deviation from the theoretical conical surface shall not exceed 0.0324RT, when measured in the radial direction over length 44RT, where R is the radius normal to the plate surface at the point of consideration, and T is the plate thickness. E. Dome Lining Domed tank floor shall be lined with steel plates that may be shaped to match the shape of the tank floor. Subsequent to testing, the void in the interface between the steel tank floor plate and the supporting structural concrete dome or slab shall be filled with a flowable grout mix. 3.06 TANK PAINTING Refer to Section 09905. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Concrete Testing and Inspection The evaluation and acceptance of concrete shall be in accordance with Section 5.6 of ACI 318 and ACI 117, except as modified in this section. Three cylinders shall be made from each sample required. A 7 -day compressive strength test shall be used to supplement the 28 -day tests. Slump, air and compressive cylinder testing shall be performed by an independent laboratory. The Owner shall retain the independent laboratory and provide the Contractor with copies of all test results. The support wall radius, plumb and thickness shall be verified for each concrete lift at 45 degree intervals. An inspection report certified by the tank designer shall be provided to the Owner at project completion. B. Steel Tank Testing & Inspection Inspection procedures for the steel tank shall be as required by AWWA D 100, Section 11, "Inspection". Radiographic inspection of full penetration butt -welded joints shall be made by an independent inspection company retained by the Contractor. Erection tolerance of the steel cone in the radial direction shall be measured. Provide field measurements at 30 -degree intervals. Weld joints of plate over the structural concrete floor shall be tested for leaks by vacuum box / soap solution testing, or equivalent method prior to grouting. C. Tank Painting Inspection and Testing Refer to Section 09905. Composite Elevated Tank 13413-20 KEL00483 3.08 CLEANING A. Site The project site shall be kept in a clean and safe condition at all times. The Contractor shall remove all construction equipment and debris at project completion. B. Tank Disinfection Water and sufficient pressure for flushing, cleaning, initial testing and disinfection shall be supplied by the Owner at no cost to the Contractor. Disinfection shall be in accordance with AWWA C652, Chlorination Method No. 2 After disinfection, the Owner shall arrange for bacteriological testing of water samples from the tank. Failed tests will be supplemented by the Contractor. The tank shall not be placed in service until bacteriological tests pass. END OF SECTION Composite Elevated Tank 13413-21 KEL00483 13440 INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. General Requirements for Instrumentation. B. The work described in this section shall be completed by WHECO for the lump sum of $17,900. WHECO shall be a subcontract for the awarded contractor. There is one area of work in the Instrumentation Work in this project as described below: The Instrumentation System Integrator (Wheco) shall provide all hardware, software, configuration and integration associated with the PLC based Instrumentation and Process Control system. Provide a complete and operational system in accordance with these Contract Documents: a. Provide instrumentation, hardware, conductors and raceway required for a complete and operable system that is above that specified in the Contract Documents. Provide all labor and materials specified in the Contract Documents. b. Provide all required labor, materials and PLC programming and system configuration and integration to interconnect back to the owners work station. Provide radios to match existing system. Vendor shall verify radio type prior to bids. c. Provide all required software and programming in the PLC for a complete and operational system in accordance with these Contract Documents. d. Contractor shall provide all required hardware and PLC hardware and PLC hardware and PLC programming necessary to interface with the existing system. e. Provide personnel to check out, test and commission the system. f. Provide personnel to train the Owner's staff as specified. g. Provide software programming to create new screens and modify existing screens as specified. h. Provide the required drivers to receive and transmit data over the specified Ethernet data highway to fully communicate with the PLC system provided by the System Integrator Contractor. i. Coordinate and fully cooperate with the Instrumentation System Integrator Contractor to provide all required system programming necessary to interface with the existing system for a complete and operational system as specified. j. Provide all software programming required in their system for a complete and operational system as specified. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. GENERAL: Should there be a conflict between various standards, codes, specifications, and contract drawings, bring the matter immediately to the attention of the Owner's Representative. B. REFERENCE STANDARDS: 1. American Society of Testing Materials: Instrumentation General Provisions 13440-1 KEL00483 A269 Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service B 68 Seamless Copper Tube D 1047 Polyvinyl Chloride Jacket for Wire and Cable A36 Specification for Structural Steel Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 2. Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints (RCRBSJ). 3. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC). 4. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): Painting Specifications for weather exposure. 5. American Welding Society (AWS): Welding Code D 1.1-75. 6. Federal Specifications: Primer, Paint Zinc, Chromate, Alkyd Type, Fed. Spec. TT -P - 645a. 7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): National Electrical Code (NEC), 1990 edition. 9. Instrument Society of America (ISA): S5.1-1973 Instrumentation Symbols and Identification RP7.1-1956 Pneumatic Control Circuit Pressure Test S7.3-1975 Quality Standard for Instrument Air RP 18.1-1965 Specifications and Guides for the Use of General Purpose Annunciators S5.4-1976 Instrument Loop Diagrams S8.1-1968 Instrument Enclosures for Industrial Environments RP20.1, 20.2 Specification Forms for Instruments S39.1-1972 Control Valve Sizing Equations S39.2-1972 Control Valve Capacity Test Procedures S51.1 Process Instrumentation Terminology 10. American Petroleum Institute (API): API RP 550 Manual on Installation of Refinery Instruments and Control Systems 11. Scientific Apparatus Makers Association (SAMA): PM 20.1-1973 Process Measurement and Control Terminology 12. Underwriters' Laboratory (UL): Subject 13, Subject 1227. 13. Factory Mutual (FM). 14. American National Standard Institute (ANSI): 15. Supplement to C37.90-1971, Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus (IEEE Std. 313-1971), C37.90a-1974. 16. National Bureau of Standards (NBS). 17. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): Tray Fire Tests, IEEE 383. Instrumentation General Provisions 13440-2 KEL00483 1.03 GUARANTEE A. GUARANTEE PERIOD: The Contractor shall provide guarantees as defined hereunder for a period of one year after final acceptance by the Owner. B. GUARANTEE REQUIREMENTS FOR ANALOG DEVICES: Each device shall perform its intended function within the specified operating accuracy and repeatability without more than 12 adjustments for any consecutive period of 12 months. The availability of each device shall be not less than 98.0 percent for any consecutive period of six months. Downtime of analog devices affecting more than 8 loops shall be considered a system failure. 1.04 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS The Instrumentation System Integrator Contractor's personnel shall have a minimum of five years of prior experience in furnishing, installation, testing, programming, debugging, start-up, and training for systems at least as large and similar to the one in this Contract. The system installer shall have employees who are qualified technicians for the duration of the contract located Dallas/Fort Worth area. The Contractor shall submit for evaluation within one week of Notice to Proceed, his instrumentation systems installer's company resumes complete with company history, project lists, locations, Owner, costs, type of system installed, and references with phone numbers. Installers not meeting these qualifications shall not be accepted. As a part of this contract, the instrumentation system installers shall assume complete system responsibility, including coordination and interfacing with all subsystems and equipment suppliers and manufacturers. The Contractor shall actively be involved in the control system integration industry for the last five years. The Contractor shall not act as a broker for the project; he shall provide and be responsible for all hardware, interfacing software, training, testing, and extended warranties. 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. The terms used in this specification conform to definitions in ISA S51.1, SAMA PMC 20.1- 1973 and RC 5-10-1963, except as modified below. 1. Device: An electronic or mechanical apparatus designed to perform a specific measurement or control function. 2. Equipment: The machinery used in a process, e.g., pumps, fans, etc. 3. Interchangeability error: The algebraic difference between the indication and true value of the measured variable as a result of exchanging a device with a replacement. 4. Loop: Any combination of interconnected transmitters, receivers, switches, alarms, indicators, controllers, computers, or final control elements. 5. Operating accuracy: Conformity of indicated value to accepted standard value or true value throughout specified operating conditions with a confidence level of 95 percent includes, but is not limited to, hysteresis, linearity, and operating influence of temperature, pressure, supply voltage, and transmitter power supply. Operating accuracy for loop is defined as root -mean -square (RMS) of individual device operation accuracies. 6. Response: The results of the act, or process of measuring the time difference between the time of a change in an input signal or a measured variable, and the time when the output, display, and final control element in the loop has changed to at least 60 percent of the change which should result from the input change. 7. Subsystem: A discrete subdivision of a system and an assemblage of parts, devices, or software modules designed to perform one or more of the specific tasks required for the system to accomplish its functions. Instrumentation General Provisions 13440-3 KEL00483 8. System: An assemblage of sometimes diverse parts, devices, or software modules serving a common set of measurement or control functions. 9. Time resolution: The result of the act or process of rendering distinguishable events occurring at nearly the same time. Expressed as a measurement of time in seconds. 10. Unit: Any combination of equipment items interconnected in a predetermined manner, performing one or more controlled actions toward a particular result. A discrete subdivision of a process. 11. Concealed - Accessible: Out of general sight, but can be easily reached by removing panels or access doors. 12. Concealed - Inaccessible: Out of general sight and cannot be easily reached except by removing a permanent part of the building or using special tools. 13. Exposed: Open to general view without removing panels, access doors, or a permanent part of the building. 14. Field termination point: Termination of a run of raceway from an instrument panel to the vicinity of a field instrument. Field termination point is usually within five horizontal feet from the field instrument. 15. Analog device: Any sensor, transmitter, indicator, recorder, controller, computing relay, or control valve which transmits or receives an analog signal. Excludes the analog portion of a digital system or I/O subsystems. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA: 1. Detail: Give sufficient detail to permit system configuration, installation, and wiring without reference to design drawings. Refer to Division 1 - General Provisions. 2. As a minimum, shop drawings shall include a bill of materials with original manufacturer's name and catalog number (re -labeled component information is not acceptable), original manufacturer's catalog cut sheets, front views, assembly drawings, nameplate schedules, electrical schematics, electrical connections diagrams, and piping connection diagrams. 3. Electrical, piping, and interconnection diagrams shall show all terminations of equipment, complete with conduit, cable, and equipment designations, and shall include terminal identification information. 4. Include size of all conduits, pipe, cables, and conductors. 5. Physical arrangement drawings shall include operating and servicing clearance requirements, cooling requirements, electrical power requirements, and cabling information. 6. Operator console configuration drawings shall include specific location of all keys and pushbuttons. 7. Logic drawer drawings shall show used space and expansion space. 8. Show appropriate tag numbers on all product data. 9. Software specifications for all software provided in addition to existing standard software. a. Include fully annotated source listings, input-output requirements, memory requirements, timing and sequencing requirements, flow chart showing functions performed, operating sequences and decision points, required system configuration, list of known or anticipated limitations of software modules, list of malfunction procedures to be followed for recovering from operator error or other malfunction, and description of how each module interfaces with calling and called programs. Instrumentation General Provisions 13440-4 KEL00483 b. Provide proposed screen layouts showing modifications to existing screens, and new screens: Show all displays, inputs, outputs, recorders, alarms and indications along with the associated signal tag number. B. TECHNICAL MANUALS: 1. Supply six (6) sets of technical manuals with software specifications to Owner's Representative no later than the equipment shipment date. Each set shall be bound in a standard size, three-ring, loose-leaf, vinyl plastic, hard -cover binder suitable for bookshelf storage. Binder ring size shall not exceed 2.5 inches. 2. Each set of technical manuals shall include a general and detailed description, a theory of operation description, detailed schematic drawings, specifications, and installation, connection, calibration, operating, troubleshooting, preventive maintenance, and overhaul instructions in complete detail with a clear and specific description of the steps the operators must take to perform each of the tasks and modes of operating specified. These manuals shall provide the Owner with comprehensive information on all systems and components to enable operation, service, maintenance and repair. Exploded or other detailed views of all instruments, assemblies, and accessory components shall be included together with complete parts lists and ordering instructions. These manuals are in addition to all applicable requirements of Division 1 - General Provisions. C. SPARE PARTS LIST: Contractor shall prepare and submit for Engineer's review a master spare parts list of all Division 13 items. All division 13 spare parts shall be turned over to the City at one time and stored into lockable cabinets. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 INFORMATION ON DRAWINGS A. The following information is indicated on the drawings: 1. Loop diagram on flow sheet for each control loop. Diagrams are schematic in nature and intended only as a guide to work to be performed. 2. Approximate location of primary elements, instrument panels, and final control elements. 3. Location of electrical distribution panel boards for instrument electrical power. 4. Location of equipment having alarms and equipment status contacts. 5. Location of equipment being controlled by system. B. The following information is not shown on drawings, but shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine, furnish, and coordinate with other divisions based upon systems specified. Show this information on project record drawings. 1. Instrument loop drawings per ISA S5.4 minimum, desired and optional items. 2. Location of electrical distribution panel boards supplying power to any device supplied under this Contract. 3. Detailed enclosure and instrument panel layouts, PLC enclosure layouts and wiring diagrams. 4. Detailed system configuration. Instrumentation General Provisions 13440-5 KEL00483 5. Raceway and cable routing for instrumentation wiring. 2.02 OPERATING CONDITIONS A. AMBIENT CONDITIONS: Provide equipment suitable for ambient conditions specified. Provide system elements to operate properly in the presence of radio frequency fields produced by portable RF transmitters with output of five watts operated at 24 inches from instruments in the presence of plant telephone lines, power lines, and electrical equipment, and in the presence of digital data transmission systems. B. FIELD LOCATIONS: Field equipment may be subjected to ambient temperatures from -5 to 50°C with direct radiation and relative humidity from 45 to 100 percent with condensation. C. POWER SUPPLY: Power supply will be 117 volts a -c, single-phase, 60 -hertz commercial power. Voltage variations will be at least plus or minus 8 percent. Certain loops shall have integral power supply as specified in the Contract Documents. Power supplies shall be provided in the panels as specified in the Contract Documents or required for a complete system, plus one spare. 2.03 SPARE PARTS A. Supply spare parts as indicated in these Specifications. B. Spare parts shall become property of the Owner. 2.04 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Provide equipment of solid-state construction utilizing second source semiconductors, unless otherwise specified. Derate components to assure dependability and long-term stability. Provide printed or etched circuit boards of glass epoxy, hand or wave soldered, of sufficient thickness to prevent warping. Coat printed circuit boards in field -mounted equipment with two mils of solderable conformal coating. Alignment and adjustments shall be noncritical, stable with temperature changes or aging, and accomplished with premium grade potentiometers. Do not insert components of specially selected values into standard electronic assemblies to meet performance requirements. Use parts indicated in instruction manuals, replaceable with standard commercial components of the same description without degrading performance of completed assembly. B. Use test equipment and instruments to simulate inputs and read outputs suitable for purpose intended and rated to an accuracy of at least five times greater than the required accuracy of device being calibrated. Such test equipment shall have accuracies traceable to the National Bureau of Standards as applicable. 2.05 SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS A. As a part of this Contract, the instrumentation systems Contractor shall coordinate with the City of Keller, and with all the sub -systems suppliers and manufacturers, during bidding, construction, testing, installation and start-up phases of the project. The coordination is to Instrumentation General Provisions 13440-6 KEL00483 assure that the instruments and sub -systems are in compliance with the Contract Documents and that the necessary tie-ins and interface signals with the system are provided as specified or required. B. The instrumentation system Contractor shall provide the Owner's staff with all required training and operating procedures, at no extra cost to the Owner, in addition to In -Plant SCADA training specified in Section 13500. The training schedule shall be coordinated with the Owner's Representative. Training shall include operating, testing, calibration and programming of the system, and simple troubleshooting of the system. The training shall include manuals which are specifically written for the system provided as described in Division 1 - General Provisions of these Specifications. C. The calibration, testing, and start-up of all the instruments whether existing or provided new, shall be done by the manufacturer's field technician/Engineer in the presence of the Owner. The Contractor shall provide a list of all manufacturers whose technicians will perform this work. The Contractor shall also provide a certified calibration report stating that each instrument shown or specified in the Contract Documents has been installed, tested and calibrated per manufacturer's recommendations and per these Contract Documents. D. Follow-up Services: After the acceptance of the system, the Contractor shall make two (2) trips to the project site for calibration and adjustment of all the instruments and devices, including the In -Plant SCADA system. The first trip shall be six months after acceptance of the complete system, and the next trip shall be six months after that. These trips are in addition to all warranty items, and shall be at no extra cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall provide the services of a trained technician for each trip with appropriate calibration and testing instruments. All defects shall be immediately remedied. The trips shall be coordinated with the Owner. E. All control software developed for this contract shall be delivered to the Owner stored on electronic media in a format suitable for installing on the existing equipment and new equipment installed under this contract. This includes all source code, complied code, link libraries, run-time libraries or other modules necessary to recreate an operational system in the event of a catastrophic failure or cessation of business by any of the Contractors. In addition, copies of all data bases and necessary associated files as configured after the final test shall be supplied on the same medium. END OF SECTION Instrumentation General Provisions 13440-7 K-EL00483 13442 INSTRUMENTATION COMMISSIONING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE Inspection, operational testing, adjustment, and calibration of each device, subsystem, and system, and placement of each device and system into service. The system supplier shall submit certified calibration reports for all instruments and loops for this project. The calibration shall comply with manufacturer's and ISA recommended practices. All calibrations shall be performed in the presence of Owner's authorized representative. The system supplier shall also recalibrate all instruments immediately prior to acceptance of the project by the Owner. Calibrations of all instruments shall be performed by the instrument manufacturer's factory technicians only. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Test Plan: 1. At least 60 days before commissioning starts, submit a description of the tests to be conducted. The test procedure shall be detailed. Step-by-step on a loop -by -loop basis. 2. Include list of test equipment, test procedures, checklists, and test report formats. 3. At the completion of each commissioning phase, deliver all test reports for phase to Owner with statement that phase test requirements have been satisfied. 4. Shop drawings. 5. All other applicable requirements of Division 1 - General Provisions. B. Responsibility: Review for acceptance by the Owner's representative of any plan, report, or other commissioning activity will not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to meet the Contract requirements. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Devices and systems are specified in other sections of this Specification. Reference to "devices" means all devices included in the Contract. B. Any device which fails to meet contract requirements or published performance specifications of the manufacturer must be repaired or replaced as directed by the Owner at no cost to the Owner. C. Demonstrate that test equipment is fully operational and properly calibrated. D. The Owner reserves the right to disapprove test equipment that is improper or functioning improperly. Instrumentation Commissioning 13442-1 K-EL00483 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 OBSERVATION A. The Owner and/or Engineer reserves the right to witness any test, inspection, calibration, or start-up activity. B. Notify the Engineer in writing at least two (2) working days in advance of any test. All tests executed without notifying the Engineer are invalid and must be repeated. C. Perform commissioning of each device, subsystem and system under direct supervision of the individual manufacturer's factory -trained representative. 3.02 REPORTS A. Prepare report showing test procedures, conditions, and results of each test. In the test report, give applicable contract requirements, manufacturer's performance specifications, permissible tolerances at each test point, actual values of test signals, and test results. B. Check -off List: 1. Maintain a check -off list by loop number indicating tasks remaining to be done to make loop operational. 2. Submit check -off list form at least 60 days before commissioning starts. 3. Submit check -off lists when requested by Owner. 4. Lists will be requested no more frequently than once a week. 3.03 SCHEDULING GUIDELINES FOR COMMISSIONING PHASES A. Perform all commissioning in accordance with the instructions on the Contract Drawings, these Specifications, manufacturer's instruction manuals, and the direction of the Owner's representative. B. Commission field devices after installation of field instruments and prior to commissioning the instrument or the control panel. C. After installation of the instrument or control panel, and prior to loop commissioning, commission panel -mounted devices and systems. D. After commissioning field devices and panel -mounted devices, commission loops. 3.04 REQUIREMENTS A. Transmitters and Receivers: 1. Remove shipping stops before starting with these procedures. 2. Have manufacturer's instruction manuals available. 3. Install miscellaneous components such as charts, illumination, etc., which have been supplied separately but are integral parts of equipment. 4. Test and exercise each instrument to demonstrate correct operation, first individually, then collectively, as a functional network. Instrumentation Commissioning 13442-2 KEL00483 5. Check calibration of and recalibrate, where necessary, instruments at a minimum of three points over full operational range and prove instruments to be within specified accuracy. Re -calibrate existing instruments shown as a part of this system. 6. Calibrate instruments individually and, where applicable, as loop (i.e., transmitter, controller, and valve). 7. Specified accuracy for loop is defined as root -mean -square summation (RMS) of individual device specified accuracies. 8. Individual device specified accuracy requirements shall be as specified by contract requirements, or by published manufacturer accuracy specifications whenever contract accuracy requirements are not specified. 9. Test each loop by applying simulated analog and/or discrete inputs to first elements of loop (i.e., applying simulated analog and/or discrete sensor signals) and measuring outputs from final elements of loop (i.e., controllers, alarms, indicators, etc.). 10. Apply continuously variable analog inputs to verify proper operation and setting of discrete devices (i.e., alarms, etc.). 11. Make provisional settings on controllers, alarms, etc., during loop installation tests. 12. Prepare calibration report on each instrument and loop. B. Integrators, Ratio Relay, Etc.: 1. Check devices in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Receiver integrators may be calibrated for proper operation and multiplication factor by feeding maximum input signal for a specified period of time using a stopwatch. 3. Ratio signals may be simulated to check proper ratio settings and output. C. Level Transmitters, and Pressure Transmitters: 1. Perform volumetric drawdown test for all flow meters and level transmitters. 2. Prepare test report for each meter and level transmitter. 3. If test results conflict with calibration report, recalibrate in accordance with subparagraph A above and repeat volumetric drawdown test. 4. Continue until drawdown test results prove calibration to be correct. D. Software Level Switches: Perform drawdown test for each level switch. Set switch in accordance with Specifications or, in absence of switch setting in Specifications, set in accordance with instructions from Owner's representative. E. PLC PID Controllers: 1. Check control action of each controller. 2. Check calibration of gain, integral and rate adjustments where specified, including all codes of operation. 3. For each setting, check output for at least three inputs evenly spaced through input range. 4. Check at least three settings for each adjustment evenly spaced throughout the adjustment range. 5. Run all diagnostic procedures. F. Interlocks: Ring and check interlocking circuits for conformance to Plans and Specifications. G. Start-up of Instruments: Instrumentation Commissioning 13442-3 KEL00483 1. Test each control loop under start-up and steady-state operating conditions to verify that proper and stable control is achieved using instruments in each instrument panel and control panel. a. Test control of final control elements using specified modes of manual and automatic control. b. Demonstrate bumpless transition between control station modes. e. Use signals from transducers, sensors, and transmitters. d. Simulated input data signals are not permitted. Simulated input date signals may be used subject to prior written approval on a case-by-case basis by the Owner's or Engineer's representative. 2. Set proportional band, reset rate and derivative settings for each control as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Verify transient stability of each control loop by applying control signal disturbances, monitoring amplitude and decay rate of control parameter oscillations, and making necessary controller adjustments to eliminate excessive oscillatory amplitudes and decay rates while retaining control sensitivity. Verify proper suppression of "reset wind-up." 4. Contractor shall be responsible for calibration and ringing out all devices which are to be interfaced with the distributed control system. END OF SECTION Instrumentation Commissioning 13442-4 KEL00483 13500 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM (SCADA) 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This section specifies furnishing, installing, testing, and start-up operations of a complete control sub -system by Wheco as indicated in the plans (sheet E4) and as specified herein. The system shall be totally integrated with the existing SCADA system. B. System Components: The system will consist of the following major components and subsystems: 1. One RTU (remote terminal unit) 2. Uninterruptible power supply (UPS). 3. Software. 4. Spare parts. 5. Radios C. Reference Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): a. C37.90.1, IEEE Standard Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Protective Relays and Relay Systems. b. C37.90.2, Trial Use Standard Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers. 2. Electronic Industries Association (EIA): a. RS -232-C, Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Communication Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange. b. RS -422-A, Electrical Characteristics of Balanced Voltage Digital Interface Circuits. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems. b. ICS 1. 1, Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control. c. ICS 4, Terminal Blocks for Industrial Use. d. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. e. Publication No. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V maximum). 4. National Electric Code. 5. ISA Standards 6. IEC 2 KV Isolation test 7. IEEE472/ANSI C37 -90A Surge withstand capability test. 8. IEEE 802.3 1.02 SUBMITTAL A. Submittals shall conform to the requirements set forth in Section 01300 and Section 13440 - Instrumentation General Provisions. Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition System (SCADA) 13500-1 KEL00483 B. Loop diagrams shall be prepared according to ISA Standard ISA -S5 and using loop numbers provided. C. Schematic ladder diagrams shall include all terminal blocks, hardware devices, software interlocks, software data links, and control. D. PLC panel layout, plans, elevations, sections, details, etc. E. A schedule defining all I/O, database reference, and point of origin or destination, and PLC system internal address. F. Software manuals shall be provided to configure the central system and technical review information. Provide sample program documentation from previous projects. G. Submit written description of functions, loops, and logic. H. Submit all SAMA Logic and Wiring Diagrams and ISA Logic Diagrams for all equipment requiring programming at the PLCs, with all set points and ranges indicated. I. Complete spare parts list with catalog and part numbers and quantities. J. Factory Test Reports. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Suppliers Qualifications: The complete system shall be configured, programmed, and installed by one qualified system supplier who is regularly engaged and qualified in designing and building instrument control systems. The systems company shall have been in existence under its own name for at least 5 years. Qualifications shall include five years of successfully providing similar systems, a qualified local area -based (D/FW metroplex) technical staff and design office, physical facilities, and personnel to complete the work specified, and competent service personnel to service and operate the equipment provided. The system suppliers shall assume complete systems responsibility, including coordination and interfacing with all subsystems and equipment suppliers and manufacturers. The installation supervisor shall have had experience in overseeing installation and start-up of at least three similar installations. The bidder shall submit, upon ENGINEER's request, complete company history, resumes of full time project manager for this project, other key full-time system analysts, programmers, technicians, and submit project list with costs, OWNER, contact person, phone number, etc. B. Tests: The complete system shall be assembled and tested at the job site. The OWNER'S representative and the ENGINEER'S presence will be required at the time of final testing at the system supplier's facilities. C. Standards: All applicable NEC, ISA, IEEE, NEMA, UL, ANSI, IEC, FCC, FM standards shall apply. All equipment shall be new and UL listed and labeled. D. Assembly, Storage, & Handling: The complete system, including all individual electronic component units, shall be assembled and stored in air-conditioned and heated facilities with Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition System (SCADA) 13500-2 KEL00483 low humidity. Once assembled and tested, the system shall be stored in air-conditioned and heated rooms. E. Acceptable PLC Manufacturers: 1. Motorolla — MOSCAD L 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install a programmable controller -based supervisory control and data acquisition system configured as a distributed processing network as defined by the Contract Documents. Control functions shall include digital logic control, PID control, and setpoint control. B. Include all hardware, firmware, software, and application programming and configuration, as necessary, to make the system completely functional and operational in accordance with the Contract Documents. All necessary components and equipment which are not specifically described in the Contract Documents, but which are necessary to configure an operational distributed control system as described herein, shall be identified, furnished, and installed by the CONTRACTOR. The system provided shall be the vendor's standard; a prototype system will not be accepted. 1.05 SPARE PARTS, TOOLS, AND SUPPLIES A. As a minimum, provide the following compatible spare parts, tools, and supplies as a part of this CONTRACT: 1. In addition to above, provide the manufacturer's recommended spare parts for each piece of equipment furnished. 1.06 WARRANTY A. The Equipment supplier and the CONTRACTOR shall warrant to the OWNER that the equipment delivered with reference to this specification complies with this specification. B. The equipment supplier and the CONTRACTOR shall warrant the equipment as to defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance of the project. Vendor shall include a copy of his special equipment warranty with the shop drawings. The warranty specified by this specification shall be exclusive, and in lieu of all other warranties whether written, implied, orally presented, or statutory. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS A. The control system shall be configured using microprocessor -based programmable controllers for local process control functions. Memory will be required such that there is a minimum of 20 percent spare, and will be non-volatile. Control functions such as register loading, register reading, and diagnostics may be downloaded from the central computer system programming. Automatic shutdown feature shall be selectable such that the desired field condition will be the default condition in the event of power loss or system failure. Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition System (SCADA) 13500-3 KEL00483 Power supplies shall be provided for the process controller as required with built-in protection against short-circuits, overcurrent, and overvoltage. Two communications ports shall be provided for each programmable controller. The programmable controller shall be capable of complete control, including PID control, digital logic control, batch, and setpoint control. The entire PLC system shall immediately shut down and annunciate the occurrence of any of the following abnormal circumstances: 1. Memory parity error. 2. Loss of signal communication between CPU and I/O's. 3. Loss of logic power to any portion of the system. 4. Halt or interruption of memory scan. 5. Detection of any incomplete relay ladder rungs in memory. B. The PLC system shall accomplish the control requirements of the loop descriptions, and Contract Documents. C. The design application and installation of the PLC system shall conform to NEMA ICS 1.1. D. PLC programming shall be documented annotated in detail, and factory tested. E. Human -machine interface (HMI) shall utilize the existing system CRT displays and keyboard(s). Interface functionality shall include: 1. Indication of process variables 2. Configuration of control loop parameters 3. Adjustment of controller output 4. Display of real time and historical process trends 5. Push button station controls 6. System and process status indicators 7. Graphic representation of plant operations with interactive status and measurement symbols 8. Annunciation F. The PLC system shall report the following events: 1. All entries initiated by operator including the following: a. Console key changes b. Beginning and final values of setpoint and output changes c. Mode changes (i.e., auto to manual) d. Which console changes were made from e. Time change was made 2. Events: a. Description of event b. Time of event c. Resolution of 100 milliseconds maximum G. The PLC system shall operate in ambient conditions of 32 to 1407 temperature and 0 to 95 percent relative humidity without the need for purging or air conditioning. Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition System (SCADA) 13500-4 KEL00483 H. Utilize a power turn -on time delay circuit when powering up or down DC power supplies to ensure power supply output voltage has reached the proper value prior to application of power to solid state logic and output circuits. I. Environmental Controls: 1. Over -temperature switches shall be utilized to provide special cooling if required to maintain operating temperatures within the manufacturer's specified range. J. Input/Output Connection Requirements: 1. Outputs shall be fused: a. External fusing shall be provided if output module does not possess internal fusing. b. Fuses provided external to output model shall: 1) Be in accordance with module manufacturer's specifications. 2) Be installed at terminal block. 2. Install bleeding resistors across input from field devices which leak current sufficiently to flicker input status light. 3. Make connections to I/O subsystem by terminating all field wiring on terminal blocks within the I/O enclosure. 4. Prewire I/O modules to terminal blocks. 5. Provide terminal blocks with continuous marking strip. 6. Size terminals to accommodate all active data base points and spares. 7. Provide terminals for individual termination of each signal shield. Stripping back twisted shielded pair and twisting together all the shields is not acceptable. 8. Field wiring shall not be disturbed when removing or replacing an I/O module. K. Where the PLC is utilized to control multiple trains of equipment, the PLC components (I/O modules, power supplies, etc.) shall be assigned so that the failure of one component does not affect equipment on all trains. I/O modules shall be segregated on a train basis unless required otherwise for safety reasons. L. All PLC control system components shall be capable of meeting or exceeding electromagnetic interference tests per ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2. M. Incorporate the following minimum safety measures: 1. Master Safety Relay: a. Cuts off power to I/O devices upon de-energization b. Multiple Master Safety Relays shall be available as required to provide ability to control separate designated blocks of the control program. 2. External Watchdog Function to Monitor: a. Internal processor clock failure b. Processor memory failure c. Loss of communication between processor and I/O modules d. Processor ceases to execute logic program 3. Safety Function Wiring: a. Emergency shutdown switches shall not be wired into the controller. 4. An emergency power disconnect shall be placed in the power circuit feeding the power supply as a means of removing power from the entire PLC system. a. Capacitor shall be placed across the disconnect to protect against current outrush through trails. Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition System (SCADA) 13500-5 KEL00483 5. Safe Wiring: a. Equipment failure mode shall be selected so that the loss of power or control signal to the equipment will result in the equipment either shutting down or operating safely. b. Activation of alarms and stopping of equipment shall result from the de-energization of control circuits, rather than the energization of control circuits. c. Low voltage control signal wires: 1) Place in conduit segregated for that purpose only 2) Twisted shielded wire pair 3) Not located in the same conduit or bundle with power wiring 6. Initial Safety Conditions: a. Utilize program module to dictate output states in a known and safe manner prior to running of control program. b. Utilize program each time PLC is re-initiated and the control program activated. 7. PLC Fault Relay: a. Placed in series with any other emergency stop conditions b. Opening of PLC Fault Contact: 1) Upon unsafe or undesirable system operation, including: • Loss of memory • Processor fault • Power supply fault • Isolation failure • Communications failure • Scan time overrun • Module failure 2) Results from de-energization of PLC fault relay 3) Causes Master Safety Relay to de -energize 8. Monitoring of Internal Faults and Display: a. Internal PLC system status and faults shall be monitored and displayed. Monitored items shall include: 1) Memory ok/loss of memory 2) Processor ok/processor fault 3) Battery ok/battery low 4) Power supply ok/power supply fault 5) Isolation failure 6) High CPU temperature 7) Scan time overrun 8) Module failure 9. Control of Programs: a. Protect access to PLC program loading with locked, key operated selector switches. 10. Effects of Failure: a. PLC system shall incorporate safe responses to the following failure effects: 1) Power losses, interruptions, excursions, dips, and transients. 2) Loss or corruption of memory 3) Information transfer corruption or loss 4) "Fail on" or "Fail off' of inputs or outputs 5) Unreadable signals 6) Addressing errors Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition System (SCADA) 13500-6 KEL00483 7) Processor faults 11. Design PLC system with high noise immunity to prevent occurrence of false logic signals resulting from switching transients, relay and circuit breaker noise or conducted and radiated radio frequency interference. 12. Incorporate noise suppression and inductive load suppression design into input, output, and logic modules 13. Operator Intervention: a. Logic system failure shall not preclude proper operator intervention b. Safety shutdown of equipment or a system shall require manual operator intervention before the equipment or system operation may be reestablished. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. PLC System Central Processor Unit (CPU): Completely solid state CPU designed to provide: a. Digital relay logic b. Analog loop control c. Other required control functions: 1) Counting 2) Floating point math computations 3) Timing 2. To provide communications with other control systems and man -machine interfaces as specified. 3. To use electrical ladder diagram style programming for discrete logic applications. 4. Memory: a. Battery -backed RAM 5. Memory battery backup shall be capable of 60 days memory retention with fresh batter. a. Provide visual indication of battery status and alarm low battery voltage. b. Memory battery backup shall be capable of 14 days memory retention after the "Battery Low" indicating LED is on. 6. Plug-in card design to allow quick field replacement of fault devices. a. Provide unit designed for field replacement and expansion of memory without requiring rewiring or use of special tools. 7. 20 percent minimum spare useable memory capacity after all required programming is in place and operating. 8. Capable of executing all control functions required by the Contract Drawings including digital and analog loops. 9. Built-in three -mode (proportional -integral -derivative) control capabilities. a. As directly selectable algorithms requiring no user knowledge of programming languages. 10. On line reconfigurable. 11. Lighted status indicators for "RUN" and "FAILURE." 12. Capable of manual or automatic control mode transfer from the HMI system or from within the control strategy. Transfer shall be bumpless and balanceless. B. Input/Output (I/O) Modules 1. Provide plug-in modular -type I/O racks with cables to connect to all other required PLC system components. 2. Provide 1/0 system with: Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition System (SCADA) 13500-7 KEL00483 a. UO solid state boards with status lights indicating I/O status and board failure. b. Electric isolation between logic and field device. c. Individually fused outputs with blown fuses indication. d. Interchangeable boards for similar I/O type to allow substitution of operating boards for failed units by the operator. e. Capability of withstanding low energy common mode transient to 1500 V without failure. f. Incorporate noise suppression design. g. Capable of meeting or exceeding surge -withstand capability tests, per ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1. h. Capable of meeting or exceeding electrical noise tests, NEW, ICS 1-109.60-109.66. i. Capable of being removed and inserted into the I/O rack under power, without affecting any other I/O modules in the rack. 3. Discrete I/O Modules: a. Interface to ON/OFF devices b. UO status indicator module front c. Voltage rating to match circuit voltage d. Output module current rating: 1) Match maximum circuit current draw 2) Minimum 1.5 A/point for 120 V AC applications e. Isolated modules for applications where one module interfaces with devices utilizing different sources of power. f. Individually fused with blown fuse indication. 4. Analog I/O Modules: a. Input modules to accept signals indicated on Drawings or Specifications b. 12 bit resolution c. I/O chassis supplied power for powering connected field devices d. Isolated (differential) inputs and outputs e. User configurable for desired fault response state f. Provide output signals as indicated on Drawings and Specifications g. Individual D/A converter for each output module h. Individual A/D converter for each input module 5. Spare I/O Modules: Each LPU-PLC shall have a minimum of 20 percent spare analog and 20 percent spare discrete I/O points installed and wired to terminal blocks, isolates, surge devices, and relays inside the LPU. C. Power Supply Units: 1. Provide regulated power units: a. Designed to operate with PLC system and shall provide power to: 1) All components of PLC system 2) Two -wire or four -wire field instruments 3) Other devices as indicated on Drawings or Specifications b. Capable of supplying PLC system when all of the specified spare capacity is utilized c. Each power supply shall be sized such that it will carry no more than 75 percent of capacity under normal loads. 2. Electrical service to PLC system is 105 to 125 V, 60 HZ, +1 percent, 1 PH power. 3. Separate AC circuit breakers shall be provided for each power supply. Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition System (SCADA) 13500-8 KEL00483 4. If the PLC system is field expandable beyond the specified spare capacity, and if such expansion requires power supply modification, note such requirements in the submittals and allow room in the PLC system enclosure. 5. Provide integral battery backup to maintain 60 seconds upon loss of all AC power. This is required to ensure transient power surges and dips do not affect the operation of the PLC system. 6. Capable of meeting or exceeding electrical noise tests, NEMA ICS 1-109.60-109.66. 7. Capable of meeting or exceeding surge -withstand capability tests per ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1. 8. Power Distribution: a. Immune to transients and surges resultant from noisy environment. b. Shall provide constant voltage level DC distribution to all devices. 9. Provide UPS in PLC enclosures. 2.03 HMI CENTRAL CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM A. The existing central computer system shall be configured and programmed to maintain a real- time database of all input/output points within the system. The central system shall monitor and control the local process controllers; it will log selectable points within the system, and be capable of data management such that all data is available while monitoring concurrently. B. Report Generation: Contractor shall modify existing reports for up to 20 daily and 20 monthly reports. Alarm/event logs are to print all alarms immediately as they occur. The message is to include the time of the alarm, point name, and a description of the alarm. Time of the operator acknowledgment and return to normal are also to be printed. Events, including operator log on, system control point change, and operator control functions, are also to be reported. The system is to be equipped with a facility for time -generated reports such as alarm summary, shift log of events, etc. 1. The following custom reports shall be generated: a. Standard Format: 1) User configurable 2) Contain selected information from any log, event, or alarm list 3) Capable of producing custom log report for periodic and on -demand printing of a list of process or calculated variables b. Variable Format: 1) User configurable 2) Ability to include any system data including: • Calculated time based on averages • Totalizations • Minimum values • Minimum times • Maximum values • Maximum times c. Reports shall not require software programming to setup. d. All reports shall be output to standard print devices, to ASCII files and to Microsoft Excel. Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition System (SCADA) 13500-9 KEL00483 C. Trending: Trend graphics are to be provided as either a stand-alone tool for analysis, or as a real-time recorder. Compression techniques shall be provided for automatic rescaling, optimal resolution, and time slot averaging to give the operator an efficient interface for analysis. Datapoints for trending are to be selectable directly from the database by scrolling through the tag database and selecting the desired points to trend. The trend facility is to provide the ability to generate reports to provide the operator with a hard copy of his analysis. A sample report form is include at the end of this Section. D. Networking: Facilities shall be provided to network the system with microcomputers such that the real-time database generated within the system can be easily transferred to other computers for manipulation and analysis E. Displays: Displays are to be accessible through the use of the mouse and/or touch screen. Status is displayed on the screen through the use of color and alphanumerics. The mouse and touch screen can change the status of a discrete device or the output value of an analog device. Displays shall be easily built or reconfigured through the use of an established library of symbols. The system shall be easily modified to change the values displayed, the format and arrangement of the display. Status colors changed within each display shall include tanks, line, rotating equipment, etc. Refer to the end of this Section for an example screen, screen tree organization chart, and individual screen listing with description of the screen. "The graphic displays shall have the following additional capabilities: 1. Utilize ISA symbols for devices 2. Have selectable colors 3. Utilize loop numbers, equipment numbers, and valve number 4. Devices shall dynamically change colors on status change 5. Graphics shall be pixel oriented 6. Level indication shall be dynamic 7. Have bar -graph capability 8. Have complete touch screen interface. 9. Graphic icon library." 2.04 ENCLOSURES FOR PLC A. Housings: Each PLC with its UPS unit shall be housed in NEMA 12 stainless steel enclosure. It shall have lifting eyes and a front door provided with a key locking handle per Specifications Section 13443. B. The remote station shall be equipped with a 120 volt grounded duplex receptacle and a switched service light free of RFI. All switches, fuses, terminal blocks, etc., shall have permanent nameplates or labels for identification. C. All equipment shall be mounted in such a manner that all maintenance may be accomplished with easy access through the door(s). Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition System (SCADA) 13500-10 KEL00483 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. System equipment shall be installed where indicated in the Contract Documents. Power and signal connections between- components shall provide the specified functions. Install according to equipment manufacturer's instruction. B. The system Supplier Contractor shall utilize their own printers, CRT's, and computers for programming, testing, and start-up. The use of the OWNER's computers, CRTs, or printers shall not be acceptable until the entire system has been installed, debugged, programmed, and operated to ENGINEER's satisfaction. 3.02 PROGRAMMING A. The loop descriptions and diagrams shown in the Contract Documents are functional only and do not attempt to specify detail program coding that may be required. The CONTRACTOR shall utilize this functional information to develop complete application programming for the PLC equipment provided under this CONTRACT. Programs shall be designed to provide fail-safe operation of equipment in case of PC logic or power supply failure. Fail-safe shall be defined as "stopped" for all drives and "closed" for valves, unless otherwise specified. Up to five (5) graphic pages shall be required for the operator -interface, and will be developed via a menu -driven color graphics editor. Interrupting logic between the RTU and central computer system shall be required as per system sequence of operation. An additional 3 graphics shall be developed in the field in coordination with the OWNER and the ENGINEER. The graphics shall be sufficiently detailed to include all equipment, pipes, valves, solenoids, meters, switches, etc. Graphics shall include equipment tag numbers and display the current flow rates, levels, quantities, status, elapsed time of equipment, etc. All such work shall be done at no extra cost to the OWNER. Before programming the graphics, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish a set of drawings for ENGINEERS review. 3.03 DOCUMENTATION A. Following delivery to the site, the equipment manufacturer, in the presence of the ENGINEER, shall demonstrate operation of the complete system. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide documentation for all application software. Documentation system shall be diagrams and shall show all input devices to the left of the left "power rail" and all outputs to the right of the right "power rail." The diagrams shall show all device codes and functional description used in the project manual, and shall also show PLC address codes, element codes, and I/O assembly codes, modules numbers, and terminal numbers. 3.04 TESTS A. All elements of the SCADA system, both hardware and software, shall be tested to demonstrate that the total system satisfies all of the requirements of the Specifications. Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition System (SCADA) 13500-11 KEL00483 B. The Contractor shall furnish and install the field instruments, PLC, remote input/output (RI/0), and interface equipment in a schedule to meet the construction sequencing. C. As a minimum, the testing shall include the following: 1. Software Acceptance Tests (SAT) 2. Operational Readiness Tests (ORT) 3. Functional Demonstration Tests (FDT) 4. 30 -Day Acceptance Test D. Each test shall be in the cause and effect format. The person conducting the test shall initiate an input (cause) and, upon the system's or subsystem's producing the correct result (effect), the specific test requirement will have been satisfied. E. All tests shall be conducted in accordance with Engineer -approved procedures and documented. Each specific test to be performed shall be described and a space provided after it for signoff by the appropriate party after its satisfactory completion. F. Copies of signoff test procedures, forms, and checklists will constitute the required test documentation. G. Provide all special testing materials and equipment. Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process variables, equipment, and data. Where it is not practical to test with real process variables, equipment, and data, provide suitable means of simulation. Define these simulations techniques in the test procedure. H. Coordinate all testing with other Contractors, the OWNER, and the Engineer. The OWNER and/or ENGINEER will actively participate in many of the tests. The OWNER and/or ENGINEER reserves the right to test or retest any and all specified functions whether or not explicitly stated in the approved test procedures. The OWNER and/or ENGINEER reserves the right to observe and/or inspect the work during any phase. J. The Engineer's decision shall be final regarding the acceptability and completeness of all testing. 3.05 SOFTWARE ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT) A. Prior to the start of the witnessed Software Acceptance Test (SAT), the entire system shall be installed on site, inspected and tested to ensure that it is fully operational and ready for the SAT demonstration testing. B. All panels, consoles, and assemblies of the subsystem shall be completely installed except I/O signals to field elements or devices shall not be connected. The system shall be inspected and tested to verify that they are in conformance with related submittals and the Contract Documents. C. The PLC and RI/O, except for primary elements, shall be interconnected and tested to ensure that the system is fully operational. The system shall be operated without signals leaving or entering from the field elements or devices for at least one week to verify that it is capable of Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition System (SCADA) 13500-12 KEL00483 continuous operation. Outputs to and inputs from the excluded primary elements shall be simulated. D. The system shall be tested, installed on site to demonstrate that it is operational and in conformance with the Contract Documents. E. Notify the Engineer and OWNER in writing a minimum of 30 days in advance of the proposed starting date for the Software Acceptance Test. At the time of notification, submit any revisions to the detailed test procedure previously approved by the Engineer in the Project System Plan. F. The purpose of the test shall be to witness and verify the functionability, performance, and stability of the hardware and software. The system must operate continually for 24 hours without failure before the test shall be judged successful. Successful completion of this test shall be the basis for approval of the system. G. The Software Acceptance tests shall be performed on all the equipment installed including the system and PLC panels. The ST shall be a two-part text procedure; Part I shall include the PLC sub -system to verify all UO addresses and proper step sequence for all features. Part II shall add the HMI to verify all screen displays, addressing and report generation. H. Where hardware items are of standard manufacture and in current production, the manufacturer shall certify that applicable tests have been performed and met, in accordance with IEEE and ISA Standards, and be prepared to supply copies of data to Engineer upon request. Such statements shall accompany the equipment submittals called for in SUBMITTALS of this Section. Any assemblage of devices together with operating programs shall be tested together as provided herein. The various tests performed during Software Acceptance Test shall be designed to demonstrate that the hardware and software fulfill all the requirements of the Contract Documents. The test conditions shall resemble, as closely as possible, actual conditions. Any additional hardware or software that may be required to successfully verify system operation shall be supplied at no cost to the OWNER. J. Some of tests to be performed shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Building and loading the system database. 2. Conduct online modifications to the database. 3. Demonstrate operability of the interfaces (hardware and software). 4. Demonstrate operability of the data communication network. 5. Demonstrate all system software functions specified. 6. Verify the displays and interactive capabilities of an operator's console. 7. Simulate selected normal and abnormal operating conditions to verify the performance of the monitoring and control functions. 8. Simulate every UO point by opening or shorting digital inputs, inject appropriate signals into every analog input point, and measure the output signal from each analog output point. K. All deficiencies identified during these tests shall be corrected and retested prior to completing the Software Acceptance Test. Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition System (SCADA) 13500-13 KEL00483 L. The following documentation shall be made available to the Engineer at the test site both before and during the Software Acceptance Test. 1. All drawings and specifications, addenda, and change orders. 2. Master copy of the test procedure. 3. List of the equipment to be tested including make, model, and serial number. 4. Design -related hardware submittals applicable to the equipment being tested. 5. Preliminary software documentation submittal. M. The daily schedule during these tests shall be as follows: 1. Testing and meetings: Nominally 8 hours per day; 24 hours per day if required to meet schedule. 2. Morning meetings to review the day's test schedule. 3. Evening meetings to review the day's test results and to review or revise the next day's test schedule. N. All test data and procedures followed during testing shall be logged, and certified copies of the logs shall be provided to the Engineer and OWNER. O. The Engineer will observe each test once on a pass -fail basis. The Engineer alone has the authority to determine if a test passes or fails. Only four (4) fifteen minute windows per day will be allowed during the test procedure to make corrections to software and successfully pass a re -test. Otherwise, that test will be declared a failure. If a test fails, it will be put on a retest schedule. If other tests to follow rely on a particular test passing, then the following tests will also be placed on a retest schedule even though they were not tested before. Retesting shall not interrupt the test schedule. The CONTRACTOR may schedule retest days during the testing period, but not more than two per week. All retesting shall only occur on a day designated in the schedule or at the end of testing. P. All time and expense incurred by the Engineer and/or OWNER'S staff for all retests shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR and paid to the OWNER. Time and expense incurred shall be on a time and material basis tracked by the Engineer and OWNER for their own staff and presented to the CONTRACTOR on a periodic basis. Q. The CONTRACTOR shall expedite the correction of any deficiency discovered during testing. The CONTRACTOR shall have personnel from each trade to standby during the test period to immediately correct, or adjust any item of software or hardware or equipment causing a test to fail. 3.06 OPERATIONAL READINESS TEST (ORT) A. General: Prior to start-up, the installed system shall be certified (inspected, tested, and documented) that it is ready for operation. Download all database on job computers from this test onwards. The OWNER and ENGINEER shall be notified when ORT starts. Copies of ORT forms that have been signed off by the CONTRACTOR shall be copied and sent to the OWNER and ENGINEER on a daily basis for record purposes only. No signature by the ENGINEER or OWNER is required for ORT forms. B. Loop/Component Inspections and Tests: The system shall be checked for proper installation, calibrated, and adjusted on a loop -by -loop and component -by -component basis to ensure that Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition System (SCADA) 13500-14 KEL00483 it is in conformance with related submittals and these specifications. Actual real-time signals generated from the field devices shall be used. Simulation of field signals shall not be permitted. This test is intended to actually operate the entire process and to find and correct all real-time operational deficiencies. The Loop/Component Inspections and Tests shall be implemented using Engineer - approved forms and checklists. a. Each loop shall have a Loop Status Report to organize and track its inspection, adjustment, and calibration. These reports shall include the following: 1) Project name 2) Loop number 3) Tag number for each component 4) Checkoffs/signoffs for each component • Tag/identification • Installation • Termination - wiring • Termination - tubing • Calibration/adjustment 5) Checkoffs/signoffs for the loop • Panel interface terminations • I/O interface terminations • I/O signal operation • Inputs/outputs operational: received/sent, processed, adjusted • Total loop operational 6) Space for comments 7) Space for signoff by Contractor Each active analog subsystem element and each I/O module shall have a Component Calibration Sheet. These sheets shall include the following: 1) Project name 2) Loop number 3) Component tag number or I/O module number 4) Component code number analog system 5) Manufacturer (for analog system element) 6) Model number/serial number (for analog system) 7) Summary of functional requirements, for example: • For indicators and recorders: Scale and chart ranges • For transmitters/converters: Input and output ranges • For computing elements: Function • For controllers: Action (direct/reverse) control modes (PID) • For switching elements: Unit range, differential (fixed/adjustable), reset (auto/manual) • For I/O modules: Input or output 8) Calibrations; for example: • For analog devices: Required and actual inputs and outputs at 0, 10, 50, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling • For discrete devices: Required and actual trip points and reset points • For controllers: Mode settings (PID) Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition System (SCADA) 13500-15 KEL00483 • For I/O modules: Required and actual inputs or outputs of 0, 10, 50, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling 9) Space for comments 10) Space for signoff by the Contractor 2. Maintain the Loop Status Reports and Component Calibration Sheets at the jobsite and make them available to the Engineer and Owner upon request. 3. These inspections and tests do not require witnessing. However, the Engineer will review the Loop Status Reports and Component Calibration Sheets and spot-check their entries periodically and upon completion of the Operational Readiness Test. Any deficiencies found shall be corrected. 3.07 FUNCTIONAL DEMONSTRATION TEST (FDT) A. Once ORT has been completed and operational readiness has been confirmed, a witnessed Functional Demonstration Test shall be performed on the complete system to demonstrate that it is operating and in compliance with the Contract Documents. Each specified function shall be demonstrated on a paragraph -by -paragraph, loop -by -loop, and component -by - component basis. This test shall be scheduled and conducted only after the plant has been detected and resolved. B. Loop -specific and non -loop -specific tests shall be the same as specified under SOFTWARE and OPERATIONAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS except that the entire installed PICS shall be tested and all functions demonstrated. C. Simulation of field signals, or simulation of the response of the process, or the response of individual components, or the functions being monitored or controlled, shall not be permitted. Simulation may be permitted with the express permission of the ENGINEER. The decision to simulate is the ENGINEER's alone. The CONTRACTOR shall include in the Contract Price the time necessary to wait for all process responses. D. Updated versions of the documentation called for under SOFTWARE and OPERATIONAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS shall be made available to the Engineer at the jobsite both before and during the test. In addition, one copy of the approved Instrumentation O&M Manual shall be made available to the Engineer at the jobsite both before and during testing. The approved schedule shall be followed strictly on an item -by -item basis. Combining of test items shall be at the discretion of the ENGINEER alone. The CONTRACTOR shall include in the Control Price adequate time necessary to complete each test item one at a time. E. The daily schedule called for under SOFTWARE and OPERATIONAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS shall also be followed during the Functional Demonstration Test. F. The Engineer will observe each test once on a pass -fail basis. The Engineer alone has the authority to determine if a test passes or fails. Only one (1) fifteen minute window per day will be allowed during the test procedure to make corrections to software or to field equipment and successfully pass a re -test; otherwise, that test will be declared a failure. If a test fails, it will be put on a retest schedule. If other tests to follow rely on a particular test which has failed, then the following tests will also be placed on a retest schedule even though they were not tested. Retesting shall not interrupt the test schedule. The CONTRACTOR Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition System (SCADA) 13500-16 KEL00483 may schedule retest days during the testing period, but not more than two per week. All retesting shall only occur on a day designated in the schedule or at the end of testing. G. All time and expense incurred by the Engineer and/or OWNER'S staff for all retests shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR and paid to the OWNER. Time and expense incurred shall be on a time and material basis tracked by the Engineer and OWNER for their own staff and presented to the CONTRACTOR on a periodic basis. H. The CONTRACTOR shall expedite the repair or correction of any deficiency discovered during testing. The CONTRACTOR shall have personnel representing each trade to standby during the test period to immediately correct, repair, or adjust any item of hardware, software or field equipment causing a test to fail. I. The system shall operate continuously for 100 hours without failure before this test will be considered successful. 3.08 30 -DAY ACCEPTANCE TEST A. All database errors must be corrected prior to the start of the 30 -Day Acceptance Test. The 30 -Day Acceptance Test will not be considered successful until all database is correct. B. Any malfunction during the test shall be analyzed and corrections made by the Contractor. The Engineer and Owner will determine whether any such malfunctions are sufficiently serious to warrant a repeat of the test. The cost of a retest shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR as specified. C. After completion of the Functional Demonstration Test and Plant Start-up, the Contractor shall be responsible for operation of the entire System for a period of 30 consecutive days, without single non -field repairable malfunction. D. During this test, Contractor personnel shall be present as required. The Contractor shall provide personnel for this test who have an intimate knowledge of the hardware and software of the system and also are familiar with the overall process. The Supplier shall be on-site a minimum of 8 hours a day and be on call for the rest of the day, during the 30 -Day Acceptance Test. E. While this test is proceeding, the Owner shall have full use of the system. Only operating personnel shall be allowed to operate equipment. F. Any malfunction, during this 30 consecutive day test period, which cannot be corrected within 24 hours of occurrence by the Contractor's personnel, or more than two similar failures of any duration, will be considered as a non -field -repairable malfunction. G. Upon completion of repairs, by the Supplier, the test shall be repeated as specified herein. H. In the event of rejection of any part or function, the Supplier shall perform repairs within 5 days or replacement within 30 days. I. Upon successful completion of the 30 -Day Acceptance Test, approval of all as -built drawing and O&M Manuals, completion of all related Owner training, and delivery of all spare, Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition System (SCADA) 13500-17 KEL00483 expendable, and test equipment, the systems shall be considered substantially complete and the warranty period shall commence. 3.09 TRAINING A. Provide an integrated training program for the Owner's personnel, both at the Supplier's factory or training center and at the jobsite. The Contractor shall submit a detailed training schedule and syllabus for approval. Tailor the training program to meet the specific needs of the Owner's personnel. Include training sessions, classroom and field, for managers, engineers, operators, and maintenance personnel. B. The training shall be carried out by technically competent and experienced instructors. C. One training day shall consist of 8 hours of actual instruction time. Provide instruction on any or all three working shifts as needed to accommodate the Owner's personnel schedule. The actual training schedule shall be coordinated with the Owner. D. The Contract shall hire a professional firm regularly engaged in video tape and/or film productions to video, tapes of all of the factory and on-site training sessions. The video tapes and all rights there to shall become the property of the Owner. The Owner may re -use or distribute the video tapes at their discretion. 3.10 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING A. O&M training for each subsystem shall be in accordance with the requirements specified under the related Instrumentation specification sections. B. All training shall be given using only equipment identical to the equipment provided on this Contract or currently owned by the Owner. C. Unless otherwise specified, hardware maintenance training shall be suitable for instrument technicians who have at least a 2 -year associate engineering or technical degree, or equivalent education and experience in electronics, instrumentation, or digital systems. 3.11 ON-SITE SUPERVISION The Supplier shall provide, on-site, an experienced resident engineering manager to supervise and coordinate all of the on-site activities. This resident engineering manager shall be on-site as required during the total period to effect all the activities relating to the PICS. 3.12 START-UP AND TESTING TEAM A. The Supplier shall provide, on-site, a team of experienced engineering, technician, trades personnel, and software/configuring personnel during the total construction period to: 1. Thoroughly check the installation, termination, and adjustment of all the subsystems and their components. 2. Perform and complete all on-site tests. 3. Provide start-up assistance. END OF SECTION Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition System (SCADA) 13500-18 KEL00483 DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 15103 BUTTERFLY VALVES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to design, manufacture, assemble, test, and install butterfly valves. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. EXPERIENCE REQUIREMENTS Valves shall be the product of a manufacturer who has had at least 10 years of successful experience in the design, manufacture, and application of butterfly valves for water transmission service. B. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1. Acceptable Valve Manufacturers are as follows: a. American Darling b. M&H C. Mueller d. DeZurik e. Pratt 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: 1. Shop drawings 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Manuals shall be prepared by the Equipment Manufacturer and shall also incorporate appropriate final certified shop drawings. Manuals may the Manufacturer's standard instructions, but shall be supplemented as necessary to cover any special feature not included in standard material. 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: AWWA C-504 "Standard Specification for Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves" AWWA C-540 "Standard Specification for Power -actuating Devices for Valves and Sluice Gates" AWWA C-550 "Standard Specification for Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants" ASTM A-48 "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings" ASTM A-126 "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings" ASTM A-536 "Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings" Butterfly Valves 15103-1 KEL00483 ASTM B-148 "Standard Specification for Aluminum -Bronze Castings" ANSI American National Standards Institute NEMA National Electric Manufacturers Association 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE [Not Used] 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS [Not Used] 1.07 OPTIONS [Not Used] 1.08 GUARANTEES A. Vendor shall warrant the equipment furnished under this specification for a period of one (1) year against defects in materials and workmanship and operational failure. B. In the event of failure of any part or parts of the equipment during the fust year of service, provided that the equipment has been operated and maintained in accordance with good practice, the Vendor shall furnish, deliver, and install the defective part or parts at his own expense. C. The first year of service shall be interpreted as the 12 -month period following the installation, adjusting, and acceptance testing, and the start of actual operation of the equipment, or 20 months following delivery of the equipment, whichever comes first. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. GENERAL Valves shall be tight closing, rubber -seated type with rubber seats that are securely fastened to the valve body. Valves shall be bubble -tight at rated pressures with flow in either direction and shall be satisfactory for applications involving valve operation after long periods of inactivity. Butterfly valves shall conform to the design, strength, testing, and performance requirements of AWWA C- 504. B. BUTTERFLY VALVES VALVE BODY: Constructed of cast iron ASTM A-126, Class B, ASTM A-48, Class 40, or of Ductile Iron ASTM A-536. Valve body shall have ANSI Class 125 or 250 flanges. Two (2) trunnions for shaft bearings shall be integral with each valve body. 2. VALVE DISC: Cast iron conforming to ASTM A-126, Class B, ASTM A-48, Class 40, or Ductile Iron ASTM A-536. There shall be no external ribs cast transverse to the flow path. VALVE SHAFTS: Turned, ground and polished stainless steel with diameters as required in AWWA C-504. Shafts may consist of a one-piece unit extending completely through the valve disc, or may be of the "stub shaft" type, which comprises two (2) separate shafts inserted into the valve disc hubs. If of the "stud shaft" construction, each stub shaft shall be inserted into the valve disc hubs for a distance of at least 1-1/2 shaft diameters. Disc shall be attached to the shaft with tapered or wedged keying devices. Butterfly Valves 15103-2 KEL00483 4. VALVE SEATS: Having natural or synthetic rubber resilient seats attached to the valve body to provide tight shut off at the pressure specified. The mating seat surface shall be 18-8 stainless steel or a 95% pure nickel overlay. VALVE BEARINGS: Valves shall be fitted with sleeve -type bearings. Bearings shall be of corrosion resistant and "self -lubricated" materials that will not deteriorate natural or synthetic rubber. 6. VALVE SHAFT SEALS: Where shafts project through the valve bodies for operator connection, a shaft seal shall be provided. Seal shall be of split -V or O-ring type. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Install valves in existing piping with valve shaft vertical and with the disc seal facing upstream of the flow. Installation shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Upon completion of installation of the equipment, an acceptance test to verify the satisfactory operation of each valve shall be conducted. The test shall be conducted in a manner approved by and in the presence of the Engineer. The unit must perform in a manner acceptable to the Engineer before final acceptance will be made by the Owner. 3.03 CLEAN AND ADJUST Adjustments shall be in accordance with the Valve Manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 SCHEDULES Valves requirements under this section are tabulated below: END OF SECTION Butterfly Valves 15103-3 KEL00483 10 MGD Varies (See Plans) 150B 100 psi 150 psi Open/Shut Potable Water END OF SECTION Butterfly Valves 15103-3 KEL00483 15114 PILOT OPERATED SOLENOID CONTROL VALVE 1.00 GENERAL 1.02 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and appurtenances necessary to install and test the pilot operated solenoid control valve. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. EXPERIENCE REQUIREMENTS Valves shall be the product of a manufacturer who has a least 10 years experience of successful experience in the design, manufacture and application of pilot operated altitude control valves used in water service. B. ASSEMBLY The valve, strainers, piping, opening and closing speed control valves and other appurtenances shall be completely assembled, wired and tested at the factory. The valve seats shall be adjusted at the factory for correct seating. C. MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE The valve manufacturer shall furnish the services of a competent service technician for the duration of time necessary to assist in the installation, adjustment and start-up operation, and field acceptance testing. The technician shall instruct the Owner's personnel in the proper care, maintenance, adjustment and operation of the equipment and shall issue a written certification that the equipment has been properly installed. D. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Acceptable valve manufacturers include the following: a. CLA-VAL Company b. Watts Regulators 1.04 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: a. Shop drawings b. Operation and maintenance manuals 1.05 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety. ASTM A48 "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings" ASTM B61 Pilot Operated Solenoid Control Valve 15114-1 KEL00483 ASTM B62 AWWA C-550 "Standard Specification for Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants" ANSI American National Standards Institute NEMA National Electric Manufacturers Association 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS The equipment furnished under this specification shall be suitable for use in a potable municipal water system. The equipment will be installed inside the elevated tank tower. 1.07 GUARANTEES A. Vendor shall warrant the equipment furnished under this specification for a period ofthree (3) years against defects in materials, workmanship failure, provided that the valve is installed and used in accordance with all applicable instructions. Electrical components shall have a one (1) year warranty. B. In the event of failure of any part or parts of the equipment during the first year of operation, the Vendor shall furnish, deliver and install the defective part or parts at no additional expense to the Owner. C. The first year of service shall be interpreted as the 12 -month period following installation, adjusting, acceptance testing and start of actual operation of the equipment, or 20 months following delivery of the equipment, whichever comes fust. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. GENERAL The valve shall be hydraulically operated, single diaphragm -actuated, globe pattern designed to control water level in the elevated storage tank. The valve shall consist of three major components: the body with Buna-N synthetic rubber seat installed, the cover with bearings installed, and the diaphragm assembly. The diaphragm assembly shall be the only moving part and shall forma sealed chamber in the upper portion of the valve, separating operating pressure from line pressure. Packing glands and/or stuffing boxes are not permitted and there shall be no pistons operating the main valve or pilot controls. Valves shall be drip tight at rated pressures with flow in two directions and shall be satisfactory for applications involving valve operation after long periods of inactivity. The diaphragm assembly containing a non-magnetic 303 stainless steel stem of sufficient diameter to withstand high hydraulic pressures shall be fully guided at both ends by a bearing in the valve cover and an integral bearing in the valve seat. The seat area shall be the same diameter as the flanges. The main valve seat and the stem bearing in the valve cover shall be removable. Cover bearing, disc retainer, and seat shall be made of the same material. All necessary repairs and/or modifications other than replacement of the main valve body shall be possible without removing the valve from the Pilot Operated Solenoid Control Valve 15114-2 KEL00483 1'-'-' C. Q pipeline. Components including cast material shall be of North American manufacture. OPERATION The altitude control valve is a self-contained unit consisting of a diaphragm -operated packless main valve, a diaphragm -operated high capacity auxiliary valve and a packless three-way solenoid pilot valve. The three-way solenoid pilot alternately applies pressure to or exhausts pressure from the diaphragm chamber of the high capacity auxiliary valve, which in turn causes the same action in the main valve. Valve shall be capable of flow in either direction and shall be equipped to fully open/close upon actuation from a remote command or electrical power source, regardless of the direction of flow through the main valve. Pilot system shall consist of opening and closing speed controls flow clean strainers, isolation cocks and manual operator. Valve shall be equipped with dual limit switches for remote indication of valve position. Valve shall be normally open, energized to close. Contractor shall make provision for drainage of water from the pilot system upon valve actuation. 2. The three-way solenoid pilot control switch is to be connected to the SCADA system through which the operator will be able to manually control the valve. However, the operation of the valve shall be automatic via a pressure transducer monitoring the elevation of the tank. The valve shall also be manually operated by controls mounted on the support wall interior. See Section 13500. 3. Closing Speed Control. A CNA needle valve shall control the closing speed of the main valve. Turn the adjusting stem clockwise to make the main valve close slower. SOLENOID CONTROL VALVE 1. Valve Size 2. Main Valve Body and Cover 3. Main Valve Trim 4. Pressure Class 5. Temperature Range 6. Rubber Material 7. Coating PILOT CONTROL SYSTEM 1. Pressure Rating 2. Pilot Control and Trim 3. Rubber Material 4. Tubing and Fittings 5, Operating Fluids 6. Desired Operations 16" with 12" Internal Flow Compartments Ductile Iron ASTM A-536 Brass QQ-B-626 and Bronze ASTM B-61 250 psi -40 to 180 OF Buna "N" Synthetic Rubber FDA Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coating 5-7 mils 300 psi Bras ASTM B-62 and 303 Stainless Steel Buna "N" Synthetic Rubber Bronze and Copper Water Manual Operator on Solenoid Pilot Operated Solenoid Control Valve 15114-3 KEL00483 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Install the valve in the elevated tank fill piping with the valve diaphragm shaft in the vertical position. Make all connections between the valve and the altitude pilot. Installation of the valve shall be in accordance with the valve manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Upon completion of the installation of the equipment, an acceptance test to verify the satisfactory operation of the valve shall be performed. The test shall be conducted in a manner, approved by and in the presence of the Engineer. The valve manufacturers representative shall be present during the valve acceptance test. The unit must perform in a manner acceptable to the Engineer before final acceptance will be made by the Owner. 3.03 CLEAN AND ADJUST All adjustments will be performed in accordance with the valve manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Pilot Operated Solenoid Control Valve 15114-4 KEL00483 15136 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidental necessary to install miscellaneous valves. Valves and accessories specified in this section are to be installed only in the absence of product specifications in other sections and must be approved by the Engineer. Review other sections for specific requirements. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE [Not Used] 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: 1. Record Data 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1.04 STANDARDS [Not Used] 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE [Not Used] 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS [Not Used] 1.07 OPTIONS [Not Used] 1.08 GUARANTEES [Not Used] 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS [Not Used] 2.02 MIXES [Not Used] 2.03 FABRICATIONS [Not Used] 2.04 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS 2.08 FLAP VALVES A. Flap valves shall be circular flange framed, with machined back flange for attachment to a flanged wall thimble. Body and flap shall be cast iron, ASTM A -126-B. Resilient seat shall be neoprene or Buna-N bonded in a groove machined in the body. Hinge arms shall be high - tensile bronze, ASTM B-584-CA865 with two pivot points, an adjustable lower pivot with limited rotation and a threaded upper hinge post to adjust flap valve sensitivity. A lubrication Miscellaneous Valves 15136-1 KEL00483 fitting shall be supplied for each pivot. Hinge pins shall be silicon bronze, ASTM B-98- CA655 or Type 304 Stainless Steel. B. Flap valve shall be designed to open when differential head across the flap is 0.3' or less. C. Flap valve shall be Rodney Hunt Series FV -AC, Waterman Equal Model, or equal. 2.09 DOUBLE SWING CHECK VALVE A. The check valves used shall be double swing check valves unless otherwise specified and shall be constructed with a heavy cast iron body and bronze seat ring, non -corrosive shaft for astachment of weight and lever, and complete bronze air cushion chamber. B. The valve discs shall absolutely prevent the return of water or gas back through the valve when the inlet pressure decreases below the delivery pressure. The valve shall be tight - seating. C. Swing check valves shall be APCO Series 9000L or approved equal. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION [Not Used] 3.02 INSTALLATION Carefully handle and install valves in a manner that prevents damage to any part of the valves. Install valves in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [Not Used] 3.04 CLEAN AND ADJUST [Not Used] 3.05 SCHEDULES [Not Used] END OF SECTION Miscellaneous Valves 15136-2 KEL00483 15170 PRESSURE GAUGES AND COCKS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install pressure gauges and cocks. Dial gauges shall indicate feet or head of water on a graduated dial by means of a pointer utilizing an elastic element (Bourdon tube or coil, and actuating linkage as necessary. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE [Not Used] 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: 1. Record Data 1.04 STANDARDS [Not Used] 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE [Not Used] 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS [Not Used] 1.07 OPTIONS [Not Used] 1.08 GUARANTEES [Not Used] 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS CONNECTION PIPE NIPPLES AND FITTINGS: Brass 2.02 MIXES [Not Used] 2.03 FABRICATIONS [Not Used] 2.04 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. PRESSURE GAUGES 1. The gauges shall be the Manufacturer's standard commercial product 6 inches in size and liquid filled with a pressure range of 0-100 psi. The gauges shall be new and shall embody the design characteristics stated for the respective class, size, type, etc. scheduled herein. Gauge cases shall be steel zinc -coated or phosphate treated and finished with black enamel. Inlet shall be 1/4" size with bottom connections. 3. Gauges shall be as manufactured by Marshalltown Instruments, Ashcroft, (Dresser Industries), Weksler, or approved equal. Pressure Gauges and Cocks 15170-1 KEL00483 B. GAUGE COCKS: Gauge cocks for isolating standard product gauges shall be heavy duty brass with tee handle and male and female ends for 1/4" bottom threaded connections. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION [Not Used] 3.02 INSTALLATION Provide tap and connecting piping to install the pressure gauges. Connection shall comprise of brass or bronze nipples, fittings, bronze gauge cock and pulsation dampener. Install the gauge and protect the gauge until project acceptance by the Owner. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [Not Used] 3.04 CLEAN AND ADJUST [Not Used] 3.05 SCHEDULES [Not Used] END OF SECTION Pressure Gauges and Cocks 15170-2 KEL00483 DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary for complete and operational electrical systems, as specified herein. B. This Section, as well as Division 1, concerns all other Sections in Division 16, and shall be considered a part of each of those Sections as if written in their entirety. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS' QUALIFICATIONS Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen, trained and experienced in their crafts, and who are familiar with the specifications and methods of performing the work in this Division. All electrical work shall be performed by a licensed electrician. B. WORKMANSHIP Work shall be performed in accordance with quality, commercial practices. The appearance of finished work shall be of equal importance with its operation. Materials and equipment shall be installed based upon the actual dimensions and conditions at the project site. Locations for materials or equipment requiring an exact fit shall be field measured. Conduit, transformers, and motors shall be isolated to avoid unacceptable noise levels from objectionable vibrations from all systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: 1. Component catalog number and manufacturing data sheet, indicating pertinent data and identifying each component by the item number and nomenclature as specified. 2. Component drawings showing dimensions, mounting, and external connection details. 3. Complete control schematics and point to point wiring diagrams. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Electrical work shall be executed in accordance with local, State and national codes, ordinances and regulations which have jurisdiction or authority over the work. If the standards and codes conflict with each other, the most stringent shall apply. The applicable provisions of the following standard shall apply as if written here in their entirety: National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA) General Electrical Requirements 16010-1 KEL00483 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) National Electrical Code (NEC) Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Uniform Building Code (UBC) Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Local utility companies City of Keller Electrical Ordinance Rural Electrification Association (REA) Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA) National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) Association Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC) B. Electrical work shall be performed under the direct supervision of a Master Electrician who holds a valid license in the State of Texas. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Follow the Manufacturer's directions for the delivery, storage and handling of equipment and materials. Tightly cover equipment and materials and protect it from dirt, water, chemical or mechanical injury and theft. Damaged equipment shall not be acceptable. Upon installation, protect the materials until the work is completed and accepted by the Owner. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Permits, licenses and inspections shall be secured and paid for as required by law for the completion of the work. Certificates of approval shall be secured, paid for, and delivered to the Owner before receiving the final acceptance of the work. B. The location of materials, equipment, devices and appliances indicated are approximate and subject to revisions at the time the work is installed. General Electrical Requirements 16010-2 KEL00483 C. Should project conditions require any rearrangement of work, or if equipment or accessories can be installed to a better advantage than the general arrangement of work on the plans, the Contractor may, before proceeding with the work, prepare and submit plans of the proposed rearrangement for the Engineer's review. 2.00 PRODUCTS 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Maintain the waterproof integrity of conduit penetrations through the roof, exterior walls and floors. B. Install 22 gauge, galvanized, sheet iron sleeves for each conduit passing through floors. Extend sleeves 1-1/2" above the floor slab and cement watertight. The sleeve sizes shall permit the subsequent insertion of a properly sized conduit or raceway. 3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING Provide adequate support during cutting operations to prevent any damage to the affected masonry. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide lintels or structural supports to protect the remaining masonry. The cutting of structural members shall not be permitted without the specific written approval of the Engineer. 3.03 PAINTING Painting shall be in accordance with Section 09901, ARCHITECTURAL PAINTING. Maintain the original factory finish on material and equipment installed, unless specifically indicated on the plans or specifications. If the finish is marred in transit or during installation, re -finish to a neat, workmanlike appearance. Leave equipment clean and free of grease, dirt, rust, and in a suitable condition for painting. 3.04 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING A. Prior to any excavation or trenching, notify the Owner's representative, utility companies and Owner's facilities department. Allow sufficient time for utilities to be located prior to excavation to avoid disruption of services. Provide a minimum of 72 hours written notice to the Owner prior to trenching or excavation. Do not proceed with trenching or excavation until authorized by the Owner. Utilities or services which are damaged, which are identified prior to excavation or trenching, or where confirmation by utility companies has not been obtained verifying that utilities are marked, shall be repaired to operable condition immediately, at no cost to the Owner. B. Barricade open trenches and excavations for the entire duration of the project. Barricades for excavations shall have warning lights maintained during hours of darkness. Trenches shall be marked with warning tape, or access to trenches shall be prohibited with readily identifiable sawhorses, warning tape or other acceptable means. Barriers shall be General Electrical Requirements 16010-3 KEL00483 illuminated or recognizable during hours of darkness. Barriers and tape shall be properly maintained at all times. C. Protect all adjacent work, structures and properties. Damage to adjacent work, structures or properties shall be repaired, or the cost of repair reimbursed in full. D. All construction areas shall be finally graded as indicated on the contract documents, or to the conditions of the site prior to construction. Grading shall bring the site back to the existing conditions as close as practical. Turfed areas shall be sodded, or hydro -mulched with matching turf. Landscaping shall be replaced with identical shrubbery, ground cover, or plants as existed. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining water on new turf and landscaping until established. If new turn and landscaping is impractical due to weather conditions, contractor shall provide satisfactory arrangements to have turf and landscaping furnished and installed at the earliest opportunity thereafter. Provide a 90 -day year warranty on new turn and landscaping. E. Determine if irrigation systems exist prior to trenching and excavation. Obtain record or as - built drawings and locate control wiring and pressure main branches and devices. Determine by actual operation that systems are functional and repair or replace damaged systems to their original condition prior to beginning construction. 3.05 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Identify electrical equipment in accordance with the NEC, the local authorities, and as specified. B. Use laminated three-ply engraved plastic nameplates with black surface and white interior core, at least 1/16" thick. Engraved lettering shall be condensed gothic at least 1/4" high and properly spaced for legible and easy reading. Attach plates to equipment with chromium plate screws. Adhesive attachment is not acceptable. Identify the following items with engraved nameplates, located as follows: 1. Each switch/fuse unit or circuit breaker in each main panel and each distribution panel - adjacent to switch/fuse unit or circuit. 2. Spares shall be labeled "Spare". 3. Each branch circuit panel - on panel trim cover immediately above panel door. 4. Each safety disconnect switch, relay cabinet, time clock - on outside of cover. Outside light switches - custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate. 9. Any switch for load that cannot be seen from the control point - custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate. C. Branch circuit panelboard directories shall be completely and properly typewritten. Cover with plastic and attach to the inside of the cabinet door. Spares shall be labeled as "Spare". General Electrical Requirements 16010-4 KEL00483 D. Refer to Section 16120, 600 VOLT WIRES AND CABLES for conductor coding requirements. E. Install special custom engraved switch cover plates with engraving on the outside of the cover plate at outside light switches, and at any switch for equipment which is out of sight from the control point. 3.06 LOCKING OF ELECTRICAL FACILITIES Install locks immediately upon the installation of the electrical facility. Provide padlocks for exterior electrical facilities subject to unauthorized entry. Furnish the Owner with two (2) keys per lock up to a quantity of 10 keys. Furnish locks to match the Owner's locking system. 3.07 CLEAN AND ADJUST Remove shipping labels, dirt, paint, grease, and stains from equipment. Remove debris as it accumulates. Upon completion of work, clean electrical equipment and the entire electrical installation so that it is suitable for the Owner's use. END OF SECTION General Electrical Requirements 16010-5 KEL00483 16111 CONDUITS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install a complete conduit system for each type of electrical system. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 16010, GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS. 1.02 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: 1.03 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: ANSI C80.1 Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc -Coated ANSI C80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc -Coated ANSUNEMA FB 1 Fittings and Supports for Conduits and Cable Assemblies NEMA TC 3 PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing 1.00 PRODUCTS 1.04 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. RIGID CONDUIT: Heavy wall, mild steel tube with metallic, corrosion -resistant coating on interior and exterior, hot -dipped, galvanized steel, free from defects; manufactured in accordance with Fed. Spec. WW -C-581, ANSI C80.1 standards, and U.L. listed. Acceptable manufacturers shall be Allied, Triangle, and Wheatland. B. PVC COATED RIGID STEEL: Meeting the requirements of rigid steel conduit; 40 mil PVC, exterior coating and 2 mil red urethane interior coating. Acceptable Manufacturers shall be Rob Roy Plastibond Red, Ocal and Perma-Cote. C. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: 1. FOR USE WITH GALVANIZED CONDUIT AND E.M.T.: Single strip, helically wound, interlocking, galvanized steel, in accordance with Fed. Spec. WW -C-566 and U.L. listed. Liquid tight conduit shall have an extruded, polyvinyl jacket over the flexible metal. Acceptable product shall be Anaconda Type U.A. 2. FOR USE WITH RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT: Single strip, helically wound, interlocking aluminum, in accordance with Fed. Spec. WW -C-566 and U.L. listed. Conduit shall have an extruded, polyvinyl jacket over the interlocking aluminum. Acceptable product shall be Anaconda Sealtite EFL. Conduits 16111-1 KEL00483 D. RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT: Schedule 40 high impact, polyvinylchloride, in accordance with Fed. Spec. W -C-1094 and U.L. listed. Acceptable manufacturers shall be Carlon, Cantex, and Certainteed. E. FITTINGS AND CONDUIT BODIES: 1. RIGID METAL METAL CONDUIT: Threaded type material to match the conduit, in accordance with ANSUNEMA FBI and as manufactured by Appleton Form 35, Killark "O" Series, Crouse Hinds, OZ Gedney, or RACO. 2. FLEXIBLE AND LIQUID TIGHT FITTINGS: In accordance with ANSI/NEMA FBI; cadmium -plated, malleable iron body and nut; cadmium steel ferrule; insulated throat; integrally -cast, external ground lugs, as manufactured by Appleton "ST" series, Hubbel, OZ Gedney Type 4QL, or RACO. PVC CONDUIT: Solvent -welded, slip-on joints, in accordance with NEMA TC3, as manufactured by Carlon, CertainTeed. F. ELBOW AND BENDS: Rigid, nonmetallic conduit system shall use PVC -coated rigid steel for conduits 2" and larger for all bends greater than 45 degrees. Other conduit systems shall use the same material as the conduit with which they are installed. G. BUSHINGS: High impact, thermosetting, phenolic insulation; 150 degrees C.; as manufactured by Appleton "BBUH", Blackburn, or OZ Gedney type A. H. GROUNDING BUSHINGS: Conduit grounding bushings shall consist of a malleable iron, insulated throat conduit bushing with an attached aluminum set screw lug. Grounding bushing shall comply with Fed. Spec. W -F -408b and W -W -C -581d, UL Standards 514B and 467, and shall be Crouse Hinds Lazy Lug or approved equal. I. LOCKNUTS: Zinc -plated or cadmium -plated, malleable iron, as manufactured by Appleton "BL", OZ Gedney, RACO, or Steel City. 1. STEEL CONDUIT: Cadmium -plated, malleable iron with tapered threads, a neoprene "O" ring and an insulated throat, as manufactured by Appleton "HUB", Myers type St., OZ Gedney, type CH -T. K. CONDUIT THROUGH -WALL AND FLOOR SEAL: Malleable iron body with oversized sleeves, sealing ring, pressure clamp and rings and sealing grommet; hex head cap screw, as manufactured by OZ Gedney, type FSK. L. END BELLS: Hot -dipped, galvanized, threaded, malleable iron, as manufactured by OZ Gedney type TNS. M. EXPANSION FITTINGS: Hot -dipped, galvanized, malleable iron with bonding jumpers. Linear expansion fittings shall be OZ Gedney Zx for rigid, metal conduit and Tx for EMT, or Appleton "XJ" series. Combination linear and deflection expansion fittings shall be OZ Gedney type AXDX. Conduits 16111-2 KEL00483 N. THREADED NIPPLES: As manufactured by Allied, Triangle or Steel Duct. Conduit nipples shall have two (2) independent sets of threads. Running threads shall not be used. Utilize the conduit union when joining two (2) fixed conduits in a continuous run. O. ACCESSORIES: Reducers, washers, etc., shall be cadmium -plated, malleable iron. P. IDENTIFYING TAPE FOR BURIED CONDUITS: 6" wide, polyethylene with continuous printing along the length of the tape, as manufactured by Brady "Identoline" or Sentry Lin "Terra Tape". Use red with black letters for buried electrical power conduits. Use green with black letters for buried electric instrumentation and communication conduits. Q. CONDUIT DRAINS: Conduit drains shall be Crouse Hinds ECD Universal, or approved equal. R. BURIED CONDUIT: PVC Schedule 40, or PVC coated rigid steel. S. ABOVE GRADE CONDUIT: Rigid Steel, unless noted otherwise. 2.00 EXECUTION 2.01 INSTALLATION A. Size conduits as required by the NEC for the number and sizes of wires to be drawn into the conduit. Conduits less than 3/4" shall not be used unless specified otherwise. B. Install the conduit at elevations which maintain headroom and at locations which avoid interference with other work requiring grading of pipe, the structure, finished ceiling, walls, etc. Avoid crossing other work. Do not place the conduits in close proximity to equipment, systems and service lines, such as the hot water supply and return lines or steam pipes which could be detrimental to the conduit and its contents. Maintain a minimum of 3" separation, except in crossing, which shall be a minimum of V. C. Prevent displacement by securely supporting the conduit which is to be concealed and installed in advance of other work. Carefully layout all conduit installed within the structure, such as in floors, beams and walls to avoid densities excessive for the construction. D. Cut the conduit square with a saw. Ream, deburr and swab the inside of the conduit before installing the conductors. Make bends and offsets in 1" and smaller conduit with approved bending devices. Use a hydraulic, one-shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in conduit larger than 1 ". Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction around ground beams. Install no more than four (4) 90 degree bends between boxes. E. Where space conditions prohibit the use of standard elbows, use cast ferrous alloy fittings to match the conduit construction. "Condulet" type fittings shall not be used on conduit containing #4 or larger wire. F. Make conduit joints mechanically tight and electrically continuous. Pitch the conduit in areas where moisture may be present to avoid creating moisture traps. Where indicated or Conduits 16111-3 KEL00483 necessary to prevent accumulation of water in the conduit, provide a junction box with a drain fitting at the conduit system's low point. G. Group the conduit in parallel runs where practical and use a conduit rack constructed of steel channels with conduit straps or clamps. Prove space for an additional 25% conduit. Route conduit inside building extents parallel to building lines. H. Route and suspend conduit crossing expansion or Seismic joints to permit expansion, contraction, and deflection utilizing approved fittings to prevent damage to the structure, conduit, and supporting devices. Combination expansion/deflection fittings shall be installed on conduits which are concealed when they cross expansion joints. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise, route through the roof with pitch pocket. Do not allow conduit to penetrate duct work. Do not install conduit exposed on the roof without prior permission from the Engineer. Connect motors, equipment containing motors, equipment mounted on isolated foundations, transformers and other equipment and devices which are subject to vibration and which require adjustment with a liquid -tight, flexible metallic conduit from the device to the conduit serving it. The maximum length of the flexible conduit shall be 30", unless specifically instructed otherwise by the Engineer in writing. Install a sleeve for the conduit passing through the interior floors and insulated throat grounding bushings on conduit which is stubbed through slabs and foundations into electrical enclosures. K. Provide grounding for conduit, fittings and accessories. L. Use PVC coated, rigid steel, factory elbows for bends in PVC conduit runs which are longer than 100', or in PVC runs which have more that two bends, regardless of their length. M. Use double locknut construction on conduit which terminates at electrical enclosures, pull boxes, motor terminal enclosures, etc., with an approved bushing over the conduit. Increase the length of the conduit threads at outlets and junction boxes wherever necessary to accommodate double locknuts and bushings. Seat all bushings fully against the end of the conduit. N. Generally, conduit runs shall not be installed in concrete slabs, but shall be installed in cushion sand below slabs. Where specifically indicated to be cast into concrete, conduits shall be rigid steel and shall be located in the middle between top and bottom reinforcing. Maintain a minimum of 1-1/2" concrete cover at all locations. The maximum size of conduit permitted to be embedded in slabs is 1 ". Do not route conduit in a manner to cross each other. Conduit shall have a minimum spacing of 1-1/2" apart. Unless specifically indicated, conduits shall not be placed in slabs on grade. O. Use PVC coated, rigid metal conduit for all conduits penetrating slabs. Where PVC coated, rigid steel or aluminum conduit joins a dissimilar conduit, the fittings shall also be PVC coated. PVC conduit in slabs shall be protected from mechanical damage by extending PVC coated rigid metal conduit a minimum of 12" into the concrete at the transition. P. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entry of dirt and moisture. Conduits 16111-4 KEL00483 Q. Install empty conduits in or below slabs so that a threaded fitting with PVC plug is placed on each conduit and is flush with the concrete or finished floor surface. 2. UNDERGROUND DUCT BANK INSTALLATION A. Install top of duct bank minimum of 30" below finished grade. B. Install conduit with minimum grade of 4" per 100'. C. Terminate conduit in end bell at manhole entries. D. Stagger conduit joints in concrete encasement a minimum of 6" vertically. E. Use suitable separators and chairs installed not greater than 4' on centers. Band conduit together with suitable banding devices. Securely anchor conduit to prevent movement during concrete placement. F. Provide a minimum of 3" concrete cover at bottom, top, and sides of duct bank. G. Provide two No. 4 steel reinforcing bars in top of bank under paved areas. H. Color of concrete cap shall be red. I. Duct bank trench shall be backfilled with material free from large rocks, paving material, or large angular substance. END OF SECTION Conduits 16111-5 KEL00483 16120 600 VOLT WIRES AND CABLES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install 600 volt wires and cables. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 16010, GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS. B. Work shall include building wire, cable, wiring connections and terminations, and modular wiring systems. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: TESTING Megger test circuits for continuity and ground. Verify phasing at connection points. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to the Manufacturer's recommended values. 1.03 SUBMITTALS No submittals required for Section 16120. 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: NEMA WC -3 Rubber -Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy NEMA WC -5 Thermoplastic -Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Deliver cable and wire to the project site in the original packages. Conductors with damaged insulation or exposed nylon jacketing shall not be permitted. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. CONDUCTORS: Soft -drawn, annealed copper with a conductivity of not less than that of 98% pure copper bearing the U.L. label. The minimal size shall be #12. Conductors #8 or larger shall be stranded. Utilize single conductors. B. SINGLE CONDUCTORS: Conductor with thermoplastic insulation rated at 600 volts and insulated with type THHN/THWN insulation. Wire shall be water tank tested and approved as machine tool wire, in accordance with National Machine Tool Builders Association. Wire 600 Volt Wires and Cables 16120-1 KEL00483 in light fixture channels and other special locations shall be as specifically noted for temperature in NEC Article 300. Wire shall be Rome 2020 or approved equal. C. GROUND WIRE: Tinned, Class B stranded conductor without insulation; Rome 1102 or approved equal. D. PAIRED SHIELDED CABLE: 18 gauge, 7/28 stranded, tinned copper conductors with .015" extruded PVC; .004" nylon insulation twisted into pairs, stranded into a core and enclosed by a non -hygroscopic core tape, 100% coverage, helically wound, aluminum foil shield, drain wire, and .045" minimum extruded PVC jacket. Pairs shall be black/red or black/white numbered. Cables shall be 600 volts in accordance with NEC -725 and IEEE 383. Cables shall be Alpha No. 5616/1801 or Okonite No. 20-3301T. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION Completely swab raceway system before installing conductors. Do not use cleaning agents and lubricants which have a deleterious effect on the conductors or their insulation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Splice only injunction or outlet boxes. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards. Pull conductors into a raceway at the same time and use U.L. listed, wire pulling lubricant for pulling No. 4 AWG and larger wire. Install raceway first as a complete system without conductors. Do not install pull wires and conductors until the raceway system is in place. B. Provide conductors continuously from outlet to outlet with no splices except in approved boxes. Leave sufficient wire at all outlets to make connections without straining. Tag all conductors at terminals. Conductors of different colors shall never be spliced together. C. Where outlets only are indicated, leave a minimum of 4' leads of conductors for connection to equipment. Identify all conductor circuit numbers at terminals and junctions. D. Install a tray cable with attachments according to the Manufacturer's recommendations. E. Use the following color code for 277/480V, 3-phase wiring: Phase A - Brown Phase B - Orange Phase C - Yellow Neutral - Gray Equipment Grounding Conductor - Green Use the following color code for 120/208V or 240V, 3-phase wiring: Phase A - Black Phase B - Red Phase C - Blue Neutral - White 600 Volt Wires and Cables 16120-2 KEL00483 Equipment Grounding Conductor - Green Use the following color code for 120/240V, 1 -phase wiring: Leg A - Black Leg B - Red Neutral - White Equipment Grounding Conductor - Green Use the following color code for control wiring: Ungrounded conductor - Red Grounded conductor - White Equipment Grounding Conductor - Green F. Color code power wiring conductors by marking each end with a 1" band of colored, pressure -sensitive, plastic tape or with brilliant, waterproof lacquer applied according to the Manufacturer's instructions. Colors for each phase and the neutral shall be consistent throughout the system. On new conductors, colored vinyl marking tape shall be allowable only for all conductors greater than 8 AWG. For smaller conductors, provide colored insulation. G. Identify control wiring by a numeric or alphabetic identification system for conductors entering or leaving remote devices. Provide detailed wiring and interconnection diagrams showing the utilized scheme. H. Install green equipment grounding conductors for all systems. Use colored tape to identify ungrounded conductors at junction boxes, wireways, and/or terminations. The phasing of the complete electrical installation shall be connected, maintained and consistent throughout the power distribution system. Where the project is an addition or a modification to an existing facility, the electrical distribution system phasing shall match the existing system. J. Switchgear, safety switches, motor starters, plug-in type bus duct, lighting and power panels, and power receptacles shall have the same phase arrangements throughout the facility. END OF SECTION 600 Volt Wires and Cables 16120-3 KEL00483 16122 WERE CONNECTIONS AND DEVICES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install wire connections and devices. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 16010, GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 600 volt connectors shall comply with the specifications and the following Manufacturers will be acceptable: 1. Brundy 2. Thomas & Betts 3. Ideal Industries 4. Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing 1.03 SUBMITTALS No submittals required for Section 16122. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. CONNECTORS, COMPRESSION: For splicing and termination; 600 volt wiring; connectors for cable sizes 250 MCM and larger shall be the long barrel type for double indentation. (Soldered connections shall not be permitted.) B. CONNECTORS, 600 VOLT TWIST -ON: Spring insulated, properly sized and resistant to vibration; may be used for No. 14 through No. 10 gauge conductors. C. CONNECTORS, 600 VOLT TERMINAL: Of the appropriate hole sizes and spacing which are in accordance with NEMA standards; two (2) holes in the tongue for use on conductor sizes 250 MCM or larger; not required for connections to the circuit breakers in the lighting and/or receptacle panels. D. 600 VOLT PLASTIC TAPE: Minnesota Mining & Manufacturing Company, No. 35. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Insulate connections made with non -insulated connectors with a minimum of three (3) layers of plastic tape. Half -lap each layer. Wire Connections and Devices 16122-1 KEL00483 B. Splice 600 Volt conductors injunction boxes or at outlets only. END OF SECTION Wire Connections and Devices 16122-2 KEL00483 16130 OUTLET BOXES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install outlet boxes. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 16010, GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE - ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Steel City Series 600 1.03 SUBMITTALS No submittals required for Section 16130. 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: ANSI/NEMA OS 1 ANSI/NEMA OS 2 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. GENERAL: Provide boxes with plaster ring where required. Boxes for installation in masonry walls shall be special square corner masonry type. Furnish boxes with proper covers and device plates. Boxes shall be non-metallic in accordance with ANSI/NEMA OS 2. B. SHEET METAL BOXES: ANSI/NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel, with 1/2" male fixture studs where required. C. CAST BOXES: Cast feralloy metal, deep type, gasketed cover, threaded hubs. Use cast boxes for damp and outdoor installation. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION; COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS A. Provide electrical boxes in the locations shown on the Plans, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and code compliance. B. Electrical box locations shown on Contract Drawings are approximate unless dimensioned. Verify locations of boxes and outlets prior to rough -in. Outlet locations may be modified to accommodate changes in door swings, space changes or to clear other interferences that arise Outlet Boxes 16130-1 KEL00483 or from job modifications. Make such modifications at no cost to the Owner as a matter of job coordination. Coordinate job conditions and notify the Engineer of discrepancies before proceeding with the installation of the work. Set wall boxes in advance of wall construction blocked in place, and secured. Set wall boxes flush with the finish. Install extension sleeves as required to extend boxes to finished surfaces. C. Unless otherwise noted, location of outlet boxes shall be as follows: Equipment or Outlets Toggle switches Receptacles Equipment or Outlets Control stations Circuit protective devices * Above Finished Floor. Elevation *(A.F.F.) 41011 1'6" Elevation *(A.F.F.) 4'0" 6'6" to top of enclosure D. Locate and install boxes to allow access. Where installation is inaccessible, coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors in accordance with other sections of the specifications. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Provide knockout closures for unused openings. B. Use multiple -gang boxes where more than one (1) device is installed together; do not use sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems. C. Align wall -mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats and similar devices. END OF SECTION Outlet Boxes 16130-2 KEL00483 16131 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install pull and junction boxes. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 16010, GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE - ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hoffman B. Raco C. O Z Gedney D. Rob Roy E. Hubbell F. Crouse Hinds G. Appleton H. Bryant 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: A. NEMA 250 B. ANSI/NEMA OS 1 C. NEC - National Electrical Code 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. GENERAL: Pull boxes and junction boxes used on concealed runs of conduit in walls and over ceilings shall be of code gauge galvanized steel with sheet steel covers. Exposed wall Pull and Junction Boxes 16131-1 KEL00483 recessed pull and junction boxes shall be 304 stainless steel. Pull boxes in floors shall be of galvanized malleable cast iron, with gasketed covers. Exposed pull boxes or junction boxes installed outdoors, per NEMA 250 shall be weatherproof and shall be provided with watertight gasketed covers fastened with stainless steel screws. B. PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES: Metal construction conforming to National Electrical Code and ANSI/NEMA OS 1 with screw -on or hinged cover. Provide hinge type for sheet metal boxes of 12" in any dimension. C. FLUSH -MOUNTED PULL BOXES: Provide overlapping covers with flush -head cover retaining screws. D. FIBERGLASS HANDHOLES: Die -molded with pre-cut 6" x 6" cable entrance at center of each side, fiberglass weatherproof cover with non-skid finish. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Use separate pull boxes and junction boxes for electric power, control and communication systems. B. Install pull boxes and junction boxes where required by the National Electric Code and wherever required to overcome mechanical difficulties. C. Install pull boxes in interior conduit at not more than 100' apart when conduit runs are not broken by junction or outlet boxes. D. Pull and junction boxes shall be accessible and not buried. E. Do not install boxes back to back in walls and provide a minimum of 6" separation, except in acoustic -rated walls, provide 24" separation. F. Support boxes independently of conduit except for cast boxes that is connected to two rigid metal conduits, both supported within 12" of box. END OF SECTION Pull and Junction Boxes 16131-2 KEL00483 16140 WIRING DEVICES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install wiring devices. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 16010, GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS. 1.02 SUBMITTALS No submittals required for Section 16140. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. SWITCHES: HP rated switches approved for motor control or disconnect service when controlling or disconnecting motor loads in excess of 1/4 HP; 20 amp switches for loads exceeding 10 amps. Switches shall conform to the following: Acceptable Manufacturers Pass & Seymour Hubbell ArrowHart 1. Single Pole, 15 amp 5011-I 2. Double Pole, 15 amp 5012-I #1201-I 1891I #1202-1 1892I 1. GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTING, INDOOR: Feed -through feature shall not be used. Install GFCI device at each location. GFCI circuit breaker shall not be permitted. GFCI device shall be Pass & Seymour 1591 -FI or Arrow Hart GF52421. B. COVER PLATES: [Specification grade, high impact nylon; Arrow Hart 8200 series] [Stainless steel type 302 series with cadmium -plated screws; Arrow Hart 93000, Hubbell 93000]. Provide telephone cover plates which are the same as above, except with a single bushed pole for the telephone cable. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install receptacles and switches only in electrical boxes which are clean, free from excess building materials, dirt and debris. B. Install switches, wall -mounted duplex receptacles and telephone outlets at the heights specified in Section 16130, OUTLET BOXES, unless indicated otherwise on the plans. C. Switches installed at one (1) location shall be ganged together under one (1) cover plate. Wiring Devices 16140-1 KEL00483 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Test wiring devices to insure electrical continuity of grounding. Energize the circuit to demonstrate compliance with the requirements. END OF SECTION Wiring Devices 16140-2 KEL00483 16150 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work in this section. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 16010, GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS. 1.02 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include:] 2.00 PRODUCTS A. CONTROL RELAYS: Industrial -type, 600 volt rated with 120 Volts operating coil; contacts shall be rated 10 amperes inductive resistive at 120 VAC. Relays shall be manufactured in accordance with NEMA Standards and shall be by General Electric, Allen Bradley, Westinghouse or Square D. General purpose, "plug-in" type relays are not acceptable. B. CONTROL STATIONS, INDICATING LIGHTS, SWITCHES AND PUSHBUTTONS: Heavy duty and oil tight, manufactured by General Electric, Allen Bradley, Westinghouse or Square D; individually mounted devices installed outdoors shall be NEMA 4X enclosures. Devices installed in enclosures other than control stations shall match or exceed the rating of the enclosure. C. LATCHING RELAYS: Dual coil latching type with coil clearing contacts hermetically sealed where indicated on the plans; plug-in type; 120 VAC with four (4) Form C contacts rated 10 amperes, manufactured by Potter and Brumfield KBP 17AG series or Clare. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Make all electrical connections to all equipment specified. Install equipment in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and the plans. If neither are available, install the equipment using recognized practices of the electrical industry and trade. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Upon completion of the installation, perform continuity tests and functional checkout to assure the proper operation of all equipment. END OF SECTION Electrical Equipment 16150-1 KEL00483 16450 GROUNDING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install a complete grounding system. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 16010, GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS. 1.02 SUBMITTALS Submittal shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: A. List for each project 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS Measure the ground grid resistance with the earth test megger and install additional ground rods and conductors as required until the resistance to the ground conforms to NEC requirements. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. GROUND RODS: Having a diameter of 3/4" and a minimum length of 10. B. GROUND CABLES: Stranded, bare copper of 98% conductivity. C. GROUND FITTINGS: Fittings for bonding ground cable to the conduit shall be Bumdy Corp., type NE or Thomas & Betts No. 3951 series. 2.02 GROUNDING SYSTEM Provide a grounding system that includes all connections and the testing of ground rods, ground cables, ground buses, conduits, fittings, anchor supports, thermite process materials and equipment and other materials required for a complete installation. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Ground electrical work in accordance with NEC Article 250 and local codes. B. Install ground cables in conduits above grade or directly buried in earth to a depth of not less than 12" below grade. Installation to provide sufficient mechanical protection so as not to break ground cables or connections. Grounding 16450-1 KEL00483 C. Install ground cables continuously between connections. Splices shall not be permitted, except where indicated on the plans. Where ground cables pass through floor slabs. buildings, etc., and when not in metallic enclosures, provide a sleeve of approved, non- metallic materials. D. Install a green -colored, equipment grounding conductor in raceways. Size conductors in accordance with NEC Article 250. E. At each convenience outlet, install a grounding clip attached to the outlet box and leave a sufficient length of #12 wire with green -colored insulation to connect to the grounding terminal at the receptacle. This clip may be deleted if an automatic grounding clip receptacle meeting NEC Article 250-74, Exception No. 2, is used. END OF SECTION Grounding 16450-2 KEL00483 16500 LIGHTING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install light fixtures, complete with lamps, ballasts and other incidentals. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 16010, GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Lamps shall comply with the specifications and shall be by the following Manufacturers: 1. Westinghouse 2. Sylvania 3. General Electric 4. Lithonia 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: 1. Product data sheets 2. Performance curves for light fixtures 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Ship light fixtures inside protective cartons and keep packaged until installed. Deliver lamps to the job site in the original packing cases and sleeves. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Provide cold weather ballasts in fixtures which are subject to temperatures below 32 degrees F. B. Provide special mounting, enclosures and fire-safing, as required by the authorities having jurisdiction so that the integrity of the U.L. listed ceiling assembles is maintained. C. Provide U.L. labels where fixtures are subject to moisture. Provide DL or Wl label on fixtures required for the location. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. PHOTOCELL: Fully adjustable from two (2) to 50' candles with SPST contacts; rated 1500 watts at 120 VAC. Cells shall have a built in time delay of five (5) seconds. Lighting 16500-1 KEL00483 B. BALLASTS: Ballast for fluorescent lamps shall be high power factor, dual protected, Class P, one (1) or two (2) lamps as required, unless otherwise specified on the plans; manufactured in accordance with CBM standards, ETL certified, U.L. approved, and sound rated "A"; protected by a built-in, resetting, thermal protector. Ballasts for high intensity discharge lamps shall be high power factor, potted and encapsulated. The starting current shall not exceed the running current. Ballast shall be compatible in design to the specified lamps. Fluorescent ballasts shall be manufactured by Advance and by the manufacturer of the light fixture for Hi -Intensity ballasts. C. LAMPS 1. METAL HALIDE: Phosphor -coated, unless otherwise specified or indicated; self - extinguishing type when the outer lamp envelope is broken. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Provide the lighting fixtures, as specified and scheduled on the plans. If a type designation is omitted, verify the fixture selection with the Engineer before installation. B. Provide fixtures with proper trim, frames, support hangers and other hardware required to coordinate with the proper finishes, regardless of the specified or scheduled catalog number, prefixes and suffixes. C. Furnish and install photocells where indicated on the plans. Cells shall face a northerly direction. 3.03 CLEAN AND ADJUST Immediately before final inspection, clean all fixtures, inside and out, including plastics and glassware. Adjust all trim to properly fit adjacent surfaces, Replace broken or damaged parts. Lamp and test all fixtures for electrical, as well as, mechanical operation. END OF SECTION Lighting 16500-2 KEL00483 Appendix A GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING STUDY ELEVATED STORAGE TANK KNOX ROAD AT RAVENWOOD DRIVE KELLER, TEXAS Presented To: Freese and Nichols, Inc. January 2001 PROJECT NO. 00-30166 db KIN MUll 1i A LEIGH COMPANY GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING • GEOLOGICAL STUDIES • DISTRESS INVESTIGATIONS • PAVEMENT DESIGN • ADVANCED GEOTECHNICAL TESTING • FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS • CONSTRUCTION MONITORING CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS TESTING • CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION CONCRETE TESTING ASPHALT TESTING • SOILS TESTING • PIER INSPECTION • POST TENSION INSPECTION • NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING DRILLING SERVICES MONITOR WELL INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENTAL DRILLING GEOTECHNICAL DRILLING 121 NORTH RAYNER STREET FORT WORTH, TEXAS 76111 TELEPHONE 817-831-6211 METRO 817-429-4328 FACSIMILE 817-834-4833 January 12, 2001 Report No. 00-30166 Freese and Nichols, Inc. Attn: Mr. Mauricio ZuaZua 4055 International Plaza, Suite 200 Fort Worth, Texas 76109-4895 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING STUDY ELEVATED STORAGE TANK KNOX ROAD AT RAVENWOOD DRIVE KELLER, TEXAS Gentlemen: Submitted here are the results of a geotechnical engineering study for the referenced project. This study was performed in general accordance with our Proposal No. 00-20184 (revised) dated November 10, 2000 and Engineering Services Subcontract Change Authorization dated January 3, 2001. The geotechnical services were authorized by Mr. Thomas Haster, P.E. of Freese and Nichols, Inc. on November 13, 2000. Engineering analyses and recommendations are contained in the text section of the report. Results of our field and laboratory services are included in the appendix of the report. We would appreciate the opportunity to be considered for providing the materials engineering -testing and geotechnical observation services during the construction phase of this project. We appreciate the opportunity to be of service to Freese and Nichols, Inc. Please contact us if you have any questions or if we may be of further service at thic times Respectfully submitted, RONE ENGINEERS, INC. Harold J. Leeman, Jr., P.E. Director of Engineering �►OF \ ov C1 00 • �� I ............................... HAROLD J. LEEMAN, JR. .... �;•� 86617 p •��� �F ••.•• . .00* ,.•' C� i� 1 �SS�O NAL Texas No. 86617 Jol HJL/cmk copies submitted: (3) Mr. Mauricio ZuaZua; Freese and Nichols, Inc. TABLE OF CONTENTS P -9- 1.0 INTRODUCTION............................................................................ 1 2.0 FIELD EXPLORATION AND LABORATORY TESTING .......................... 2 3.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS........................................................... 4 4.0 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS .............................................. 5 5.0 EARTHWORK............................................................................... 8 6.0 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATIONS.................................................. 13 7.0 REPORT CLOSURE........................................................................ 14 APPENDIX A lam PLANOF BORINGS.................................................................. A.1 UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM .................................... A.2 KEY TO CLASSIFICATION AND SYMBOLS .................................. A.3 LOGOF BORINGS..................................................................... A.4 -A.8 1.0 INTRODUCTION 1.1 Project Description This report presents the results of a geotechnical engineering study for the proposed 2.5 -million gallon elevated water storage tank located at the northwest corner of Knox Road and Ravenwood, Keller, Texas. The full tank plus water lead load is approximately 25,000 kips. Plate A.1 presents the location of the proposed tank. 1.2 Purpose and Scope The purpose of this geotechnical engineering study has been to determine the general subsurface conditions, evaluate the engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials encountered, and provide recommendations for earthwork. To accomplish its intended purposes, the study has been conducted in the following phases: (1) drilling sample borings to determine the general subsurface conditions and to obtain samples for testing; (2) performing laboratory tests on appropriate samples to determine pertinent engineering properties of the subsurface materials; and (3) performing engineering analyses, using the field and laboratory data, to develop geotechnical recommendations for the proposed construction. 1.3 Report Format The text of the report is contained in Sections 1 through 7. All plates and large tables Report No. 00-30166 Rone Engineers, Inc. I are contained in Appendix A. The alpha -numeric plate and table numbers identify the appendix in which they appear. Small tables of less than one page in length may appear in the body of the text and are numbered according to the section in which they occur. Units used in the report are based on the English system and may include tons per square foot (tsf), kips (1 kip = 1,000 pounds), kips per square foot (ksf), pounds per square foot (psf), pounds per cubic foot (pcf), and pounds per square inch (psi). 2.0 FIELD EXPLORATION AND LABORATORY TESTING 2.1 Field Exploration Subsurface materials at the project site were explored by five borings drilled to depths of 35 to 50 feet in the area of the proposed elevated tank. The borings were drilled at the approximate locations shown on the Plan of Borings, Plate A.1. The boring locations were selected by Freese and Nichols, Inc. The boring logs are included on Plates A.4 through A.8 and keys to classifications and symbols used on the log are provided on Plates A.2 and A.3. Disturbed samples of the noncohesive granular or stiff to hard cohesive materials were obtained utilizing a nominal 2 -inch O.D. split -barrel (split -spoon) sampler in conjunction with the Standard Penetration Test (ASTM D 1586). This test employs a 140 -pound Report No. 00-30166 2 Rone Engineers, Inc. hammer that drops a free fall vertical distance of 30 inches, driving the split -spoon sampler into the material. The number of blows required for 18 inches of penetration is recorded and the value for the last 12 inches, or the penetration obtained from 100 blows, is reported as the Standard Penetration Value (N) at the appropriate depth on the logs of borings. Ground -water readings were recorded during and at completion of drilling. Readings are provided in the upper right area on the boring logs. Upon completion of the borings, the bore holes were backfilled with soil cuttings and plugged at the surface by hand tamping. 2.2 Laboratory Testing Laboratory soil tests were performed on selected representative samples recovered from the borings. In addition to the classification tests (liquid limits and plastic limits), moisture content, unconfined compression, and unit weight tests were performed. Results of the laboratory classification tests, moisture content tests, strength, and density conducted for this project are included on the boring logs. The above laboratory tests were performed in general accordance with applicable ASTM or U.S. Army Corps of Engineers procedures, or generally accepted practice. Report No. 00-30166 3 Rone Engineers, Inc. 3.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 3.1 Subsurface Stratigraphy Specific types and depths of subsurface strata encountered at the boring location are shown on the boring logs in Appendix A. The generalized subsurface stratigraphy encountered in the borings is discussed below. Subsurface soils encountered in the borings consist of reddish brown, brown, light brown, tan, tannish red, reddish orange sand extending to the full depth of the borings. Borings B-2 and B-3 had a thin seam of silty sandy clay and shaly clay, respectively. The clay seams were of low plasticity with a tested liquid limit of 27 and plasticity index of 15. 3.2 Ground -Water Observations The borings were drilled using continuous flight augers in order to observe ground- water seepage. Boring B-4 was dry at completion of drilling. All other borings had water at depths ranging from 23 feet to 40 feet below existing ground level. It must be recognized that the surface elevation of the borings were not uniform due to the slope of the terrain at the site. Fluctuations of the ground -water level can occur due to seasonal variations in the amount of rainfall, site topography and runoff, hydraulic conductivity of soil strata, and Report No. 00-30166 Rone Engineers, Inc. 4 other factors not evident at the time the borings were performed. The possibility of ground -water level fluctuations should be considered when developing the design and construction plans for the project. Water traveling through the soil (subsurface water) is often unpredictable. This could be due to seasonal changes in ground water and due to the unpredictable nature of ground -water paths. Therefore, it is necessary during construction for the contractor to be observant for ground -water seepage in excavations in order to assess the situation and take appropriate action. 4.0 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS 4.1 General Foundation Considerations Two independent design criteria must be satisfied in the selection of the type of foundation to support the proposed structure. First, the ultimate bearing capacity, reduced by a sufficient factor of safety, must not be exceeded by the bearing pressure transferred to the foundation soils. Second, due to consolidation or expansion of the underlying soils during the operating life of the structures, total and differential vertical movements must be within tolerable limits. The foundation for the elevated storage tank is discussed in Section 4.3. Foundation construction considerations are presented in Section 4.4. Report No. 00-30166 5 Rone Engineers, Inc. 4.2 Expansive Soil Movements The expansive soils are relatively thin and minimal in total depth/thickness. Therefore, the amount of expansive soil movement to onsite soils is anticipated to be on the order of 1 inch or less. 4.3 Mat Foundation -Elevated Water Tank Reinforced concrete mat or ring foundations may be used to support the elevated tank structural loads within the very dense sand. Square, rectangular, or ring type spread foundations should be founded at a depth of 6 to 8 feet below existing ground surface within the very dense sand using a maximum allowable bearing capacity of 5.0 to 6.0 ksf. This bearing pressure assumes a factor of safety above 3. Settlements on the order of % inch to 1 '/4 inch is anticipated for foundations founded within the sand. 4.4 Mat or Spread Foundation Construction Mat or spread foundation construction should be monitored by a representative of the geotechnical engineer to observe, among other things, the following items: • Identification of bearing material • Adequate penetration of the foundation excavation into the bearing layer • The base and sides of the excavation are clean of loose cuttings • If seepage is encountered, whether it is of sufficient amount to require the use of excavation dewatering methods Precautions should be taken during the placement of reinforcing steel and concrete to prevent loose, excavated soil from falling into the excavation. Concrete should be Report No. 00-30166 LV Rone Engineers, Inc. placed as soon as practical after completion of the excavating, cleaning, reinforcing steel placement and observation. Excavation for a spread foundation should be filled with concrete before the end of the workday, or sooner if required, to prevent deterioration of the bearing material. Prolonged exposure or inundation of the bearing surface with water will result in changes in strength and compressibility characteristics. If delays occur, the excavation should be deepened as necessary and cleaned, in order to provide a fresh bearing surface. If more than 24 hours of exposure of the bearing surface is anticipated in the excavations, a "mud slab" should be used to protect the bearing surfaces. If a mud slab is used, the foundation excavations should initially be over -excavated by approximately 4 inches and a lean concrete mud slab of approximately 4 inches in thickness should be placed in the bottom of the excavations immediately following exposure of the bearing surface by excavation. The mud slab will protect the bearing surface, maintain more uniform moisture in the subgrade, facilitate dewatering of excavations if required, and provide a working surface for placement of formwork and reinforcing steel. The concrete should be placed in a manner that will prevent the concrete from striking the reinforcing steel or the sides of the excavation in a manner that would cause segregation of the concrete. 4.5 Site Drainage An important feature of the project is to provide positive drainage away from the Report No. 00-30166 7 Rone Engineers, Inc. structures, pipe supports, pump pads, slabs or foundations. If water is permitted to stand next to or below the structures, pipe trenches, and similar facilities, excessive soil movements can occur. This could result in excessive vertical movements and damage or distortion of the structures or other facilities. Ponding water can result in soil movements exceeding those previously given. A slope of 1.5 to 3 percent should be provided, such that the soil slopes away from the proposed structure, foundations, and excavations. 5.0 EARTHWORK 5.1 Site Preparation The areas to receive foundations, structures or excavations should be stripped of vegetation, roots, old construction debris, and other organic material. It is estimated that the depth of stripping will be on the order of 6 inches. The actual stripping depth should be based on field observations with particular attention given to old drainage areas, uneven topography, and excessively wet soils. The stripped areas should be observed to determine if additional excavation is required to remove weak or otherwise objectionable materials that would adversely affect the fill placement or other construction activities. Report No. 00-30166 8 Rone Engineers, Inc. 5.2 Placement and Compaction Fill material should be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 8 inches in uncompacted thickness. The uncompacted lift thickness should be reduced to 4 inches for structure backfill zones requiring hand -operated power compactors or small self-propelled compactors. The fill material should be uniform with respect to material type and moisture content. Clods and chunks of material should be broken down and the fill material mixed by disking, blading, or plowing, as necessary, so that a material of uniform moisture and density is obtained for each lift. Water required for sprinkling to bring the fill material to the proper moisture content should be applied evenly through each layer. The fill material should be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined by the Standard Proctor test, ASTM D 698. Backfill for structures should be compacted to a density ranging from 95 to 100 percent of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 698, Standard Proctor. In conjunction with the compacting operation, the fill material should be brought to the proper moisture content. The moisture content for earth fill should range from 2 percentage points below optimum to 5 percentage points above optimum (-2 to + 5). These ranges of moisture contents are given as maximum recommended ranges. For some soils and under some conditions, the contractor may have to maintain a more narrow range of moisture content (within the recommended range) in order to consistently achieve the recommended density. Report No. 00-30166 9 Rone Engineers, Inc. Field density tests should be taken as each lift of fill material is placed. As a guide, one field density test per lift for each 5,000 square feet of compacted area is recommended. For small areas or critical areas the frequency of testing may need to be increased to one test per 2,500 square feet. A minimum of 2 tests per lift should be required. The earthwork operations should be observed and tested on a continuing basis by an experienced geotechnician working in conjunction with the project geotechnical engineer. 5.3 Trench Backfill Trench backfill for pipelines or other utilities should be properly placed and compacted. Overly dense or dry backfill can swell and create a mound along the completed trench line. Loose or wet backfill can settle and form a depression along the completed trench line. Distress to overlying structures, pavements, etc. is likely if heaving or settlement occurs. If a higher class bedding material is required for the pipelines, a lean concrete bedding will limit water intrusion into the trench and will not require compaction after placement. The soil backfill should be placed in approximately 4- to 6 -inch loose lifts. The density and moisture content should be as recommended for fill in Section 5.2 Placement and Compaction, of this report. A minimum of one field density test should be taken per lift for each 150 linear feet of trench, with a minimum of 2 tests per lift. Report No. 00-30166 Ire Rone Engineers, Inc. 5.4 Excavation The side slopes of excavations through the overburden soils should be made in such a manner to provide for their stability during construction. Existing structures, pipelines or other facilities, which are constructed prior to or during the currently proposed construction and which require excavation, should be protected from loss of end bearing or lateral support. Temporary construction slopes and/or permanent embankment slopes should be protected from surface runoff water. Site grading should be designed to allow drainage at planned areas where erosion protection is provided, instead of allowing surface water to flow down unprotected slopes. Trench safety recommendations are beyond the scope of this report. The contractor must comply with all applicable safety regulations concerning trench safety and excavations, including, but not limited to OSHA regulations. 5.5 Acceptance of Imported Fill Any soil imported from off-site sources should be tested for compliance with the recommendations for the particular application and approved by the project geotechnical engineer prior to the materials being used. The owner should also require the contractor to obtain a written, notarized certification from the landowner of each proposed off-site soil borrow source stating that to the best of the landowner's Report No. 00-30166 19 Rone Engineers, Inc. knowledge and belief there has never been contamination of the borrow source site with hazardous or toxic materials. The certification should be furnished to the owner prior to proceeding to furnish soils to the site. It is also recommended that the contractor be required to provide the services of an EPA -approved laboratory to perform, as a minimum, a toxic contaminant scan of composite soil samples representative of each separate proposed borrow source, in accordance with EPA protocol for the list of contaminants contained in 40 CFR, Part 261, Appendix VIII, by EPA methods SW -846, prior to importing the soil borrow. Any potential off-site soil borrow on which the test results indicate the presence of contaminants above background levels should be rejected. Soil materials derived from the excavation of underground petroleum storage tanks should not be used as fill on this project. 5.6 Soil Corrosion Potential Specific testing for soil corrosion potential was not included in the scope of this study. However, based upon past experience on other projects in the vicinity, the clays at this site may be corrosive. Standard construction practices for protecting metal pipe and similar facilities in contact with these soils should be used. 5.7 Erosion and Sediment Control All disturbed areas should be protected from erosion and sedimentation during construction, and all permanent slopes and other areas subject to erosion or sedimentation should be provided with permanent erosion and sediment control Report No. 00-30166 12 Rone Engineers, Inc. facilities. All applicable ordinances and codes regarding erosion and sediment control should be followed. 6.0 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATIONS In any geotechnical investigation, the design recommendations are based on a limited amount of information about the subsurface conditions. In the analysis, the geotechnical engineer must assume the subsurface conditions are similar to the conditions encountered in the borings. However, quite often during construction anomalies in the subsurface conditions are revealed. Therefore, it is recommended that Rone Engineers, Inc. be retained to observe earthwork and foundation installation and perform materials evaluation and testing during the construction phase of the project. This enables the geotechnical engineer to stay abreast of the project and to be readily available to evaluate unanticipated conditions, to conduct additional tests if required and, when necessary, to recommend alternative solutions to unanticipated conditions. Until these construction phase services are performed by the project geotechnical engineer, the recommendations contained in this report on such items as final foundation bearing elevations and other such subsurface related recommendations should be considered as preliminary. Report No. 00-30166 13 Rone Engineers, Inc. It is proposed that construction phase observation and materials testing commence by the project geotechnical engineer at the outset of the project. Experience has shown that the most suitable method for procuring these services is for the owner or the owner's design engineers to contract directly with the project geotechnical engineer. This results in a clear, direct line of communication between the owner and the owner's design engineers and the geotechnical engineer. 7.0 REPORT CLOSURE The borings for this study were staked by Rone Engineers, Inc. after selection by Freese and Nichols, Inc. The locations of the borings should be considered accurate only to the degree implied by the methods used in their determination. The boring logs shown in this report contain information related to the types of soil encountered at specific locations and times and show lines delineating the interface between these materials. The logs also contain our field representative's interpretation of conditions that are believed to exist in those depth intervals between the actual samples taken. Therefore, the boring logs contain both factual and interpretive information. It should be understood that the classification data on the logs of borings represent visual estimates of classifications for those portions of each stratum on which the full range of laboratory soil classification tests were not performed. It is not implied that these logs are representative of subsurface conditions at other locations and times. Report No. 00-30166 14 Rone Engineers, Inc. With regard to ground -water conditions, this report presents data on ground -water levels as they were observed during the course of the field work. In particular, water level readings have been made in the borings at the times and under conditions stated in the text of the report and on the boring logs. It should be noted that fluctuations in the level of the ground -water table can occur with passage of time due to variations in rainfall, temperature and other factors. Also, this report does not include quantitative information on rates of flow of ground water into excavations, on pumping capacities necessary to dewater the excavations, or on methods of dewatering excavations. Unanticipated soil conditions at a construction site are commonly encountered and cannot be fully predicted by mere soil samples, test borings or test pits. Such unexpected conditions frequently require that additional expenditures be made by the owner to attain a properly designed and constructed project. Therefore, provision for some contingency fund is recommended to accommodate such potential extra cost. The analyses, conclusions and recommendations contained in this report are based on site conditions as they existed at the time of our field exploration and further on the assumption that the exploratory borings are representative of the subsurface conditions throughout the site; that is, the subsurface conditions everywhere are not significantly different from those disclosed by the borings at the time it was completed. If, during construction, different subsurface conditions from those encountered in our borings are observed, or appear to be present in excavations, we Report No. 00-30166 Rone Engineers, Inc. 15 must be advised promptly so that we can review these conditions and reconsider our recommendations where necessary. If there is a substantial lapse of time between submission of this report and the start of the work at the site, if conditions have changed due either to natural causes or to construction operations at or adjacent to the site, or if structure locations, structural loads or finish grades are changed, we urge that we be promptly informed and retained to review our report to determine the applicability of the conclusions and recommendations, considering the changed conditions and/or time lapse. Further, it is urged that Rone Engineers, Inc. be retained to review those portions of the plans and specifications for this particular project that pertain to earthwork and foundations as a means to determine whether the plans and specifications are consistent with the recommendations contained in this report. In addition, we are available to observe construction, particularly the compaction of structural fill, or backfill and the construction of foundations as recommended in the report, and such other field observations as might be necessary. The scope of our services did not include any environmental assessment or investigation for the presence or absence of wetlands or hazardous or toxic materials in the soil, surface water, ground water or air, on or below or around the site. Report No. 00-30166 In Rone Engineers, Inc. This report has been prepared for use in developing an overall design concept. Paragraphs, statements, test results, boring logs, diagrams, etc. should not be taken out of context, nor utilized without a knowledge and awareness of their intent within the overall concept of this report. The reproduction of this report, or any part thereof, supplied to persons other than the owner, should indicate that this study was made for design purposes only and that verification of the subsurface conditions for purposes of determining difficulty of excavation, trafficability, etc. are responsibilities of the contractor. This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of the Freese and Nichols, Inc. for specific application to design of this project. The only warranty made by us in connection with the services provided is that we have used that degree of care and skill ordinarily exercised under similar conditions by reputable members of our profession practicing in the same or similar locality. No other warranty, expressed or implied, is made or intended. Report No. 00-30166 17 Rone Engineers, Inc. Q K 0 Z W IL IL Q x WIRE FENCE X X X X X k X X X X L X X B-2 U TT Z W U. W PROPOSED ce 3 x B-3 WATER TANK B-4 X B-1 / B-5 X KNOX ROAD WIRE FENCE NORTH SCALE: 1" = 60' Rnn&Ennln&w2 � `� ELEVATED WATER TANK - KELLER TEXAS PLAN OF BORINGS 00-30166 PLATE A.1 Major Divisions Sym. Typical Names Laboratory Classification Criteria Q) Well -graded gravels, gravel - a) C GW sand mixtures, little or no C= D °—° greater than 4: C�= (D �0� between 1 and 3 .y M p fines N D,° D10 x D8, a C) T graded gravels, gravel .ami aPoorly � E N w GP sand mixtures, little or no 12 u) u) u, Not meeting all gradation requirements for GW C/) ��a fines a) ati� > m > c`o o v E (D o Silty gravels, gravel -sand -silt Liquid uid and Plastic limits q "A" Liquid and plastic limits ziCD 0 w o o Z ;; C? (D :� C: s a: E t N GM mixtures Q) Cr ai .N Q) below line or P.I. plotting in hatched zone o L >> ' greater than 4 Z U ._ N ` N U : Q) between 4 and 7 are Li uid and Plastic limits q y M a) o .� N o borderline cases y o Co'CL GC Clayey gravels, gravel sand- U) N m above "A" line P.I. requiring use of dual m (D n. clay mixtures .S o Q with symbols c Q E Z : Z greater than 7 EU Well -graded sands, gravelly Q -... Q w m D, (D30)2 ?� o E N -0 C C w SW sands, little or no fines Q) m a N C�= — greater than 6: C�= between 1 and 3 D,° D D, U E N c x , y p) c O Poorly graded sands; L " C g N C ar0i m D c o N C) v SP gravelly sands, little or no�, 15 °; Not meeting all gradation requirements for SW s yfines ° ` Q) a C M `. C N CU w Q O n' N aa)) u7 w 0 U o a) M m e a) Cn Liquid and Plastic limits ESM Silty sands, sand -silt mixtures � U below "A" line or P.I. less Liquid and plastic limits s s m �, 3 _ ` Q o o o than 4 plotting between 4 and 7 _ 3a o ° J are borderline cases Liquid and Plastic limits m C U m -0 requiring use of dual `o co �' SC Clayey sands, sand -clay E � °' above "A" line with P.I. symbols g a Q mixtures Q) 0 .N m greater than 7 v U Inorganic silts and very fine sands, rock flour, silty or ML clayey fine sands, or clayey U, � silts with slight plasticity m L ° U) Inorganic clays of low to 60 N medium plasticity, gravelly o E CL clays, sandy clays, silty clays, 50-- N vii and lean clays Q CH Z Q C: Organic silts and organic silty a OL clays of low plasticity y x o m U) c Inorganic silts, micaceous or C N 3c 1 `= a MH diatomaceous fine sandy or OH ar d MH `° (D m silty soils, elastic silts o .P C: °� w = 5 2 CL LL U Z Q � (UCH Inorganic clays of high m Q) plasticity, fat clays 1 '. CL -ML ML a d OL 4 mOrganic OH clays of medium to 1 1 0 o to 20 30 ao so so 70 ao so too J high plasticity, organic silts Liquid Limit .9 CD Pt Peat and other highly organic Plasticity Chart O o soils UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM PLATE A.2 SOIL OR ROCK TYPES NRAVE e e L LEAN CLAY LIMESTONE • •' �• . • SAND • • • SANDY — — SHALE SILT SILTY SANDSTONE "Em, HIGHLY PLASTIC CLAY CLAYEY CONGLOMERATE Shelby Tube Auger Split Spoon Rock Core Cone Pen No Recovery TERMS DESCRIBING CONSISTENCY, CONDITION, AND STRUCTURE OF SOIL Fine Grained Soils (Mare than 50% Passing No. 200 Sieve) Descriptive Item Penetrometer Reading, (tsf) Soft 0.0 to 1.0 Firm 1.0 to 1.5 Stiff 1.5 to 3.0 Very Stiff 3.0 to 4.5 Hard 4.5+ Coarse Grained Soils (More than 50% Retained on No. 200 Sieve) Penetration Resistance Descriptive Item Relative Density (blows/foot) 0 to 4 Very Loose 0 to 20% 4 to 10 Loose 20 to 40% 10 to 30 Medium Dense 40 to 70% 30 to 50 Dense 70 to 90% Over 50 Very Dense 90 to 100% Soil Structure :alcareous Contains appreciable deposits of calcium carbonate; generally nodular .3lickensided Having inclined planes of weakness that are slick and glossy in appearance Laminated Composed of thin layers of varying color or texture -fissured Containing cracks, sometimes filled with fine sand or silt nterbedded Composed of alternate layers of different soil types, usually in approximately equal proportions PERMS DESCRIBING PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF ROCK Hardness and Degree of Cementation eery Soft or Plastic Can be remolded in hand; corresponds in consistency up to very stiff in soils joft Can be scratched with fingernail Moderately Hard Can be scratched easily with knife; cannot be scratched with fingernail lard Difficult to scratch with knife Very Hard Cannot be scratched with knife Poorly Cemented or Friable Easily crumbled ,emented Bound together by chemically precipitated material; Quartz, calcite, dolomite, siderite, and iron oxide are common cementing materials. ')egree of Weathering Inweathered Rock in its natural state before being exposed to atmospheric agents Slightly Weathered Noted predominantly by color change with no disintegrated zones 'Veathered Complete color change with zones of slightly decomposed rock Aremely Weathered Complete color change with consistency, texture, and general appearance approaching soil BEY TO CLASSIFICATION AND SYMBOLS PLATE A.3 Project No. 00-30166 Boring No. B-1 Project Elevated Water Tower Keller, Texas Location See Plate A.1 Water Observations Seepage at 25'; water at 25' with cave-in to 28' two hours after completion Completion Depth 50.0' Completion Date 11-28-00 a Q TE m Surface Elevation Type Auger s a 0 z o o �, ens b y L. t= y> Z. E~ a�n :Z4 A. PEI v ;5a 4)U:: Stratum Description 5 —10- 050/4" 15 20 25 30 35 0 5 50 SAND, red, medium dense - grades w/ tan, slightly cemented, very dense — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 18 11 50/5" 12 50/4" 24 6 50/3" 4 5 0/421 2 50/3" 3 50/3" 5 50/3" 21 50/4" 27 50/4" 25 50/3" 26 424� 50/3" LOG OF BORING NO. B-1 Plate A.4 Project No. 00-30166 Boring No. B-2 Project Elevated Water Tower Keller, Texas Location See Plate A.1 Water Observations Seepage at 25'; water at 40' at completion; cave-in soon after completion CompletionCompletion Depth 50,0' Date 11-28-00 a Q N m Surface Elevation Type Auger e- a 0 O O Z �� b� � s k 0 C =U ^� or_C �> �e a, 00 �s iron A.CA U �D.4 amu- Stratum Description 5 10 15 —20-19 25 30 - - 35 0 5—§ 50 SAND, tannish red, very loose 4 9 SANDSTONE, reddish tan, very dense 50/3" 21 6 50/4" 2 SAND, reddish tan, w/ traces of sandstone, slightly cemented, very dense 50/3" 36 5 50/4" 4 50/5" 6 50/4" 5 US A SILTY SAND CLAY, gray, hard 50/3" 27 13 14 12 19 SAND, tannish red, very dense — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 50/5" 27 50/4" 20 1 50/5" 31 1 50/3" 22 LOG OF BORING NO. B-2 Plate A.5 Project No. 00-30166 Boring No. B-3 Project Elevated Water Tower Keller, Texas Location See Plate A.1 Water Observations Seepage at 32'; water at 32' at completion CompletionCompletion Depth 35.0' Dau 11-28-00 s L 0 T -2 E Surface Elevation Type Auger cx 0 z N • C. :E ,� � •a9 i xwE~ as S% . •y x y V.- �� a. -a C.A v v O= C o as �; Stratum Description 5 10 —15- 20 25 30 35 S.. ND, brown, tan, very loose - loose - grades to reddish tan, very dense - slightly cemented 3 NP NP NP 10 6 7 60 15 10 50/4" 6 50/3" 8 50/3" 4 50/3" 1 13 SHALY CLAY, tannish gray, w/ red sand seams, hard 40 27 12 15 10 SANDSTONE, reddish tan SAND, reddish tan, very dense — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 501-3" 1 1 26 LOG OF BORING NO. B-3 Plate A.6 Project No. 00-30166 Boring No. B-4 Project Elevated Water Tower Keller, Texas Location See Plate A.1 Water Observations Seepage at 24'; dry at completion CompletionCompletion Depth 35.0' Date 11-22-00 w M. A �° °-' Surface Elevation Type Auger °a 0 CZ z b s ^ s o � �= L o5 cd a SCJ Stratum Description 5 10 15 20 —25—Xx 30 35 i SAND, reddish orange, very loose grades w/ trace of gravel, loose 3 5 6 17 50/3" 25 12 _ SANDSTONE, reddish orange, hard 00/1.25' 1 SAND, tan grades to reddish orange, very dense - grades to tannish orange, w/ traces of clay, medium dense - grades to very dense grades w/ trace of sandstone _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . 50/3" 71 1 50/4" 10 19 33 NP NP NP 13 50/4" 36 50/4" 21 LOG OF BORING NO. B-4 Plate A.7 Project No. 00-30166 Boring No. B-5 Project Elevated Water Tower Keller, Texas Location See Plate A.1 Water Observations Seepage at 18'; water at 23' at competion; cave-in at 30' at completion Completion Depth 50.0, Completion Date 12-22-00 a Q E E Surface Elevation Type Auger " a a 0 }+ Z o 0 o a, a�C �A v �s s " `" t= " g'R��ao� aaaF a.vn 'a -:a E:a E:4 ;3a ;DU Stratum Description 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 0 5 i so SAND, reddish brown, loose grades to very dense - grades to reddish orange grades to light brown - w/ small clay seams - grades to reddish brown - grades to light brown — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 7 5 g 4 7 5 50/3.25" 6 50/4.25" 12 50/3" 16 50/2.5" 22 50/4.25" 22 64 18 50/3.75" 18 50/2" 19 50/2" 1 g LOG OF BORING NO. B-5 Plate A.8 rns�yl SIOHC>IN • 3S33d=l kt% Limi 9fL6L i� 7J31StM 'A SVNOHI �TAII7N7 =aa L��T A dM 1 � A �ll�ll� IA 83-113A 830dMdW . uIo )�113d 1N3d1 �IoAdw )�3�a`d(,*A8 11OOS 1N34N31NI83dnS 83M3S ONV a31VM 3�3ON3M NHOP smoM onend JO 8W03814 Old �13NHOS-ll a3 2i30VNV N AiIO d3HS3d4 'H 310 ao,kdw SdI71Hd 3nda XW6L E[j)N%OjS XHIVAN (lalVAHIEI asn Imof OW '*Z LL AO l '03S Lo z v '30N3A NNII NIVHO 031VOO IANIA 2 AO n311 NI 3 1NIOd 1081NOO Ol 3 1NIOd -1081NOD Ol V 1NIOd IO2l1NO3 213NM0 Ln W0NA 33N3A IVIN3WVNdO NO 03SVS 38 IIVHS L W311(118 31VNNR_W '£Z 3H1 Ol 1S03 IVNOIlIOOtl ON 1V O3OIA02id 38 1711M ONV 133f O2Jd 3Hl Ol 1S03 A21tl101SBf15 'm V 03213OISN03 38 IIVHS S3031d 38nS013 IIV 'NOuon8ISNO3 AO 3ON3nO3S 3H1 01 S30NVHO '9NIdId O21VA 1nOH9nO8Hl 31VNICI8003 Ol S36n0330ad N0113n8ISNO3 IM03dS 804 03NIn M 3SOH1 9NIOnl0NI 'I 3f'O21d '0 0 213303 (MOND AO lA £WnWINIW HlIM 0318n8 38 IIVHS 3Nn3dld 3H1 13nNiSNOO Ol 038inO38 SV 3NII3dId 80A S3031d 321nS013 30IA08d IIVHS 8010tl211NOO 0 r 'S9NIMVMO 3H1 NO O31V310NI 383HM S1N10f 03NIVdiS38 Ol NOIIIOOV NI " 0 03IItl1SNl 3B INNS sX00IB 15ndHl 31380NO3 'SNOI1V3Id133dS 1031'08d dad" Wn1V0 S9Sn NOdn 03SV8 321V 1O3(02Jd SIHl 2101 S1NIOd I0211N00 Itl011213A 3H1 _.� S1NIOf 03NIV211S38 3AVH IIVHS 133f021d SIH1. 80A 03IIV1SNI 3NII3did 11V 'ZZ 'NOI13n8ISNOO 0NiNn0 �. 3OIA83S NI s311nI1n 9NUSIX3 IIV 9NId33N NOA 3181SNOdS3d 38 IIVHS HOIOVNIN03 o T 'SNOIIVOI3103dS H11M 30NVO8030V NI 1N3W3AVd 039VWV0 s 8IVd3d 'S3IOHlOd 0NV DM.L 21 d 213 0 333OVA21nS 9NIAINO HlOOWS V 38nSN3 2132Jn13VAnNVW 3dld 3Hl AB y 0 01 21013tl211NO3 3H1 AB O3NIVINIVW 38 lIVHS ONV 1N3W3AVd 9NI1SIX3 3H1 AO 030NY040038 SV Sn10V21 WnWINIW ONV SNOI133Id30 1NIOf 3I8VMOIIV WnWIXVW 3Hl 30 SSL 30VZID 03HSINIA 3Hl Ol O3IIVISNI 38 AVNs IIIA NOVB AHV8OdV431 'SNOI1Vd3d0 ONV S0N38 OMVONVIS 9NISn 03IIV15N1 38 IIVHS SON3B Itl1NOZIaOH ONV IV3112J3A NOIlOn2)15NO3 9NI21n0 S21nOH 1H91IAV0 9NRln0 1d33X3 1N3W3AVd 9NIlSIX3 (18VONVIS-NON MY 'NMOHS SNOIlV30l ltl SON3B O2JVONVIS IIVISNI IIVHS 2101Ou211NOO ° N1 O3MOIIV 38 IIIM HON381 N3dO ON 'SIVMOVOH 03HSII8VIS3 NI H3N32J1 '0310N 3SIM83HIO n o N3d0 2103 03211n0321 SV IIIA X3V8 A21V2JOdW31 IIVISNI _-VHS 21013VdJ.NOO 'LZ S53INn '3(1"9 03HSINIA M0138 Si„AO N3AO3 WnWINIW V 3AVH INNS S3NII83IVM w a� Q '6090 VMMV 83d 1V3S IN31IIS38 38 IIVHS S3AIVA 31VO IIV 'OZ SNOIId1d 31V 3H1 H11M 33NV02J 'S3 NI 03 Mike 38 IIVHS 1N3Wd1n03 31IItl13W 0Ntl '9Nldld 31I1V13W 'S1NV21OAH 32i1A 'S3AIVA 0312JfIB IIV 0= NOI13ndISN03 3Hl VIONA 5121830 ONV 0nW AO 338A 133r021d Ol IN33VfOd-11V S)IVM3Ois ONtl SAMIS 9NId33N 2103 3IBISNOdS32i SI 8OIZ)VHIN03 3H1 '61 I 'N33NIONO3 101 3000 Noi n ISN003M AO NMOL NIV ONV H31 -13)i AO NOZ) 3Hl '2133NI9N3 3Hl Ol SS3OOV NOIlOn2115N0O 3IBVllnS NItl1NIVW IIVHS 2J013VM1NO3 B '1HOIN83AO 331A83S AO 1nO NIVW38 Ol 0 8 z x m 03MO11V 38 S30IM3S I1VHS 3SVO ON NI '037171VISNGH 38 Ol S331Aa3S 83M3S NOA 301A83S 9NI133W N0113n2115N0O-32Jd 3Hl ltl O3llIW8n5 38 IItlHS NVId A13AV5 H3N3211 s ,m o NI SNOIldn2k131N1 A3kiB 2103 1d3OX3 'S3WIl IIV 1V 2130210 9NINNOM NI S3MMSne CNV V '103(02Jd SIHI 2103 833NION3 IVNOISS3AO8d V AB 03HVd321d 'NVId A1327S H3N3211 V rN N " o S3WOH IIV Ol SNO1103NNOO S3M3S ONtl 831VM 9NINIVINIVW 80A 3IBISNOdS38 SI 21013ca1NO3 '9l 9NIZIIIln >180M O350d08d 3H1 13n815NO3 IIVHS 8013V2J1NOO 3H1 'A13AVS H0N3211 IIV 2103 o * u 3IBISNOdS3N SI 8013VNINOO 'S021V0NVIS S,2JO1V211SINIWOV H1Itl3H ONV A13AVs IVNOI1Vdn000 80BY1 AO 1N3) iVd30 'S'n 3H1 HIM 30NVONOODY NI 38 IIVHS NOIIVAVOX3 H3N3HI I-IV N '103rOHd 3H1 AO N0113Id1`400 NOdn Vd3 Ol ,ION, rn(T1 N�ON,NIWN3INI o033OLLONOVV9N1111NIBf1Suon6ISa0A 3IBISNO 53211 38 IldIM 2JOlOV81N0033H1 Z I021NOD 1S,133H1HAM A dWOO Ol 30Naf.LII EI SNOdS3?3 S,21013V211NOO 3Hl 318�l S30dNVdIVHS m O SlIVl30 93 L L 11 'N0113nNISNOO AO S3SVHd IlV 1nOH9n021H1 AL1181SNOdS38 S,2i013V81NO3 3H1 x S33n(13HOS V SM89VIO ti3 9l D L 3Nn-3N0 38 OIlVW3HOS 10211N0O £3 S l 38 IIVHS S32JfISV3W NOIlN3A3ad NOISOa3 3Hl AO 3ONVN3INIVW (INV N01133dSNl 3H1 r O ONI1H9n NNVI 1503 NMO SIH Z ON3O3l 38 NVId 31IS l3 £L AY*3NN l3nva0 1V IV1831Vh 3AOW38 INNS 3H ONV IIIA HOns MONA 9NIlInS321 39VWV0 IIV NOA 3I81SNOdS38 Z —I 1n0AVl W31SAS NOIlVOl21211 38 TIM 3H 'NOISSIW213d 1nOH11M SV38Y 3Hl NI W831tlW SS33X3 S30Vld NOIZ)V211NO3 1211 Z l 3Hl AI '2101V211SINIWOV N1V`1d OOOIA S,A113 3H1 (INV 83NMO A1213d021d 031033AV 3Hl MONA O SlIVl30 3AIVA (18VA � 1,M3AW i C n £W L L — NOISSIW213d N311RJM 1nOH11M AVM 30VNIVNO IV2)n1VN SNOW 80 SV38V MOI NI 0311SOd3O 38 frl ONIdId 801831NI S,83113H ZV1 OL (WO D'S ins) IIVHS IVI831VW 031VAV3X3 SS30X3 ON 'OS 9NI1V1S 83LL31 V 301A08d IIVHS 21013V211NO3 3Hl U) m ONldld 801831Ni S,3>IVl1S3/A LW 6 la3Alno 3MONW 'SIM11 3113 3H1 NIH11M ION SI NOUV30I 3Hl AI 'SllYin ALIO 3H1 NIH11M AI NO M1SINIWOV NIVId Om SlIV130 ONION33 NNIINIVH3 LO 9 1•MidSV w ism 1 d 1 .1 .1 (1001.4S,A110 3Hl Ol 3IBV1d333V MIS V 1V AO O3SOdS10 ),183dONd 38 IIVHS '313 'HSV211 '1x10 +_ Sl1d130 Sn03NV113351W 93 L 9NIOnIONI NOIIVAV3X3 NONA SIV1831VW SnlddnS 'W311 AVd 31VNVd3S V ION ONV WiN3013N1 38 z r m SIIVl30 1V1 0333dS 11 3 S1N SO 9 a�'� GUM 30a� — — — IIVHS SIHl 'IV1831VW Snld8nS Iltl V38Y 133P021d 3Hl NONA 3AOW3d MVHS N01OVdiNO3 3H1 Z mfrl r uan3sv3 '1NYMMS NO3 MO -11V 01 S3H3NI XIS ;;a r– NVId N011VONn03 V N01133S NNVl to S D C m Snld 30V89 9NI1SIX3 01 (130VId 38 IIVHS SV38V O3AVdNn NI III.03tl8 HON381 11V fel r D NOUVA313 NNVl EO t, ar,M wa MM YiM ',an un� x f l m NVId ONIOV60 311S ZO i arm 101 'NOI1VI8OdSNV211 AO 1N3W121Vd30 SVX31 IN011103 1S31V1) S3OIA30 -1081NOO 31 v6l Wa0A1Nn NO NVId 311S LO Z IVnNVW SVX31 3H1 NI NMOHS NOIIVIIVISNI 3H1 Ol W210AN03 ism 'SNV181S303d ONV OIAAV211 D a ON3931 38 X30NI 'S31ON IV63N30 LO l 314111 � — AO N011331OHd ONV 33Nvom 3Hl NOA "313 ONV 'S33IA30 1H91I 'SN91S 9NINHVM 'S30V318sve Z N 133HS H3A03 0 0 — 3 IIV 'AINO SAMIS HONIW NO 3I8V1d333V 38 IIIM S021Vn93AVS 31vnD30V H11M SS38DONd NI xnw SNOI1V2J3d0 N0113n211SN00 0Nn08tl I3A`u2il 3N'dl 3N0 'S31`4I1 IIV 1V 03NIV1NIVW 3B 1SnW 3133 O NOIldl213SM ON 12311S Z-3-9 3W iyans AVM -OM1 '9NI133W NOIlOn8ISNOO-38d 3Hl Ol 8018d IVAONddtl 80A 1N3W18Vd30 SNaOM OIIBnd 3113 3H1 Ol 'SV38V 9NIAHOM IIV HOA 'NYId IO211NO3 31AAV81 V HSINNnA IIVHS 8010VIIINOO 3Hl c 0 . X3GN1 133HS � �� � ., '30Va9 03HSINIA H31VW Ol 13S 38 IIVHS S3XOB 3AIVA IIV (7um Nmn m1vW v,NW 3JN3! m m 0 0 0 o (wm WOO) 3]N3! 0 0 0--o--213113N AO 3110 3Hl AO IVAO8ddV N311121M 1nOH11M SBWn NO 53381 39VWV0 MO 1n0 Z ---I(038M) 3ON3e * '3AOW321 ION IIVHS SOIOVHINOO 3H1 '9NIMV210 V NO (131ViS MV31A103dS SS3INn D ONnOA 383M A31-11 NVHI 2131138 NO SV 0009 SV NOI110NO3 NI ONV (/) Z 8 s31W 83M0d 9 8 ` NOI1V0OI 3WVS 3H1 NI '3SN3dX3 S.8OI3V211NO3 3Hl 1V '2)01OVa1NO3 3Hl AB 033V1d3N sa313" — -� —� 80 038rVd38 38 INNS NNOM 3Hl AO NOIIVIIVISNI 1IN83d Ol 03a311V NO 03AOV13H '039VWVO 38V HOIHM S321n13n8IS 39VNIV8CI (INV 'S3NII3did Alniln 'S821n0 '1N3W3AVd mo0 - 'SNIVM301S 'SAVM3Al2i0 'S33N3A Ol 0311WI1 ION Ina '9NIOnIONI SINYGAONdAl 9NI1SIX3 � 3M s 37Wi35 a31VM V_ m b 9998 -91£ -LIB -1, S311dO 213813 319 �� m Nn Nma na01s 0 0440-S6£-009-1 S311dO 82181A II38 MS m ' — 100£-OIZ-LLB-I W003I31 WnINN3IIIW 0 'H" SOMY e31vM tl3M3s £ZZO-14ti-009- l 0313 213BIA 3X1 V � — ltiS (- l£4-118- l 3RJ13313 ALNn03-1211 1yNA 0440-S6£-008- 1 3NOHd3131 II38 N831S3MH1nOS n- 3"OHWR Wma "Wis r — OL09-IZ9 Of21O313 nXl SOLO-6LSa37N3a �LZLIS ANVdW03 SV9 2V1S 3NOI O 5501-l£4LlB 1N3W12Vd30 SN0M 3IBnd 83113>1D 3duw3AwA ',sin 3n7Vn 31VO — — — NOIlVAtl3X3 01 8018d SanOH ZL 1SV3I 1V 9NIM0II0A _ 3H1 13V1NO3 IIVHS N01OV81NOO 3Hi '01383H1 30VWV0 010AV 01 MVSS303N 0 0 s3unun � o —0 N^+a "+pu 3B AVW Stl STImIn a3H10 ONtl ONn0a9a30Nn IIV AO NOI1V30I ONV 3dA1 3H1 01 —3N0 3N0— 3N0Hd3131 QMrXM a30Nn —3„0 3110— SV SNOIIVNIM83130 NMO SIH 9NINVW 2103 3I81SNOdS3H SI 8010V211NOO 3Hl '3NSnI0Nl i;;i 3nirn 1rJ3N0 = —o/e o/�— 5�11d0 a3eli —o/s o/e— IIV NO 31`u'an33V 38 Ol 0331Nvdvno ION SI S311nI1n N3H10 ONV ONnO8C83ONn �C — — 151X3 AO NOI1V30I ONV 3dA1 0NIN830NO3 S9NIMVHO 3S3H1 NO NMOHS NOI1tlW2JOANl 3Hl �.r?n _ iii:'i l'!',il li 3n nn Alltl311nB — —1" 1"— 3NONd3l31 aNrwaOtlNn —1n N — �� — '80.LOVNINOO 3H1 AB ONnO89 3Hl NO 031AI83A 3B IIVHS S311n11n AO NOI1V30I 13VX3 —�„ 7n— 3Nn sv0 —ort on— yarn �� 'N0113nd1SN03 Ol 80INd 'SO80338 3lBtllitlAV 213d SV 321V S311nl1n 9NIlSIX3 IIV 3Zis 3 31411 tl3M35 ..v 55— 5 s Niv" a31vM •w +� ^" 'a— — ., 3M i 3Nn tl31vM —M _v- S 310 N del 3 N 3 3n 3an1n3/03SOdONd M31A 3113OJd ONIISIX3 321n1nA/03S0d0Nd M31A NV -1d ONIISIX3 'ail i! GN303� '0l '6 F 0 Ll d0 Lo SN8VWH3N38 OOZO'86Z9 00SO'1.664 0 SN8VWH0N3B 84£9'49Z9 4S£L'94Z9 N ON3 33N33 06£S'6619 0014'94Z9 W 1NIOd 696£'461.9 0000'S91.S 831N30 NNVI (1) 83141400 A183d08d 49BL'S6Z5 I846'£Z£S N N3N800 A183dOdd LLZO'00£9 0000'0005 (r) 83N800 A183d08d 0000'0005 I 0000'OUOS = 1NIOd £OBO'0005 £Z44'OZ£9 NO11VNIWN31 'I'M (H) 1NIOd £1£9'Z9Z9 499L'SIOS NOIIVNIW831 'TM (0) 83N800 30N3d 9Z6Z'966-0 2O£6'£Z£S j 83N800 33N33 ZLZB'4LZS 6946'£Z£S 3 N3N800 33N33 69 W90£9 9LIZ'ZZZ9 0 83NN00 33N33 9B44'9BZ9 £460'9405 3 83NN03 33N3d 6996'4019 699Z'4405 8 83NHOO 33N3d Z909'6664 613ZZ'£409 V NOI1d180S30 ONIISV3 ONIHINON ON 31841 31VNIa21000 ,0'££L 'A313 3d1d d0 d01 SN31I AB NOI133NN00 3Hnlnd 2103 Onld 3NII 631VM „OZ 831I3N 30 A110 ON3 (0)o (r) 381 „B/9 7d*0'84Z—,, -d-0-N ,Z1. '1SIX3� 1.Z'6ZL = 1nN d01 3A1VA N31VM AMD.H 3813 L£'6ZL = 1nN. dO1 3AIVA N31VM W31SAS N01 VOINNI HIM OOS O VddnB :3dV3SONVlI 301SNI W31SAS N01118N1 H11M SBn8HS ONV dop OlVddnB :3dV0S(Mr1 30151n0 O 'IIVM ONINIV138 30 ,OZ 0NOA38 53381 3AOW38 ION IIVHS 8013V81N00 '4 , IO'9£L = NOUVA313 0V08 XONN 30 301S H1nOS 31Hl NO 3115 31-11 30 83NHOO 1SV3H1nOS 31-11 1V 1HOI113381S — 310d 83MOd NI 13S 3NIdS OVO8TV8 :NBVWHON38 103r08d ,££' I4L = NOIIVA313 '33N33 V 30 H1n05 .1.333 LI Al31VFIX08ddV JNIAI ONV 3A180 OOOMN3AVN 30 330 1333 OL kl3lVW1XOHddV 3381 NVO „Z1. NI 3NIdS '8'8 :HNVV4H3N38 103rONd '£ '301A30 ONIOV38 08VO H11M 031VN3dO kl-1V318103l3 '31VO ONIOIIS N3A3111NV3 'Z 'A1N3dO8d 30 S318VONn08 H1nOS ONV 1SV3 31-11 NO 0301A08d 38 IIVHS 33N33 1V1N3WVN80 13N01d 80 381M 0388VB 3o SONVNIS 338H1 H11M 331433 NNIINIVHO (131V03 IANIA „B 'A183d08d 3o S318VONn08 1S3M ONV H180N NO 0301AO8d 38 IIVHS 381M 0388VB d0 SONVNIS 338H1 HIM 30N3d NNIINIVHO 03ZINVAIVO „9 :0N10N33 'I :S310N 314 A1N3dONd ! (I) I d08 „4Z (0V08 1lVHdSI�) 0V08 XONH S83H10 a-3NII N31VM _OZ N31 -13A J0 AD:) ====-14391.14 o---- ----------------. }� --- — — — — —----------------- > ----------•--- 0-1.9L 'A313 3d1d 30 d01 NC 0 Ln N m (B) (V) d >dIN1S MOW „Z1./M i , (3 O p ANVNIWn-1 41.1419 MOW „ZI/M 301434 NNII NIVHO i031V03 IANIA ipAdB o NNII NIVHO 031V03 IANIA ,B ,B nyWL) .OZ :V38V % 0Z15 W /MwNINBVd 0NV „Z N33 Nil N H3 , 3AI80 31380NOD I� i oy ii {� 31 Q IANI ,B 3 l 'n {I 7' o NooO N3nza ,41.x,zL 11 I {i �. N ' !i'm i ��p ca ;'O li m rn I W ;, O I YV1�' !{ I o NIVM IS ,£ dd if ;a ij 11 m 3518 v _ 1{ n 1.j J 3131 m I (l) 33N33 NNII NIVH3 �! O 8000 NVIN1S303d Lx,£ , - '- -' Y '-+ 0 31V00 IANIA ,4 { m 1.j m I dd NNVI C131VA313 3Sn ij S I � 1NIOr 03SOdONd f 1HO13H 'XVW 'XO8ddV ij o I OOd 313831400 (M8S3) IIVM DNINIVJ38 !{ m NIV80 MOIJ83AO I IVIN31103S 313N0N00 !1 O 30N3d NNII �p NIVH3 C13ZINVAIVO ,B {i i 38n10n815 ��p ( 180ddnS, 31383NO 69L I'LS m m !i -ay S �� A'•1 m D I m SII � � i !j r {i r_- NNVl 1?31S j 381 „2/9 (0) 310d IIw N3MOd ;+ i (N) if j 1 {{ 1 ,Z1.—„9 30V83AV 1 l SAVO 1SOd 53381 3SN30 { 1 ----------------------- (1 03AOW38 —01 33N33 381M 03B8V81'151X3— i {{' A ! ” o 1 1.,C13AO1138 ;q r ! 38 01 S1SOd 33N33 1 ! 31380NOO 1 i m i i A38 „OZOL } i ±1 � ONn03 1 3WnNOW { M OZ 3NVI1S3M 30 A110 3NII 831V„ 3 380NOO— (N) ----------------------- — 3NII A183dO8d _ 03AOW38 38 Ol 301433 381M 0308VB '191.X3 — j 381 „Z/Ijij oljn (3) 3){ji X110 33N33 NNII jij �Ilm 3A180 I3AVN0 WHO 03ZINVAIVD ,B !ji m;oIlf { li I I m CII 3A180 13AV80 30 3003 ml l� ml lm jl OII IMm V) 0-1.9L 'A313 3d1d 30 d01 Ll 3 N CJ1 c� C— C) C) Z N m N Fri O D n m p < m r- m C) m X D O Z7 C) m D Z °ash m m g�9Z ' U8 O ,OZ=, l ,04 OZ ,OL 0 ,tiZ H11M ,Y 4'0£L 'n313 ! 1 S'9£ 'n313 3a l l "SfliI 'S"0 0'0£L 'n313�dZL '151X3-S"0-183nNl r� LZ'6ZL = inN dol 3nIVn 113111M 1NVa0AH 3813 I L£"6ZL = inN d01 3AIVn a31VM I v W31SAS NO H11M 00S C :3dV3SONVl V JNIOOOS AO S11WI1 HOA Lai W33HS 33S Yi31SAS NOI1V01681 Hl.IM (0) 1NIOd 1 alNo3 Ol (0) 1NIOd 10a1NOO 01 (V) 1N10 l0a1NO3 NOW SONIOVdS ,OL® 311HAN #380 I1V1 ,4 (INV OOS o1VjAne :3dVOS0N 3aisin0 '1N3Y4NO11V 30N3A 0NV 3NI1831VM .OZ 3rV1lS3M 31-11 01 0NV 'IIVM ONINIV138 AO S301S 1S3M ONV H18ON NO 03033N Stl diaiS V Ol '311S 30 SV38V O3AOHdWl 01 031INII 38 11VHS 1tln011438 3381/JN18V313 '4 '3NIl 30V80 ONIISIX3 MOl10j TIVHS 1H0131-1 IIVM 0NINIV138 IV1N3A03S 31383NO3 £ 'NMOHS SV NOIloflaiSN03 183A-inD ,bZ MOIIV 01 3/UNG 0O0MN3AVa AO ISV3 NWHR 30tl80 'Z 94£9"49Z9 = 3 4S£L'96ZS = N ,L0'9£L = NOUVn313 'OVO8 XONN j0 301S HinoS 31 -ll NO 3115 31-11 j0 83NHOO 1SV3Hinos 3H1 1V 1Ho11133a1S – 310d 83MOd NI ES 3NIdS OV0811V6 :N8VWH3N38 103fo8d ,££'L4L = NOI1Vn313 '33N3j V j0 Hinos 133J LL Al31VhIXOaddV 0NIA1 ONV 3Na0 OOOMN3AV8 j0 jj0 133j OL A131VWIXOaddV 3381 HVO .Zl NI 3NIdS 'a'a :N8VWH3N38 103roHd 'l :S310N g1 ti'9£Ln3 3 \ d36 ,ti 1213.1 'fl (I No AsVd 313 a Vy y� — 3N l Ala 'd0ad ! IIVN —�— —--- i d0a 1 dSV) a xONH Sa3H0=3NIl_a3 VM _0 a3ll3N 30 10_ _ f _ a- -- 0L/ 44y i � y�'j •ij �L/ � ♦ yy V / ' 469L' o�,L if VI y .y NltlrA i5– �yboy $ {j m 4� 3 n313 3Sn rl I 6 / / r yyy j 0 }I rrm / P 03SO Oad o v Cz, � t i' j l su 310d + r I `a3MOd__{{ II S% 0 sod'iLS3 al 3S 330 I., 0 A008 38 1 150 30N3J 3a NO '1SIX3 l jr'--�- • 7 I --- – ------ - 1 A1atd02d - 03noV43N\ 3 1 \3j 3aIM \ X08 ` 1104r9a 3Na 13 tl80 � 3AIa0 13AVa0 j0 3003 `I 151X3jai WLH I o11 ""1 m1 of1j rn Ln LIDOS 03S .0 01=.L 3IVOS t0 NVd NOliVGNnoj ANd1 133H5 o< o m '801OV211NOO J.8 0311VA 38 NVO 830"I0 IV1S303d 'Z '8Oi3V81N00 AB 03NI330 38 Ol H1d30 (INV ONI1003 NOLLVONn03 'L nyN O F 0 0 :S310N ow �o - Ste. " o I y• - i. i 1p kVM3A[80 313210NOO n o m F I •. Q B �" x x -'1 . �n � m ro o o •� - •j: �o chi u ;: 4'2!000 NVR11��43d'_ SOHVII08 „8 21004 x XL z dC-N1VH 31380N00 ,ql �� I •�� ONI100 NOI1VONn03 ' \ m o n r m -Ti � m F 3NII IHNVl Pr- 1 15v' 0 O D m 213113A m_OZ Z M m Q q0 qo \1 213 OVl 83M01 D Ln / 1 r OOd 3AHONOO \ / Dm MOI3213AO \` / Z � � I / Z � ' :;gym NIVM301S ,£ "om ------ -----�, �Z• I -WO Ego I r r� r Zlm m N is n i NOUVONnod O l 30V2JO HSINI-1 Ll 00'Lq 09.L4L '1N3VV3ONV88V ONIdld NNVI 80183INI 2103 ZYY 0NV M S133HS 33S SNOVdIIVM ONIIHOII 801831N1 HNVI IIVM 1NOddns 3AHONOO N1V38 ON18 IIVM 8301AI0 .0-,OL=.L 3IVOS NOIIVA313 ANdl 0 I O ,££ 01,0£ 800Id i S3IOHNVh 3W00 03NII IVAON138 ASV3 80J 31VId IMS 11AV0 HIM 03ddIn03 38 IIVHS 3IOHNVNI A V 38n1 SS300V .61, cn q ON 0'L NNVI 3NVI1S3M HOIVH -10011 3NVI1S3M 1N3A NNVl 2131138 1N3A NNVl J DNVIMM -WH S08VMdn ONINIHS SHOVd IIVM ONIIHOII 801131X3 DZ# NI311 018 31VN8311V SW210-11V1d 1353-10 ,£X,£ ONV •IIV8 831N30 •3OVO ,k133VS H11M N30OVI 1N3A IIVM 1210ddnS 0383AOI 00'099 0 0 ON S' l NNVI 831138 -WH 30NVHCIV3H ,S -L4 H01VH 38n1 SS300V 3NVI1S3M NNVl 99'ZS N 0 A S830OVI SS300V N p iT .Os -z ,006-099 30NVHOV3H ,Oir :2131-13)1 Ho1VH 30021 2131138 sF LL do 9 3lVOS Ol ION inoAvi 1NIOf dAVd aMd JldM3Al64 3903 1. 31VOS 01 ION N01103S 1V31dA1 — dM8 30NVdiNn du 'du ... ' , '". '- • - W0ll08 V 401 .ZL „9L AVM 'V3 .ZL0i4 .Zl®4# 4#Z • t'#Z „ZL®ti# 3AIa0 31380NOO /I.ZL 'A3-13 30Va9 '1V3S 3008d831VM 9'L*L l3 IVNl3 HO1VW 9019D _ HIM 1NIOr 'dX3 . L ,£ LZ 'S'I'N 90 rGo N01103S a „ZL „ZL SIN N01103S kVM3A18G 9� � 31380NOD 1d01d)d 31VOS Ol ION „3„ 1NIOf N01SNVcJX3 1N3W3AVd 30 3003 ONOA38 .0-,l ON31X3 01 70 .L=1 :31ON 30Va98nS 03ZI11OVIS 3WI1 SAVM Hi0e 3/0 .9L ® SNve 4# 3Y411/M 30V9 ens 13ASVB 80 -NIN 03ZIlIBV1S .9 NIW 18oddns 13M0O .0£ dO1S aV8 9L'/£ '038nO3S 3e (INV 13M00 3/S 114 01 dVO e • _ 13A331S 13M00 .Z „ N 10 'NIW .4 L L / „9 .9 'NIW „9 1IV130 1NIOr NOISNVdX3 33S OV08 3J W08d AVM HOV3 1003/.ti/L 3dOIS 0/0 ZL ® t'# 3 .Z NIW 831113 1NIOr NOISNVdX3 ONV .Z 1NVIV3S 1NIOr HIM Sn10V8 .,A, 0313103dS ON3 SIHI 31voiNem 01 030NnoH 3AO080 03V480d SV 0301AOad 38 IIVHS 9NIIVO3 -13MOO .9L 1NIOr NOISNVdX3 3S83ASNV81 1NIOr AWWna 03MVS d330 O/O „ZL ® 13M00 .L HIOOWS 0.9/9 9NO1 „t'Z 31VOS 01 ION 31VOS OI ION 114134 1N10f N01SMddX3 1N10r NOUDV�J1NOO a3MVS 3S2i3ASN'?il > Ivla3lvw „S„ I 1NIOr 00 NOISNVdX3 •o J • „Z/L INVIV3S 1NVIV3S 1NIOr J u 1NIOr 31VOS Ol ION HIM 301M .b/L ln0-MVS IVOIla3A A �? 114134 (18VI-108 3d1d 'M'3 0/0 „Z L ® SNV8 t•# 4.41 1NIOf N0110f1diSN00 1b'N oniION01 1N3WO38W3 „01 3138ONOO 0/0.1,Z - ONO -1 .0£ SHV8 311 t,# 0 ' • - I v iNIOr '4X3 . L -1IVM 18OddnS 'M'3 0/0.Z1 ® SHVB 4# N N 30 30Vj 301S1n0 0 Odd 04 31n03HOS) .ZL 'OV8 „8/1 Ol 03ONnoa ('0,038 Z) 1 .9/L 53903-3AOOa9 03W603 31383NOO /M 031113 08V1108 3d1d 1331S 0 .e 08V11o8 3J anod ON003S anod 1Sa13 HSINId Ll 30 L 90 �s fV CP G7 O C/) z C) rn cQ r N:� m o M m O < r C r D A --I X m N D � r O U D G7 m D Z m ..-m ' o� n- USN .. I L i'.4. 'VO ZL Xo„Z/LO2 1DNOlc 'VO 9L X 0.1 lltla 83NN 3IVOS 01 ION 30N33 �VA3fNdNdO d0 NOUVA3�3 -IdOld.11 OR h31l 418 31VNa31]d n n I I I I ao0JNieo NMOe ao ev I •,B NVHl SS3SI ION 3e 171VHS 30N33 30 1HO13H 't II II 3i(TN (a38n1otl3nNtlA MaSO Ae 03NIWa3130 3e 01 S83AV1 0N108o3Nl3a 0180030 3o HION3I (INV ONIOVdS '839vm) 'IN3W30803N138 IIOS 0180030 IlV1SNl L O3aOOV „0-, L NNl8HS 031113 33 803 1331S 31VMS 30VNIVdC A 031Vi3O3A '03NIINn I d330 .lam - -1113 H18V3 „9 d1a1S ONIMOW 'ON00 301M .q 30N33 kiwn03S NNII NIVHO a31VO3 IANIA .q- llvM (MNSO) ONINIVl38 -1V1N3W03S - 313HONOO Z N A 3AIS3HOV '1SN00 HIM 33Yld NI 03an03S 11Nn dVO 31V0S Ol ION -non ao .eit i -,e 0-0 NOU33S S-0 8 'ON 3dld O l -0 V 'ON a: SS -OZ „9/F (INV 3NIl NV3a8 OOL-06 „q/E 0071 „l ONISSVd 1 a d 0NlN3dO 3dvnosI I :NOIIVOVdD ONIMOI103 3HI HIM 3NOIS 03HSna0 30 S3I0118Vd 3-1etlan0 30 SISISN00 1113 31VO3600V 3dld aOHONV 31V0S 01 ION „9 '13/871 009'Z 3o HloN3als NOU33S MJSO -]VOld�d o 31ISN31 31VWIlln WnWINIW V 3AVH „0-,r A133vS IIVHS ON1080AN138 TOS 803 0180030 'E (030a03N138Nn) 31380N00 'IN3WdInO3 031V83dO ONVH Ol ISd 000E WnWINIW „q 0311WI-1 38 IIVHS 30V3 IIVM 1NOa3 'NIAZ: 'NIW 31-lI 30 1333 E NIH11M N011OVdA00 'Z „ZL ,ZL •SN011V0N3WW003a S,a3anlOv3nNVW .q a3d SV 031IVISNI 38 Ism M8so 'L :S310N AlISN30 a01008d '(]IS X96 (11OSd01) Ol 031OVdW00 III3 HINV3 1113 HlaV3 „9 s11Wn NOIIVAVDX3 0188tl3 831113 3-111X31030 (a38n1otl3nNtlA MaSO Ae 03NIWa3130 3e 01 S83AV1 0N108o3Nl3a 0180030 3o HION3I (INV ONIOVdS '839vm) 'IN3W30803N138 IIOS 0180030 IlV1SNl L O3aOOV „0-, L NNl8HS 031113 33 803 1331S 31VMS 30VNIVdC A 031Vi3O3A '03NIINn I d330 .lam - -1113 H18V3 „9 d1a1S ONIMOW 'ON00 301M .q 30N33 kiwn03S NNII NIVHO a31VO3 IANIA .q- llvM (MNSO) ONINIVl38 -1V1N3W03S - 313HONOO Z N A 3AIS3HOV '1SN00 HIM 33Yld NI 03an03S 11Nn dVO 31V0S Ol ION '$%U 0-0 NOU33S NIW „F Lk uW 3dld G� dVadla OINI a: 1N38 071313 3e (INV 3NIl NV3a8 v15Vd ON31X3 AVWnONI0a03N138 3dld-o "Ad / �_ �tl3a3ae Wt< I I—T NIW „el 31VOS 01 ION „V,, ,, -I lVi34 83Oavl� „9'0 80 a3NNna 3dld AL33VS Stl 3ZIS 3WVS 38 Ol 3dld SSOaO ------------ I ------------ I a3NNna q/L 3dld SS3 031-)0803bIAiS�IdV�,Nb� did SSOK) JO ON3 ONn08V dV8dl8 N301M (INV N3d330 3IV0S 01 ION 8-8 NOU33S 3dld „z 3I3a0N00 (LOFtl JIOS a3HSVM „Z 1nN X3H „0-,L X „ I I VIO 3dld SSOaO L I` 3dld £ V -V NOU33S '$%U NIW „F Lk uW G� a: m Nary 3dld aOHONV „9 NI a3NNna W o 3dld „0-,r A133vS o 31VOS 01 ION (II 3dA1 100X1) ONIIoNOUVA313 -nVM(IV3H i83A1no lltlM 3001 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 01 3NII MOI3 (dAl) 83NNn8 3dld ),133VS 30 d01 SNV ld NI NMOHS 'S'I'N NVId GVd WHO MO-]Jd3A0 SV 3dOlS HOiVN XtlW 31VOS Ol ION q (11 3dKL 100X1) NVId -fldMC1V33H i2lWno (du�Jvs Jo dol (-0� 1a— I d"dla I NIW „9-,l -------------- EC ----- -------- ---------------- I V. 11VAO 33S I -------- ------ ------------ I d08 „VZ dVadla 'STN - - N01103S 6 4#- l 1V01183A 1 01 zL®save q# „Zi.� 4,1 J— AVM 'v3 I // „ZL®q# A -� O'L4L 13--' „qS'L4L 13 30VH9 NO 8YIS 6 SS3l-1331S NIV1S 0.Z[ cIn -- rn „AVM 'V3 „Zloq# „9-,L IdOddnS N C.TI R -- C) n C) L D O Z Z r C) Z cC :� f` m 0 M 0 r m Z ` m C r C) m _ D � Z ---I C x x D In m O D r D (� m m D Z moi n 3 N r'l7 }=m Z • �o N 31VO V 1SOd Ol 03HOV11V 1SOd 01 03HOVllV 1,lBW3SSV a3llOd 301n0 83MO1 N a3ddn ivowj (S)AIBW3SSV 831108 3aIno 83MOI V 83ddn IVOIdJ l M31A GN3 N ITV— 'f3 WON ,£ aoa ssnal - 1HOladn Wnitl os .z - Ilya/»oval Wnly - A,ssv Hona1 - 31VOS 01 ION NOUVA3�3 3140 ON1013S a3b3A3�UNb'0 A SOIHBVd »NII NIVHO SV 831108 3aIn0 F lsod 00 „4 I I� I I 31813V-4»NII NIVHO 1(1HOladn I I I I I I (108 1w Wmy llya Wolloa Wmv I I I nnv AIr11C A171 _ I I AIn IC A171 .—. C 7/1 1 — nc 7 1 Ll 30 B 03S 31VOS01 ION L 133HS (SONIN3dO ,ZZ n8H1 ,9) V 33S 'NOI11SOd 03SOlO L2 ONV N3d0 NI S31VO 11V 80.2 S3HOIV3 ONV 008 30Nnld 301A08d '9 IIVa -m '01,"9£ 8 (VSV) NOIIVIOOSSV SCIMINVIS NVOIa3WV 83d'OV Wnly OS Z 0 0 31n03HOS 'd313WVlG IVNIWON 38V 031VOIGNI SWIS 3dld aaVONV1S 'S o - '03ddV3 38 IIVHS S1SOd MOIIOH I1V 'd01 3Hl 1V 031lddV SONnod 1H918dn �. 001, d0 30dOd 1V831V1 V ONIONVISHIIM d0 31eVdVO WnNlWnly 80 WnIV OS ,Z g 1331S 30 ONlenl a0 SNO1103S 03an81X3 80 031108 38 IIVHS S1SOd 17 �O 'oNIMVaO SIHI 30 S1N3W3aIn038 31-11 133W OSIV HOIHM 08VONVIS S,a3enlOy3nNVW 0 0 38 11VHS S31NOneNanl (INV SOOa OVS 'S3dld d0 SUIS 'S31V0 803 '£ o '38VM0aVH (INV SONI1113 AdVSS303N llV8 a£ lIV HIM 313ldW03 03HSINan3 38 IIVHS S31YO (INV S30N3d 'Z />IOyal Wnly '3l8VOIlddV d1 0383AO0 11-19I8dn WnIV IANIA (INV03ZINVAIVO d10IOH 38 llyHS SINVd 1V13W -11V'l 1-0. OS .ZL S88Ve Id ti /M d R ��9Z 11-1018dn 1NI 381M 3NIl ONV81S 1HOladn WnIV Os .Z/l l Z d0 ONIISISNOO WnIV OS .Z V3 '381M O388VB d01 1SOd d0 SONVaIS (£) (OI88yj lIWO) ONVHa3AO V38V O188Vd 1. o N C.TI R -- C) n C) L D O Z Z r C) Z cC :� f` m 0 M 0 r m Z ` m C r C) m _ D � Z ---I C x x D In m O D r D (� m m D Z moi n 3 N r'l7 }=m Z • �o N 31VO V 1SOd Ol 03HOV11V 1SOd 01 03HOVllV 1,lBW3SSV a3llOd 301n0 83MO1 N a3ddn ivowj (S)AIBW3SSV 831108 3aIno 83MOI V 83ddn IVOIdJ l M31A GN3 N ITV— 'f3 WON ,£ aoa ssnal - 1HOladn Wnitl os .z - Ilya/»oval Wnly - A,ssv Hona1 - 31VOS 01 ION NOUVA3�3 3140 ON1013S a3b3A3�UNb'0 A SOIHBVd »NII NIVHO SV 831108 3aIn0 F lsod 00 „4 I I� I I 31813V-4»NII NIVHO 1(1HOladn I I I I I I (108 1w Wmy llya Wolloa Wmv I I I nnv AIr11C A171 _ I I AIn IC A171 .—. C 7/1 1 — nc 7 1 aoa ssnal t. ! 1H 3WVa3 a3d33N� 11-19I8dn WnIV OS .ZL S88Ve Id ti /M d 1SOd 00 ,4 dAl WaV M/8 Os Z , 11-1018dn 1NI 381M 3NIl ONV81S 1HOladn WnIV Os .Z/l l Z d0 ONIISISNOO WnIV OS .Z V3 '381M O388VB d01 1SOd d0 SONVaIS (£) (OI88yj lIWO) ONVHa3AO V38V O188Vd .0 -,OL NVId 31VO ONICIIISd I1Nt/ ONIN3dO ,0-,1,Z NOUVA3�3 S31` 9 (INV 30N33 NNII NIVH0 3dld (]IS '0'0 ,9/L -Z Allatll0 803 (83N800 80) 1HOIValS NMOHS 3ON33 3101 3dld O1S '0'0 „9/£-Z 1 d UN -7 lN3YW13GYG ISOd IVOIdAl -i90-d--TN-ll 031VOO wnNlWnly a0 -'AIVO LN 381M NOISN31 BOlOValN00 A9 03HSIN8nd NOOlB 31380NOD 80 NOlae 1N3W3SV3N3 31380NOO ISd 000£ 30tldans 30 Z NIHINA '031IViSNl 38 OI OlaeV3, '0'0 ,4Z 38NA NOISN31 Ol 0I8BV3 3lnn8Nanh f :; r,: J,:•,,,-,.,✓:j,o 41`S1Sod^O1 OIa8V3 N3d0 Ol 318t1011ddV 383HM d181S MOW 301M ,Zl 1SOd o yhY �3OtlaB y�1�rrFti� \� z�� X J v ��i `>`� ^ 30V HE) . O/O 4Z NO Slltla xr sloe -n 08By3 oN �H53W Z Mil NIVHO Ol 1Lll 803 rr o Qo 3Wy8j 31y0 Qo Qo 03ZINVAIV OMV Gil S3aIM 311 WnNlWnly 6// ✓ 30 a3BW3W X-. , q 3Wy8d/HOV81 dO.L q � � ,Z/l S L 1»88 NOnal AIBW3SStl 9NldV38 311110 /M H31108 301n0 a381`13W Al8W3SSV NOnal a3110a 301nO NO -UN a3ddn 3WVa3/HOV81 Wnitl - A,SSV NOnal 13A3V88 NOnal / SnonNI1N0O J S30VA13S WO110B ONV d01 a3lHonNN 38LM 'Way 3 030 IIVa d01 „B/S-1 0388y8 803 3aIM >10011 '1SOdSOd 08vmin0 odvn0 83analNl 0/0 „b id V 01 03NNId d01 1331S a3SS38d 3811 03BaVB SONVHIS £ 30N33 NNII NIVH3 JNIISIX3 A L1J06 L wi i 4�F i N � L m p r Z r � m C Q rc � ri O Z P m m m z m F /V m X CD D N 0 Z G7 D0 m D Z V}U� z62 kWO u u 8 to ji n 1` (jjji'iij'lil! j�, �i ,9=„1 31VOS :uNE SSI` AG JNIdld IVDG1 3ATUS3M 30 .1110 180ddnS 3AIVA 318V1snrOv 331 ,91X.91 I. 8 r Y G 1HOddns ONIN0018 3dld ('d)d) 2131113 ONIldnOO 1NIOr dV9 .1 /--03NIV2l1S38 3dld 13315 SS31NIV1S ,OZ F. � r o v - ' ° O'L4L I3 39NV13 ONIlB� 9N12JOIINOW 13A31 2n NOIIVIOSI HIIM Anon nOW 2l3onOOnOSNV2Jl 3anSS38d 3AIVA — A132J311n8 .91 Al8W3SSV 3dld MOIJN3AO Ol 39nVO 3anSS38d 3NII 30NVHOSIa/IIIJ ,91 \-3dld 'S'S 0.9 3dld 13315 'S'S 0.9 1NIOr NOISNVdX3 9Nldld 3dld NIV2i(1 1NIOr� MO13233AO O.Z1 ONIl1NVWS10 3AIVA A13213lln8 ,9 9=,1 31VOS jl 331 ,9X,91X,91 NNVl Ol M31A NY1l NNV101 3AV9iS3M 30 11110 (ISd 001-0) S39nV9 38nSS38d 031113 Olnon (INV N303 3OnvO 'S83=13H '818 3SOH 'dO1S NOIIVHOd8OO ,1 30nIONI IIVHS Al8W3SSV 39nVO 3anSS38d 'ONIIVN 3anSS38d ISd SZL HIM 13315 SS31NIVIS 38 IIVHS I1VM 12lOddnS 3H1 301SNI S30NVN318nddV ONV 9NIdld IIV 'Z 'SSM el 051 '409 VMMV '3AIVA klJH311ne „91 '1 S310N ,9-LVZ 13 , (-dAL) 831113 1NIOr dvO ,1 M0913 A6 ONIOn038 ,91 X,OZ 3AIVA AI321311ne ,91 tD 1NIOr 9NIIINVWSIO 7VM 12JOddnS NNVl 3dld 1331S 'S'S ,91 3AIVA „91 M0813 A6 ,91X,91 331 „91M1X,9L M0813 ONIOn038 .06 ,91 X„ OZ 3dld N30NIIAO 31380NOO ,OZ LL 30 OL '03S N V1 � L m O r Z m m C Q (/) Ln :� m O Z n fT1 � n r m m z m m CD :C7 m x � D N O Z D C) m D Z m}Nila v- m 10 - I , NNVl Ol ,9=.l :31VOS S1 VAG ONldid 1d01d.l1 83113>i 30 u10 180ddnS 3AIVA 331 ,91X,91 r 3ONVl.i ONIIB � L ONINOIINOW 13A31 NOd 3AIVA NOI1V10SI HIIM 1NnOW N33nOSNVNl 3NnSS38d 3AIVA ,03631-Lne .9L 3dld M0IjN3A0 Ol 3dld 'S'S 0.9 3dld 13315 'S'S 0.9— , 3dld NIVdO1Nio M01 -:183A0 0.Zl, ONIIlNVY4SI0 3AIVA AI3N311nB .9 331 .9X.9LX.9L NNVI 01 (ISd 001-0) S3OnVO 3ansS38d 031113 Olnoll ONV N3o3 3OnVO 'S83On038 BIB 3SOH 'dOlS NOU"OdHOO . L 30n -ml INNS A1BW3SSV 39nVO 38nSS38d 'S 'ONIIVB 38nSS38d ISd 9ZL H11M 13315 SS31NIVIS 38 IIVHS IIVM 180ddns 31-11 301SNI S30NVN318nddV (INV ONldld lIV '4 'SSM Bl 09L '409 VMMV '3AIVA A1383LLne .9L '£ 'iVnO3 80 'Nld d01S 0NV Nld 3ONIH 'A006 13315 SS31NIVIS 'IV3S N–VNnB 80 3N38d03N 'SSV13 BI OSL '3AIVA NO3H0 8000 318n00 Onl 030V38HI 10006 S3183S 03dV 3AIVA H03HO .9L 'Z 'SIN3191NVdW03 MOl3 IVN831NI .Z L H11M 3AIVA 1081NO3 OION310S .91 '1 =S310N M0813 .06 ONIOn038 .9 L X.OZ 1,lBw3SSV 3AIVA 3OnVO 3NnSS38d 038311ne .9L £O 3NIl 1NIOf 398VHDSIC/Illd .9L ONIl1NVWSl0 3AIVA IIVM 1NIOf NOISNVdX3 ONldld l0alN0O OION31OS OL 1NOddnS NNVl 3dld 13315 'S'S .9l ,!;=.L :31VOS M31A Wd 93-73A Jo uI3 3AIVA .9L MOB13 .06 .9 L X.9 L 331 .9LX.9LX.9L M0813 O on038 .06 .9 L X.OZ 1NOddnS JNINOOlB 3dld ('dkL) 831114 ONIldn0o 1NIOf dV0 .L 03NIV81S38 4 3dld 2130NI1A0 313NONOO .OZ 3dld 13315 SS31NIVIS .OZ \ 0.LtL 13 ,S'L4L 13 ('d),1) 831113 1NIOP dVO . L M0813 .06 ONIOn038 .9 L X.OZ 1,lBw3SSV 3AIVA 3OnVO 3NnSS38d 038311ne .9L £O 3NIl 1NIOf 398VHDSIC/Illd .9L ONIl1NVWSl0 3AIVA IIVM 1NIOf NOISNVdX3 ONldld l0alN0O OION31OS OL 1NOddnS NNVl 3dld 13315 'S'S .9l ,!;=.L :31VOS M31A Wd 93-73A Jo uI3 3AIVA .9L MOB13 .06 .9 L X.9 L 331 .9LX.9LX.9L M0813 O on038 .06 .9 L X.OZ LL 30 IL cc'^^II 03S L I•, 0 0 .0 p Fa m N (V C.J7 C- 0 0 D z C) N m O D r 0 m x < Z m mD D m r � m m m D o x N (n o :C7 D G7 m D Z 31VOS Ol ION lIVAO N0liV-nV1SN1 NOISN31X3 v X08 3Aldn 'WVA W31d)d 'SN01133NNO0 031108 jj0 313HONO3 d33X '9 '831V380 80 .9L S3AIVA.3NIINIVW 80J X08 3AIVA (INV 3AIVA SSvdAB 301AO8d 'S 'SNVId NO NMOHS SV 3dA1 V RIS 3AIVA '4 'IIOS (INV S18830 IIV j0 XOB 3AIVA NV3I0 '£ '3N31AH13AIOd 'l1W 9 H11M dVaM 'SNOlIV31dl33dS aid X08 3AIVA V 3dld 0318n8 1v0O 'Z '3AIVA N3dO Ol NOUVl0a 30 NO1103a10 31V310NI Ol SI 1nN '30"D 03HSINIJ M0I38 , l NIH11M 1nN VMMV 'OS .Z /M a01V83dO W31S NOISN31X3/M 03OIA08d 38 IIVHS S3AIVA 031an8 llv . L :S31ON NOU33S H18V3 0398n1sIONn I HVlaOW 1N3W30 313a3NO3 ISd OOOZ j0 'NIW ,Z HIM 83AOO 180ddnS 3AIVA 31363NO3 N3H1 ONV AXOd3 NVI Woo HIM SHVB 3 0 SNOUNOd 03(1038W3Nn 1NIVd v v SNIdaIVH av838 SN—Z IVIa31VYV 1N3W038W3 avinNva9�• - v NIVW 831VM — — C1311VISNI NIW ,Zl 3dld j0 3d)d 3AIVA 31VO 80J SON3 3AIVA 13NNOB '30V89 03HSINIJ 03SOdONd 80 1N3W3AVd MO -138 ' 1 4 L Ol NOISN31X3 301A08d IVIa31VW 33vjanS 83H10 a0 OI.LIVHdSV AvM HOV3 S8V8 4# HIM 31383NO3 isd 000£ 'BVIS 9x,Zx,Z 'BVIS X08 3AIVA HIM HSnlj 13S-.a31VM. (13>18M a3AOO NOMI 1SVO 319VAOW38 31-380NOO ISd laOddnS 3A-IVA 313.,."x1.".. WISN30 'XVW %96) 'lvla3lvW 8vinNV80 0313VdAOO 1vn03 80 X08 3AIVA 3031d 338H1 98A 'ON '00 1331S 29 NOW A31NINOW 30VNO 03HSINIJ 03AVdNn NVld .9 'S1NIOf 03NIV81S38 80 03013M 01 NOI1100V NI 03Sn 38 IIVHS SNOOIB 1sn8Hl '03NIva1S38 80 03013M 38 01 36V SINior 1VH1 SNvld 3H1 NO NMOHS 383HM '9 '631V380 80 '318V1 NI 031SII SV NOISN3W10 (3'0'0'B'V) IVNOZ180H 3IBVOIlddV 3H1 Ol IVOUN301 38 IIVHS ONIN3018 j0 NOISN31NIO IVOIl83A 'S 'ONIN30I8 1sn8Hl AHVSS303N 3Hl NJIS30 633NION3 1VN01SS3AO8d 03831SID38 SVX31 V 3AVH IIVHS 801OV81NOO "J'S'd OOOZ NVH.L SS31 SI 3nlVA DNIHY38 IIOS jl 'NInWINIW 38V S3nlvA Ilv '4 '1IV130 ONIN30I8 1SnaH1 IVOld ki NO NMOHS SV 030V1d (INV 31383NO3 (AVO 9Z) '1'S -d 0007 JO 031ondISNOO 38 01 38V SN3019 Lsn8H1 '313HONO3 WOaj 338J SONllllj IIV d33X 'W831Vh 03B8n1SIONn 38 IIVHS 30Vjans ON18V38 HI8V3 3H1 '£ '3n'1vA ON18V38 IIOS 'j'S'd 000'Z ONv 1S31 'I'S'd OS L NO 03SV8 38V NMOHS SV38V ONIHV38 'Z 'SH1ON381S ON18V38 I10S IIV Ula3A -11"S 8010va1NO3 'l :S310N ONIX30I8 6Z'94 L9 SO'49 96 99'4£ LL 19 -LL OS 98'9 9£ 07 .4Z 94' L£ L9 94114 09 LO'4Z 65 LZ'Z L Z4 L L'9 0£ 07 ,OZ 94'SZ 19 £0'9£ ZL 09'61 £S 46'6 9£ 66'4 LZ 0'Z .9L £L'OZ 49 L4'9Z 49 L4'S1 L4 99'L 4£ 96'£ 4Z 0'Z .91 Z£' L l 04 10,9L 94 L9'9 S£ Z4'4 SZ ZZ'Z 91 0'Z .Z L 99'L 4£ ZV11 04 ZO'9 6Z LOT LZ 49'L SL 0'Z .OL £0'9 LZ I Z l'L Z£ 99'£ 4Z 96' l L l 66'0 Z L S' l .B £97 OZ 00'4 4Z L L'Z 9 L Ol' l £ l 99'0 6 T1 .9 V3av 'NIW .3 V38V NIW .41 V38V NIW �NI V3av NIW el . V3av 'NIW .y lj X. 3ZIS 3dld Onld V 331 .06 S4 0£.ZZ S LA L 318VI ONIN0018 Id1NOZ180H 'STN lIV130 ONIA3018 WiNOZWOH 313HONOO 313aDNOD 'I'S'd OOOZ .3. X. +, X m S0N3B .06 803 0 SON38 .94 HOJ 0 ON38 SON39 0£.ZZ HOJ 8 Onld SON38 S 1.1 L 803 V 331 0 mrno Z. A nNy� mom r _ m j m 16Ln0 Z m�v .R7 D m N r� � N �n �n 0 0 v At Ll d0 ZL '03S `al OZ=„t WdO L'Z :31ZZON 0'£ /M OZI 831NnH QHS 04 OZ .01 0 Wd0 TL :31ZZON 0'4 /M dOd 831Nf1H e 2 Wd0 0'L !31ZZON 0'1 /M WOd 831NnH 0 S83INNIadS N3AIdCI aV30 AHVIOa a37061N00 3NOZ 8 031Nf10W 1V1S303d CEI „;.�� 3AIVA 10a1N00 3NOZ X -AZ® •*��} j� 831NIA3ad MOl3 NOVO -fSt� �1 uIx" ImI:-!- GN3031 „0 -,oz = I I ino),'v'-1 W31S kS NOUVOIMI t (Od08 ilVHdSd) adOd XONA 3NII A183doad NJ CJS C- 0 O Z U) N —q m 0 M m '3003 Ivoli r M r- (S83H10 A8) 3ONVOa00OV NI < NMOHS SV NOIIVO1881 30 S11W11 11V IV 30V1d 38 IIVHS ONIOOOS OIV33f18 'ZL 1V1S3a3A0O Z -H 3SV8 = Mm SVX31 83113N d0 ALIO 3H1 NI 03831SIJ38 -IVNOIIV83dO NOW 831S31 klSr43SSV a 1 3 830 V AS SV 3NOZ C N x031311830 ONV 031531 38 MVHSS3ll8W SSV1NOUN3A3a MOIJ)43VB liV N (lV1LIW8f1S SONIMV80 dOHS 31-11 Ni 0301AOad 38 llVHS 0 S31d00) '30NV8f1SNl (INV 'SlIW83d 'S0WO 0ONa1 1NAwno Sa01V01881 03SN3011 3H1 30 MOO V 83NM0 31-11 301A08d 'Ol 'NOIla01S10 m ONV ONII113S 1N3A38d 01 IIOS ONIONnod8ns lOVdWOO '30Va0 ONIONfl0mm 3H1 H1IM 13A31 d01 S3X08 dditl 0,Ot ONV 3AIVA 301A08d '6 D '833NION3 3HI Z A8 NOI103dSNl IVNIA 01 8018d 031VOlONI SV ONV SNOUVON31AW0038 S838f11OVinNVW NO 03SVB 3O1SIVW8030d PIf1WIld0 80.1 831NN18dS A83A3 30 38V ONV M=31'Val AVadS IshraV 'g oN,'Wf1WINIW d330 ,81 ONIdId m HONV88 14nmNIW d330 JZ 0188 38 -11VHS SNIVW 3anSS38d 'L �Jo y 8 m '13NVd IOa1N0O 31-11 30 301SNI 31-11 '9 ' 0 o Ol 03XId3V kIIN3NVA83d 3-inG3HOS ONI831VM 031VNIY4Y1 301A08d �o Z- 'SOV3H 831NN18dS 11V NO S83Sl8 330 inn 3N31AH13A7IOd 301AOad 'S U" 0 Sa01Of CINOO IOHINOO x03 S3AI80 H1V3N38 S3A33IS '4 8y OAd ,Z 301AOad 03S1083X3 SI NOI1Va0013NOO ONldld AdI00W 01 NOIldO S801OV81N0O 3HI 383HM ALIOO-13A Wf1WIXVW 3HI 0330X3 ION 00 n Sd3 5 30 A11OOI3A NIf1WIXVW V NO 03SV8 38V 031VOlONI SWIS 3dld '£ - SW3ISAS NOI1V01881 lIV1SNl utljii!di1 iii.Iluy!I 01 ?33113>130 ALIO 3HI HIM 03831S1038 38 IIVHS 801OV81NOD 'Z i 'j �n A31SAS NOI1V0Iaa1 31-11 d0 NOIIVIIVISNI 31-11 ONI8f10 S3WIl 1IV 1V 3115 NO !illj 38 IIVHS 8311V1SNl 03SN3011 V 'SVX31 30 31VIS 3Hl NI O38N1 31-11 A8 03nSS1 3SN30I1 S801VOINHI 1N3N8no V OIOH IIVHS 801OV81N0O 'I :S31ON ]d�13N3O „0 -,oz = I I ino),'v'-1 W31S kS NOUVOIMI t (Od08 ilVHdSd) adOd XONA 3NII A183doad LL .40 CL m�cu 03S mm�� `3 ,OZ=„1 mooz A 133HS ,04 OZ ,OL 0 zou_ N Ln L _U) O m Q N 4 C m m O Z n m x r m M m m D r m m X C) Ln Z -i p O m D Z 'W31SAS ONVO ONIISIX3 Sa3113N HO1VW 01 830V38 OBVO 301AOad 'S 'OI -dl IinO810 W08J 3IV9 31V83dO 8010W 'O.q "9ZL# 'ZL#Z 301A08d '4 'Ll -dl 11nO810 Ol 'o.q ''9ZI# 'ZI#Z 301Aoad £ •1451-1£4(LI9) 1V d0-00 01810313 ALNnoo 181 HIM 113SSna NHo H11M 31VNION000 IIVHS a010Va1N0o '83W80.4SNV81 .40 MIS ),8VONO33S NO S801on0NOO (INV 11nON0O 301AOad 'Z 7VHS 80IOV81N0o 'd0 -OO 01810313 ALNnoo 181 A9 0301A08d 83W80.4SNV81 SNOIIVON3WW0038 838n1oV.4nNVF1 83d I1V1SN1 '3lOd IV13W ,OZ ONV 1H911 301AOad .1 ND„ l0 NAS A8 S310N 'lo3rO8d SIHI NO 03Sn 38 AVW NOIIVW80.4N1 SIH1 .40 11V ION '380.1383H1 '0N3031 08VONVIS V SI SIH1 :310N NMOHS SI 11VI3O HOIHM NO 133HS I33HS 1N388no X X x 839WnN 11V130 (HOII S NM0313S 38VdS 38V Sa01OnON0O a3Mod 80 I081NOO OIMa anOA 3H1 .10 OMI OnONOO ,vA V NI S801onON0O 11V 'a01onON0O ONnOaO 4L# 3NO 'Sa01onONOO a3Mod 80 I081NOO 4L# an0.1 OVl 318VO nl8 VOVOS 1V 031VO01 IS31 01 HSnd=11d 3n1B=9 '839WV=V '311HM=031VOlONI HO -103 9NIIVOIONI ONnoao 30ON IVNIW831 3sn.4 13NVd a3W80.4SNVa1 3dAl 3an1X1.1=8 38nlxl.4 ONUH011 83MOd3S80H S3IVN0IS3O 839WI1N 8010W 'O'V X09 NOUONnf 2131dn883INI mw 0114no80=139 .4008d83HIV3M=dM 3dA1 03ONn08o '3IOV10038 X31dno HOIIMS 310d 338H1 831NVIS a010W 1VnNVW HO11MS 310d 310NIS HOAMS 103NNOOSIO 03Sn.1 HolIMS l33NNOOS10 03Sn.4-NON 1081NOo 7130010Hd S310d=d 'd181 dWV=V 83NV389 llnoalo IDVINOo 03SO13 ATNMON 3dk 38n1Xi.1=V (38Vds YI/z) 3anlxl3 ONUH9n 'J,'YIMY NM00 03Nan1 11nONOO xx-IoW AOOada3H1V3M -[ do O3Nan1 lInONOO o n of 031VOIONI SV Imao 08V0913NVd 'Nn83WOH }� 031V30NOD 11nONOO NI ON181M ONn08O830Nn 0 O3SOdX3 lInONOO NI ONIUM 113M 008 ONnodo 83MOd3S80H S3IVN0IS3O 839WI1N 8010W 'O'V X09 NOUONnf 2131dn883INI mw 0114no80=139 .4008d83HIV3M=dM 3dA1 03ONn08o '3IOV10038 X31dno HOIIMS 310d 338H1 831NVIS a010W 1VnNVW HO11MS 310d 310NIS HOAMS 103NNOOSIO 03Sn.1 HolIMS l33NNOOS10 03Sn.4-NON 1081NOo 7130010Hd S310d=d 'd181 dWV=V 83NV389 llnoalo IDVINOo 03SO13 ATNMON '^C LLd IOV1N0o N3dO A71IVW80N (38Vds YI/z) 1331S SS31NIVIS 'J,'YIMY 83Wa0dSNV-3.-h"`JYI� xx-IoW AOOada3H1V3M -[ 11VM 80 HIM `5, IIOA 1VOIdA1 '^C LLd HolIMS --X---X---X-I. 1331S SS31NIVIS ' llNn IVNIW831 310W3a 111 11nONOO 3018011HOIANIAAI0d -[ 318VO 81Vd `5, 011081NOo 01001 319VWWV8008d 3IV1d 0 3SVHd 310d -�- 3IVOS 01 ION N3dO AIIVW80N 03Sn.4-NON 03SO10 kIIVHNON S,a3anl�V.4mm MOII;N 383dWV-11OAOIN Z183H 831V3H O 83MOd3S8OH HO11MS 80103135 O1nV-.1.4O-ONVH ONn0a0 133.4 ONIISIX3 _ -• IIV130 3anSS38d IVIIN383.4.110 °-- a3NV389 llnOalO Z -vi lInONOO S383MV WnNIWn1V Al1OVdV3 ONI1dn8831N1 S383dWV 30V80 80 8001.1 03HSINIA 3A09V Q 383dWV 'aN3033 0 IV I.4O'dM f$ W$ S Hd d//° V 10 -i- aW.1X dM M A "dAd MS Ss nla OAd 8d Old 'Id Hd HO : d SIN ON .1/N ON S,a.4W MN VAN ZH 8IH dH VOH .0 1.1 '151x3 'lI0 dO 90 0 SdWV .-W 31V .4.1V V ,OZ=, L 13 I3 NVd 31lS 1 I I I 1 I I I I 1111 ` t � vj I I z-dI \0 "oni 'zLAz I I I I I ' I(I I it cwt Irl li --X---X---X-I. 111 � I 1 `5, I ' I(I I it cwt Irl li LL 30 til 03S Z3 .m R N CJS L O Z D C A Z N � m m O m m �— r m Lu rn D D m = r A -� m m Z D G7 Lf) N f O :C7 D C) m D Z ,OL L ,OZ OL 0 ,OL=„l Z3 Z3 4NOliVC]Nf103 ANVI z 'ONI1HOIl 21000 VM3S UL SOOT HMI #1V3 `dINOHIII WnI00S 38nSS38d HOIH MOOT 3 'S1HDII 301S1n0 1Vn03 03AOdddV 80 Sdd-B-3dH-091-030 083dS YVnI00S 3NnSS3dd HOIH MOSL Q 'NNVl 30 1V1S303d NO 1HOIl 1Nnom 'd-HM/ZSdS OZL SdH004 ZZIdV # IVO ONUHOII WIN WnI00S 3anSS3Hd HOIH MOOV 'IVno3 03AO8ddV 80 OZ L 100£HMI # 1VO VINOH1Il '3Hn1Xld 1NnON1 1lVM 1N33S30NVONI M00£ 8 'SNOIIV0N3WW0038 08n13V3nNM 83d IIVISNI 'H31VW 01 310d 38vn05 ,OZ V NO 031NnOW Lad 4018dSOZLZ8 SOSL ZAB VINOHIII NIn100S 38nSS38d HOIH MOSL NOI IHOS30 3d U 31n(13H0S 38nixi3 0NUH01-1 '93 133HS HOW L 11V130 N3d 13NVd Anon 'S 13NIGV3 NOIIVNIH831 N3 -1-13A Ol 31noN IIVHS 21000 NO H311MS NOISn211NI '4 'HO11MS 1V3R113313 1133 OIOHd ONV AV13N 1nO dM9 30niONI Ol 38niX13 '1VnO3 NO OLB-1 03VNVlV-BOV 'MOOOZ '3VAOZL 'S1HOIl NOIIVIAV '£ '93 133HS NO L 1IV13O ONISn 1Nnon 'VOVOS NOJ 13NIBV3 NOIIVNIN831 'Z 13NIBV3 NOIIVNIN1831 01 WHIM 102llNOO 31nod *83113>1 2103 NOUV301 d33nOSNVHI 'L „0„ 108YUS A8 S310N 'n31l 31VN8311V OIG 38 IIVHS 1V1S303d 30 301S1nO NO JNINIHS SIHOII *L :S310N FV63N30 iZ ,OL=,L Z3 Z3 NOUVA3�3 ANdl L ZL-dl 113301OHd O ONI1H011 01313N u r*i�ic zm� c z�Xoo = u 0si - m—.' m F: — m Z,�"pNN /ovn OA0" xa O' A ; = y C / N A 0 O 0 N ��x �m A n m - 4 ZJ m m n f � yN O ti 0 m D r' (n Z L 30 L l 03S 31V0 3 S S 01 ION 63 93 133HS NOUV813N3d llb'M II � II II II II II N (Jl C- 0 O Z --i C _Q. Cn � m 0 m m m Q r m M r m D M m o D W cn Q D G7 m D z awl ,� iill ; il� I� II �laji�ll�lll �- 80013 1nouo NN18HS-NON HIM 310H ONV iin0N00 N33MI39 33VdS 1113 0NI1LId 01 "—dWV1O iin0N00 - 1n8is 13NNVH0 WnNIWn1V 31V0S Ol ION 93 r93. iVIN CHOW o?j9 s ('dA,L) 0021 0NnoNo OVIO 83ddOO .OLX .4/£ Q---------------------► \\\ ('du) •n0 38V8 •o0/Z#I�/% \ \ / MIS \ / H0V3 \ / ,OL / Y 31V0S Ol ION 93T9'3 N0UVIlViSN1 iinGN00 £ a3SOdX3 llt1M 210 ONI1130 HOH0NV 31nsdV0 3AIS3H0V (038In032J Sb 11 1 3ZIS) dilV10 lIn0N0O -/ NIVNO 11n0N00 83A00 dM /X0e ('dAl) ONIHSne j I I I I 3N3NdO3N SIIW -P, C, a I OOl ,Z/1 -Z 13NNVH0 O O 13NVd IS31 1HJIl 2 1ndiSINn �l1jFR n �= WnNIWnIV W083 zl#-£ k* `�'�.G.•`' 3onvo z l it 13315 SS31NIVIS 38 IIVHS S83NH31SVJ (INV 'S63010H '31V1d 11V 38mon211s d0021 NNvi Ol N31SVJ Al321n03S N3A00 /X08 WnNIWn1V 1svo S31Vld 13ssn0 OM1 013M 31Yld 13315 SS31NIVIS 40£ 31V0S Ol ION 93R3 30Md�i1N3 210013 iin(INOO �J \\ 2J01VNIW2131 iin0NO0 BVIS 2130Nn �iinONOO OAd evls n2IHl 11n0N0o SHE) 031V00 - HON38i 1V0IN10313 80 801131X3 JNI1dno0 03GV38HI IIVM N01131NI 80 21012131X3 31V0S Ol ION S3 S3 lIV13a GOH aNnoHo Z OON 9N10Nnoao wo� H3ddo0 ,0-,0LX.vh AV10 0313111IA .0 -,OL (S30Vld Z) kll0lh8HiOX3 008 01 smoion0NOO 013M dOOl Sn0nNIINO0 (IO2) 23A0O 31380NOZISV0211P�rA £ .S 30V210 (-du) 13315 w8nlondls (-dkl) 013M IK 0IW83HIOX3 31V0S 01 ION S3 S3 1HOIl NOIlOnais80 9 31n03H0S 3Nnlxu 0NUH011 33S ,e, 3dkI '1H0I1 N0uon8ise0 Olel 31V0S Ol ION 9S3 11VEG ONI1Nf10W lbo0d l 313HON00 NIW,9, T 1n2J1SINn 13315 03ZINVAIV0 31V1d N0V8 WnNlWnly 031V0I0NI SV 1N3WndiSNI NO 1N3WdIn03 83H10 'H011MS 103NN00SI0 1.133VS NOIIVIS 1081N00 NIVNO 11n0N00 83A00 dM /X0e I I I I I I WnNIWnIV isvo N I dYiM 3dld ,L � I O OI 0 I I I 0 � O O 13NVd IS31 1HJIl 2 N0uondiseo x W083 zl#-£ iinONOO SON .1 31n03H0S 3Nnlxu 0NUH011 33S ,e, 3dkI '1H0I1 N0uon8ise0 Olel 31V0S Ol ION 9S3 11VEG ONI1Nf10W lbo0d l 313HON00 NIW,9, T 1n2J1SINn 13315 03ZINVAIV0 31V1d N0V8 WnNlWnly 031V0I0NI SV 1N3WndiSNI NO 1N3WdIn03 83H10 'H011MS 103NN00SI0 1.133VS NOIIVIS 1081N00